NEC SL1100 Programming Manual
Programming Manual
A50-031167-004 AU
ISSUE 1.1 (R2.1)
Aug 2012
Copyright
NEC shall not be liable for any direct, indirect, consequential or incidental damages about the use of
this equipment, manual or any related materials.
NEC Corporation reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or features at any time
without notice.
NEC Corporation has prepared this document for use by its employees and customers. The information
contained herein is the property of NEC Corporation and shall not be reproduced without prior written
approval of NEC Corporation.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Copyright 2011 - 2012
NEC Corporation
Printed in Japan
Chapter1
SECTION 1
SECTION 2
SECTION 3
SECTION 4
SECTION 5
SECTION 6
SECTION 7
SECTION 8
SECTION 9
SECTION 10
Chapter2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Introduction 1-1
BEFORE YOU START PROGRAMMING
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
HOW TO ENTER PROGRAMMING MODE
HOW TO EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
USING KEYS TO MOVE AROUND IN THE PROGRAMS
PROGRAMMING NAMES AND TEXT MESSAGES
USING SOFTKEYS FOR PROGRAMMING
WHAT THE SOFTKEY DISPLAY PROMPTS MEAN
SYSTEM NUMBER PLAN/CAPACITIES
CONCEPT OF SLOT NUMBER
Programming the SL1100
SECTION 1
PROGRAMMING YOUR SYSTEM
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-01 : Time and Date
10-02 : Location Setup
10-03 : ETU Setup
10-04 : Music On Hold Setup
10-06 : ISDN BRI Setup
10-07 : Conversation Recording Resource
10-08 : Pre-Ringing Setup
10-09 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup
10-12 : CPU Network Setup
10-13 : In-DHCP Server Setup
10-14 : Managed Network Setup
10-15 : Client Information Setup
10-16 : Option Information Setup
10-17 : H.323 Gatekeeper Setup
10-18 : H.323 Alias Address Setup
10-19 : VoIPDB DSP Resource Selection
10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment
10-23 : SIP System Interconnection Setup
10-24 : Daylight Savings Setup
10-25 : H.323 Gateway Prefix Setup
10-26 : IP System Operation Setup
10-28 : SIP System Information Setup
10-29 : SIP Server Information Setup
10-30 : SIP Authentication Information Setup
10-33 : SIP Registrar/Proxy Information Basic Setup
10-36 : SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup
10-37 : UPnP Setup
10-39 : Fractional Setup
10-40 : IP Trunk Availability
10-42 : Virtual Loop Back Port Setting
10-45 : IP Routing Table Setup
10-46 : DR700 Server Information Setup
10-47 : Terminal License Server Information Setup
10-48 : License Activation
10-49 : License File Activation
10-50 : License Information
10-51 : PRI/T1/E1 Selection of PRI
10-52 : Free/Demo License Information
10-58 : Network Address
10-60 : Audio Port Setup
Programming Manual
1-1
1-1
1-2
1-2
1-3
1-3
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-6
2-1
2-1
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-8
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-16
2-17
2-18
2-19
2-21
2-22
2-23
2-24
2-25
2-26
2-27
2-28
2-29
2-30
2-32
2-33
2-34
2-35
2-36
2-37
2-38
2-39
2-40
2-42
2-43
2-44
2-45
2-46
2-47
2-48
2-49
i
10-61 : Relay Port Setup
10-62 : NetBIOS Setting
10-63 : DHCP Client Setting
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-01 : System Numbering
11-02 : Extension Numbering
11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering
11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers
11-09 : Trunk Access Code
11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator)
11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation)
11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access)
11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel)
11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special Access)
11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup
11-19 : Remote Conference Pilot Number Setup
11-20 : Dial Extension Analyze Table
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-01 : Night Mode Function Setup
12-02 : Automatic Night Service Patterns
12-03 : Weekly Night Service Switching
12-04 : Holiday Night Service Switching
12-05 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions
12-06 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks
12-07 : Text Data for Night Mode
12-08 : Night Mode Service Range
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
13-01 : Speed Dialing Option Setup
13-02 : Group Speed Dialing Bins
13-03 : Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions
13-04 : Speed Dialing Number and Name
13-05 : Speed Dial Trunk Group
13-06 : Speed Dial Number and Name
13-11 : Abbreviated Dial Group Name
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup
14-02 : Analog Trunk Data Setup
14-04 : Behind PBX Setup
14-05 : Trunk Group
14-06 : Trunk Group Routing
14-07 : Trunk Access Map Setup
14-08 : Music on Hold Source for Trunks
14-09 : Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks
14-11 : ID Setup for IP Trunk
14-12 : SIP Register ID Setup for IP Trunk
14-15 : ISDN Call Forward Method
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-01 : Basic Extension Data Setup
15-02 : Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup
15-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup
15-05 : IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup
15-06 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions
15-07 : Programmable Function Keys
15-08 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup
15-09 : Virtual Extension Ring Assignment
15-10 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup
15-11 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment
ii
2-50
2-51
2-52
2-53
2-53
2-58
2-59
2-60
2-61
2-62
2-65
2-69
2-72
2-73
2-74
2-75
2-76
2-77
2-77
2-78
2-80
2-81
2-82
2-83
2-84
2-85
2-86
2-86
2-87
2-88
2-89
2-91
2-92
2-93
2-94
2-94
2-97
2-99
2-100
2-101
2-102
2-103
2-104
2-105
2-106
2-107
2-108
2-108
2-110
2-115
2-117
2-119
2-120
2-125
2-126
2-127
2-128
Programming Manual
15-12 : Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions
15-13 : Loop Keys
15-14 : Programmable One-Touch Keys
15-16 : SIP Register ID Setup for Extension
15-17 : CO Message Waiting Indication
15-18 : Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options
15-22 : Mobile Extension Setup
15-24 : Registration of Standard SIP Terminal
15-28 : Trunk Incoming Ring Tone of Extension Setup
Program 16 : Department Group Setup
16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup
16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions
16-03 : Secondary Department Group
16-04 : Call Restriction Between Department Groups
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-01 : System Options
20-02 : System Options for Multiline Telephones
20-03 : System Options for Single Line Telephones
20-04 : System Options for Virtual Extensions
20-05 : System Options for Charging Cost Service
20-06 : Class of Service for Extensions
20-07 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level)
20-08 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service)
20-09 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service)
20-10 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service)
20-11 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service)
20-12 : Class of Service Options (Charging Cost Service)
20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service)
20-14 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M
20-15 : Ring Cycle Setup
20-16 : Selectable Display Messages
20-17 : Operator Extension
20-18 : Service Tone Timers
20-19 : System Options for Caller ID
20-20 : Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data
20-21 : System Options for Long Conversation
20-23 : System Options for CTI
20-25 : ISDN Options
20-26 : Multiplier for Charging Cost
20-28 : Trunk to Trunk Conversation
20-29 : Timer Class for Extension
20-30 : Timer Class for Trunks
20-31 : Timer Class Timer Assignment
20-34 : Remote Conference Group Setup
20-35 : Extension's Operator Setting
20-36 : Trunk's Operator Setting
20-37 : Operator Extension Group Setup
20-38 : Operator Group Setting
20-42 : Night Mode for each package
20-43 : Power supply for each package
20-44 : Watch Mode Setup
20-45 : Remote Watch Setup
20-46 : Security Sensor Setup
20-47 : Time pattern setting for Watch Mode
20-48 : Time pattern setting for Security Sensor
20-49 : Caller ID Shared Group Basic Data Setup
20-55 : Delay Timer for Security Sensor
Programming Manual
2-129
2-130
2-131
2-132
2-133
2-134
2-135
2-136
2-137
2-138
2-138
2-140
2-141
2-142
2-143
2-143
2-144
2-146
2-148
2-149
2-150
2-151
2-153
2-155
2-157
2-158
2-160
2-161
2-165
2-167
2-168
2-170
2-171
2-172
2-173
2-174
2-175
2-176
2-177
2-178
2-179
2-180
2-181
2-183
2-184
2-185
2-186
2-187
2-188
2-189
2-190
2-191
2-192
2-193
2-194
2-195
2-196
iii
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-01 : System Options for Outgoing Calls
21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions
21-03 : Trunk Group Routing for Trunks
21-04 : Toll Restriction Class for Extensions
21-05 : Toll Restriction Class
21-06 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup
21-07 : Toll Restriction Override Password Setup
21-08 : Repeat Dial Setup
21-09 : Dial Block Setup
21-10 : Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extension
21-11 : Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment
21-12 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks
21-13 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions
21-14 : Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup
21-15 : Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions
21-17 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk
21-18 : IP Trunk (H.323) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension
21-19 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension
21-20 : SIP Trunk Call Discernment Setup for Extension
21-21 : Toll Restriction for Trunks (Seized Trunk Basis Setting)
21-22 : CO Message Waiting Indication - Call Back Settings
21-24 : Forced Access Dial Data
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-01 : System Options for Incoming Calls
22-02 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup
22-03 : Trunk Ring Tone Range
22-04 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment
22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment
22-06 : Normal Incoming Ring Mode
22-07 : DIL Assignment
22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination
22-09 : DID Basic Data Setup
22-10 : DID Translation Table Setup
22-11 : DID Translation Number Conversion
22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group
22-13 : DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment
22-14 : VRS Delayed Message for IRG
22-15 : VRS Delayed Message for Department Group
22-16 : Private Call Refuse Target Area Setup
22-17 : Dial-In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern
22-18 : Private Call Assignment Setup
22-19 : DID MFC Dialing Options
22-20 : Flexible Ringing by Caller ID Setup
Program 23 : Answer Features Setup
23-02 : Call Pickup Groups
23-03 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer
23-04 : Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-01 : System Options for Hold
24-02 : System Options for Transfer
24-03 : Park Group
24-04 : Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target Setup
24-05 : Department Group Transfer Target Setup
24-09 : Call Forward Split Settings
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-01 : VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup
iv
2-197
2-197
2-199
2-200
2-201
2-202
2-204
2-206
2-207
2-208
2-209
2-210
2-211
2-212
2-213
2-214
2-215
2-216
2-217
2-218
2-219
2-220
2-221
2-222
2-222
2-224
2-225
2-226
2-227
2-228
2-229
2-230
2-231
2-232
2-233
2-235
2-236
2-237
2-238
2-239
2-240
2-241
2-242
2-243
2-244
2-244
2-245
2-246
2-247
2-247
2-248
2-250
2-251
2-252
2-253
2-254
2-254
Programming Manual
25-02 : DID/DISA VRS Message
25-03 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing
25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy
25-05 : VRS/DISA Error Message Assignment
25-06 : VRS/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup
25-07 : System Timers for VRS/DISA
25-08 : DISA User ID Setup
25-09 : Class of Service for DISA Users
25-10 : Trunk Group Routing for DISA
25-11 : DISA Toll Restriction Class
25-12 : Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA
25-13 : System Option for DISA
25-15 : DISA Transfer Target Setup
25-16 : DUD/DISA Single Digit Timer
Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing
26-01 : Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route) Service
26-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR
26-03 : ARS Dial Treatments
26-04 : ARS Class of Service
26-05 : LCR Carrier Table
26-06 : LCR Authorization Code Table
26-07 : LCR Cost Center Code Table
26-08 : LCR Manual Override Access Code Table
26-09 : LCR Manual Override Exemption Table
26-11 : Transit Network ID Table
26-12 : Network Specific Parameter Table for ARS
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
30-01 : DSS Console Operating Mode
30-02 : DSS Console Extension Assignment
30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment
30-04 : DSS Console Alternate Answer
30-05 : DSS Console Lamp Table
Program 31 : Paging Setup
31-01 : System Options for Internal/External Paging
31-02 : Internal Paging Group Assignment
31-03 : Internal Paging Group Settings
31-04 : External Paging Zone Group
31-05 : Universal Night Answer/Ring Over Page
31-06 : External Speaker Control
31-07 : Combined Paging Assignments
31-08 : BGM on External Paging
31-10 : External Paging Group Basic Setting
Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup
32-01 : Door Box Timers Setup
32-02 : Door Box Ring Assignment
32-03 : Door Box Basic Setup
32-04 : Door Box Name Setup
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-01 : E&M Tie Line Basic Setup
34-02 : E&M Tie Line Class of Service
34-03 : Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines
34-04 : E&M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class
34-05 : Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction
34-06 : Add/Delete Digit for E&M Tie Line
34-07 : E&M Tie Line Timer
34-08 : Toll Restriction Data for E&M Tie Lines
34-09 : ANI/DNIS Service Options
Programming Manual
2-255
2-256
2-257
2-258
2-259
2-260
2-262
2-263
2-264
2-265
2-266
2-267
2-268
2-269
2-270
2-270
2-271
2-272
2-273
2-274
2-275
2-276
2-277
2-278
2-279
2-280
2-281
2-281
2-282
2-283
2-287
2-288
2-290
2-290
2-291
2-292
2-294
2-295
2-296
2-297
2-298
2-299
2-300
2-300
2-301
2-302
2-303
2-304
2-304
2-305
2-306
2-307
2-308
2-309
2-310
2-311
2-312
v
34-11 : E1 Trunk Basic Setup
Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup
35-01 : SMDR Options
35-02 : SMDR Output Options
35-03 : SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group
35-04 : SMDR Port Assignment for Department Groups
35-05 : Account Code Setup
35-06 : Verified Account Code Table
Program 40 : Voice Recording System
40-07 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS
40-10 : Voice Announcement Service Option
40-11 : Preamble Message Assignment
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
42-01 : System Options for Hotel/Motel
42-02 : Hotel/Motel Telephone Setup
42-03 : Class of Service Options (Hotel/Motel)
42-04 : Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes
42-05 : Hotel Room Status Printer
42-06 : PMS Service Setting
42-07 : PMS Restriction Level Conversion Table
42-08 : Text Message Setup for Hotel Room Status
42-09 : Flexible Setup for Room Status
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-01 : System Options for ARS/F-Route
44-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access
44-03 : Dial Analysis Extension Table
44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule
44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table
44-06 : Additional Dial Table
44-07 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access
44-08 : Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route
44-09 : Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route
44-10 : Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route
Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration
45-01 : Voice Mail Integration Options
45-02 : NSL Option Setup
45-04 : Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment
45-05 : Voice Mail Send Protocol Signal Without Additional Digits
Program 47 : InMail
47-01 : InMail System Options
47-02 : InMail Station Mailbox Options
47-03 : InMail Group Mailbox Options
47-06 : Group Mailbox Subscriber Options
47-07 : InMail Routing Mailbox Options
47-08 : Call Routing Mailbox Options
47-09 : Announcement Mailbox Options
47-10 : InMail Trunk Options
47-11 : InMail Answer Table Options
47-12 : InMail Answer Schedules
47-13 : InMail Dial Action Tables
47-15 : Routing Directory Mailbox Options
47-17 : Routing Distribution Mailbox Options
47-18 : InMail SMTP Setup
47-19 : InMail POP3 Setup
47-20 : Station Mailbox Message Notification Options
47-21 : Station Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options
47-22 : Group Mailbox Message Notification Options
vi
2-314
2-315
2-315
2-316
2-318
2-319
2-320
2-321
2-322
2-322
2-323
2-324
2-325
2-325
2-326
2-327
2-328
2-329
2-330
2-332
2-333
2-335
2-336
2-336
2-337
2-339
2-340
2-341
2-342
2-343
2-344
2-345
2-346
2-347
2-347
2-349
2-350
2-351
2-352
2-352
2-356
2-360
2-361
2-364
2-365
2-366
2-367
2-369
2-372
2-376
2-379
2-380
2-381
2-382
2-383
2-384
2-385
Programming Manual
47-23 : Group Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-01 : Service Tone Setup
80-02 : DTMF Tone Setup
80-03 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup
80-04 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup
80-05 : Date Format for SMDR and System
80-06 : Reference Impedance Setup
80-07 : Call Progress Tone Detector Frequency Setup
80-08 : MFC Tone Setup
80-09 : Short Ring Setup
80-11 : MFC Tone Receiver Setup
80-12 : Caller ID Receiver Setup
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-01 : CO Initial Data Setup
81-04 : ISDN BRI Layer 1 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup
81-05 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 2 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup
81-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (T-Point) Timer Setup
81-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Port
81-08 : T1 Trunk Timer Setup
81-09 : COT CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Setting
81-13 : E1 Trunk Timer Setup
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
82-01 : Incoming Ring Tone
82-04 : ASTU Initial Data Setup
82-05 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer2 (S-Point) Initial Data Setup
82-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer3 (S-point) Timer Setup
82-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Station Port
82-08 : Sidetone Volume Setup
82-09 : SLIU CODEC Filter Data Setup
82-14 : Handset/Headset Gain Setup for Multi Line Telephone
82-21 : Sensor Setup
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
84-01 : H.323 Trunk Basic Information Setup
84-02 : H.225 and H.245 Information Basic Setup
84-07 : Firmware Download Setup
84-09 : VLAN Setup
84-10 : ToS Setup
84-13 : SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup
84-14 : SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup
84-15 : H.323/SIP Phone Keep Alive Setup
84-16 : VoIPDB Limiter Control Gain Setup
84-19 : SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup
84-20 : SIP Extension Basic Information Setup
84-22 : DR700 Multiline Logon Information Setup
84-23 : DR700 Multiline Basic Information Setup
84-24 : DR700 Multiline CODEC Basic Information Setup
84-26 : VoIP Basic Setup (DSP)
84-27 : VoIP Basic Setup
84-28 : DR700 Multiline Firmware Name Setup
84-29 : SIP-MLT CODEC Information Fixed Mode Setup
84-31 : VoIPDB Echo Canceller Setup
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-01 : Installation Date
90-02 : Programming Password Setup
90-03 : Save Data
90-04 : Load Data
Programming Manual
2-386
2-387
2-387
2-391
2-392
2-394
2-396
2-397
2-398
2-399
2-400
2-402
2-404
2-405
2-405
2-407
2-408
2-409
2-411
2-412
2-415
2-417
2-419
2-419
2-421
2-422
2-423
2-424
2-425
2-426
2-428
2-429
2-430
2-430
2-432
2-433
2-434
2-435
2-436
2-439
2-440
2-441
2-442
2-445
2-446
2-447
2-448
2-451
2-452
2-454
2-455
2-456
2-460
2-460
2-461
2-462
2-463
vii
90-05 : Slot Control
90-06 : Trunk Control
90-07 : Station Control
90-08 : System Reset
90-09 : Automatic System Reset Time Setup
90-10 : System Alarm Setup
90-11 : System Alarm Report
90-12 : System Alarm Output
90-13 : System Information Output
90-16 : Main Software Information
90-17 : Firmware Information
90-19 : Dial Block Release
90-20 : Traffic Report Data Setup
90-21 : Traffic Report Output
90-23 : Deleting Registration of IP Telephones
90-24 : System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup
90-25 : System Alarm Report CC Mail Setup
90-26 : Program Access Level Setup
90-28 : User Programming Password Setup
90-31 : DIM Access over Ethernet
90-33 : Preselected Data Setup
90-34 : Firmware Information
90-35 : Wizard Programming Level Setup
90-36 : Firmware Update Time Setting
90-38 : User Programming Data Level Setup
90-39 : Virtual Loop Back Port Reset
90-41 : Server Setting to Update Terminal Local Data
90-42 : DR700 Multiline Terminal Version Information
90-43 : Deleting Terminal License of DR700
90-44 : Deleting Terminal License of TCP Interface
90-45 : Temporary Password Change for Multiline Telephone
90-50 : System Alarm Display Setup
90-51 : Alarm Setup for Maintenance Exchange
90-52 : System Alarm Save
90-53 : System Alarm Clear
90-54 : PC/Web Programming
90-55 : Free License Select
90-56 : NTP Setup
90-57 : Backup Recovery Data
90-58 : Restore Recovery Data
90-59 : Delete Recovery Data
90-60 : T1/ISDN Layer Status Information
90-63 : DR700 Control
90-65 : 1st Party CTI Authentication Password Setup
90-66 : FTP Firmware Update setup
90-67 : Backup Data Auto-save Interval Time Set
90-68 : Side Tone Auto Setup
Program 92 : Copy Program
92-01 : Copy Program
92-02 : Delete All Extension Numbers
92-03 : Copy Program by Port Number
92-04 : Extension Data Swap
92-05 : Extension Data Swap Password
92-06 : Fill Command
92-07 : Delete Command
viii
2-464
2-465
2-466
2-467
2-468
2-469
2-475
2-476
2-477
2-478
2-479
2-480
2-481
2-482
2-483
2-484
2-485
2-486
2-487
2-488
2-489
2-501
2-502
2-503
2-504
2-505
2-506
2-507
2-508
2-509
2-510
2-511
2-512
2-513
2-514
2-515
2-516
2-517
2-518
2-519
2-520
2-521
2-522
2-523
2-524
2-525
2-526
2-527
2-527
2-529
2-530
2-531
2-533
2-534
2-535
Programming Manual
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1-1 Keys for Entering Data .........................................................................................1-3
Table 1-2 Keys for Entering Names ......................................................................................1-3
Table 1-3 Softkey Display Prompts ......................................................................................1-4
Table 1-4 System Number Plan/Capacities ..........................................................................1-4
Table 2-1 System Numbering Default Settings...................................................................2-54
Table 2-2 Function Number List .......................................................................................2-120
Table 2-3 Function Number List .......................................................................................2-123
Table 2-4 Ringing Cycles..................................................................................................2-167
Table 2-5 Program 22-03 - Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns ....................................2-225
Table 2-6 Function Number List .......................................................................................2-283
Table 2-7 Function Number List .......................................................................................2-286
Table 2-8 47-02-16 Default Table .....................................................................................2-358
Table 2-9 47-06-14 Default Table .....................................................................................2-363
Table 2-10 47-07-03 Default Table ...................................................................................2-364
Table 2-11 47-10-03 Default Table....................................................................................2-367
Table 2-12 Basic Tones ....................................................................................................2-387
Table 2-13 Frequency 1/2 Table .......................................................................................2-400
Table 2-14 Ring Cycle Table .............................................................................................2-400
Table 2-15 Default Table ...................................................................................................2-400
Table 2-16 Default Table ...................................................................................................2-402
Table 2-17 Description of Alarm .......................................................................................2-469
Programming Manual
ix
Memo
x
Programming Manual
Introduction
1
SECTION 1 BEFORE YOU START PROGRAMMING
Before customizing your system be sure to read this chapter first.
This Manual is created for System : SL1100
SECTION 2 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
This section lists each program in numerical order. For example, Program 10-01 is at the beginning of
the section and Program 92-01 is at the end. The information on each program is subdivided into the
following headings :
Description describes what the program options control. The Default Settings for each program are
also included. When you first install the system, it uses the Default Setting for all programs. Along with
the Description are the Conditions which describe any limits or special considerations that may apply
to the program.
The program access level is just above the Description heading. You can only use the program if your
access level meets or exceeds the level the program requires. Refer to HOW TO ENTER
PROGRAMMING MODE for a list of the system access levels and passwords.
Feature Cross Reference provides you with a table of all the features affected by the program. You will
want to keep the referenced features in mind when you change a program. Customizing a feature may
have an effect on another feature that you did not intend.
Telephone Programming Instructions shows how to enter the program data into system memory. For
example :
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 15-07-01
tells you to enter the programming mode, dial 150701 from the telephone dial pad. After you do, you will
see the message “15-07-01 TEL” on the first line of the telephone display. This indicates the program
number (15-07), item number (01), and that the options are being set for the extension. The second row
of the display “KY01 = *01” indicates that Key 01 is being programmed with the entry of *01. The third
row allows you to move the cursor to the left or right, depending on which arrow is pressed. To learn
how to enter the programming mode, refer to HOW TO ENTER PROGRAMMING MODE.
Introduction
1-1
Introduction
This chapter provides you with detailed information about the system programs. By changing a
program, you change the way the feature associated with that program works. In this chapter, you find
out about each program, the features that the program affects and how to enter the program data into
system memory.
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
SECTION 3 HOW TO ENTER PROGRAMMING MODE
To enter programming mode :
1.
Go to any working display telephone.
2.
3.
4.
In a newly installed system, use extension (port 1).
Do not lift the handset.
Press Speaker.
# * # *.
5.
Dial the system password + Hold.
Refer to the following table for the default system passwords. To change the passwords, use
90-02 : Programming Password Setup.
Password
User Name
Level
******
nec-i
1 (MF)
12345678
tech
2 (IN)
0000
admin1
3 (SA)
9999
admin2
4 (SB)
Programs at this Level
Manufacture Level (MF) :
80-02, 81-04, 81-05, 82-05, 82-08
Installation (IN) :
All programs in this section not listed for MF, SA, & SB
System Administrator - Level 1 (SA) :
10-01, 10-02, 10-12, 10-13, 10-14, 10-15, 10-16, 10-17, 10-18, 10-23, 10-24,
10-25, 10-28, 10-29, 10-45, 12-02, 12-03, 12-04, 12-08, 15-01, 15-07, 15-09,
15-10, 15-11, 20-16, 20-34, 21-07, 21-14, 22-04, 22-11, 22-17, 25-08, 30-03,
30-04, 32-02, 45-02, 84-22, 90-03, 90-04, 90-06, 90-07, 90-19, 90-57, 90-58,
90-59, 90-65
System Administrator - Level 2 (SB) :
13-04, 13-05, 13-06, 13-11, 15-14, 21-20
SECTION 4 HOW TO EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
To-exit the programming mode :
When you are done programming, you must be out of a program option to exit (pressing the Mute key
will exit the program option).
1. Press Mute key to exit the program options, if needed.
2.
3.
Press Speaker. If changes were to the system programming, "Saving System Data" is displayed.
The display shows "Complete Data Save" when completed and exits the telephone to an idle
mode.
To save a customer’s database, a blank Compact Flash (CF) Card is required. Insert the CF Card into the
CPU and, using Program 90-03, save the software to the CF Card. (Program 90-04 is used to reload the
customer data if necessary.) Note that a CF Card can only hold one customer database. Each database to be
saved requires a separate drive.
1-2
Introduction
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
SECTION 5 USING KEYS TO MOVE AROUND IN THE
PROGRAMS
Once you enter the programming mode, use the keys in the following chart to enter data, edit data and
move around in the menus.
Table 1-1 Keys for Entering Data
When you want to ...
Enter Data into program
Next Index
Prior Index
Select Data
All Clear
Register
Go Back to Prior Screen
Move Cursor Jump Up/Down
Delete single character
Next Page
Toggle between Number/Character
While in a Entering Number
Prior Page
Quit the programming
Move Cursor to Left
Change Program Number
Change Index Number
Change Program Number
Change Index Number
Move Cursor to Right
Telephone Programming
0 ~ 9, *, # Line Key (1 ~ 6)
Cursor Key (Up)
Cursor Key (Down)
Line Key (1 ~ 6)
Flash
Hold
Enter
Mute
Clear / Back
DND
Clear / Back
Help
Transfer
Speaker
Exit
Cursor Key (Left)
Soft Key1
Soft Key2
Soft Key3
Cursor Key (Right)
Soft Key4
SECTION 6 PROGRAMMING NAMES AND TEXT MESSAGES
Several programs (e.g., Program 20-16 : Selectable Display Messages) require you to enter text. Use
the following chart when entering and editing text. When using the keypad digits, press the key once for
the first character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press the key 2 three
times. Press the key six times to display the lower case letter. The name can be up to 12 digits long.
Table 1-2 Keys for Entering Names
Use this keypad digit ...
1
2
3
4
5
Programming Manual
When you want to ...
Enter characters : 1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | }
Enter characters : A-C, a-c, 2.
Enter characters : D-F, d-f, 3.
Enter characters : G-I, g-i, 4.
Enter characters : J-L, j-l, 5.
ÁÀÂÃÅÆÇÉÊìó0
1-3
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Use this keypad digit ...
6
7
8
9
0
*
#
Clear/Back
Flash
When you want to ...
Enter characters : M-O, m-o, 6.
Enter characters : P-S, p-s, 7.
Enter characters : T-V, t-v, 8.
Enter characters : W-Z, w-z, 9.
Enter characters : 0 ! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) ô õ ú å ä æ ö ü α ε θ В
Enter characters : * + , - . / : ; < = > ? π Σ σ Ω ∞ ¢ £
# = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed - ex : TOM).
Pressing # again = Space. (In system programming mode, use the right arrow Softkey
instead to accept and/or add a space.)
Clear the character entry one character at a time.
Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.
SECTION 7 USING SOFTKEYS FOR PROGRAMMING
Each Display telephone with Softkeys provides interactive Softkeys for intuitive feature access. The
options for these keys will automatically change depending on where you are in the system
programming. Simply press the Softkey located below the option you wish and the display will change
accordingly.
Pressing the Cursor key Up or Down will scroll between the menus.
SECTION 8 WHAT THE SOFTKEY DISPLAY PROMPTS MEAN
When using a display telephone in programming mode, various Softkey options are displayed. These
keys will allow you to easily select, scan, or move through the programs.
Table 1-3 Softkey Display Prompts
Softkey Display Prompts
If you press this Softkey ...
back
select
-1
+1
The system will ...
Go back one step in the program display.
You can press Cursor Key (UP) or Cursor Key (Down) to scroll forward or backward through a list
of programs.
Scroll down through the available programs.
Scroll up through the available programs.
Select the currently displayed program.
Move the cursor to the left.
Move the cursor to the right.
Move back through the available program options.
Move forward through the available program options.
SECTION 9 SYSTEM NUMBER PLAN/CAPACITIES
The following table provides the capacities for the SL1100 system.
Table 1-4 System Number Plan/Capacities
System Number Plan/Capacities
System Type
System
Analog Caller ID Detector
(detected by DSP)
1-4
Number Plan/Capacities
Note
Related
Program
32 channels / Main KSU
Introduction
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
System Number Plan/Capacities
Classes of Service
Day/Night Mode Numbers
Day/Night Service Patterns
Dial Tone Detector
DTMF Receiver
Toll Restriction Classes
Verifiable Account Code Table
Trunk
Trunk Port Number
Trunk Ports (Total) :
15
8
4
32 / Main KSU
15
800

Analog Trunks
38 / Main KSU
38 / Main KSU
12 / Main KSU

BRI Trunk Ports
12 / Main KSU

T1/PRI Trunk Ports
30 / Main KSU
VoIPDB Trunk Ports
(VoIPDB & MEMDB is required.
Need license to be Max.)
DID Translation Tables
DID Translation Table Entries
DISA :

Classes of Service
Users
Ring Groups
Trunk Access Maps
Trunk Group Numbers
Trunk Routes
Extension
Telephone Extension Ports



Multiline Terminals

Single Line
Phones/Analog Devices
VoIPDB Extensions
(SIP-MLT/Std)
(VoIPDB & MEMDB is required.
Need license to be Max.
(SIP-Std))
Digital Extension Ports

Physical Ports
Telephone Extension Number
Range
Virtual Extension Ports
Virtual Extension Number Range

Door Boxes
Door Box Numbers
DSS Consoles Numbers :

60 Button DSS Console
Operator Access Number
Operator Extension
Speed Dialing
Speed Dialing Groups
Speed Dialing Bins
Speed Dialing Table-Common
Automated Attendant
VRS Message Numbers
Conference
Conference Circuits
Department and Pickup Groups
Department (Extension) Group
Numbers
Call Pickup Group Numbers
Hotline
Internal Hotline
External Hotline
Paging and Park
Internal Page Group Numbers
External Page Group Numbers
External Speakers
Park Group Numbers
Programming Manual
Note
20–06
12–07
12–07
35–06
16
20
800
22–10
22–10
15
15
20–14
25–09
25
96
25
25
22–04
14–07
14–05
14–06
40 / Main KSU
24 / Main KSU
20 / Main KSU
16 / Main KSU
01 ~ 08
1 ~ 89999999*
(*Extension cannot start with 0 or 9)
50
1 ~ 89999999*
(*Extension cannot start with 0 or 9)
6
1~6
12
11–04
11–04
32–02
32–02
30–01
0 (Default)
15
32
0 ~ 999
900
13–02
13–02
13–01–03
1 ~ 100
25–06
32 : maximum
(16 Parties Per Conference)
1 ~ 32
16–01
1 ~ 32
23–02
40 / Main KSU
40 / Main KSU
0, 01 ~ 32
1~3
1 / Main KSU
1 ~ 64
31–02
31–04
31–04
24–03
1-5
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
System Number Plan/Capacities
Park Orbits
SMDR
SMDR Ports
VRS/VM InMail
VRS/VM InMail
VRS/VM Ports
(Need license and MEMDB)
VRS Port
(Need MEMDB)
VRS Attendant Messages
VRS Recordable Messages
VRS Ports
VoIPDB
RTP Ports
RTCP Ports
DSP Resources
Passwords
Programming Passwords :
Level 1 (MF)
PCPro/WebPro User Name :
Level 2 (IN)
PCPro/WebPro User Name :
Level 3 (SA)
PCPro/WebPro User Name :
Level 4 (SB)
PCPro/WebPro User Name :
Programming Password Users
Note
1 ~ 64
24–03
1~2
35–03
1
16
16
3
100
16
40–10–02
0 ~ 65534
0 ~ 65535
16
******
nec-i
12345678
tech
0000
admin1
9999
admin2
8
Extension numbers can be one to eight digits long. Refer to the Flexible System Numbering feature in the SL1100 Features and
Specifications Manual.
SECTION 10
CONCEPT OF SLOT NUMBER
Each unit installed to the system has a slot number assigned. Some of slot number are fixed to a unit
that be installed. Other slots are not fixed to unit but fixed to location where it is installed. Below chart
shows the slot and its number :
1-6
Introduction
Programming the SL1100
2
SECTION 1 PROGRAMMING YOUR SYSTEM
The information contained in this chapter provides the information necessary to properly program your
system.
Programming the SL1100
The programming blocks are organized into the following programming modes.
Program Number : Program Name
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
Program 11 : System Numbering
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
Program 16 : Department Group Setup
Program 20 : System Option Setup
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
Program 23 : Answer Features Setup
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
Program 31 : Paging Setup
Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup
Program 40 : Voice Recording System
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration
Program 47 : InMail
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
Program 92 : Copy Program
Programming the SL1100
2-1
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-01 : Time and Date
Level
SA
Program
10
Description
Use Program 10-01 : Time and Date to change the system Time and Date through system
programming. Extension users can also dial Service Code 728 to change the time if allowed by an
extension Class of Service.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
02
03
04
Year
Month
Day
Week
07 ~ 96
01 ~ 12
01 ~ 31
1 ~ 7 (Sun ~ Sat)
05
06
07
Hour
Minute
Second
00 ~ 23
00 ~ 59
00 ~ 59
Description
Enter 2 digits for year (07 ~ 96).
Enter 2 digits (01 ~ 12) for the month.
Enter 2 digits (01 ~ 31) for the day.
Enter digit for the day of the week (1 =
Sunday, 7 = Saturday).
Enter 2 digits for the hour (00 ~ 23).
Enter 2 digits for the minute (00 ~ 59).
Enter 2 digits for the second (00 ~ 59).
Default
No Setting
No Setting
No Setting
No Setting
No Setting
No Setting
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

2-2
Clock/Calendar Display/Time and Date
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-02 : Location Setup
Level
SA
Program
Description
Use Program 10-02 : Location Setup to define the location of the installed system.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
Country Code
02
04
International Access
Code
Other Area Access
Code
Area Code
05
Trunk Access Code
03
Input Data
Dial (up to four digits) :
0 ~ 9, *, #
Dial (up to four digits) :
0 ~ 9, *, #
Dial (up to two digits) :
0 ~ 9, *, #
Dial (up to six digits) :
0 ~ 9, *, #
Dial (up to eight
digits) : 0 ~ 9, *, #
Description
Default
Enter the country code.
61
Enter the international access code.
00
Enter the other area access code.
0
Enter the local area code.
No Setting
Enter the trunk access code digits required
to place an outgoing call.
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-3
10
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-03 : ETU Setup
Level
IN
Program
10
Description
Use Program 10-03 : ETU Setup to setup and confirm the Basic Configuration data for each unit.
When changing a defined terminal type, first set the type to 0 and then plug the new device in to have
the system automatically define it or you may have to reseat the unit.
The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed.
Input Data
Slot No.
00 ~ 09
For ESIU PKG Setup
Physical Port Number
Item No.
01 ~ 08
Item
01
Terminal Type (B1)
02
Logical Port Number
10
Bottom option information
12
Multi-Line Telephone Line
Input Data
Default
0 = No setting
1 = Multi-Line Telephone
10 = DSS Console
0 = No setting
1 = Multi-Line Telephone (1 ~ 72)
10 = DSS Console (1 ~ 12)
0 = None
4 = WHA
0 = None
12 = 12 Line
24 = 24 Line
0
0
0
0
This program can only be change by using
PC Programming.
For SLIU PKG Setup
Physical Port Number
Item No.
01
03
04
05
01 ~ 08
Item
Input Data
Logical Port Number
Transmit Gain Level (S-Level)
Receive Gain Level (R-Level)
Select port type
Default
0 ~ 120
1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 ~ + 15.5 dB)
1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 ~ + 15.5 dB)
0 = SLT
1 = Door Phone
0
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
0
For COIU Unit Setup
Physical Port Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Logical Port Number
1~4
Input Data
Default
1 ~ 36
Note
0
For BRIU PKG Setup
ISDN Line Number
Item No.
2-4
Item
01 ~ 02
Input Data
Default
Note
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 1.1
Item No.
SL1100
Item
01
ISDN Line Mode
02
Logical Port Number
03
The start port number of a
BRI line is displayed. Two logic ports
are automatically assigned to a BRI
line.
Connection Type
04
Layer 3 Timer Type
05
06
07
08
Each timer value of Layer 3 is
set up for each type in Program
81-06 (T-Bus)
CLIP Information
Based on this setting, the system
includes a Presentation Allowed
(1) or Presentation Restricted (0)
in the Setup message to allow or
deny the Calling Party Number.
Program 15-01-04 must also be
set to 1 if this option is enabled.
Connection Bus Mode
14
S-point DDI digits
Dial Sending Mode
ISDN Protocol definition
Dial Information Element
ISDN Protocol definition Only
when Dial Sending Mode
(10-03-08) is set for 1 (Overlap
Sending).
Service Protocol for S-point
15
Call Busy Mode for S-point
17
ISDN Line Ringback Tone
System can provide ringback
tone, if set to 1 : Enable.
Type of Number
ISDN Protocol definition.
09
18
19
Numbering Plan Identification
ISDN Protocol definition.
24
Power feeding for S-point
Input Data
Default
0 = No setting
1 = T-Point
2 = S-Point
6 = S-Point (Leased Line)
[0 : No setting] = 0
[1 : T-Point] = 1 ~ 096
[2 : S-Point] = 1 ~ 120
[6 : S-Point (Leased Line)] = 1 ~ 120
Note
1
0
Program
0 = Point-to-Multipoint
1 = Point-to-Point
1~5
0
1
10
0 = No
1 = Yes
1
0 = Extended passive bus
1 = Short passive bus
0-4
0 = Enbloc Sending
1 = Overlap Sending
0 = Keypad Facility
1 = Called Party Number
0
0
1
1
0 = Keypad facility
1 = Specified Protocol for Aspire system
0 = Alerting
1 = Disconnect
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0
0
0
0 = Unknown
1 = International number
2 = National number
3 = Network Specific number
4 = Subscriber number
5 = Abbreviated number
0 = Unknown
1 = ISDN numbering plan
2 = Data numbering plan
3 = Telex numbering plan
4 = National standard numbering plan
5 = Private numbering plan
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0
0
0
For PRIU PKG Setup
ISDN Line Number
Item No.
01
Item
ISDN Line Mode
Programming Manual
01 ~ 30
Input Data
0 = No setting
1 = T-Point
2 = S-Point
6 = S-Point (Leased Line)
Default
Note
1
2-5
SL1100
Item No.
ISSUE 1.1
Item
02
Logical Port Number
03
The start port number of a
PRI line is displayed.
CRC Multi-frame (CRC4)
(Only for 2M = 30ch Mode)
Layer 3 Timer Type
04
Input Data
Default
[0 : No setting] = 0
[1 : T-Point] = 1 ~ 96
[2 : S-Point] = 1 ~ 120
[6 : S-Point (Leased Line)] = 1 ~ 120
0
0 = off
1 = on
1~5
1
Note
1
Program
10
05
06
07
08
Each timer value of Layer 3 is
set up for each type in Program
81-06 (T-Bus)
CLIP Information
Based on this setting, the system
includes a Presentation Allowed
(1) or Presentation Restricted (0)
in the Setup message to allow or
deny the Calling Party Number.
Program 15-01-04 must also be
set to 1 if this option is enabled.
Length of Cable
14
S-point DDI digits
Dial Sending Mode
ISDN Protocol definition
Dial Information Element
ISDN Protocol definition Only
when Dial Sending Mode
(10-03-08) is set for 1 (Overlap
Sending).
Loss-Of-Signal Detection Limit
If the transmit/receive voltage is
less than the setting in 10-03-13,
the system considers this as
Loss-Of-Signal and the PRI does
not come up. Note that there are
different values based on the
setting in 10-03-12 for the PRI.
Service Protocol for S-point
15
Call Busy Mode for S-point
16
Two B-Channel Transfer for PRI
Service
ISDN Ringback Tone
System can provide ringback
tone, by setting 10-03-17 is set to
1 : Enable.
Type of Number
ISDN Protocol definition.
Select the number type for the
ISDN circuit.
09
13
17
18
19
Numbering Plan Identification
ISDN Protocol definition.
Select the Numbering Plan used
for the ISDN circuit.
20
Network Exchange Selection
Select the ISDN protocol for the
ISDN circuit
2-6
0 = No
1 = Yes
1
0 = Level 1
1 = Level 2
2 = Level 3
3 = Level 4
4 = Level 5
0-4
0 = Enbloc Sending
1 = Overlap Sending
0 = Keypad Facility
1 = Called Party Number
2
0 = Level 0 (lowest sensitivity)
1 = Level 1
2 = Level 2
3 = Level 3
4 = Level 4
5 = Level 5
6 = Level 6
7 = Level 7 (highest sensitivity)
0 = Keypad facility
1 = Specified Protocol for Aspire system
0 = Alerting
1 = Disconnect
0 = off
1 = on
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
2
0 = Unknown
1 = International number
2 = National number
3 = Network Specific number
4 = Subscriber number
5 = Abbreviated number
0 = Unknown
1 = ISDN numbering plan
2 = Data numbering plan
3 = Telex numbering plan
4 = National standard numbering plan
5 = Private numbering plan
0 = Standard (same as NI-2)
1 = reserved
2 = reserved
3 = DMS (A211)
4 = 5ESS
5 = DMS (A233)
6 = 4ESS
7 = NI-2
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Item No.
21
Item
Input Data
Number of Ports
Default
0 = Auto
1 = 4 Ports
2 = 8 Ports
3 = 12 Ports
4 = 16 Ports
5 = 20 Ports
6 = 24 Ports
7 = 28 Ports
Note
0
Program
For E1 PKG Setup
Physical Port Number
Item No.
01 ~ 30
Item
01
Logical Port Number
02
04
Number of channels
E1 Clock Source
05
Transmit Pulse Mask
06
Frame Type
07
Line Coding
10
Receive Input Threshold
Input Data
Default
1 ~ 126 (SL1000)
1 ~ 96 (SL1100)
0 ~ 30
0 = Internal
1 = External
0 = 01 to 133 feet
1 = 133 to 266 feet
2 = 266 to 399 feet
3 = 399 to 533 feet
4 = 533 to 655 feet
0 = Double Frame (no CRC-4)
1 = Multiframe Structure (CRC-4)
0 = AMI
1 = HDB3
0 = 0.91/1.70 V
1 = 0.74/0.84 V
2 = 0.59/0.84 V
3 = 0.42/0.45 V
4 = 0.32/0.45 V
5 = 0.21/0.20 V
6 = 0.16/0.10 V
7 = 0.10/not defined
0
0
1
0
0
1
2
For VoIPDB PKG Setup
Physical Port Number
Item No.
01
02
01 ~ 32
Item
Trunk Logical Port Number
Trunk Type
Input Data
1 ~ 96
0 = H.323
1 = SIP
Default
0
1
Conditions


When changing a defined terminal type, first set the type to 0 and then plug the new device in to
have the system automatically define it, or redefine the type manually.
The system must have a unit installed to view/change the options for that type of unit.
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-7
10
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-04 : Music On Hold Setup
Level
IN
Program
10
Description
Use Program 10-04 : Music on Hold Setup to set the Music on Hold (MOH) source. For internal
Music on Hold, the system can provide a service tone callers on hold or one of eleven synthesized
selections.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
Music on Hold
Source Selection
0 = Internal MOH
1 = External MOH
2 = Service Tone
3 = VMDB
02
Music on Hold Tone
Selection
03
Audio Gain Setup
[In case Item 1 is 0.]
1 = Download File1
2 = Download File2
3 = Download File3
[In case Item 1 is 1, 2, or
3.]
1 ~ 100 = VRS Message
Number
1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 ~ + 15.5
dB)
Description
Internal Music Tune - The tune is
set by Program 10-04-02.

External Source - ACI input via
audio connector (J421)
(Program10-60-01).

Silence - Callers on hold hear
silence.
Download File1 : Farewell Song (by
Chopin)
Download File2 : Die Forelle (by F.
Schubert)
Download File3 : Plaisir d’amour (by
J.P.E.Martini)

Default
0
1
32 (0 dB)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference


2-8
Background Music
Music on Hold
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-06 : ISDN BRI Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 10-06 : ISDN BRI Setup define the TE1 selection and DID mode for DID callers when
the BRI feature is used.
10
Input Data
Slot No.
01 ~ 09
ISDN Line No.
01 ~ 04
Item
No.
Item
01
TEI selection
02
DID mode
03
04
SPID1
SPID2
Input Data
0 = Select by SPID number
1 = Select by Channel ID number
0 = Route by Called Party Number
1 = Route by Redirecting Number
Maximum 20 digits
Maximum 20 digits
Default
0
0
No Setting
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-9
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-07 : Conversation Recording Resource
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 10-07 : Conversation Record Resource to select the number of Conference circuits to
be used for Conversation Recording.
10
Even if this program is set to ‘0', the telephone conversation recording function can be used.
In this case, 32 (16 x 2) circuits will be shared by conference recording and conversation recording. The number of
the conference circuits occupied by a conversation recording is two.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
The number of Conversation
Recording
Input Data
0 ~ 16
(0 = No setting, 1 ~ 16 = 2 ~ 32 Conference
Resource)
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

2-10
Conference
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-08 : Pre-Ringing Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 10-08 : Pre-Ringing Setup to enable or disable pre-ringing for trunk calls. This sets how
a trunk initially rings a telephone. With pre-ringing, a burst of ringing occurs as soon as the trunk LED
flashes. The call then continues ringing with the normal ring cadence cycle. Without pre-ringing, the call
starts ringing only when the normal ring cadence cycle occurs. This may cause a ring delay, depending
on when call detection occurs in reference to the ring cycle.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Pre-Ringing
Input Data
0 = No
1 = Yes
Default
0
Conditions

Used with Analog Trunks only.
Feature Cross Reference

Central Office Calls, Answering
Programming Manual
2-11
10
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-09 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
10
Use Program 10-09 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup to allocate the circuits on the CPU for either
DTMF receiving or dial tone detection. The CPU has 16 circuits initially, and an additional 16 circuits are
added when a VMDB is installed. By Adding EXIFE system can have up to 96. These are used as
follows:

Extension: DTMF receiver for single line telephone

Trunk: DTMF receiver for analog trunks, dial tone & busy tone detection for analog trunks
Input Data
Circuit/Resource Number
Item
No.
01
01 ~ 96
Item
DTMF Dial Tone Detection
Input Data
0 = Common Use
1 = Extension Only
2 = Trunk Only
Default
Resource 01 - 96 = 0 (Common)
Resource 01 - 16 are Baic
resource (only use Basic Board)
Resource 17 - 32 are vmdb
resource (only use Basic Board)
Conditions


CPU has 16 Channel DSP resources (receivers) only for basic CPU Unit. VMDB has additional
16 DSP resources which you can add to CPU.
In case of 0 (= Common) is selected, and if 14-02-10 (Caller ID receive ability) is set to “Yes”,
DSP resources are always allocated to analog trunk only, not for analog extension. If 14-02-10 is
set to “No”, the DSP resources can be used for both analog trunk and analog extension
commonly.
Feature Cross Reference




2-12
Caller ID
Central Office Calls, Placing
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-12 : CPU Network Setup
Level
SA
Program
Description
Use Program 10-12 : CPU Network Setup to setup the IP Address, Subnet-Mask, and Default
Gateway addresses.
Caution!
If any IP Address or NIC settings are changed, the system must be reset for the changes to take affect.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
IP Address
02
Subnet Mask
03
Default Gateway
Programming Manual
Input Data
0.0.0.0 ~
126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~
191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~
223.255.255.254
128.0.0.0 | 192.0.0.0 |
224.0.0.0 | 240.0.0.0 |
248.0.0.0 | 252.0.0.0 |
254.0.0.0 | 255.0.0.0 |
255.128.0.0 |
255.192.0.0 |
255.224.0.0 |
255.240.0.0 |
255.248.0.0 |
255.252.0.0 |
255.254.0.0 |
255.255.0.0 |
255.255.128.0 |
255.255.192.0 |
255.255.224.0 |
255.255.240.0 |
255.255.248.0 |
255.255.252.0 |
255.255.254.0 |
255.255.255.0 |
255.255.255.128 |
255.255.255.192 |
255.255.255.224 |
255.255.255.240 |
255.255.255.248 |
255.255.255.252 |
255.255.255.254 |
255.255.255.255 |
0.0.0.0 ~
126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~
191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~
223.255.255.254
Description
Default
Set for CPU.
192.168.0.10
The setting of Subnet Mask is invalid when
all Host Addresses are 0.
If the network section is:
0,
127,
128.0,
191.255,
192.0.0,
223.255.255
The setting of Subnet Mask is invalid.
255.255.255.0
IP Address for Router.
0.0.0.0
2-13
10
SL1100
Item
No.
ISSUE 1.1
Item
Input Data
Description
Determine the offset from Greenwich Mean
Time (GMT) time.
Then enter its respective value.
For example,
Eastern Time (US and Canada) has a
GMT offset of -5.
The program data would then be 7
(0 = - 12,
1 = - 11,
2 = - 10,
3 = - 9,
4 = - 8,
5 = - 7,
6 = - 6,
7 = - 5,
:
24 = + 12)
NIC Auto Negotiate
(CPU)
12
If using an external NAPT Router or not.
0
Set the IP address on the WAN side of
router.
0.0.0.0
When receiving ICMP redirect message,
this determines if the IP Routing Table
updates automatically or not.
0
Set for VoIPDB.
172.16.0.10
Set for VoIPDB.
255.255.0.0
04
Time Zone
0~24 (0 = -12 Hours and
24 = +12 Hours)
05
NIC Interface
06
Network Address
Port Translation
(NAPT) Router Setup
NAPT Router IP
Address(Default
Gateway [WAN])
0 = Auto Detect
1 = 100Mbps, Full
Duplex
2 = 100Mbps, Half
Duplex
3 = 10Mbps, Full Duplex
4 = 10Mbps, Half
Duplex
0 = No (Disable)
1 = Yes (Enable)
Program
10
07
08
ICMP Redirect
09
IP Address
10
Subnet Mask
2-14
0.0.0.0 ~
126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~
191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~
223.255.255.254
0= NO, Signaling
packets will follow the
ICMP redirect message.
1= YES, Signaling
packets will NOT follow
the ICMP redirect
message.
0.0.0.0 ~
126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~
191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~
223.255.255.254
128.0.0.0 | 192.0.0.0 |
224.0.0.0 | 240.0.0.0 |
248.0.0.0 | 252.0.0.0 |
254.0.0.0 | 255.0.0.0 |
255.128.0.0 |
255.192.0.0 |
255.224.0.0 |
255.240.0.0 |
255.248.0.0 |
255.252.0.0 |
255.254.0.0 |
255.255.0.0 |
255.255.128.0 |
255.255.192.0 |
255.255.224.0 |
255.255.240.0 |
255.255.248.0 |
255.255.252.0 |
255.255.254.0 |
255.255.255.0 |
255.255.255.128 |
255.255.255.192 |
255.255.255.224 |
255.255.255.240 |
255.255.255.248 |
255.255.255.252 |
255.255.255.254 |
255.255.255.255 |
Default
0
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 1.1
Item
No.
11
SL1100
Item
NIC Setup
Input Data
0 = Auto Detect
1 = 100 Mbps, Full
Duplex
3 = 10 Mbps, Full
Duplex
5 = 1 Gbps, Full Duplex
Description
Set for VoIPDB.
Default
0
Program
Conditions

The system must be reset for these changes to take affect.
Feature Cross Reference
10
None
Programming Manual
2-15
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-13 : In-DHCP Server Setup
Level
SA
Program
Description
Use Program 10-13 : In-DHCP Server Setup to setup the DHCP Server built into the CPU.
10
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
DHCP Server Mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
02
Lease Time
Days 0 ~ 255
Hour 0 ~ 23
Minutes 0 ~ 59
05
Last DHCP Data
Input Data
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Default
Description
0
Enable or disable the use of the built-in
DHCP Server. This program cannot be
enabled if PRG10-63-01 is enabled.
Lease Time of the IP address to a client.
0 day
0 hour
30 minutes
1
Pressing the Hold Key increments to
the next setting data.
If 10–13–01 is enabled, this setting
determines if DHCP resource is
enabled or disabled.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-16
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-14 : Managed Network Setup
Level
SA
Program
Description
Use Program 10-14 : Managed Network Setup to set up the range of the IP address which the DHCP
Server leases to a client.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
The Range of the IP address
to Lease.
When Maximum has not been
entered, the maximum value
equals the minimum value.
Input Data
Minimum :
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Maximum :
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Default
Related
Program
172.16.0.100
10-13-04
172.16.5.254
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-17
10
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-15 : Client Information Setup
Level
SA
Program
Description
Use Program 10-15 : Client Information Setup to set up the client information when the DHCP server
needs to assign a fixed IP address to clients.
10
Input Data
Client Number
Item No.
01
Item
MAC Address
IP Address
The IP address should be assigned out of the
scope range set up in Program 10-14.
1 ~ 16
Input Data
Default
MAC : 00-00-00-00-00-00 ~
FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF
1.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
00-00-00-00-00-00
0.0.0.0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-18
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-16 : Option Information Setup
Level
SA
Program
Description
Use Program 10-16 : Option Information Setup to set up the option given from the DHCP server to
each client.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
Router
Set the Router IP address.
02
DNS Server
Set IP address of DNS Server.
03
TFTP Server
Set the name for the TFTP Server.
MGC
05
06
07
08
Client Host Name
Set the Client Host Name.
DNS Domain Name
Set the DNS Domain Name.
Download Protocol
Set Download Protocol used for
AutoConfig (for DR700 Series).
09
Encryption Information
Set an Encryption Information used for
AutoConfig (for DR700 series).
10
FTP Server Address
Set a FTP Server Address used for
AutoConfig.
11
Config File Name
Set a File Name used for AutoConfig.
12
Vender Class ID
13
SNMP Server
14
POP3 Server
16
SIP Server (IP Address)
Programming Manual
Input Data
Code number 0 ~ 255
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Code number 0 ~ 255
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Code number 0 ~ 255
Maximum 64 character strings
Code number 0 ~ 255
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Code number 0 ~ 255
Maximum 64 character strings
Code number 0 ~ 255
Maximum 20 character strings
Code number 0 ~ 255
Sub code number
1 = FTP
2 = HTTP
Code number 0 ~ 255
Sub code number
Maximum 128 character strings
Code number 0 ~ 255
Sub code number
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Code number 0 ~ 255
Sub code number
Maximum 15 character strings
Code number 0 ~ 255
Maximum 256 character strings
Code number 0 ~ 255
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Code number 0 ~ 255
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Code number 0 ~ 255
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Default
3 (Fixed)
0.0.0.0
6 (Fixed)
0.0.0.0
66 (Fixed)
No setting
129 (Fixed)
172.16.0.10
12 (Fixed)
No setting
15 (Fixed)
No setting
43 (Fixed)
163 (Fixed)
1
43 (Fixed)
164 (Fixed)
No setting
43 (Fixed)
141
0.0.0.0
43 (Fixed)
151
No setting
60 (Fixed)
NEC DR700
69 (Fixed)
0.0.0.0
70 (Fixed)
0.0.0.0
120 (Fixed)
172.16.0.10
2-19
10
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Item
No.
17
18
Program
10
Item
SIP Server (Domain Name)
If there is setting in 10-16-16 this setting
will be ignored
FTP Server
19
Config File Name
20
LDS Server 1
21
22
23
24
27
LDS Server 2
LDS Server 3
LDS Server 4
Next Server IP Address
SIP Server Receive Port
Input Data
Default
Code number 0 ~ 255
Maximum 20 character strings
120 (Fixed)
No setting
Code number 0 ~ 255
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Code number 0 ~ 255
Maximum 15 character strings
Code number 0 ~ 255
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Code number 0 ~ 255
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Code number 0 ~ 255
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Code number 0 ~ 255
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Code number 0 ~ 255
Port: 1 ~ 65535
141 (Fixed)
0.0.0.0
151 (Fixed)
No setting
162 (Fixed)
0.0.0.0
162 (Fixed)
0.0.0.0
162 (Fixed)
0.0.0.0
162 (Fixed)
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
168 (Fixed)
5080
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-20
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-17 : H.323 Gatekeeper Setup
Level
SA
Program
Description
Use Program 10-17 : H.323 Gatekeeper Setup to set the H.323 Gatekeeper information.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
Gatekeeper Mode
02
Gatekeeper IP
Address
04
Preferred Gatekeeper
Input Data
0 = No Gatekeeper
1 = Automatic
2 = Manual
0.0.0.0 ~
126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~
191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~
223.255.255.254
Maximum 124
characters
Description
Default
Set IP Address either automatically or
manually if using an external Gatekeeper.
0
When Program 10-17-01 is set to 2, use
this to set the IP Address of the
Gatekeeper
0.0.0.0
When Program 10-17-01 is set to 1, use
this to set the preferred ID of multiple
Gatekeepers.
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-21
10
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-18 : H.323 Alias Address Setup
Level
SA
Program
Description
Use Program 10-18 : H.323 Alias Address Setup to set the alias address registered to the outside
H.323 Gatekeeper.
10
Input Data
Number of Alias
Item
No.
Item
01
Alias Address
02
Alias Address Type
1~6
Input Data
Description
Default
Dial up to 12 digits (0 ~
9, *, #)
0 = E164
Set the telephone number (Alias Address)
to external gatekeeper.
Set the Alias Address Type to external
gatekeeper.
No Setting
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-22
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-19 : VoIPDB DSP Resource Selection
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 10-19 : VoIPDB DSP Resource Selection to define the criteria for each DSP resource
on the VoIPDB unit.
10
Input Data
DSP Resource Number
Item
No.
01
Item
VoIPDB DSP Resource Selection
01 ~ 16
Input Data
0 = Common use for both IP extensions and
trunks
1 = Use for IP extensions
2 = Use for SIP trunks
5 = Blocked
6 = Common without unicast paging
7 = Multicast paging
8 = Unicast paging
Default
Resource 1 ~ 16 = 0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-23
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment to define the TCP port/address/etc. for
communicating to external equipment.
10
Input Data
Type of External Equipment
Item
No.
1 = CTI Server
5 = SMDR Output
6 = DIM Output
9 = 1st Party CTI
11 = O&M Server
12 = Traffic Report Output
13 = Room Data Output for Hotel Service
Item
Input Data
01
TCP Port
0 ~ 65535
03
Keep Alive Time
1 ~ 255 seconds
Default
External Device 1 (CTI
Server) = 0
External Device 5 (SMDR
Output) = 0
External Device 6 (DIM
Output) = 0
External Device 9 (1st
Party CTI ) = 0
External Device 11 (O&M
Server) = 8010
External Device 12 (Traffic
Report Output) = 0
External Device 13 (Room
Data Output for Hotel
Service) = 0
30 seconds
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-24
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-23 : SIP System Interconnection Setup
Level
SA
Program
Description
Use Program 10-23 : SIP System Interconnection Setup to determine if the system is interconnected
and define the IP address of another system, call control port number and alias address for SL1100
system interconnection.
Input Data
System Number
Item
No.
Item
01
System Interconnection
02
IP Address
03
04
Call Control Port
Dial Number
001 ~ 1000
Input Data
0 = No (Disable)
1 = Yes (Enable)
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
1 ~ 65535
Up to 12 digits (0 ~ 9)
Default
0
0.0.0.0
1720
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-25
10
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-24 : Daylight Savings Setup
Level
SA
Program
10
Description
Use Program 10-24 : Daylight Savings Setup to set the options for daylight savings. As the telephone
system is used globally, these settings define when the system should automatically adjust for daylight
savings as it applies to the region in which the system is installed.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
Daylight Savings
Mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
02
Time for Daylight
Savings
Start Month (Summer
Time)
00 : 00 ~ 23 : 59
04
Start of Week
0 = Last Week of Month
0~5
05
Start of Week Day
1~7
(Sun = 1, Mon = 2, etc.)
06
End of Month
07
End of Week
1 ~ 12
(Jan = 1, 2 = Feb, etc.)
0 = Last Week of Month
0~5
08
End of Week Day
03
1 ~ 12
(Jan = 1, 2 = Feb, etc.)
1~7
(Sun = 1, Mon = 2, etc.)
Description
Default
Enable (1) or disable (0) the system ability
to adjust the time for daylight
savings/standard time.
Enter the time of day when the system
should adjust for daylight savings time.
Enter the month when the system should
adjust the time for daylight savings time
(01 ~ 12).
Enter the week of the month when the
system should adjust the time for daylight
savings time. The week will start on the
day listed in 10-24-05.
Enter the day of the week when the system
should adjust the time for daylight savings
time (01 = Sunday, 02 = Monday, etc.).
Enter the month when the system should
adjust the time for standard time (01 ~ 12).
Enter the week of the month when the
system should adjust the time for standard
time.
The week will start on the Day listed in
10-24-08.
Enter the day of the week when the system
should adjust the time for daylight savings
time (01 = Sunday, 02 = Monday, etc.).
1
02 : 00
10
1
1
4
1
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

2-26
Clock/Calendar Display/Time and Date
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-25 : H.323 Gateway Prefix Setup
Level
SA
Program
Description
Use Program 10-25 : H.323 Gateway Prefix Setup to set the gateway prefix registered to the outside
gatekeeper.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
Item
Gateway Prefix
Entry
Gateway Prefix
Value
Input Data
0 = Off
1 = On
Up to 12 digits (0 ~ 9,
*, #)
Description
Default
Related
Program
0
When Program 10-25-01 is set as 0
(Off) this setting will be ignored.
No Setting
10-25-01
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-27
10
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-26 : IP System Operation Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 10-26 : IP System Operation Setup to enable or disable the Peer to Peer feature for
SIP MLT and SIP IP stations.
10
Input Data
Item
No.
02
03
04
05
Item
RTP Forwarding
Mode
SIP Peer to Peer
Mode
DR700 Peer to Peer
Mode
SIP CTI Mode
Input Data
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Disable
1 = Mode1
Description
Default
0
1
1
When SIP CTI Mode is set as 1 (Mode1) it
will ignore the setting at 10-26-03.
0
Conditions



Disabling 10-26-04 results in SIP MLT Station-to-SIP MLT Station calls using a DSP resource.
SIP-to-SIP MLT Station does not support Peer to Peer function and will result in using a DSP
resource.
Disabling 10-26-03 results in SIP IP Station-to-SIP IP Station calls using a DSP resource.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-28
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-28 : SIP System Information Setup
Level
SA
Program
Description
Use Program 10-28 : SIP System Information Setup to set up basic SIP trunking.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
Domain Name
Up to 64 Characters
(ex. :
[email protected])
Up to 48 Characters
(ex. :
[email protected])
0 = UDP
1 = TCP
Up to 32 Characters
When assigning the User ID, the ID
may contain only alpha characters.
(A space and/or special characters
are not allowed in the User ID
field).
(ex. :
[email protected])
02
Host Name
03
Transport Protocol
04
UserID
05
Domain
Assignment
0 = IP Address
1 = Domain Name
06
IP Trunk Port
Binding
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Description
Default
Set the domain name of the SIP-URL.
None
Set the host name of the SIP-URL.
None
Set the protocol for the connection.
0
User ID in the SIP Invite Setup
message. Use it for outbound caller ID
information if no information is assigned
in commands 21-17, 21-19, 15-16,
14-12 and 10-36. A call cannot be
completed across the span if there is no
outbound CID info. The reason for this
is: the from and display portion of the
invite message would be blank, and it
would not know where the call
originated from.
If the information from Telco was a
domain name ([email protected]) then
set to domain. If the information for
Telco was a IP address then set to IP
Address.
Trunk port binding is only used for SIP
trunks to the provider in
Non-Registration Mode only. When this
is disabled, an inbound call comes in
and follows your DID routing but it
comes in on the first available trunk.
When enabled, the inbound call comes
in and follows your normal DID routing
but maps to that specified trunk. If that
trunk is busy, it sends back a busy
unless you build a hunt group. To build
the hunt group, it references command
14-12-02 (pilot register ID). This then
points you to command 10-36-02. All the
numbers with the same pilot are in the
same hunt group.
None
0
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-29
10
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-29 : SIP Server Information Setup
Level
SA
Program
Description
Use Program 10-29 : SIP Server Information Setup to define the SIP Proxy setup for
outbound/inbound. The 10-29 commands are not used in non-registration mode.
10
If entries are made in Program 10-29-xx for a SIP Server and the SIP Server is then removed or not used, the
entries in Program 10-29-xx must be set back to their default settings. Even if 10-29-01 is set to 0 (off), the system
still checks the settings in the remaining 10-29 programs.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Input Data
Default Proxy
(Outbound)
Default Proxy
(Inbound)
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
03
Default Proxy IP
Address
04
05
Default Proxy Port
Number
Registrar Mode
0.0.0.0 ~
126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~
191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~
223.255.255.254
0 ~ 65535
06
Registrar IP Address
07
Registrar Port
Number
DNS Server Mode
02
08
0 = None
1 = Manual
0.0.0.0 ~
126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~
191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~
223.255.255.254
0 ~ 65535
0 = Off
1 = On
0.0.0.0 ~
126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~
191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~
223.255.255.254
0 ~ 65535
09
DNS Server IP
Address
10
DNS Port Number
11
Up to 128 Characters
12
Registrar Domain
Name
Domain Name
13
Proxy Host Name
Up to 48 Characters
14
SIP Carrier Choice
(V1.5 Changed)
0 ~ 26
1 = Carrier A
2 = Carrier B
:
7 = Carrier G
8 = Carrier H
:
26 = Carrier Z
2-30
Up to 64 Characters
Description
Default
This sets whether the SIP message is
always sent through the Default Proxy.
Need to be registered in registration mode.
This sets whether the SIP message is
always received through the Default Proxy.
This is optional and used if the provider
gives you a proxy address that is different
than the registration address. If the
provider is using domain names instead of
IP addresses, leave this at default.
0
The port number of the Default Proxy is
set.
The mode registered in the registration
server is set.
IP address of the SIP registration server is
set.
The port number of the SIP registration
server is set.
This setting determines if the DNS server
is used.
If 10-29-08 is 1, this is effective. This sets
the IP address of the DNS server.
If 10-29-08 is 1, this is effective. This sets
the port number of the DNS server.
This sets the domain name of the
registration server.
This specifies the domain name of the SIP
server.
This specifies the host name of the SIP
server.
This selects the carrier type of the SIP
server.
When Carrier A, B, or C is selected in
PRG10-29-14, PRG10-29-16 Register Sub
Mode is set "On" automatically.
0
0.0.0.0
5060
0
0.0.0.0
5060
0
0.0.0.0
53
None
None
None
0
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 1.1
Item
No.
SL1100
Item
Input Data
15
Registration Expiry
(Expire) Time
120 ~ 65535 seconds
16
Register Sub Mode
0 = Off (Allow invalid
Invite message)
1 = On (Deny invalid
Invite message)
17
DNS Source Port
0 ~ 65535
Description
Default
This sets the expiration time when the SIP
trunk registers to the Sip server. When half
the time set here passes, the registration
update is automatically done.
Prevents an invalid Invite message. If the
"register information that system send to
SIP server" and the "Invite information that
system receive" are different, system
sends "404 Not Found" message. If
PRG10-29-05 Register Mode is 0; Off, it is
necessary to set 0; Off in PRG10-29-16.
(10-29-08 must be On)
This sets the DNS source port number.
3600
0
Program
53
10
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-31
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-30 : SIP Authentication Information Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 10-30 : SIP Authentication Information Setup to set the authentication options for SIP
trunks.
10
Input Data
Item
No.
02
03
04
Item
User Name
Password
Authentication Trial
Input Data
Up to 64 Characters
Up to 32 Characters
0~9
Description
This sets the user name of the SIP trunk.
This sets the SIP trunk password.
This is how many times it will try an
authenticate before timing out and not
registering.
Default
None
None
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-32
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-33 : SIP Registrar/Proxy Information Basic Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 10-33 : SIP Registrar/Proxy Information Basic Setup to set the registrar/proxy options
for SIP extensions.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Description
Default
3600
01
Registration Expire
Time
60 ~ 65535
02
Authentication Mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
03
Registrar/Proxy
Domain Name
Registrar/Proxy Host
Name
Up to 64 Characters
After this time expires, the UA’s are forced
to reregister with the CPU. This allows the
CPU to keep a current location of the entire
end UA’s.
Check here if a password is desired for the
IP SIP phones to register. When checked,
15-05-16 must have a password entered
and also the SIP phone must have the
same password. When using
Authentication, the station number is the
authorization name.
Set the domain name of the SIP proxy.
Up to 48 Characters
Set the domain name of the SIP proxy.
04
1
(V2.1 Changed)
None
None
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-33
10
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-36 : SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 10-36 : SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup to set the SIP trunk registration
information.
10
Input Data
Register ID
Item
No.
Item
01
Registration
02
03
User ID
Authentication User
ID
Authentication
Password
04
1 ~ 31
Input Data
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Up to 32 Characters
Up to 64 Characters
Up to 32 Characters
Description
Default
This setting determines if the SIP trunk
information is registered.
This sets the SIP trunk User ID.
This sets the SIP trunk Authentication User
ID.
This sets the SIP trunk authentication
password.
0
None
None
None
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-34
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-37 : UPnP Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 10-37 : UPnP Setup to set the UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) options for SIP trunks.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
UPnP Mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
02
Retry Time
0, 60 ~ 3600
(1 ~ 59 cannot be input)
Description
Default
0
Router must support UPnP.
Set interval time to re-check the Router for
the WAN IP address.
When this set as 0 it will not retry.
60
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-35
10
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-39 : Fractional Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 10-39 : Fractional Setup to enable or disable the ability to use fractional T1 or PRI.
10
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Fractional
Input Data
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-36
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-40 : IP Trunk Availability
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 10-40 : IP Trunk Availability to enable or disable the ability to use SIP trunks and assign
the number of ports if IP Trunk is enabled.
10
Input Data
Slot Number
Item
No.
0
Item
01
IP Trunk Availability
02
Number of Ports
Input Data
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 ~ 32 (Port)
Default
0
0
SIP trunks are assigned in increments of two.
Please note that if odd port number is set it will use 1
extra port. (V2.0 Added)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-37
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-42 : Virtual Loop Back Port Setting
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 10-42 : Virtual Loop Back Port Setting to set the data for the Virtual Loop Back Port.
10
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
02
03
04
05
Number of Loop Back Ports
Logical Trunk Port Number
Logical Station Port Number
Layer 3 Timer Type
Calling Party Number
06
07
S-point DDI digits
Call Busy Mode for S-point
Input Data
0 ~ 30 (0 = No setting)
1 ~ 96
1 ~ 120
1~5
0 = No
1 = Yes
0~4
0 = Alerting Message
1 = Disconnect Message
Default
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-38
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-45 : IP Routing Table Setup
Level
SA
Program
Description
Use Program 10-45 : IP Routing Table Setup to set up the IP Routing Table.
Input Data
Routing Table Number
Item
No.
01
02
03
Item
Network Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
10
001 ~ 100
Input Data
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.0 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.0 ~ 223.255.255.254
128.0.0.0 | 192.0.0.0 | 224.0.0.0 | 240.0.0.0 |
248.0.0.0 | 252.0.0.0 | 254.0.0.0 | 255.0.0.0 |
255.128.0.0 | 255.192.0.0 | 255.224.0.0 |
255.240.0.0 | 255.248.0.0 | 255.252.0.0 |
255.254.0.0 | 255.255.0.0 | 255.255.128.0 |
255.255.192.0 | 255.255.224.0 | 255.255.240.0 |
255.255.248.0 | 255.255.252.0 | 255.255.254.0 |
255.255.255.0 | 255.255.255.128 |
255.255.255.192 | 255.255.255.224 |
255.255.255.240 | 255.255.255.248 |
255.255.255.252 | 255.255.255.254 |
255.255.255.255 |
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Default
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-39
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-46 : DR700 Server Information Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 10-46 : DR700 Server Information Setup to set up the information of DR700 Server.
10
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
Register Mode
0 = Normal
1 = Auto
2 = Manual
04
Server Name
Up to 32 characters
06
Register Port
0 ~ 65535
07
Encryption
Mode
Encryption Type
One Time
Password
Start Port
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Mode 1
Up to 10 characters (0
~ 9, *, #)
1 ~ 120
11
Multicast IP
Address
224.0.0.0 ~
239.255.255.255
12
13
Multicast Port
Subscribe
Session Port
NAT Mode
0 ~ 65535
0 ~ 65535
08
09
10
14
0 = Off
1 = On
Description
Default
Normal:
When the phone boots up, it reports
the ext. assigned in the phone or
chooses the next available
extension in the system. Password
is not required.
Auto:
If set to Auto, the SIP user name
and password must be entered on
the actual IP phone. These settings
must match 84-22/15-05-27, or the
phone does not come on-line.
Manual:
When the phone boots up, it
prompts user to enter a user ID and
password before logging in. It
checks this user ID/password
against 84-22/15-05-27. If there is
no match, the phone does not come
online.
Assign the Server name to be used
in the SIP URL.
Assign the port number in which the
SIP messages are sent to on the
VoIPDB.
This same port number must be
assigned in the SIP Multiline
terminals.
If this command is changed, it
requires a CPU reset.
0
Related
Program
sipphd
5080
0
0
None
This sets the Multicast IP address
so that two or more main devices
don’t overlap on the same network,
or if Multicast is used by other IP
services.
49
(V2.1 Changed)
224.0.0.10
10-46-07
10-46-01
30000
5081
When the system controls the SIP
multiline terminal via the NAT router,
this system data is set to On.
0
Conditions
None
2-40
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
10
Programming Manual
2-41
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-47 : Terminal License Server Information Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 10-47 : Terminal License Server Information Setup to setup the information of
Terminal License Server.
10
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
Register Port of TCP I/F
0 ~ 65535
02
TCP Keep Alive Time
1~255 seconds
Description
Default
This set the register port number
of TCP I/F.
This set the TCP keep alive time.
6080
5
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-42
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-48 : License Activation
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 10-48 : License Activation to turn on the license issued from the license server.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
Item
Software Key Code
Activation Code
Feature Code
Input Data
20-digit character
8-digit hexadecimal number
7-digit number
10
Default
None
None
None
Conditions
The Key Operation for input item 03 is as follows;
Hold Key
Soft Key2 (Back)
Soft Key3 (Submit)
Edit next feature code

Up to 10 feature code is possible to input at once.

Register the license when 10th feature code is edited.
Edit previous feature code
Register the license
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-43
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-49 : License File Activation
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 10-49 : License File Activation to enable the command to save the license file via CF
Card which is issued from the license server.
10
Input Data
Item No.
01
Item
Save License File on CF Card
Input Data
Dial 1 + Hold (Press Hold to cancel.)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-44
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-50 : License Information
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 10-50 : License Information to confirm license information that is stored in a system.
Input Data
Feature Code Number
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
Item
License Name
License Quantity
Campaign License
Quantity
Campaign License
Remaining Days
Input Data
10
000 ~ 9999
Description
"–"
"–"
"–"
None
0 ~ 32767 (Read Data)
0 ~ 32767 (Read Data)
"–"
0 ~ 9999 (Read Data)
Default
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-45
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-51 : PRI/T1/E1 Selection of PRI
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 10-51 : PRI/T1 Selection of PRI to select whether the unit works as PRI or T1 or E1.
10
Input Data
Slot Number
Item
No.
01
Item
PRI/T1 Selection
01 ~ 09
Input Data
0 = PRI
1 = T1
2= E1
Description
Chose whether the unit works as PRI or
T1.
Default
0 = PRI
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-46
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-52 : Free/Demo License Information
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 10-52 : Free/Demo License Information to display information on free of charge/Demo
license.
10
Input Data
Item No.
01
Item
Remaining days of Free/Demo License
Description
Read Data: 0 ~ 9999
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-47
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-58 : Network Address
Level
IN
Program
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)
Description
10
Use Program 10-58 : Network Address to set the local network address when the SIP multiline
terminal connects the system via a local router.
Input Data
Area Table
Item
No.
Item
01
Network
Address
02
Subnet Mask
Input Data
0.0.0.0 ~
126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~
191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~
223.255.255.254
248.0.0.0 / 252.0.0.0 /
254.0.0.0 / 255.0.0.0
255.128.0.0 /
255.192.0.0 /
255.224.0.0
255.240.0.0 /
255.248.0.0 /
255.252.0.0
255.254.0.0 /
255.255.0.0 /
255.255.128.0
255.255.192.0 /
255.255.224.0
255.255.240.0 /
255.255.248.0
255.255.252.0 /
255.255.254.0
255.255.255.0 /
255.255.255.128
255.255.255.192 /
255.255.255.224
255.255.255.240 /
255.255.255.248
255.255.255.252 /
255.255.255.254
1~8
Description
Default
Related
Program
Sets local network address.
0.0.0.0
10-46-14
Sets local subnet mask.
0.0.0.0
10-46-14
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-48
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-60 : Audio Port Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 10-60 : Audio Port Setup to defines which audio port on the 084M packages are used
for BGM/External MOH.
10
Input Data
Audio Port Number
Item
No.
01
1 = BGM
2 = External MOH
Item
Slot No.
Input Data
0, 1, 4, 7
Default
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-49
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-61 : Relay Port Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 10-61 : Relay Port Setup to defines the relay port type on the 084M.
10
Input Data
Relay Port No.
Item
No.
Item
01
Relay Type
02
Destination Selection
1~6
Input Data
Default
0 = No setting
1 = External MOH
2 = BGM resource
3 = External Speaker
4 = Door Phone
10-61-01 = 1 or 2 : Not Use
10-61-01 = 3 : 1 ~ 3 External Speaker Message No.
10-61-01 = 4 : 1 ~ 6 Door Phone No.
0
0 (Not Used)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-50
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-62 : NetBIOS Setting
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use 10-62 : NetBIOS Setting to set the data of NetBIOS.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
NetBIOS Mode
02
NetBIOS Name
Input Data
Description
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Maximum 15 characters
Default
1
SL1100
Please avoid using Space between the
words. Also when you create name please use
all upper letters.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-51
10
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-63 : DHCP Client Setting
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use 10-63 : DHCP Client Setting to set the data of DHCP Client.
10
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
DHCP Client Mode
Input Data
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Description
Default
If you are using IP phones/trunks it is
recommended to not use the DHCP client
function, a static IP address would be
preferred. If you are going to still use the
DHCP client function then the DHCP
server should be setup so that the same IP
address is always provided to the system.
0
When changing this program a system
reset is required.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-52
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-01 : System Numbering
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 11-01 : System Numbering to set the system numbering plan. The numbering plan
assigns the first and second digits dialed and affects the digits an extension user must dial to access
other extensions and features, such as service codes and trunk codes. If the default numbering plan
does not meet the site requirements, use this program to tailor the system numbering to the site.
Caution!
Improperly programming this option can adversely affect system operation. Make sure you thoroughly
understand the default numbering plan before proceeding. If you must change the standard numbering,
use the chart for System Numbering Default Settingsto keep careful and accurate records of your changes.
Before changing your numbering plan, use PC Pro to make a backup copy of your system data.
Changing the numbering plan consists of three steps:
Step 1 : Enter the digit (s) you want to change
You can make either single or two digit entries. In the Dialed Number column in the System Numbering
Default Settings, the nX rows (e.g., 1X) are for single digit codes. The remaining rows (e.g., 11, 12, etc.)
are for two digit codes.

Entering a single digit affects all the Dialed Number entries beginning with that digit. For example,
entering 6 affects all number plan entries beginning with 6. The entries you make in step 2 and
step 3 below affect the entire range of numbers beginning with 6. (For example, if you enter 3 in
step 2 the entries affected are 600 ~ 699. If you enter 4 in step 2 below, the entries affected are
6000 ~ 6999.)

Entering two digits lets you define codes based on the first two digits a user dials. For example,
entering 60 allows you to define the function of all codes beginning with 60. In the default
program, only * and # use 2-digit codes. All the other codes are single digit. If you enter a two digit
code between 0 and 9, be sure to make separate entries for all the other two digit codes within
the range as well. This is because in the default program all the two digit codes between 0 and 9
are undefined.
Defining codes based on more than 2 digits require a secondary program (Program 11-20) to define
the codes.
Step 2 : Specify the length of the code you want to change
After you specify a single or two digit code, you must tell the system how many digits comprise the code.
This is the Number of Digits Required column in the System Numbering Default Settings.
Step 3: Assign a function to the code selected
After entering a code and specifying its length, you must assign its function. This is the Dial Type
column in the System Numbering Default Settings. The choices are:
Dial
Types
0
1
Dial Type
Description
--- Not Used --Service Code
Programming Manual
Related Program
Note
11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator)
11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation)
11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access)
11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel)
11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special Access)
11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup
2-53
11
SL1100
Dial
Types
ISSUE 1.1
Dial Type
Description
Related Program
2
Extension Number
3
4
Trunk Access Code
Special Trunk
Access
Operator Access
F-Route Access
Dial Extension
Analyze
Note
11-02 : Extension Numbering
11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering
11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers
Program
5
6
9
11
11-09-01 : Trunk Access Code
11-09-02 : Trunk Access Code
20-17 : Operator Extension
44-xx
11-20 : Dial Extension Analyze Table
Changing the Dial Type for a range of codes can have a dramatic affect on how your system operates.
Assume, for example, the site is a hotel that has room numbers from 100 ~ 399. To make extension numbers
correspond to room numbers, you should use Program 11-02 to reassign extension numbers on each floor
from 100 to 399. (Other applications might also require you to change entries in Program 11-10 ~ 11-16.)
Default
See the following tables for default settings.
Table 2-1 System Numbering Default Settings
Dial Types : 1 = Service Code, 2 = Extension Number, 3 = Trunk Access, 4 = Special Trunk Access, 5 =
Operator Access, 6 = Flexible Routing, 9 = Dial Extension Analyze, 0 = Not Used
Dialed
1X
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
10
1*
1#
Number of Digits Required
Default
New
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Dial Type
Default
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2X
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
20
2*
2#
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3X
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
30
3*
3#
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2-54
New
Program 11 : System Numbering
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Dial Types : 1 = Service Code, 2 = Extension Number, 3 = Trunk Access, 4 = Special Trunk Access, 5 =
Operator Access, 6 = Flexible Routing, 9 = Dial Extension Analyze, 0 = Not Used
Dialed
Number of Digits Required
Default
New
Dial Type
Default
4X
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
40
4*
4#
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5X
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
50
5*
5#
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6X
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
60
6*
6#
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
7X
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
70
7*
7#
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8X
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Programming Manual
New
Program
11
2-55
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Dial Types : 1 = Service Code, 2 = Extension Number, 3 = Trunk Access, 4 = Special Trunk Access, 5 =
Operator Access, 6 = Flexible Routing, 9 = Dial Extension Analyze, 0 = Not Used
Dialed
89
80
8*
8#
Program
11
Number of Digits Required
Default
New
0
0
0
0
Dial Type
Default
0
0
0
0
9X
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
90
9*
9#
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0X
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
00
0*
0#
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
*X
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
*9
*0
**
*#
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
#X
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7
#8
#9
#0
#*
##
0
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
2
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
New
Conditions
None
2-56
Program 11 : System Numbering
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Feature Cross Reference

Flexible System Numbering
Program
11
Programming Manual
2-57
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-02 : Extension Numbering
Level
IN
Program
11
Description
Use Program 11-02 : Extension Numbering to set the extension number. The extension number can
have up to eight digits. The first/second digit (s) of the number should be assigned in Program 11-01 or
Program 11-20. This allows an employee to move to a new location (port) and retain the same
extension number.
Input Data
Extension Port Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Extension Number
Input Data
Dial (Up to 8 digits)
001 ~ 120
Description
Set up extension numbers for multiline
telephones, single line telephones and IP
telephones.
Extension number assignments cannot
be duplicated in Programs 11-02, and 11-07.
Default
Extension Port
Number :
Extension
Number :
001 ~ 064:
101 ~ 164
065 ~ 120 : No
Setting
(V2.1 Changed)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference



2-58
Department Calling
Flexible System Numbering
Intercom
Program 11 : System Numbering
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering to define the virtual extension numbers. The
extension number can have up to eight digits. The first/second digit (s) of the number should be
assigned in Program 11-01 or Program 11-20.
Input Data
Virtual Extension Numbers
Item
No.
01
Item
Extension Number
Input Data
Dial (Up to 8 digits)
001 ~ 050
Description
Set up Virtual Extension numbers.
The extension number cannot be
duplicated in Programs 11-02 and 11-07.
Default
Virtual Port
Number :
Extension
Number
1 ~ 50 : No
Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Flexible System Numbering
Programming Manual
2-59
11
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers
Level
IN
Program
11
Description
Use Program 11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers to assign a pilot number to each Department
Group set up in Program 16-02. The pilot number is the number users dial for Department Calling and
Department Step Calling. The pilot number can have up to eight digits. The first and second digits of the
number should be assigned in Program 11-01 or Program 11-20 as type 2.
Input Data
Department (Extension) Group Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Extension
Group Pilot
Number
Input Data
Dial (Up to 8 digits)
01 ~ 32
Description
Default
Use this program to assign
department group pilot numbers.
The number set up by Program
11-02 (Extension Numbering)
cannot be used.
The extension number cannot be
duplicated in Programs 11-02 and
11-07.
No Setting
Related
Program
・16-01 :
Department
(Extension)
Group Basic
Data Setup
・16-02 :
Department
Group
Assignment for
Extensions
・16-03 :
Secondary
Department
Group
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference


2-60
Department Calling
Department Step Calling
Program 11 : System Numbering
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-09 : Trunk Access Code
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 11-09 : Trunk Access Code to assign the trunk access code. The trunk access code
can be set from 1 ~ 4 digits which is defined to type 3 and 4 in Program 11-01. This is the code
extension users dial to access Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route). The Individual Trunk Access
Code is used when Trunk Group Routing is desired for an outgoing line.
Caution!
The digit 9 is defined in Program 11-01 as Dial Type ( ) with the Number of Digits Required set to ( ). If you
change the trunk access code in Program 11-09, you must make the corresponding changes in Program
11-01.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Description
Default
0
・11-01 : System
Numbering
・14-01 ~ 07 :
Basic Trunk Data
Setup
・14-05 : Trunk
Group
・14-06 : Trunk
Group Routing
・21-02 : Trunk
Group Routing
for Extensions
No Setting
・11-01 : System
Numbering
・14-01 ~ 07:
Basic Trunk Data
Setup
・14-05 : Trunk
Group
・14-06 : Trunk
Group Routing
・21-02 : Trunk
Group Routing
for Extensions
・21-15 :
Individual Trunk
Group Routing
for Extensions
01
Trunk Access
Code
Dial (Up to four
digits)
Use this program to assign the
trunk access code. This is the code
extension users dial to access
Automatic Route Selection
(ARS/F-Route).
02
2nd Trunk
Route Access
Code
Dial (Up to four
digits)
Use this program to define
additional trunk access codes.
When a user dials the Alternate
Trunk Route Access Code, the
system routes their call to the
Alternate Trunk Route.
Related
Program
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference



Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)
Central Office Calls, Placing
Trunk Group Routing
Programming Manual
2-61
11
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator)
Level
IN
Program
11
Description
Use Program 11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) to customize the Service
Codes for the System Administrator. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-11 ~
11-16. The following chart shows:

The number of each code (01 ~ 50).

The function of the Service Code.

The type of telephones that can use the Service Code.

The default entry. For example, dialing item 26 allows users to force a trunk line to disconnect.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Description
Default
Related
Program
01
Night Mode
Switching
Change of
music on hold
tone
Setting the
System Time
Storing
Common Speed
Dialing
Numbers
Storing Group
Speed Dialing
Numbers
Setting the
Automatic
Transfer for
Each Trunk Line
Canceling the
Automatic
Transfer for
Each Trunk Line
Setting the
Destination for
Automatic Trunk
Transfer
Charging Cost
Display by the
Supervisor
Entry Credit for
Toll Restriction
Night Mode
Switching for
Other Group
Leaving
Message
Waiting
(Requires CPU
to be licensed
for Hotel/Motel)
Dial Block by
Supervisor
Off-Premise Call
Forward by
Door Box
VRS Record/Erase
Message
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maximum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
718
Terminal: MLT
No setting
12-xx
20-07-01
10-04
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT
728
Terminal: MLT
753
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT
754
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT
733
24-04-01
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT
734
24-04-01
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT
735
24-04-01
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT
No setting
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT
No setting
Terminal: MLT
618
12-xx
20-07-01
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT
626
11-11-09
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT
601
90-19
Terminal: MLT
722
13-05
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Define Service Code for VRS
message recording or erasing.
616
20-07-13
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
11
12
16
17
18
20
2-62
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Program 11 : System Numbering
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Item
No.
Item
21
VRS - General
Message
Playback
VRS - Record or
Erase General
Message
SMDR Extension
Accumulated
Printout Code
SMDR - Group
Accumulated
Printout Code
Account Code
Accumulated
Printout Code
Forced Trunk
Disconnect
Trunk Port
Disable for
Outgoing Calls
Set Private Call
Refuse
Entry Caller ID
Refuse
Set Caller ID
Refuse
Dial-In Mode
Switching
Date Setting
22
23
24
25
26
27
32
33
34
35
41
42
43
Maintenance
Service
VRS Incoming
Input Data
Description
Default
Related
Program
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
611
20-07-14
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
612
20-07-15
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT
621
20-07-18
Program
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT
622
20-07-19
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT
623
20-07-20
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
No setting
20-07-11
Terminal: MLT, SLT
645
20-07-12
Terminal: MLT, SLT
646
Terminal: MLT
647
14-01-27
20-07-24
20-07-25
Terminal: MLT, SLT
748
Terminal: MLT, SLT
609
14-01-27
20-07-25
20-07-26
Terminal: MLT
789
20-07-30
Terminal: MLT
643
Terminal: MLT
778
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Sets the Service Code for power
cutting. (for Administrator)
PRG11-10-44 Input dial is Max 8
digits.
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Sets Service Code (SC) for Room
monitor on/off to terminal.
SC+1+Extension Number ; Room
Monitor enable
SC+0+Extension Number ; Room
Monitor disable
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Service Code setting for Watching
message recording to VRS
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Service Code setting for Warning
message recording to VRS.
Terminal: MLT
Service Code setting for
destination number when Warning
mode detected.
Terminal: MLT
Service Code setting for
destination number when remote
inspection detects no answer
Terminal: MLT, SLT
731
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
44
Cutting the
telephone
power
45
Room Monitor
Permit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
46
Watch Message
Setting
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
47
Warning
Message Setting
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
48
Auto Dial
Setting for
Security Sensor
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
49
Auto Dial
Setting for
Remote
Inspection
Night-mode
Skip (Own
Group)
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
50
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
13-04
15-02-55
610
614
615
617
619
787
MLT = Multiline Terminal
SLT = Single Line Telephone
Programming Manual
2-63
11
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
11
2-64
Program 11 : System Numbering
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation)
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) to customize the Service
Codes which are used for registration and setup. You can customize additional Service Codes in
Programs 11-10, and 11-12 ~ 11-16.
The following chart shows:

The number of each code (01 ~ 72).

The function of the Service Code.

What type of telephones can use the Service Code.

The default entry. For example, users to turn on or turn off Background Music by dialing the
number set at item 18.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
Call Forward All
Call Forward Busy
Call Forward No Answer
Call Forward Busy/No
Answer
Call Forward Both Ring
Call Forwarding
- Follow-Me
Do Not Disturb
02
03
04
05
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Answer
Message
Waiting
Cancel All
Messages
Waiting
Cancel Message
Waiting
Alarm Clock
Display
Language
Selection for
Multiline
Terminal
Text Message
Setting
Enable
Handsfree
Incoming
Intercom Calls
Force Ringing of
Incoming
Intercom Calls
Programmable
Function Key
Programming
(3-Digit Service
Codes)
Programming Manual
Input Data
Description
Default
Terminal: MLT, SLT
741
Terminal: MLT, SLT
742
Terminal: MLT, SLT
743
Terminal: MLT, SLT
744
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
745
Terminal: MLT, SLT
746
Terminal: MLT, SLT
747
Terminal: MLT, SLT
*0
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
773
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
771
Terminal: MLT, SLT
727
20-01-06
Terminal: MLT
678
15-02
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT
No setting
Terminal: MLT
721
20-09-05
20-02-12
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT
723
20-09-05
20-02-12
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT
751
15-07
11-11-38
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Related
Program
11-10-16
2-65
11
SL1100
Item
No.
BGM On/Off
19
Key Touch Tone
On/Off
Change
Incoming CO
and ICM Ring
Tones
Check Incoming
Ring Tones
Extension Name
Programming
Second Call for
DID/DISA/DIL
Change Station
Class of Service
21
22
23
11
Item
18
20
Program
ISSUE 1.1
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
41
43
2-66
Automatic
Transfer Setup
for Each
Extension
Group
Automatic
Transfer
Cancellation for
Each Extension
Group
Destination of
Automatic
Transfer Each
Extension
Group
Delayed
Transfer for
Every Extension
Group
Delayed
Transfer
Cancellation for
Each Extension
Group
DND Setup for
Each Extension
Group
DND
Cancellation for
Each Extension
Group
Dial Block
Temporary Toll
Restriction
Override
Pilot Group
Withdrawing
Toll Restriction
Override
Ring Volume Set
Programmable
Function Key
Programming
(2-Digit Service
Codes)
Station Speed
Dial Number
Entry
Tandem Ringing
Headset Mode
Switching
Input Data
Description
Default
Terminal: MLT
725
Terminal: MLT
724
Terminal: MLT
720
Terminal: MLT
711
Terminal: MLT
700
Terminal: MLT
679
Terminal: MLT
Allows an extension user to change
the COS of another extension. Must
be allowed in Program 20-13-28.
Terminal: MLT, SLT
677
20-13-28
602
20-11-17
24-05
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
603
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT
604
20-11-17
24-05
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
605
20-11-17
24-05
24-02-08
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
606
20-11-17
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
607
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
608
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
600
Terminal: MLT, SLT
775
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
650
Terminal: MLT, SLT
663
Terminal: MLT
729
Terminal: MLT
752
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
755
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
No setting
Terminal: MLT, SLT
688
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Related
Program
15-02
15-01
21-07
21-14
15-07
11-11-17
15-07
30-03
Program 11 : System Numbering
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Item
No.
Item
45
Set/Cancel Call
Forward All
(Split)
Set/Cancel Call
Forward Busy
(Split)
Set/Cancel Call
Forward No
Answer (Split)
Set/Cancel Call
Forward Busy
No Answer
(Split)
Set/Cancel Call
Forward Both
Ring (Split)
Set Message
Waiting
Indication
Cancel Message
Waiting
Indication
Set/Cancel Call
Forward All
Destination (No
Split)
Set/Cancel Call
Forward Busy
Destination (No
Split)
Set/Cancel Call
Forward No
Answer
Destination (No
Split)
Call Forward
Busy No Answer
Destination (No
Split)
Call Forward
with Personal
Greeting
Call Forward to
Attendant
except Busy
Call Forward to
Attendant/No
Answer
Adjust of
Headset Ring
Volume
Description
Default
Related
Program
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
682
24-09
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
683
24-09
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
684
24-09
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
685
24-09
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
686
24-09
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: SLT
No setting
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: SLT
No setting
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
790
24-09
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
791
24-09
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
792
24-09
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
793
24-09
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
713
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
696
15-01-08
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
697
15-01-09
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT
No setting
11-11-37
15-02-12
15-02-41
15-02-42
Headset Mode
Switching
IntraMail
Language
Selection for
own extension
IntraMail
Language
Selection for
specific
extension
Backlight
Brightness
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT
No setting
Terminal: MLT,SLT
664
47-02-16
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT,SLT
665
20-13-53
47-02-16
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT
705
71
Auto Backlight
Terminal: MLT
706
72
Headset
V.Announce
Select Incoming
Ring Tones at
trunk (V1.5
Added)
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
15-02-61
~
15-02-63
15-02-64
15-02-65
Terminal: MLT
714
Terminal: MLT
761
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
58
59
60
62
65
68
69
70
73
Programming Manual
Input Data
15-28-01
2-67
Program
11
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
MLT = Multiline Terminal
SLT = Single Line Telephone
Conditions
Program
None
Feature Cross Reference
11
None
2-68
Program 11 : System Numbering
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access)
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) to customize the Service Codes
which are used for service access. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10,
11-11, and 11-14 through 11-16.
The following chart shows:

The number of each code (01 ~ 64).

The function of the Service Code.

The type of telephones that can use the Service Code.

The default entry. For example, dialing (Item 05) cancels a previously set Camp- On.

Programs that may be affected with the changing the code.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Description
Default
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Activating Call Forwarding/Do Not
Disturb Override. This code is
available only if you disable the
voice mail Single Digit dialing code
in Program 11-16-09.
Terminal: MLT, SLT
707
Terminal: MLT, SLT
709
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
750
Terminal: MLT, SLT
770
Terminal: MLT, SLT
712
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
708
Terminal: MLT, SLT
710
Terminal: MLT, SLT
No setting
0~9,
digit
0~9,
digit
0~9,
digit
0~9,
digit
0~9,
digit
0~9,
digit
0~9,
digit
*# Maxmum of 8
Terminal: MLT, SLT
#2
*# Maxmum of 8
Terminal: MLT, SLT
#4
*# Maxmum of 8
Terminal: MLT, SLT
#5
*# Maxmum of 8
Terminal: MLT, SLT
715
*# Maxmum of 8
Terminal: MLT, SLT
704
*# Maxmum of 8
Terminal: MLT, SLT
#0
*# Maxmum of 8
Terminal: MLT, SLT
776
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
785
01
Bypass Call
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
02
Conference
03
Override
(Off-Hook
Signaling)
Set Camp-On
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
04
05
07
Cancel
Camp-On
Switching of
Voice Call and
Signal Call
Step Call
08
Barge-In
09
Change to STG
(Department
Group) All Ring
Station Speed
Dialing
Group Speed
Dialing
Last Number
Dial
Saved Number
Dial
Trunk Group
Access
Specified Trunk
Access
Clear Last
Number Dialing
Data
Clear Saved
Number Dialing
Data
06
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
18
Programming Manual
Related
Program
#1
16-02
2-69
11
SL1100
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Description
Default
Related
Program
19
Internal Group
Paging
External Paging
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
701
31-01-01
Terminal: MLT, SLT
703
Terminal: MLT, SLT
764
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
765
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
763
31-02-01
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
*1
31-02-01
31-07
Terminal: MLT, SLT
756
0~9,
digit
0~9,
digit
0~9,
digit
0~9,
digit
0~9,
digit
0~9,
digit
0~9,
digit
0~9,
digit
0~9,
digit
0~9,
digit
0~9,
digit
0~9,
digit
*# Maxmum of 8
Terminal: MLT, SLT
768
23-02
*# Maxmum of 8
Terminal: MLT, SLT
*#
23-02
*# Maxmum of 8
Terminal: MLT, SLT
769
23-02
*# Maxmum of 8
Terminal: MLT, SLT
**
*# Maxmum of 8
Terminal: MLT, SLT
672
*# Maxmum of 8
Terminal: MLT, SLT
#6
24-03
*# Maxmum of 8
Terminal: MLT, SLT
*6
24-03
*# Maxmum of 8
Terminal: MLT, SLT
732
*# Maxmum of 8
Terminal: MLT, SLT
762
*# Maxmum of 8
Terminal: MLT, SLT
757
*# Maxmum of 8
Terminal: MLT, SLT
702
*# Maxmum of 8
Terminal: MLT, SLT
620
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
783
0~9,
digit
0~9,
digit
0~9,
digit
0~9,
digit
*# Maxmum of 8
Terminal: MLT, SLT
#7
*# Maxmum of 8
Terminal: MLT
690
*# Maxmum of 8
Terminal: SLT
#3
*# Maxmum of 8
Terminal: MLT, SLT
#9
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: SLT
799
Terminal: SLT
749
15-03-07
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: SLT
759
15-03-08
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: SLT
Splitting (switching) between calls
794
11-12-03
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: SLT
##
Terminal: MLT, SLT
*8
Terminal: MLT, SLT
654
20
21
Program
22
23
11
ISSUE 1.1
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
40
41
42
Meet-Me Answer
to Specified
Internal Paging
Group
Meet-Me Answer
to External
Paging
Meet-Me Answer
in Same Paging
Group
Combined
Paging
Direct Call
Pickup - Own
Group
Call Pickup for
Specified Group
Call Pickup
Call Pickup for
Another Group
Direct Extension
Call Pickup
Specified Trunk
Answer
Park Hold
Answer for Park
Hold
Group Hold
Answer for
Group Hold
Station Park
Hold
Door Box
Access
Common
Canceling
Service Code
General
Purpose
Indication
Station Speed
Dialing
Voice Over
48
Flash on Trunk
lines
Answer No-Ring
Line (Universal
Answer)
Callback Test
for SLT
Enabled On
Hook When
Holding (SLT)
Answer On
Hook When
Holding (SLT)
Call Waiting
Answer/Split
Answer
Account Code
51
VM Access
53
Live Recording
at SLT
43
44
45
46
47
2-70
31-02-01
15-07-56
15-07-57
11-16-08
14-05
14-06
Program 11 : System Numbering
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Description
Default
54
VRS Routing for
ANI/DNIS
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
782
56
E911 Alarm Shut
Off
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Use when setting up ANI/DNIS
Routing to the VRS Automated
Attendant. Using the Transfer
feature, this also allows a call to be
transferred to the VRS.
Terminal: MLT
Enter the Service Code that an
extension user can dial to shut off
the E911 Alarm Ring.
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Assign the Service Code a user
dials to Transfer a call to a
Conference call.
Terminal: SLT
624
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Service Code setting for cancel
Warning message sending and
emergency call.
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Service Code (SC) setting for
on/off watch mode.
SC+1;Watch mode start
SC+0; Watch mode end.
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Service Code (SC) setting for on/off
security sensor.
SC+1; Start sensor detection
SC+0; Ignore sensor detection
716
57
Tandem
Trunking
Transfer Into
Conference
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
Trunk Drop
Operation for
SLT
Security Sensor
Reset
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
63
Watch Mode
Start
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
64
Security Sensor
Mode Start
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
58
59
62
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8
digit
786
Related
Program
21-01-13
21-01-14
Program
#8
11
660
717
719
MLT = Multiline Terminal
SLT = Single Line Telephone
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-71
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel)
Level
IN
Program
11
Description
Use Program 11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel) to customize the Service Codes which are used
with the Hotel/Motel feature. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10 ~ 11-12,
11-15 and 11-16. The Service Codes can be used only at telephones registered as hotel terminals in
Program 42-02.
The following chart shows:

The number of each code (01 ~ 19).

The function of the Service Code.

The type of telephones that can use the Service Code.

The default entry.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
02
03
04
05
06
Set DND for Own Extension
Cancel DND for Own Extension
Set DND for Other Extension
Cancel DND for Other Extension
Set Wake Up Call for Own Extension
Cancel Wake Up Call for Own
Extension
Set Wake Up Call for Other Extension
Cancel Wake Up Call for Other
Extension
Set Room to Room Call Restriction
Cancel Room to Room Call
Restriction (Hotel)
Change Toll Restriction Class for
Other Extension
Check-In
Check-Out
Room Status Change for Own
Extension
Room Status Change for Other
Extension
Room Status Output
Hotel Room Monitor
Hotel PMS Toll Restriction Set
Hotel Room Data Set
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Input Data
Description
Default
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8 digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8 digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8 digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8 digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8 digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8 digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
627
628
629
630
631
632
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8 digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8 digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
633
634
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8 digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8 digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
635
636
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8 digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
637
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8 digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8 digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8 digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
638
639
640
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8 digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT
641
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8 digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8 digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8 digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8 digit
Terminal: MLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
Terminal: MLT
Terminal: MLT, SLT
642
675
666
No Setting
MLT = Multiline Terminal
SLT = Single Line Telephone
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

2-72
Hotel/Motel
Program 11 : System Numbering
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special
Access)
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special Access) to customize the
special access Service Codes which are used by the administrator in the Hotel/Motel feature. You can
customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10 ~ 11-14 and 11-16.
The following chart shows:

The number of each code (01 ~ 14).

The function of the Service Code.

What type of telephones can use the Service Code.

The default entry.

Programs that may be affected when changing the code.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
05
Remote Maintenance
System Programming Mode,
Log-On
Transfer to Incoming Ring
Group
Extension Data Swap
Remote Access from DISA
Modem Access
09
12
13
14
Input Data
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8 digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8 digit
Description
Default
Terminal: MLT
730
# * #*
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8 digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8 digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8 digit
0~9, *# Maxmum of 8 digit
Related
Program
11-01
No Setting
Terminal: MLT
No Setting
No Setting
740
92-04
22-02
MLT = Multiline Terminal
SLT = Single Line Telephone
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-73
11
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup
Level
IN
Program
11
Description
Use Program 11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup to customize the one-digit Service Codes
used when a busy or ring back signal is heard. You can customize additional Service Codes in
Programs 11-10 ~ 11-15.
The following chart shows:

The number of each code (01 ~ 11).

The function of the Service Code.

The default entry. For example, dialing 1 (Item 03) when calling an extension switches the call
from either a voice or signal call (depending on how it is currently defined).

Programs that may be affected by changing these codes.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
Item
Step Call
Barge-In
Switching of Voice/Signal Call
Intercom Off-Hook Signaling
Camp-On
DND/Call Forward Override Bypass
Message Waiting
Voice Over
Access to Voice Mail
(Department) STG All Ring Mode
Station Park Hold
Default
2
No Setting
1
*
#
No Setting
No Setting (V2.1 Changed)
6
8
No Setting
No Setting
Related
Program
Note
16-01-05
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-74
Program 11 : System Numbering
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-19 : Remote Conference Pilot Number Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 11-19 : Remote Conference Pilot Number Setup to assign the pilot number to be used
for the Remote Conference. This is the number that outside parties will call in order to connect to a
conference.
Input Data
Conference Group Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Remote Conference Group Pilot Number
1~4
Input Data
Dial (Up to 8 digits)
Default
Note
Related
Program
20-13-46
20-34
Default
No Remote Conference Pilot Numbers assigned to any Conference Group (1 ~ 4).
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Conference, Remote
Programming Manual
2-75
11
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-20 : Dial Extension Analyze Table
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 11-20 : Dial Extension Analyze Table to define the dial type based on three or more
digits. This program is relevant only if digits in 11-01-01 are set to 9 (Dial Extension Analyze).
11
Input Data
Dial Extension Analyze Table
Item
No.
Item
01
02
Dial Extension Analyze Table
Dial Extension Analyze Table
001 ~ 128
Input Data
Dial (Up to eight digits : 0, 1 ~ 9, #, *, @)
Type of Dials :
0 = Not used
1 = Service Code
2 = Extension Number
5 = Operator Access
6 = F-Route Access
Default
Related
Program
No Setting
0
11-01
11-01
Conditions

When the system uses the Dial Extension Analyze Table to determine the dial type, the lower
table has priority. For example, if Table 1 has 211 defined and Table 2 has 2113 defined, Table 1
is used to determine the dial type.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-76
Program 11 : System Numbering
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-01 : Night Mode Function Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 12-01 : Night Mode Function Setup to set up the Night Mode options. Refer to the
following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Manual Night Mode
Switching
Automatic Night
Mode Switching
02
Input Data
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Description
Default
Related
Program
Allow/Prevent a activating Night Service
by dialing a service code.
According to a preset schedule, enable or
disable Automatic Night Service for the
system.
1
11-10-01
0
12-02
12-03
Even if the operation mode is changed manually, the operation mode changes according to the schedule set
up.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Night Service
Programming Manual
2-77
12
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-02 : Automatic Night Service Patterns
Level
SA
Program
12
Description
Use Program 12-02 : Automatic Night Service Patterns to define the daily pattern of the Automatic
Mode Switching. Each Mode Group has 10 patterns. These patterns are used in Programs 12-03 and
12-04. The daily pattern consists of 20 timer Settings.
Input Data
Night Mode Service Group Number
01 ~ 04
Time Pattern Number
01 ~ 10
Set Time Number
01 ~ 20
Item No.
01
02
03
Item
Input Data
Start Time
End Time
Operation Mode
Default
0000 ~ 2359
0000 ~ 2359
1~8
Refer below
Example :
Time Pattern 1
To make the above schedule, it is necessary to set the data as follows:
Time setting 01 :
Time setting 02 :
Time setting 03 :
Time setting 04 :
Time setting 05 :
Time setting 06 :
Time setting 07 :
00 : 00 to 09 : 00
09 : 00 to 12 : 00
12 : 00 to 13 : 00
13 : 00 to 17 : 00
17 : 00 to 18 : 00
18 : 00 to 22 : 00
22 : 00 to 00 : 00
Mode 3 (midnight)
Mode 1 (day)
Mode 4 (rest)
Mode 1 (day)
Mode 4 (rest)
Mode 2 (night)
Mode 3 (midnight)
Time Pattern 2
00 : 00
Mode 2
(night)
00 : 00
Time setting 01 :
00 : 00 to 00 : 00
Mode 2 (night)
Default
Time Pattern 1
Set Time Number
Start Time
End Time
Mode
01
02
03
04
:
20
0000
0800
1700
0000
:
0000
0800
1700
0000
0000
:
0000
2
1
2
1
:
1
2-78
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Time Pattern 2
Set Time Number
Start Time
End Time
Mode
01
02
:
20
0000
0000
:
0000
0000
0000
:
0000
2
1
:
1
Set Time Number
Start Time
End Time
Mode
01
:
20
0000
:
0000
0000
:
0000
1
:
1
Time Pattern 3 ~ 10
Program
12
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Night Service
Programming Manual
2-79
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-03 : Weekly Night Service Switching
Level
SA
Program
Description
Use Program 12-03 : Weekly Night Service Switching to define a weekly schedule of night-switch
settings. 21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions
12
Input Data
Night Mode Service Group Number
Item No.
01
01 ~ 04
Day of the Week
Time Schedule Pattern
Number
01 = Sunday
02 = Monday
03 = Tuesday
04 = Wednesday
05 = Thursday
06 = Friday
07 = Saturday
0 ~ 10
Day of the Week
Time Schedule Pattern Number
Default
01 = Sunday
02 = Monday
03 = Tuesday
04 = Wednesday
05 = Thursday
06 = Friday
07 = Saturday
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

2-80
Night Service
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-04 : Holiday Night Service Switching
Level
SA
Program
Description
Use Program 12-04 : Holiday Night Service Switching to define a yearly schedule of holiday
night-switch settings. This schedule is used for the setting of special days when the company is
expected to be closed, such as a national holiday.
12
Input Data
Night Mode Service Group Number
01 ~ 04
Item No.
Days and Months
Time Pattern Number
01
0101 ~ 1231
(e.g. 0101 = Jan. 1, 1231 = Dec. 31)
0 ~ 10
(0 = No setting)
Default
No setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Night Service
Programming Manual
2-81
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-05 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 12-05 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions to a assign Day/Night Mode
Group for each extension.
12
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Up to eight digits
Item
Night Mode Service Group Number
Input Data
01 ~ 04
Default
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

2-82
Night Service
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-06 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 12-06 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks to assign a Day/Night Mode Group
for each trunk port.
12
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
01
001 ~ 096
Item
Night Mode Service Group Number
Input Data
01 ~ 04
Default
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Night Service
Programming Manual
2-83
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-07 : Text Data for Night Mode
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 12-07 : Text Data for Night Mode to make an original text message which is displayed
on an LCD of Multiline telephone in each Mode.
12
Input Data
Night Mode Service Group Number
01 ~ 04
Day/Night Mode
1~8
Item No.
Text Message
01
Maximum 12 Characters (alphabetic or numeric)
Default








Mode 1 = No setting
Mode 2 = <Night>
Mode 3 = <Mid-night>
Mode 4 = <Rest>
Mode 5 = <Day2>
Mode 6 = <Night2>
Mode 7 = <Midnight2>
Mode 8 = <Rest2>
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

2-84
Night Service
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-08 : Night Mode Service Range
Level
SA
Program
Description
Use Program 12-08 : Night Mode Service Range to define the changing range of toggle key for each
Day/Night Mode.
12
Input Data
Night Mode Service Group Number
01 ~ 04
Item No.
Range
01
2 ~ 8 (default = 2)
Example :
When Program 12-08 is set to 3 and the Mode Key is pressed, the following modes are switched :

Press once = Night

Press twice = Mid-night

Press third = Day

Default = 2
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Night Service
Programming Manual
2-85
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
13-01 : Speed Dialing Option Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 13-01 : Speed Dialing Option Setup to define the Speed Dialing functions.
13
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Description
Default
Set where the Speed Dial bins will
use Trunk Routing (0) or dial the bin
as though it is an Intercom number
(1).
Define use additional 20 Private
speed dial bin beside 1000
Common speed dial bin or not.
Assign the number of Speed Dial
bins that are used for System Speed
Dials.
0
13-05
1
13–06
900
13-04
01
Speed Dialing
Auto Outgoing
Call Mode
02
Private Speed
Dial
0 = Trunk Outgoing
Mode
1 = Intercom Outgoing
Mode
0 = Do not use
1 = Use
03
Number of
Common Speed
Dialing Bins
0 ~ 1000
0 = No Common
Speed Dialing
Related
Program
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

2-86
Abbreviated Dialing/Speed Dial
Program 13 : Abbreviated, Dialing
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
13-02 : Group Speed Dialing Bins
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 13-02 : Group Speed Dialing Bins to define the range of bin numbers to be used by
each Speed Dialing group.
(Refer to 13-03 : Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions.)
Input Data
Speed Dialing Group
Number
Start Address of Speed Dialing
Bin
End Address of Speed
Dialing Bin
01 ~ 32
Set the range of group speed dial
bins
0 ~ 990
0, 9 ~ 999
Item No.
01
Default

No setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Abbreviated Dialing/Speed Dial
Programming Manual
2-87
13
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
13-03 : Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 13-03 : Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions to assign Speed Dialing
Group for each extension. There are 32 available Speed Dialing groups.
13
Input Data
Extension Number
Up to 8 digits
Item No.
Group Number
Default Value
01
01 ~ 32
Assign group number for extension
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

2-88
Abbreviated Dialing/Speed Dial
Program 13 : Abbreviated, Dialing
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
13-04 : Speed Dialing Number and Name
Level
SB
Program
Description
Use Program 13-04 : Speed Dialing Number and Name to store Speed Dialing data in the Speed
Dialing areas. This program is also used to define the names assigned to the Speed Dialing numbers.
13
Input Data
Speed Dialing Bin Number
Item
No.
Item
01
Speed Dialing
Data
02
Name
03
Transfer Mode
04
Transfer
Destination
Number
05
Incoming Ring
Pattern
06
CR/PR feature
07
VRS Message
Number
000 ~ 999
Input Data
1 ~ 9, 0, *, #, Pause
(Press line key 1),
Recall/Flash (Press
line key 2),
@ = Code to wait for
answer supervision in
ISDN (Press line key
3)
(Maximum 36 digits)
Maximum 12
Characters (Use dial
pad to enter name)
0 = Not Used
1 = Internal Dial
2 = Incoming Ring
Group (IRG)
3 = Remote Monitor
If Transfer mode is
(Refer to 13-04-03) :
1 = Internal Dial Mode
1 ~ 9, 0, *, #, P, R, @
(Maximum 36
Characters)
2 = Incoming Ring
Group
0 ~ 25 (IRG Number)
P = Pause
R = Recall
@ = Additional Digits
when using ISDN
functionality
3 = Remote Monitor
Dial (Up to 8 digits)
Incoming Ring Pattern
0 = Normal Pattern
1 ~ 4 = Tone Pattern (1
~ 4)
5 ~ 9 = Scale Pattern
(1 ~ 5)
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 ~ 100
Description
Default
Assign dial number for 000-999 bins
No Setting
Related
Program
No Setting
0
Each time when this setting is
changed Program 13-04-04 will be
reset. (V1.5 Added)
No Setting
13-04-03
0
13-04-03
0
14-05
This setting can be changed only
when Program 13-04-03 is set other
than 0. Also if the Program 13-04-03 is
set to 3 only Extension number can be
changed. (V1.5 Added)
0
If the VRS can not be played it
will use a Program 13-04-05 Ringing
Pattern. (V1.5 Added)
08
Memo1 (V1.5
Deleted)
Maximum 28 digit
No Setting
15-02-58
Can only be changed in WebPro
or PCPro.
Programming Manual
2-89
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Item
No.
09
Item
Memo2 (V1.5
Deleted)
Input Data
Description
Maximum 28 digit
Default
Related
Program
No Setting
15-02-58
No Setting
15-02-58
Can only be changed in WebPro
or PCPro.
10
Memo3 (V1.5
Deleted)
Maximum 28 digit
Can only be changed in WebPro
or PCPro.
Program
11
Mailbox Number
0 ~ 544
0
40-02
This setting only works when
Program 13-04-01 Speed Dial and
Incoming Trunk Call match. (V1.5
Added)
13
12
Type
0 = None
1 = Work
2 = Mobile
3 = Voice Mail
4 = Home
5 = Other
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

2-90
Abbreviated Dialing/Speed Dial
Program 13 : Abbreviated, Dialing
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
13-05 : Speed Dial Trunk Group
Level
SB
Program
Description
Use Program 13-05 : Speed Dialing Trunk Group to define the trunk group to be seized for each
Speed Dialing number.
If this program has an entry of 0 (no setting), then seizing a line follows the trunk access group routing
of the caller’s extension (refer to Program 14-06). This setting is available only in External Speed
Dialing Mode (Program 13-01-01).
Input Data
Speed Dialing Bin Number
Item
No.
01
000 ~ 999
Item
Trunk Group Number
Input Data
0 ~ 25
Default
No setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Abbreviated Dialing/Speed Dial
Programming Manual
2-91
13
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
13-06 : Speed Dial Number and Name
Level
SB
Program
Description
Use Program 13-06 : Speed Dial Number and Name to set up the dial number and name of each
Speed Dial Number.
13
Input Data
Extension Number
Up to 8 digits
Speed Dial Number
01 ~ 20
Item No.
01
Item
Speed Dialing Data
Name
02
Type
Input Data
Default
1 ~ 9, 0, *, #, Pause (Press line key 1),
Recall/Flash (Press line key 2),
@ = Code to wait for answer supervision in ISDN
(Press line key 3)
(Maximum 36 digits)
Maximum 12 Characters
(Use dial pad to enter name)
0 = None
1 = Work
2 = Mobile
3 = Voice Mail
4 = Home
5 = Other
No setting
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

2-92
Abbreviated Dialing/Speed Dial
Program 13 : Abbreviated, Dialing
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
13-11 : Abbreviated Dial Group Name
Level
SB
Program
Description
Use Program 13-11 : Abbreviated Dial Group Name to set the name of Abbreviated Dial Group
Name.
13
Input Data
Group Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Group Name
01 ~ 32
Input Data
Up to 12 characters
Default
1 = ABB : GROUP01
:
32 = ABB : GROUP32
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-93
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup to set the basic options for each trunk port. Refer to the
chart below for a description of each option, its range and default setting.
14
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
Item
001 ~ 096
Input Data
Description
Default
Set the names for trunks. The
trunk name displays on a multiline
terminal for incoming and
outgoing calls.
Use this option to select the
CODEC gain for the trunk. The
option sets the gain (signal
amplification) for the trunk you are
programming.
Use this option to select the
CODEC gain for the trunk. The
option sets the gain (signal
amplification) for the trunk you are
programming.
Use this option to select the
CODEC gain type used by the
trunk when it is part of an
Unsupervised Conference.
Use this option to select the
CODEC gain type used by the
trunk when it is part of an
Unsupervised Conference.
Use this option to have the
system include/exclude the trunk
you are programming from the
SMDR printout. Refer to
Programs 35-01 and 35-02 for
SMDR printout options.
Use this option to allow/prevent
outgoing calls on the trunk you
are programming.
Use this option to enable/disabled
Toll Restriction for the trunk. If
enabled, the trunk follows Toll
Restriction programming
(example: Programs 21-05,
21-06). If disabled, the trunk is a
toll free line.
Refer below
01
Trunk Name
Up to 12 characters
02
Transmit Level
1 ~ 63
(- 15.5 dB ~ + 15.5
dB in 0.5 dB
intervals)
03
Receive Level
1 ~ 63
(- 15.5 dB ~ + 15.5
dB in 0.5 dB
intervals)
04
Transmit Gain Level for
Conference and
Transfer Calls
05
Receive Gain Level for
Conference and
Transfer Calls
06
SMDR Printout
1 ~ 63
(- 15.5 dB ~ + 15.5
dB in 0.5 dB
intervals)
1 ~ 63
(- 15.5 dB ~ + 15.5
dB in 0.5 dB
intervals)
0 = No Print Out
1 = Prints Out
07
Outgoing Calls
0 = Deny (No)
1 = Allow (Yes)
08
Toll Restriction
0 = Restriction
Disabled (No)
1 = Restriction
Enabled (Yes)
09
Private Line
10
DTMF Tones for
Outgoing Calls
0 = Disable Private
Line (Normal)
1 = Enable Private
Line (Private Line)
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
11
Account Code Required
13
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
2-94
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
Related
Program
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
1
1
1
21-04
21-05
21-06
0
Use this option to enable (1) or
disable (0) DTMF tones for
outgoing trunk calls.
0
1
Use this option to enable (1) or
disable (0) loop supervision for
the trunk. This option is required
for Call Forwarding Off-Premise
and Tandem Trunking only.
1
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
ISSUE 1.1
Item
No.
SL1100
Item
Input Data
14
Long Conversation
Cutoff
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
15
Long Conversation
Alarm Before Cutoff
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
16
Forced Release of Held
Call
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
17
Trunk to Trunk Warning
Tone for Long
Conversation Alarm
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
18
Warning Beep Tone
Signaling
Privacy Mode Toggle
Option
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
20
Block Outgoing Caller
ID
0 = Prevent (No)
1 = Allow (Yes)
21
Caller ID Block Code
Dial (up to eight
digits)
22
Caller ID to Voice Mail
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
24
Trunk-to-Trunk
Outgoing Caller ID
through Mode
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
25
Continued/Discontinued
Trunk-to-Trunk
Conversation
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
26
Automatic
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Mode
27
Caller ID Refuse Setup
28
Effectively of
"Conversation
Recording Destination
for Extension"
Flexible Ringing by
Caller ID
Anti-trombone Function
0 = Normal Transfer
(Normal)
1 = Step Transfer
(Step)
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
0 = No Effect (No)
1 = Available (Yes)
19
30
32
Programming Manual
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
0 = No Effect (No)
1 = Available (Yes)
Description
Default
Related
Program
Use this option to enable or
disable the Long Conversation
Cutoff feature for each trunk.
Use this option to enable or
disable the Long Conversation
Alarm for each trunk.
Use this option to enable/disable
forced release for calls on Hold. If
enabled, the system disconnects
a call if it is on Hold longer than a
programmed interval (Program
24-01-05). If disabled, forced
disconnection does not occur.
Program 24-01-01 also affects
this option.
Use this option to enable or
disable the Warning Tone for Long
Conversation feature for DISA
callers.
0
20-21-03
20-21-04
0
20-21-01
20-21-02
0
24-01-01
24-01-05
Program
14
0
0
Use this option to enable or
disable a trunk ability to be
switched from private to
non-private mode by pressing the
line key or Privacy Release
function key.
Allow (1) or prevent (0) the
system from automatically
blocking outgoing Caller ID
information when a user places a
call. If allowed (i.e. block,
enabled), the system
automatically inserts the Caller ID
block code (defined in 14-01-21)
before the user dialed digits.
Enter the code, up to 8 digits, that
should be used as the Caller ID
Block Code. This code is
automatically inserted before
dialed digits if Program 14-01-20
is set to 1.
Enable or disable the system
ability to send the Caller ID digits
(Remote Log-On Protocol) to
voice mail.
Enable (1) or Disable (0) the
ability to send the original Caller
ID through when the call is
Forward Off-Premise.
Enable (1) or Disable (0) the
ability to dial a service code to
continue or disconnect the
Trunk-to-Trunk conversation after
the alert tone is heard.
0
0
14-01-21
20-08-15
1831
14-01-20
20-08-15
1
(V2.1
Changed)
0
0
0
20-28-01
20-28-02
20-28-03
24-02-07
24-02-10
25-07-07
25-07-08
24-02-11
24-02-12
0
1
15-12
1
13-04
0
2-95
SL1100
Item
No.
ISSUE 1.1
Item
Input Data
33
APSU(VM00) Trunk
Receive Gain
40
ISDN Queue
announcement connect
mode (V2.0 Added)
1 ~ 63
(- 15.5 dB ~ + 15.5
dB in 0.5 dB
intervals)
0 = send CONNECT
1 = send
PROGRESS #8
41
Incoming Caller Name
Usage (V2.0 Added)
0 = Use
1 = Ignore
Program
14
Description
Default
Additional PAD when a trunk call
connects to APSU Voice Mail.
32 (0 dB)
When a VRS queue message is
to be played back (configured in
PRG 22-14, PRG 22-15, PRG
41-11, or PRG 41-19, the system
shall, instead of a CONNECT
message, send a PROGRESS
message including a ProgressIE
#8 “in-band tones and
announcements available”.
This program will determines that
the caller name information from
the network is valid or not. If the
program is set to 1, the caller
name information the network
provides is ignored.
0
Related
Program
22-14
22-15
41-11
41-19
0
Default
Item01 : Trunk Name
Trunk Port Number
Name
1
2
:
96
Line 001
Line 002
:
Line 096
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-96
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-02 : Analog Trunk Data Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 14-02 : Analog Trunk Data Setup to set the basic options for each analog trunk port.
Refer to the table below for a description of each option, its range and default setting.
14
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
Item
001 ~ 096
Input Data
01
Signaling Type
(DP/DTMF)
02
Ring Detect
Type
03
Flash Type
0 = Open Loop Flash
1 = Ground
04
Hooking Type
0 = Timed Flash
(Hooking)
1 = Disconnect (Cut)
05
Dial Tone
Detection for
Manually
Accessed
Trunks
Pause at 1st
Digit after Line
Seize in Manual
Dial Mode
DP to DTMF
Conversion
Options
0 = Dial Tone
Detection Not Used
1 = Dial Tone
Detection Used
Answering
Condition
0 = Polarity Reversing
(Polarity)
1 = Polarity Reversing
or Timer (Int Digit)
06
07
08
Programming Manual
0 = Dial Pulse (10
PPS) (Not Used)
2 = DTMF
0 = Normal/delayed
1 = Immediate Ringing
Description
This option sets the signaling type
for the trunk.
2
This option sets Extended Ring
Detect or Immediate Ring Detect for
the trunk. For T1 loop/ground start
trunks, this option must be set to 1
for the trunks to ring and light
correctly.
This option selects the flash type
(open loop flash or ground). Always
set this option for open loop flash.
This option lets you use Flash for
Timed Flash (Program 81-01-14) or
Disconnect (Program 81-01-15). (A
user implements Flash by pressing
the FLASH key while on a trunk
call.)
Use this option enable/disable dial
tone detection for directly accessed
trunks. If disabled, the system
outdials on the trunks without
monitoring for dial tone.
1
0 = No Pause (No)
1 = Pause (Yes)
0 = Automatic
1 = Automatic and
Manual
2 = Manual
Default
Determine how a user can convert a
Dial Pulse (DP) call to a DTMF call.
For each trunk, set the type of DP to
DTMF conversion required. There
are three conversion options:
Automatic (0), Automatic and
Manual (1), or Manual (2).
Automatic:
DP to DTMF conversion occurs
automatically if the extension user
waits more than 10 seconds before
dialing the next digit.
Automatic and Manual:
DP to DTMF conversion occurs
automatically if the extension user
waits more than 10 seconds before
dialing the next digit. In addition, the
user can dial # to switch a DP trunk
to DTMF dialing.
Manual:
Users can dial # to switch a DP
trunk to DTMF dialing.
Related
Program
0
0
81-01-14
81-01-15
0
21-01-04
1
21-01-06
2
21-01-03
1
21-01-03
2-97
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Item
No.
09
10
Item
Busy Tone
Detection
Caller ID
11
Next Trunk in
Rotary if No Dial
Tone
12
Detect Network
Disconnect
Signal
Trunk-to-Trunk
Limitation
Caller ID Type
Input Data
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
0 = No
1 = Yes
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
Program
14
13
16
18
19
20
Busy Tone
Detection on
Talking
Busy Tone
Detection
Frequency
Busy Tone
Detection
Interval
Description
Default
Related
Program
1
Enable or disable a trunk ability to
receive Caller ID information.
Use this option to enable/disable the
system ability to skip over a trunk if
dial tone is not detected. This option
pertains to calls placed using Speed
Dial, ARS, Last Number Redial or
Save Number dialed. It does not
pertain to line key or Direct Trunk
Access calls.
1 (V1.5
Changed)
0
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
0
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
0 = FSK
1 = DTMF
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0
0
0
1 ~ 255
1
14-02-18
0 ~ 64800 (x 100 ms)
0
14-02-18
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-98
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-04 : Behind PBX Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 14-04 : Behind PBX Setup to indicate if the trunk is installed behind a PBX. There is
one item for each mode.
14
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
Day/Night Mode
01
1~8
001 ~ 096
Type of Connection
0 = Stand Alone (Trunk)
1 = Behind PBX (PBX)
3 = CTX assume 9
Default
0
Related
Program
22-02
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Central Office Calls, Placing
Programming Manual
2-99
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-05 : Trunk Group
Level
IN
Program
14
Description
Use Program 14-05 : Trunk Group to assign trunks to Trunk Groups. You can also assign the
outbound priority for trunks within the group. When users dial up the trunk group, they seize the trunks
in the order you specify in the outbound priority entry.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
001 ~ 096
Item No.
Trunk Group Number
Priority Number
01
0 ~ 25
001~ 096
Default
Trunk Port
Group
Priority
1
:
096
1
:
1
1
:
096
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Trunk Groups
2-100
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-06 : Trunk Group Routing
Level
IN
Description
Program
Use Program 14-06 : Trunk Group Routing to set up an outbound routing table for the trunk groups
you assigned in Program 14-05. When a user dial 9, the system routes their calls in the order (priority)
specified. For example, if a user dials 9 and all calls in the first group are busy, the system may route
the call to another group. Trunk Access Map programming (Programs 14-07) may limit this option. The
system contains 25 routing tables for trunk access. Each table has four priority orders for trunk access.
There are 25 available Trunk Group Numbers.
14
Example for setting:
With less than four trunk groups,
Route Number 1
: Order 1 - Trunk Group 1
: Order 2 - Trunk Group 2
For the above setting, if all the lines in trunk group 1 are busy, the system searches for an idle line in
trunk group 2.
With more than four trunk groups,
Route Number 1
: Order 1 - Trunk Group 1
: Order 2 - Trunk Group 2
: Order 3 - Trunk Group 3
: Order 4 - 1002 (Jump To Route Number 2)
Route Number 2
: Order 1 - Trunk Group 4
: Order 2 - Trunk Group 5
For the above setting, if all the lines in the trunk groups 1, 2 and 3 are busy, the system searches for an
idle line in trunk groups 4 and 5.
Input Data
Route Table Number
Item
No.
01
001 ~ 025
Item
Priority Order Number 1 ~ 4
Input Data
Default
0 = Not Set
001 ~ 025 = Trunk group No.
1001 ~ 1025 = 1000 + Route Table No.
Route 1, Order Number 1
= 1 (Trunk Group 1)
Order Numbers 2, 3, 4 = 0
(Not Specified)
All Other Routes (2 ~ 25)
and Order Numbers (1 ~ 4)
= 0 (Not Specified)
Related
Program
14-01-07
14-05
15-01-02
21-02
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-101
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-07 : Trunk Access Map Setup
Level
IN
Program
14
Description
Use Program 14-07 : Trunk Access Map Setup to set up the Trunk Access Maps. This sets an
extension access options for trunks. For example, an extension can place only outgoing calls on trunks
to which it has outgoing access. There are 96 Access Maps with all 96 trunk ports programmed in Map
1 with full access.
An extension can use one of the maps you set up in this program. Use Program 15-06 to assign Trunk
Access Maps to extensions. Each trunk can have one of eight access options for each Access Map.
Emergency calls will override Program 14-07 settings.
Input Data
Access Map Number
Item No.
Trunk Port
Number
01
001 ~ 096
001 ~ 096
Input Data
0 = No access
1 = Outgoing access only
2 = Incoming access only
3 = Access only when trunk on Hold
4 = Outgoing access and access when trunk on Hold
5 = Incoming access and access when trunk on Hold
6 = Incoming and Outgoing access
7 = Incoming access, outgoing access and access when trunk on Hold
Default
Access map No.
Trunk Port No.
Default
1
1
2
:
096
1
2
:
096
1
2
:
096
1
2
:
096
7 (T, R, H)
7 (T, R, H)
:
7 (T, R, H)
7 (T, R, H)
7 (T, R, H)
:
7 (T, R, H)
7 (T, R, H)
7 (T, R, H)
:
7 (T, R, H)
7 (T, R, H)
7 (T, R, H)
:
7 (T, R, H)
2
:
096
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference


Central Office Calls, Answering
Central Office Calls, Placing
2-102
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-08 : Music on Hold Source for Trunks
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 14-08 : Music on Hold Source for Trunks to define a Music on Hold source for a trunk
as COI port.
14
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
01
Item
MOH Type
001 ~ 096
Input Data
0 = Internal synthesized/external
MOH
1 = A customer-provided source
connected to BGM port
Description
Select Music on Hold source for
the trunk.
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Music on Hold
Programming Manual
2-103
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-09 : Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 14-09 : Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks to set the Conversation
Recording destination for each trunk.
14
If both Programs 14-09 and 15-12 define a destination, the destination in Program 15-12 is followed.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
Item
01
Recording Destination
Extension Number
Automatic Recording for
Incoming Calls
Automatic Recording for
Outgoing Call
02
04
001 ~ 096
Input Data
Maximum eight
digits
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Description
Default
Enter the extension number where the
trunk calls should be recorded.
Determine if incoming trunk calls should be
automatically recorded.
No Setting
0
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-104
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-11 : ID Setup for IP Trunk
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 14-11 : ID Setup for IP Trunk to set the ID of each IP Trunk. This program refers to
incoming and outgoing IP Trunk calls. The ID is sent on an outgoing IP Trunk call. This program is used
only for H.323.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
01
001 ~ 096
Item
IP Trunk ID
Input Data
0 ~ 65535
(0 = No setting)
Default
0
Conditions




This Data is referred to at IP trunk outgoing call, or IP trunk incoming call.
This ID is notified at IP trunk outgoing call.
It is not notified when ID is 0.
Incoming Call arrives to the trunk port of the same ID as ID notified from the partner system.
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-105
14
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-12 : SIP Register ID Setup for IP Trunk
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 14-12 : SIP Register ID Setup for IP Trunk to define the SIP Register ID for IP Trunks.
14
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
01
02
001 ~ 096
Item
Register ID
Pilot Register ID
Input Data
0 ~ 31
0 ~ 31
Default
0
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-106
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-15 : ISDN Call Forward Method
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 14-15 : ISDN Call Forward Method to assign the activation of Call Deflection/Call
Rerouting feature.
14
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
01
001 ~ 096
Item
Operation Mode
Input Data
0 = Normal operation
1 = Call Rerouting
2 = Call Deflection
Default
0
Related
Program
13-04-06
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-107
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-01 : Basic Extension Data Setup
Level
SA
Program
Description
Use Program 15-01 : Basic Extension Data Setup to define the basic settings for each extension.
15
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
Item
01
Extension Name
Up to 12 Characters
02
Outgoing Trunk
Line Preference
0 = Off
1 = On
03
SMDR Printout
04
ISDN Caller ID
0 = Do not print on
SMDR report
1 = Include on SMDR
report
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
05
Restriction for
Outgoing
Disable on
Incoming Line
Do-Not-Call
07
08
09
13
14
15
Call Attendant
Busy Message
Call Attendant
Answer
Message
Special ringtone
choice (V2.0
Added)
SMDR output of
made intercom
calls (V2.0
Added)
SMDR output of
answered
intercom calls
(V2.0 Added)
Input Data
0 = Supervise dial
detection
1 = Not supervise dial
detection
0 = Off
1 = On
0 ~ 100
(0 = No setting)
0 ~ 100
(0 = No setting)
0 = Incoming
extension ring tone
1 = Tone pattern 1
2 = Tone pattern 2
3 = Tone pattern 3
4 = Tone pattern 4
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Maximum eight digits
Description
Default
Related
Program
Define the extension/virtual
extension name.
Use this option to set the extension
outgoing Trunk Line Preference. If
enabled, the extension user
receives trunk dial tone when they
lift the handset. The user hears
trunk dial tone only if allowed by
Trunk Access Map programming
(Programs 14-07 and 15-06). Refer
to the Line Preference feature for
more details.
Use this option to include or exclude
the extension in the SMDR report.
Ext. 101 ~ 220 =
No Setting
0
If both Program 15-01-04 and
10-03-05 are enabled, the system
includes Caller ID in the Setup
message as Presentation Allowed. If
these options are disabled, it is
Presentation Restricted.
Enable or disable supervised dial
detection for an extension.
1
10-03-05
20-08-13
0
21-01-15
21-01-16
21-01-17
80-03-01
21-01-19
14-06
21-02
1
0
0
0
11-11-59
40-10-08
11-11-60
40-10-09
When an incoming call is received
from the extension defined in this
PRG this item defines the ringtone
presented.
0
15-02-03
If this program is disabled it will not
print out the call that extension
made.
0
15-01-49
If this program is disabled it will not
print out the call that extension
answered.
0
15-01-49
Conditions
None
2-108
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
15
Programming Manual
2-109
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-02 : Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 15-02 : Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup to set up various Multiline telephone
options.
15
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
Display
Language
Selection
02
Trunk Ring Tone
03
Extension Ring
Tone
04
Redial (Speed
Dial) Control
05
Transfer Key
Operation Mode
0 = Transfer
1 = Call back
2 = Hook
06
Hold Key
Operating Mode
0 = Normal (Common)
1 = Exclusive Hold
2 = Park Hold
07
Automatic Hold
for CO Lines
0 = Hold
1 = Disconnect (Cut)
08
Automatic
Handsfree
0 = Preselect
1 = One-Touch
(Automatic Handsfree)
2-110
1 = English
2 = German
3 = French
4 = Italian
5 = Spanish
6 = Dutch
7 = Portuguese
8 = Norwegian
9 = Danish
10 = Swedish
11 = Turkish
12 = Latin American
Spanish
13 = Romanian
14 = Polish
1 = High
2 = Medium
3 = Low
4 = Ring Tone 1
5 = Ring Tone 2
6 = Ring Tone 3
7 = Ring Tone 4
8 = Ring Tone 5
1 = High
2 = Medium
3 = Low
4 = Ring Tone 1
5 = Ring Tone 2
6 = Ring Tone 3
7 = Ring Tone 4
8 = Ring Tone 5
0 = Common
Abbreviated Dial
1 = Group Speed
Dialing
Maximum eight digits
Description
Default
(To select options 6 ~ 11, press
either 6 or Help, then press line
keys 1 ~ 6. To select options 12 ~
16, press either 12 or Help, then
press line keys 1 ~ 5.)
1
Use this option to set the tone
(pitch) of the incoming trunk ring for
the extension port you are
programming.
2
Use this option to set the tone
(pitch) of the incoming extension
call ring for the extension port you
are programming. Also refer to
Program 15-08.
8
Use this option to control the
function of the extension Redial key
when used with Speed Dialing. The
Redial key can access either the
Common/Individual or Group Speed
Dialing numbers.
Use this option to set the operating
mode of the extension Transfer key.
The keys can be for Call Transfer,
Serial Calling or Flash. When
selecting the Flash option (selection
2), refer also to Program 81-01-14.
Use this option to set the function of
the Multiline Hold key. The Hold key
can activate normal Hold or
Exclusive Hold.
When talking on a CO call and
another CO line key is pressed, the
original trunk is placed on Hold (0)
or Disconnected (1).
Use this option to set whether
pressing a key access a One-Touch
Key or if it preselects the key.
0
Related
Program
22-03
0
0
1
1
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
ISSUE 1.1
Item
No.
10
11
SL1100
Item
Ringing Line
Preference for
Trunk Calls
Callback
Automatic
Answer
12
Off-Hook
Ringing
13
Redial List Mode
15
Storage of
Caller-ID for
answered call
Handsfree
Operation
16
Input Data
0 = Idle (Off)
1 = Ringing (On)
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Muted Off-Hook
Ringing
1 = No Off-Hook
Ringing
3 = Beep in Speaker
(SP)
4 = Beep in Handset
(HS)
5 = Speaker and
Handset Beep
0 = ICM/Trunk
(Extension/Trunk
Mode)
1 = Trunk Mode
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
18
Power-Saving
Mode
21
Virtual
Extension
Access Mode
(when idle
Virtual
Extension key
pressed)
22
Multiple
Incoming From
Intercom and
Trunk
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
23
Speed Dial
Preview Mode
0 = Preview
1 = Outgoing
Immediately
Programming Manual
0 = Normal mode
1 = Power-Saving
Mode (Eco-Mode)
0 = DSS
1 = Outgoing (OTG)
2 = Ignore
Description
Default
Use this option to select between
Idle and Ringing Line Preference for
trunk calls.
Use this option to enable or disable
automatic answer of calls recalling
to a station. For example, if a
Transfer Recall or Hold Recall is
ringing back to a station, the
following happens:
If Program 15-02-11 is enabled, the
station will automatically answer the
recall when it goes off-hook. If
Program 15-02-11 is disabled, a
station does not automatically
answer the recall when it goes
off-hook. The user must first press
the line appearance of the recalling
call or press the answer key.
Use this option to set the telephone
Off-hook signaling. Off-hook
signaling occurs when a telephone
user receives a second call while
busy on a handset call. To
enable/disable Off-hook signaling
for an extension Class of Service,
use Program 20-13-06.
1
Select whether the Redial List
feature should store internal and
external numbers (0), or only
external numbers (1).
0
Related
Program
1
Program
15
5
1
Enable or disable an extension
ability to use the speakerphone on
outside calls. When disabled, users
can hear the conversation, but
cannot respond handsfree.
1
1
Determine whether a Virtual
Extension (VE) should function as a
DSS key or a Virtual Extension.
When DSS (0) is selected, the key
functions as a DSS key to the
extension and for incoming calls to
that extension. When Outgoing (1)
is selected, the key functions as a
virtual extension and can be used
for incoming and outgoing calls.
When Ignore (2) is selected, the key
functions can receive incoming calls
only.
If enabled, this affects how a Hotline
key lights, based on the setting in
Program 22-01-01. If 22-01-01 is set
to 1 for trunk priority, the Hotline key
lights solid when a trunk call rings in.
If 22-01-01 is set to 0 for intercom
priority, the Hotline key does not
light for incoming trunk calls, but
lights solid for intercom calls. If
15-02-22 is disabled, Hotline keys
light solid for any incoming calls
regardless of the setting in Program
22-01-01.
This option defines how a speed dial
key functions when pressed. If set to
Preview (0), the speed dial number
can be previewed before dialing. If
set to Outgoing Immediate (1), the
number is dialed immediately.
2
1
22-01-01
0
2-111
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Item
No.
Item
27
Handset Volume
Input Data
0 = Back to Default
(Back)
1 = Stay at previous
level (Stay)
Program
15
28
Message
Waiting Lamp
Color
0 = Green
1 = Red
29
PB Back Tone
Level
1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 dB ~ +
15.5 dB)
30
Toll Restriction
Class
34
Call Register
Mode
35
Message
Waiting Lamp
Cycle for Calling
Extension
36
Message
Waiting Lamp
Cycle for Called
Extension
37
Voice Mail
Message Wait
Lamp Color
Voice Mail
Message Wait
Lamp Cycle
0 = Vir. Ext. (Virtual
Extension Class)
1 = Real Ext. (Real
Extension Class)
0 = Trunk Mode
1 = Extension/Trunk
Mode
1 = Cycle 1
2 = Cycle 2
3 = Cycle 3
4 = Cycle 4
5 = Cycle 5
6 = Cycle 6
7 = Cycle 7
1 = Cycle 1
2 = Cycle 2
3 = Cycle 3
4 = Cycle 4
5 = Cycle 5
6 = Cycle 6
7 = Cycle 7
0 = Green
1 = Red
38
40
41
Additional Dial
for Caller ID Call
Return
Incoming Ring
Setup
42
Incoming
Off-Hook Ring
Setup
43
Headset Ring
Duration
46
Backlight LCD
duration
2-112
1 = Cycle 1
2 = Cycle 2
3 = Cycle 3
4 = Cycle 4
5 = Cycle 5
6 = Cycle 6
7 = Cycle 7
Up to four digits (0, 1 ~
9, #, *)
Description
Determine how an extension
handset volume is set after it is
adjusted during a call.
When 1 is assigned in this
program and a user sets the volume to
maximum, the volume is reset to a level
to meet FCC standards when the user
hangs up.
Determine whether an extension
Message Waiting Lamp lights Green
(0) or Red (1) when a message is
received.
This program allows adjustment of
the PB Back Tone Level when you
are calling an ISDN Line.
Select the Toll Restriction Class to
use when placing a call from a
virtual extension.
Default
1
0
32 (0 dB)
1
The Caller ID Scroll stores Trunk
calls only (0), or both Internal and
Trunk calls (1).
Select the cycle method that the
Large LED flashes when the
extension has set Message Waiting.
1
Select the cycle method that the
Large LED flashes when the
extension has Message Waiting set
to the extension.
2
Select the color of the Large LED
when a voice mail message is
waiting at the extension.
Select the cycle method that the
Large LED flashes when the
extension has a VM Message
Waiting set to the extension.
1
Enter the digits to be dialed in front
of the Caller ID when using the
Caller ID Return function.
15-02-21
3
2
No setting
0=Speaker Normal
Ring
1=Headset Ring
0
0=Speaker Off-Hook
Ring
1=Headset Off-Hook
Ring
0=No Switch to
Speaker Ring
1=10 sec
2=20 sec
3=30 sec
4=40 sec
5=50 sec
6=1 minute
0 = Continuous on
1 = 5 seconds
2 = 10 seconds
3 = 15 seconds
4 = 30 seconds
5 = 60 seconds
0
0
Set how long the Backlight LCD
stays on.
Related
Program
11-11-37
11-11-62
15-02-12
15-02-42
20-13-06
11-11-37
11-11-62
15-02-12
15-02-41
11-11-62
15-02-41
15-02-42
2
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
ISSUE 1.1
Item
No.
SL1100
Item
Input Data
Description
Default
48
Short Ring
Setup
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0
50
Mute Lamp
Status Change
0
54
Menu Operation
Mode
VRS Message
Number
Caller Log on
busy
Display mode of
trunk incoming
(V1.5 Deleted)
Soft
Key/Navigation
key Mode
Backlight Max
Brightness
Backlight Min
Brightness
Auto Backlight
0 = normal
1 = Lamp Status
Change
0 = Automatic Close
1 = Manual Close
0 ~ 100
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Caller ID
1 = Memo Information
0
55
57
58
60
61
62
63
64
Auto Backlight
bound threshold
(auto setting)
Auto Backlight
bound threshold
(manual setting)
Dial Button
Backlight
Caller ID shared
groups
Mode setting for
incoming call
from extension
65
66
67
68
70
MIC Key
Operation (V2.0
Added)
Related
Program
80-09-01
80-09-02
80-09-03
0
Program
0
15-02-34
0
13-04-08
13-04-09
13-04-10
0 = Standard Mode
1 = Advanced Mode1
2 = Advanced Mode2
0~8
2
(V2.1 Changed)
0~8
1
(V2.1 Changed)
0
15-02-64
13
15-02-63
6
0 = Off
1 = On
0 ~ 13
0 ~ 13
0
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Personal
1 ~ 8 = Shared Group
0 = Voice
1 = Signal
0 = Enabled (Active)
1 = Disabled
1
0
20-49-01
1
This program can only be
change by using PC Programming.
This program determines whether
the MIC key is operational during a
call.
0
Lamp Cycle On/Off Timing Pattern (Program 15-02-35, 36, 38)
Programs 15-02-35, 36, and 38
Input
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Cycle 1
Cycle 2
Cycle 3
Cycle 4
Cycle 5
Cycle 6
Cycle 7
Cycle
500 ms - ON / 500 ms - OFF
250 ms - ON / 250 ms - OFF
125 ms - ON / 125 ms - OFF
125 ms - ON / 125 ms - OFF / 125 ms - ON / 625 ms - OFF
875 ms - ON / 125 ms - OFF
625 ms - ON / 125 ms - OFF / 125 ms - ON / 125 ms - OFF
1000 ms - ON
Program 15-02 - Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns
Incoming Signal
Frequency Pattern
Type
Frequency 1
Frequency 2
Modulation
External Incoming Signal
Frequency (Pattern 1)
High
Middle
Low
High
Middle
Low
High
Middle
Low
High
Middle
Low
1100 Hz
660 Hz
520 Hz
1100 Hz
660 Hz
520 Hz
2000 Hz
1400 Hz
1100 Hz
2000 Hz
1400 Hz
1100 Hz
1400 Hz
760 Hz
660 Hz
1400 Hz
760 Hz
660 Hz
760 Hz
660 Hz
540 Hz
760 Hz
660 Hz
540 Hz
16 Hz
16 Hz
16 Hz
8 Hz
8 Hz
8 Hz
16 Hz
16 Hz
16 Hz
8 Hz
8 Hz
8 Hz
External Incoming Signal
Frequency (Pattern 2)
External Incoming Signal
Frequency (Pattern 3)
External Incoming Signal
Frequency (Pattern 4)
Programming Manual
2-113
15
SL1100
Incoming Signal
Frequency Pattern
Internal Incoming Signal
Frequency
ISSUE 1.1
Type
Frequency 1
Frequency 2
Modulation
High
Middle
Low
1100 Hz
660 Hz
520 Hz
1400 Hz
760 Hz
660 Hz
8 Hz
8 Hz
8 Hz
Conditions
Program
None
Feature Cross Reference
15
None
2-114
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 15-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup to set up various single line
telephone options.
15
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Maximum eight digits
Description
Default
Related
Program
Use this option to tell the system the
type of dialing the connected
telephone uses.
For Analog Wireless telephones to
function correctly, this must be set to
0 (dial pulse). If this option is set for
DTMF, after an outside call is
placed, the system cannot dial any
additional digits.
This program change is
automatically performed when the
Analog Wireless telephone is
registered. When upgrading
software from prior versions, the
previous default of 1 is saved from
the prior database so this option
must be changed manually.
Enter 1 for this option to allow a
single line port to receive DTMF
tones after the initial call setup.
Enter 0 to have the port ignore
DTMF tones after the initial call
setup. For Voice Mail, always enter
1 (e.g., receive DTMF tones).
Enables/disables Flash for single
line telephones.
Do Not Change Default Entry as
DTMF issues may arise with voice
mail.
Do Not Change Default Entry as
DTMF issues may arise with voice
mail.
1
15-03-03
45-01-01
0
15-03-01
45-01-01
01
SLT Signaling
Type
0 = DP
1 = DTMF
03
Terminal Type
0 = Normal
1 = Special
04
Flashing
05
Trunk Polarity
Reverse
0 = No
1 = Yes
0 = Off
1 = On
06
Extension
Polarity Reverse
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
07
Enabled
On-Hook When
Holding (SLT)
Answer
On-Hook when
Holding (SLT)
Caller ID
Function - For
External Module
0 = No
1 = Yes
1
11-12-45
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Yes (Enable)
1
11-12-46
08
09
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
Enable (1) or disable (0) the Caller
ID FSK signal for an external Caller
ID module or a 3rd party vendor
telephone with Caller ID display.
Important:
If voice mail is used, this setting
must be disabled for the system
integration codes to be correct.
1
0
0
1
(V2.1 Changed)
With a Single Line Telephone,
this must be set to 0 for incoming callers
to have a talk path.
Programming Manual
2-115
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Item
No.
Input Data
10
Caller ID Name
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
11
Caller ID Type
12
Fixed Cadence
14
Forwarded
Caller ID Display
Mode
15
Disconnect
without dial
after hooking
hold
Special DTMF
Protocol Send
0 = FSK
1 = DTMF
0 = Normal
1 = Fixed
0 = Calling Extension
Number (Calling)
1 = External Caller ID
(Forward)
0 = Normal
1 = Disconnect
Program
15
Item
16
0 = No
1 = Yes
17
Dial Tone Select
0 = Normal
1 = New DT
18
Select Special
Terminal Type
(V2.0 Added)
0 = Fax
1 = Modem
Description
Default
Determine if an extension user
telephone should display the Caller
ID name.
Determine whether the Caller ID
type is FSK or DTMF.
1
Related
Program
15-03-09
0
1
Determine what the display shows
when a multiline terminal receives a
forwarded outside call.
0
Determine whether or not to
disconnect a held call when on-hook
without any dialing after
hooking-hold.
Determine whether or not to send
the extension number of the phone
forwarded to the extension when
Program 15-03-04 is set to Special
(1) and not in the VM group.
When the function of MW has been
set from another extension or VM,
the dial tone upon off hook is
selected.
This PRG is used for selecting
Special Terminal Type (Fax or
Modem). This setting influences
how to transmit data via SIP trunk.
This PRG is effective at the time of
when PRG15-03-03 1: Special.
0
0
45-01-16
0
0
15-03-03
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Single Line Telephones
2-116
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-05 : IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 15-05 : IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup to set up the basic settings for an IP
telephone.
15
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
Input Data
Maximum eight digits
Description
Default
Item
No.
Related
Progra
m
01
Terminal Type
02
IP Phone
Fixed Port
Assignment
0 = NGT
1 = H.323
2 = SIP
3 = MEGACO
4 = SIP-MLT
MAC address
00-00-00-00-00-00 ~
FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF
04
Nickname
Up to 48 characters
07
Using IP
Address
Call procedure
port
CODEC Type
0.0.0.0 ~
255.255.255.255
0 ~ 65535
09
15
16
18
20
Authentication
Password
IP Duplication
Allowed
Group
Bottom Option
Information
1 = Type 1
2 = Type 2
3 = Type 3
4 = Type 4
5 = Type 5
Up to 24 characters
0 = Not Used
1 = Group 1
2 = Group 2
3 = Group 3
4 = Group 4
5 = Group 5
6 = Group 6
7 = Group 7
8 = Group 8
9 = Group 9
10 = Group 10
0 = No Option
1 = ADA
2 = BHA
3 = WHA
Programming Manual
-
MAC Address of registered SIP MLT
phone is stored and/or can input the
MAC address of an SIP MLT phone
so when it comes online it is provided
with the extension in which the MAC
address matches.
Nickname section on Invite message.
Example :
Extension 100 has a Nickname set to
PAUL.
Extension 101 has command
15-05-17 set to Nickname.
The inbound call to extension 101,
from 100, shows PAUL.
Nickname must be unique in the
system.
Assign the CODEC Type of the SIP
MLT.
Assign the authentication password
for SIP single line telephones.
If there is an adapter that has one IP
address coming into it but has
multiple extensions off of it.
Assign all the extensions to a group
so that way the CPU knows that the
one IP address is assigned to multiple
extensions.
Shows the type of adapter installed.
00-00-0000-00-00
15-05-01
No Setting
15-05-17
-
15-05-01
-
15-05-01
1
84-24
84-11
15-05-01
None
15-05-01
0
15-05-01
0
10-03-10
2-117
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Item
Input Data
Description
Default
Item
No.
Related
Progra
m
26
DR700
Terminal Type
27
Personal ID
Index
28
Addition
Information
Setup
0 = Do not inform
1 = Inform
29
Terminal
WAN-side IP
Address
DTMF Play
during
Conversation
at Receive
Extension
Alarm Tone
during
Conversation
(RTP packet
loss alarm)
LAN Side IP
Address of
Terminal
Encryption
Mode On/Off
DR700
Firmware
Version
Paging
Protocol Mode
0.0.0.0 ~
255.255.255.255
0.0.0.0
0 = Do Not Play
1 = Play
0
0 = Off
1 = On
1
Program
15
30
31
33
35
36
38
39
40
41
42
43
45
CTI Override
Mode
Calling name
display info
via trunk for
standard SIP
Time
Zone(hour)
Time
Zone(minute)
Video Mode
NAT plug &
play
0 = Not Set
2=
ITL-()D-1D/ITL-24BT-1D/ITL-2
4PA-1D (without 8LKI
(LCD)-L)
5 = Softphone
6 = CTI
9 = IP4WW-24TIXH
0 ~ 120
0
Used when the SIP Multiline
telephone is using manual/auto
registration. Assign each phone a
unique personal index. Then go to
command 84-22 to assign the user
name and password.
Select whether to inform of additional
information or not.
0.0.0.0 ~
255.255.255.255
0 = Off
1 = On
00.00.00.00 ~ ff.ff.ff.ff
0 = Multicast
1 = Unicast
2 = Auto
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = Both name and number
1 = Name only
2 = Number only
3 = None
0 ~ 24
(- 12 ~ + 12 hour)
0 ~ 120
(- 60 ~ + 60 minute)
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = OFF
1 = ON
0
84-22
0
15-01-01
15-02-13
15-02-15
15-02-34
0.0.0.0.
0
Indicate a current firmware Version.
Sets the protocol mode for the Paging
function.
00.00.00.00
0
0
0
12
60
0
Effective when PRG 10-46-14 is set
to NAT mode.
Select sending RTP port number to
remote Router, use from negotiation
result (0) or received RTP packet (1).
1
10-46-14
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-118
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-06 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 15-06 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions to define the trunk access map for each
extension. An extension can place only outgoing calls on trunks to which it has outgoing access. Use
Program 14-07 to define the available access maps.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum eight digits
Day/Night Mode
1~8
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
Related
Program
01
Trunk Access Map Number
001 ~ 096
1
14-07
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference


Central Office Calls, Answering
Central Office Calls, Placing
Programming Manual
2-119
15
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-07 : Programmable Function Keys
Level
SA
Program
Description
Use Program 15-07 : Programmable Function Keys to assign functions to a multiline terminal line
keys.
15
For certain functions, you can append data to the key basic function. For example, the function 26
appended by data 1 makes a Group Call Pickup key for Pickup Group 1. You can also program
Function Keys using Service Codes.
To clear any previously programmed key, press 000 to erase any displayed code.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum eight digits
Default Settings
Line Key
Function Number
Additional Data
LK01
:
LK12
LK13
:
LK24
*01 (Trunk Line Key)
:
*01 (Trunk Line Key)
0 (No setting)
:
0 (No setting)
1
:
12
0
:
0
Item No.
Line Key
Number
Function Number
Additional Data
01
1 ~ 24
0 ~ 99, #0 ~ #99
(Normal Function Code) (Service Code 751 by default)
*00 ~ *99
(Appearance Function Code) (Service Code 752 by default)
Refer to Function Number
List[1] Normal Function
Code (00 ~ 99, #00 ~ #99)
(Service Code 751).
Default
Programmable keys 1 ~ 8 are Trunk Line keys (key 1 = Trunk Line 1, key 2 = Trunk Line 2, etc.). All
other programmable keys are undefined.
Function Number List
Table 2-2 Function Number List
[1] Normal Function Code (00 ~ 99, #00 ~ #99) (Service Code 751)
Function
Number
Function
Additional Data
LED Indication
01
DSS/One-Touch
Extension number
or any numbers (up
to 36 digits)
02
Microphone
(Mute) Key
(ON/OFF)
DND Key
BGM (ON/OFF)
Headset
Transfer Key
Conference Key
On (Red) : DSS Ext. Busy
Off : DSS Ext. Idle, DND External, DND Transfer,
CFW Busy, CFW Noans, CFW Busy/Noans, CFW
Both, CFW FL ME
Fast Blink (Red) : DND Intercom, DND All, CFW Imm
On (Red) : Mic On
Off : Mic Off
03
04
05
06
07
2-120
Note
On (Red) : DND Setup
On (Red) : Active
On (Red) : Headset Operating
None
On (Red) : Conference Operating
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
ISSUE 1.1
Function
Number
SL1100
Function
08
Incoming Call
Log
09
Day/Night Mode
Switch
Call Forward Immediate
Call Forward Busy
Call Forward
-No Answer
Call Forward Busy/No Answer
Call Forward Both Ring
Call Forward Follow Me
Text Message
Setup
10
11
12
13
14
15
18
19
External Group
Paging
20
External All Call
Paging
Internal Group
Paging
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
41
42
43
44
45
46
Internal All Call
Paging
Privacy Release
Call Pickup for
own group
Call Pickup for
Another Group
Call Pickup for
Specified Group
Speed Dial Common/Private
Speed Dial Group
Repeat Redial
Saved Number
Redial
Memo Dial
Meet - Me
Conference
Override
(Off-Hook
Signaling)
Break - In
Camp On
Step Call
DND/FWD
Override Call
Message
Waiting
Room
Monitoring
Buzzer
Boss - Secretary
Call
Series Call
Common Hold
Exclusive Hold
Department
Group Log Out
Programming Manual
Additional Data
Mode number (1 ~
8) (0 = toggle)
LED Indication
Note
Fast Blink (Red) : Existing New CID
On (Red) : Existing Checked CID
Off : No CID
On : While each mode
On (Red) : Setup
On (Red) : Setup
Program
On (Red) : Setup
Slow Blink (Red) : Setup
On (Red) : Setup
Selectable Display
Message Numbers
(01 ~ 20)
External Paging
Number
(1 ~ 8)
15
Fast Blink (Red) : Setup
Slow Blink : To be setup
On (Red) : Setup
On (Red) : Active
On (Red) : Active
Internal Paging
Number
(01 ~ 32)
On (Red) : Active
None
None
None
None
Call Pickup Group
Number (01 ~ 32)
Speed Dial Number
(Common / Private)
Speed Dial Number
(Group)
None
None
None
Fast Blink (Red) : Repeat Dialing
None
None
None
None
None
On (Red) : Active
None
None
None
Extension Number
Extension Number
Slow Blink (Red) : Monitoring
Fast Blink (Red) : To be monitored
On (Red) : Calling party
Fast Blink (Red) : Called party
On (Red) : Active
None
None
None
On (Red) : Withdrawing
2-121
SL1100
Function
Number
47
Function
Reverse Voice
Over
48
Softphone
doesn't support
Reverse Voice
Over. (V1.5
Added)
Voice Over
49
Call Redirect
50
52
Account Code
Automatic
Answer with
Delay Message
Setup
Automatic
Answer with
Delay Message
Start
External Call
Forward by Door
Box
Extension Name
Change
General
Purpose LED
Operation
General
Purpose LED
Indication
Automatic
Transfer at
Department
Group Call
Delayed
Transfer at
Department
Group Call
DND at
Department
Group Call
Flash Key
Outgoing Call
Without Caller
ID (ISDN)
CTI
Keypad Facility
Key
Keypad Hold
Key
Keypad
RETRIEVE Key
Keypad
Conference Key
Application Key
Program
15
ISSUE 1.1
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
62
63
66
72
73
74
75
76
77
Voice Mail
(In-Skin)
78
Conversation
Recording Voice Mail
2-122
Additional Data
Extension Number
Extension Number
or Voice Mail
Number
LED Indication
Note
Same as DSS
On (Red) : Responding
Slow Blink (Red) : Listening
None
None
On (Red) : Setup
Incoming Ring
Group
(01 ~ 25)
On (Red) : Delay Message Answering
On (Red) : Setup
None
001 ~ 100 :
(Red) On
001 ~ 100 : (Red) On
Off
001 ~ 100 :
(Red) On
Off
001 ~ 100 : (Red) On
Off
Extension Group
Number
(01 ~ 32)
Slow Blink (Red) : Set
Off : Cancel
Extension Group
Number
(01 ~ 32)
Slow Blink (Red) : Set
Off : Cancel
Extension Group
Number
(01 ~ 32)
Slow Blink (Red) : Set
Off : Cancel
Off
None
On (Red) : Mode enabled
On (Red) : CTI active
Any dial data (8
digit)
Extension Number
or Pilot Number
None
<InMail>
Fast Blink (Green) : New Message (s) in own
Mailbox.
Slow Blink (Red) : New Message (s) in other Mailbox.
<External VM>
On (Red) : Access to Voice Mail
Fast Blink (Green) : New Message (s) in own
Mailbox.
Slow Blink (Red) : New Message (s) in other Mailbox.
Fast Blink : Recording
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
ISSUE 1.1
Function
Number
SL1100
Function
Additional Data
79
Automated
Attendant
(In-Skin)
Extension Number
or Pilot Number
80
Tandem Ringing
81
Automatic
Transfer to
Transfer Key
Conversation
Recording
Function
(VMSU)
1 = Set
0 = Cancel
Extension Number
to Tandem Ring
Trunk Line No.
(001-096)
83
86
87
Private Call
Refuse
Caller ID Refuse
0 = Pause
1 = Re-recording
2 = Address
3 = Erase
4 = Urgent Page
None
None
88
Dial-In Mode
Switching
94
Call Attendant
97
Door Box
Access Key
Door Box Number
(1-6)
#02
-- Cutting the
telephone power
--- Remote
Monitor Permit --
Package Number
(2-9)
#03
Program 22-17
Table No.
(1 ~ 500)
LED Indication
Note
On (Red) : Setup - All calls
Fast Blink (Red) : Setup - No answer calls
(125msec on/125msec off/125msec on/625msec
off) (Red) : Setup - busy calls
Slow Blink (Red) : Setup – busy/noans calls
On (Red) : Master Side
Slow Blink : Slave Side
Program
Off : Cancel
Slow Blink (Red) : Set
15
Off : Cancel
Slow Blink (Red) : Set
Off : Cancel
Slow Blink (Red) : Set
Off : Pattern 1, Pattern 5 ~ 8
On (Red) : Pattern 2
Slow Blink (Red) : Pattern 3
(125msec on/125msec off/125msec on/625msec
off) (Red) : Pattern 4
Fast Blink (Red) : Setup - No answer calls
(125 ms : On / 125 ms : Off / 125 ms : On / 625 ms :
Off) (Red) : Setup - Busy calls
On (Red) : Setup - Busy/No answer calls
On (Red) : Doorphone Busy
Off : Doorphone Idle
Fast Blink (Red) : Doorphone Incoming
On (Red) : Set
Off : Cancel
Slow Blink (Red) : Remote Monitor Permit
Off : Remote Monitor Deny
Table 2-3 Function Number List
[2] Appearance Function Level (*00 ~ *99) (Service Code 752)
Function
Number
Function
Additional
Data
*00
*01
ICM Key
Trunk Key
None
Trunk Number
(001 ~ 096)
*02
Trunk Group
*03
Virtual Extension
Key
Trunk Group
Number (001 ~
025)
Extension
Number or
Department
Group Number
*04
Park Key
Park Number (01
~ 64)
*05
Loop Keys
Use Programs
15-13-01 and/or
15-13-02 to
assign the loop
key to a trunk
group.
Station Park
Hold
0 = Incoming
1 = Outgoing
2 = Both
*07
Programming Manual
None
LED Indication
Note
Fast Blink (Green) : Incoming(own)/Recall(own)
Fast Blink (Red) : Incoming(other)
On (Green) : Speaking(own)
On (Red) : Speaking(other)
Slow Blink (Green) : Holding(own)/Transferring(own)
Slow Blink (Red) :
Holding(other)/Transferring(other)/Recall(other)
Fast Blink (Red) : Incoming (own/other)
Fast Blink (Red) : Incoming(own/other)/Recall(own)
On (Green) : Speaking(own)
On (Red) : Speaking(other)
Slow Blink (Green) : Holding(own)/Transferring(own)
Slow Blink (Red) :
Holding(other)/Transferring(other)/Recall(other)
Slow Blink (Green) : Holding(own)
Fast Blink (Green) : Recall(own)
Slow Blink (Red) : Holding(other)
None
Slow Blink (Green) : Holding(own)
Fast Blink (Green) : Recall(own)
2-123
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Function
Number
*32
Function
Additional
Data
Warning
Message
Sensor Mode
*33
LED Indication
Note
On (Red) : Play warning message
Off : Stop warning message
On (Red) : Security Sensor On
Off : Security Sensor Off
(125msec:on / 125msec:off / 125msec:on /
625msec:off) : Security Sensor Delay Timer
(PRG20-50-01) is starting. (V1.5 Added)
Program
15
LED Indication Reference :
ON = LED pattern 7.
OFF = LED pattern 0.
Rapid Blink = LED pattern 3.
Slow Blink (General Function Level) = LED pattern 5.
Slow Blink (Appearance Function Level) = LED pattern 1.
Fast Blink = LED pattern 3.
Stutter Blink = LED pattern 4.
Conditions

When a key is programmed using service code 752, it cannot be programmed with a function
using the 751 code until the key is undefined (000). For example with a Park Key programmed by
dialing 752 + *04 must be undefined by dialing 752 + 000 before it can be programmed as a Voice
Over key by dialing 751 + 48.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-124
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-08 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 15-08 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup to assign a ring tone range (0 ~
4) to incoming virtual extensions assigned to a Virtual Extension key (Program 15-07). If you enable
ringing for the key in Program 15-09, the key rings with the tone you set in this program. Also see
Program 22-03. The chart below shows the available tones. There are 084 available extension ports.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item No.
01
Maximum eight digits
Incoming Ring Pattern
Default
0 = Tone Pattern 1
1 = Tone Pattern 2
2 = Tone Pattern 3
3 = Tone Pattern 4
4 = Incoming Ring Tone Extension
0 = Tone Pattern 1
Description
When an extension or a virtual
extension is assigned to the function
key on the key telephone, select the
ring tone when receiving a call on
that key.
Program 15-08 - Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns
Incoming Signal
Frequency
Pattern
Type
Frequency 1
Frequency 2
Modulation
Pattern 1
High
Middle
Low
High
Middle
Low
High
Middle
Low
High
Middle
Low
High
Middle
Low
1100 Hz
660 Hz
520 Hz
1100 Hz
660 Hz
520 Hz
2000 Hz
1400 Hz
1100 Hz
2000 Hz
1400 Hz
1100 Hz
1100 Hz
660 Hz
520 Hz
1400 Hz
760 Hz
660 Hz
1400 Hz
760 Hz
660 Hz
760 Hz
660 Hz
540 Hz
760 Hz
660 Hz
540 Hz
1400 Hz
760 Hz
660 Hz
16 Hz
16 Hz
16 Hz
8 Hz
8 Hz
8 Hz
16 Hz
16 Hz
16 Hz
8 Hz
8 Hz
8 Hz
8 Hz
8 Hz
8 Hz
Pattern 2
Pattern 3
Pattern 4
Internal Incoming
Signal Frequency
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-125
15
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-09 : Virtual Extension Ring Assignment
Level
SA
Program
15
Description
Use Program 15-09 : Virtual Extension Ring Assignment to assign the ringing options for an
extension Virtual Extension Key or Virtual Extension Group Answer Key which is defined in Program
15-07. You make an assignment for each Night Service Mode.
Assign extension numbers and names to virtual extension ports in Program 15-01. Program Virtual
Extension keys in Program 15-07 (code *03). There are 50 Virtual Extension Ports.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum eight digits
Key Number
01 ~ 24
Item No.
Day/Night Mode
Ringing
Default
01
1~8
0 = No Ringing
1 = Ring
0
Conditions

Program the Multiple Directory Number function keys NOT to ring before removing the key from
telephone programming.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-126
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-10 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup
Level
SA
Program
Description
Use Program 15-10 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup to set the priority (1 ~ 4)
for the Virtual Extension Ring Tones set in Program 15-08. When Virtual Extension calls ring an
extension simultaneously, the tone with the highest order number (e.g., 1) rings. The other keys only
flash. There are 50 Virtual Extension ports.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
Priority
Order
01
1~4
Maximum eight digits
Data
0 = Tone Pattern 1
1 = Tone Pattern 2
2 = Tone Pattern 3
3 = Tone Pattern 4
4 = Incoming Extension Ring Tone
Description
When two or more virtual extensions
are set on a function key on the
telephone, and the tone pattern by
which the sound of each extension
differs, the priority of ring sound is set
up.
Related
Program
15-08
Default

By default, Virtual Extension ring tones have the following order :
Priority Order
Ring Tone (Set in Program 15-08)
1
2
3
4
0 (Tone Pattern 1)
1 (Tone Pattern 2)
2 (Tone Pattern 3)
3 (Tone Pattern 4)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-127
15
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-11 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment
Level
SA
Program
15
Description
Use Program 15-11 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment to assign the delayed ringing
options for an extension Virtual Extension or Virtual Extension Group Answer keys (defined in Program
15-09). You make an assignment for each Night Service Mode. There are 50 Virtual Extension Ports.
Assign extension numbers (Program 11-04) and names (Program 15-01) to virtual extension ports.
Program Multiple Directory Number (virtual extension) keys in Program 15-07 (code *03).
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum eight digits
Key Number
01 ~ 24
Item
No.
Day/Night Mode
Ringing
Default
Related Program
01
1~8
0 = Immediate Ring
1 = Delayed Ring
0
20-04-03
15-09-01
Conditions


Program the Virtual Extension keys NOT to ring before removing the key from telephone
programming.
Program 15-09-01 has to be assigned to Ring Immediately before assigning the VE key to Delay
Ring.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-128
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-12 : Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 15-12 : Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions to set the Conversation
Recording destination for each extension.
If both Programs 14-09 and 15-12 define a destination, the destination in Program 15-12 is followed.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
Item
01
Recording
Destination
Extension Number
Automatic Recording
for Incoming Calls
Automatic Recording
for Outgoing Calls
02
04
Maximum eight digits
Input Data
Description
Default
Maximum eight digits
Enter the extension number to which the
trunk calls should be recorded.
No Setting
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Determine if an extension incoming calls
should be automatically recorded.
Determine if an extension outgoing calls
should be automatically recorded.
0
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-129
15
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-13 : Loop Keys
Level
IN
Program
15
Description
Use Program 15-13 : Loop Keys to assign the Loop Key data for each keyset terminal. Loop Keys can
be incoming, outgoing or both ways. Outgoing Loop Keys use the entry in item 1. Incoming Loop Keys
use the entry in item 2. Both Way Loop Keys follow the entries in both item 1 and 2.
Input Data
Item
No.
Extension Number
Maximum eight digits
Key Number
01 ~ 24
Item
01
Outgoing Option
02
Incoming Option
Input Data
Default
0 ~ 25
(0 = Assigns the Loop Key for ARS, 1 ~ 25 =
Assigns the Loop Key to the trunk group
specified)
0 ~ 25
(0 = Assigns the Loop Key to all trunk groups,
1 ~ 25 = Assigns the Loop key to the trunk group
specified)
0
(Programming
Function Key No. 01 ~
24)
0
(Programming
Function Key No. 01 ~
24)
Conditions

Please set Loop Key at Program 15-07 before setting Program 15-13.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-130
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-14 : Programmable One-Touch Keys
Level
SB
Program
Description
Use Program 15-14 : Programmable One-Touch Keys to define the One-Touch key data for each
multiline terminal.
For each SL1100 Wireless telephone to use the Transfer When Out of Range feature, enter the
destination number (up to 36 digits) and name (up to 12 characters) into One-Touch bin 10. Make sure
to add any required trunk access codes for outside numbers. If this bin information is changed either
through 15-14-01 or through user programming, the destination for the transferred calls is also
changed.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum eight digits
Key Number
01 ~ 10
Item
No.
Item
01
Dial Data
02
Name
Input Data
1 ~ 0, *, #, P, R, @ (Code for Answer-Wait)
(Maximum of 36 digits)
Up to 12 characters
Default
No setting
No setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-131
15
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-16 : SIP Register ID Setup for Extension
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 15-16 : SIP Register ID Setup for Extension to define the SIP Register ID for
Extensions.
15
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Maximum eight digits
Item
Register ID
Input Data
None, 0 ~ 31
Default
None
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-132
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-17 : CO Message Waiting Indication
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 15-17 : CO Message Waiting Indication to set the message waiting LED Flash
assignment on each CO line.
15
Input Data
Extension Number including Virtual Extensions
Up to eight digits
Trunk Port Number
001 ~ 096
Item
No.
01
Item
LED Flash Assignment
Input Data
0 = LED Off
1 = LED On
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-133
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-18 : Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 15-18 : Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options to define the operation when a
Virtual Extension Key is pressed.
15
Input Data
Extension Number including Virtual Extensions
Item
No.
Item
01
Virtual
Extension Key
Operation Mode
02
Display mode
when placing a
call on Virtual
Extension Key
Input Data
0 = Release
1 = Land on the key
0 = Secondary
Extension Name
1 = Actual Station
Name
Up to eight digits
Description
Default
Define if calls to a Virtual Extension
Key land on the Virtual or on the
extension/CO appearance.
0
This is assigned for the Virtual
Extension Key, not the extension it
resides on.
Defines if calls to or from a Virtual
Extension Key display the Virtual
Extension Key name or the name of
the extension it resides on.
Related
Program
20-04-01
1
Condition

If a DIL rings a Virtual Extension, the Virtual Extension Key Operation Mode must be set to 1.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-134
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-22 : Mobile Extension Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 15-22 : Mobile Extension Setup to set the system information for the Mobile Extension
feature.
15
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
Item
01
Mobile Extension
Target Setup
02
Connect
Confirmation
03
Trunk Access Code
04
Call Back
Up to eight digits
Input Data
0 ~ 999 (0 = No
setting/1 ~ 999 = target
of mobile extension)
0 = Always
1 = On Analog Line
2 = Never
0 = Use normal trunk
access code (Program
11-09-01)
1 = Use individual trunk
access code (Program
11-09-02)
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Description
Default
Set which Speed Dial bin is used to call
when the Mobile extension is called.
0
Select when a confirmation (dial *) is
required to allow the call to cut over to the
called mobile number.
Select if the Normal (0) or Individual (1)
Trunk access is used when making the call
to the mobile number.
0
0
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-135
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-24 : Registration of Standard SIP Terminal
Level
IN
Program
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)
Description
15
Use Program 15-24 : Registration of Standard SIP Terminal to register data in the standard SIP
terminal where Register is not used.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
Using IP Address
0.0.0.0 ~
255.255.255.255
02
Call Procedure Port
1 ~ 65535
03
Registration Setting
when REGISTER isn't
used
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Description
Default
IP Address of the standard SIP terminal
that is used as the SIP extension. When
Program 15-24-03 is set to 1, this Program
cannot be changed from 0.0.0.0 (except
using PCProgramming).
Call procedure port of the standard SIP
terminal that is used as SIP extension.
Enables or disables the Registration
method. An error will occur if Program
15-24-01 is 0.0.0.0 and this Program is set
to 1 (except using PCProgramming).
0.0.0.0
5060
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-136
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-28 : Trunk Incoming Ring Tone of Extension Setup
Level
IN
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)
Program
Description
Use Program 15-28 : Trunk Incoming Ring Tone of Extension Setup to define the ringing tone for
each trunk port of extension.
Input Data
Extension Number
Up to eight digits
Trunk port number
001 ~ 096
Day/Night Mode
Item
No.
01
1~8
Item
Trunk Incoming Ring Tone
Input Data
0 = Trunk incoming ring tone
1 = High
2 = Middle
3 = Low
4 = Melody 1
5 = Melody 2
6 = Melody 3
7 = Melody 4
8 = Melody 5
Default
Related
Program
0
22-03
15-02-02
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-137
15
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 16 : Department Group Setup
16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup to set the function mode for each
department group. There are 32 available Department Groups.
16
Input Data
Department Group Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Input Data
Department
Name
Department
Calling Cycle
Maximum 12
characters
0 = Normal Routing
(Priority)
1 = Easy - UCD
Routing (Circular)
03
Department
Routing when
Busy (Auto Step
Call)
0 = Normal (Intercom
caller to busy
department member
hears busy)
1 = Circular (Intercom
callers to busy
department member
routes to idle member)
04
Hunting Mode
0 = Last extension is
called and hunting is
stopped
1 = Circular
05
Extension
Group All Ring
Mode Operation
0 = Manual (Service
Code)
1 = Automatic
02
1 ~ 32
Description
Use this option to set the call routing
for Department Calling. Routing can
be either circular (cycles to all
phones in group) or priority (cycles
to highest priority extensions first).
Set this option to set how the
system routes an Intercom call to a
busy Department Group member.
Intercom callers to the extension
can either hear busy or route to the
first available department number.
This only occurs for calls to the
extension directly, not the
department number assigned in
Program 11-07.
Use this option to set the action
taken when a call reaches the last
extension in the Department Group
(0 = hunting stopped, 1 = hunting
repeats with circular routing through
the Department Group).
Determine whether calls ringing a
Department Group should ring all
extensions in the group
simultaneously automatically or
manually when using the service
code defined in Program 11-12-09.
Default
Related
Program
No Setting
11-07
0
16-02
0
16-02
0
0
11-16-10
When set to (1) Automatic, only
ICM Calls and DID Calls will ring all
the stations in the Department Group.
06
STG Withdraw
Mode
07
Call Recall
Restriction for
STG
08
Maximum
Queuing
number for
Department
Group Call
Department
Hunting No
Answer Time
09
2-138
0 = Disable (Camp On)
1 = Enable (Overflow
Mode)
0 = Disable (Recall)
1 = Enable (No Recall)
0 ~ 32 ( 0 = No
Queuing)
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0
Determine whether or not an
unanswered call transferred to a
Department Group should recall the
extension from which it was
transferred.
To have Department Group calls
queue when busy, set this entry to
maximum queuing number.
Set how long a call rings a
Department group extension before
hunting occurs.
0
0
15
Program 16 : Department Group Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
10
Enhanced Hunt
Type
0 = No hunting
1 = Hunting When
Busy
2 = Hunting When Not
Answered
3 = Hunting When
Busy or No Answer
Description
Set the type of hunting for each
Extension (Department) Group.
Default
Related
Program
0
Program
Conditions
None
16
Feature Cross Reference

Department Calling
Programming Manual
2-139
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 16 : Department Group Setup
16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions
Level
IN
Program
16
Description
Use Program 16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions to set the Department Groups.
The system uses these groups (32 Department Groups) for Department Calling. Assign pilot numbers
to Department Groups you set up in Program 11-07. This lets system users place calls to the
departments. Use Program 16-01 to set the priority of each extension in each Department Group.
When a call comes to the group, the extensions ring in order of their priority.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum eight digits
Item
No.
Group
Number
Priority
Default
Description
Related Program
01
1 ~ 32
1 ~ 999
1 - xxx
Set up the Department Group called
by the pilot number and the
extension priority when a group is
called. Call Pickup Groups are set up
in 23-02.
11-07
16-01
(See
)
The initial value of a priority becomes the ports numerical order assigned in Programs 11-02 and 11-04.
(Extension ports are 1 ~ 100 (V2.0 or higher) Virtual extension ports are 1 ~ 50.)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Department Calling
2-140
Program 16 : Department Group Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 16 : Department Group Setup
16-03 : Secondary Department Group
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 16-03 : Secondary Department Group to set a second Department Group for
extensions. Up to 16 extensions can be assigned per a Department Group. There are 32 available
Department Groups.
Input Data
Department (Extension) Group Number
Item
No.
Secondary
Extension Number
01
1 ~ 16
Extension Number
Maximum 8 digits
01 ~ 32
Priority Order
0 ~ 999
Description
This program is set up when
placing telephones in two or
more groups.
Default

All extension groups : No setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Department Calling
Programming Manual
2-141
16
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 16 : Department Group Setup
16-04 : Call Restriction Between Department Groups
Level
IN
Program
16
Description
Use Program 16-04 : Call Restriction Between Department Groups to set internal calls between
members of different Department (Station) groups that can be restricted on a per group basis. Each
department group can restrict calls to up to 8 department groups in Department Group - Departmental
Call Restriction.
Input Data
Extension (Department) Group Number
1 ~ 32
Restricted Group Index
1~8
Item
No.
01
Item
Input Data
Restrict Department
Group Number
0 ~ 32
Description
Calls between members of different
Department (Station) groups can be
restricted on a per group basis.
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-142
Program 16 : Department Group Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-01 : System Options
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 20-01 : System Options to set various system options.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
Operator
Access Mode
0 = Step Call
1 = Circular
02
Text Message
Mode
05
DTMF Receive
Active Time
0 = Call mode
1 = No Answer/Busy
mode
0 ~ 64800 seconds
06
Alarm Duration
0 ~ 64800 seconds
07
Callback Ring
Duration Time
Trunk Queuing
Callback Time
Callback/Trunk
Queuing Cancel
Time
Trunk Guard
Timer
0 ~ 64800 seconds
12
Telephone/Web
Pro Logout Time
14
Special
Character
Input Mode
Mobile
Extension
Callback time
Day/Night
Change Key
Mode
1 ~ 86400
(86400 seconds = 1
day)
0 = Latin
1 = Cyrillic
08
09
10
16
17
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
1 ~ 64800 seconds
0 = Toggle
1 = Skip
Description
Default
Use this program to set up priority of
a call when calling an operator
telephone.
Use this program to select the mode
when calling the telephone which
set up the text message.
For OPXs, analog telephones and
certain analog trunks (like DISA),
the system attaches a DTMF
receiver to the port for this time. The
system releases the receiver after
the time expires.
This time sets the duration of the
alarm signal.
Callback rings an extension for this
time.
Trunk Queuing callback rings an
extension for this time.
The system cancels an extension
Callback or Trunk Queuing request
after this time.
The amount of time the system
waits to seize the next outside line
after the system releases an outside
line.
The system automatically logs out
of a Telephone/Web Pro session
after inactivity lasting this time.
Able to select the Special Character
input mode.
0
20-17
1
11-11-14
15-07-08
10 seconds
25-07-01
30 seconds
11-11-12
15 seconds
11-12-05
15-07-35
11-12-05
15-07-35
11-12-05
15-07-35
The amount of time the system
waits to until system ends the call
back.
Sets the operation mode for 15-07
(Code 09) Day/Night Mode Switch.
15 seconds
64800 seconds
Related
Program
1 seconds
900 seconds
(15 min.)
0
15 seconds
0
15-22-04
15-07
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-143
20
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-02 : System Options for Multiline Telephones
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 20-02 : System Options for Multiline Telephones to set various system options for
multiline telephones.
20
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
Trunk Loop Key Operation
Mode
02
Trunk Group Access Key
Operating Mode
Use this option to set the
operating mode of the
extension trunk group keys.
The keys are for incoming
access, outgoing access, or
both.
BLF Control
Set the conditions under
which a Hotline, Reverse
Voice Over or DSS Console
key indicates that an
extension is busy. Refer to
the Reverse Voice Over
feature for more information.
Retrieve the Line After
Transfer
Enable (1) or disable (0) an
extension ability to answer a
call after it has been
transferred, but before it is
answered.
Headset Busy Mode
Set the conditions under
which a headset extension is
busy to incoming callers.
Pre-selection Time
When a multiline terminal
user preselects a line key, the
system remembers the
pre-selection for this time.
Time and Date Display
Mode
Set how the Time and Date
appear on display
telephones. There are eight
display modes.
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
2-144
LCD Display Holding Time
Disconnect Supervision
Use this option to enable or
disable disconnect
supervision for the system
trunks.
Input Data
Default
0 = Keep Lamp
1 = Extinction
Mode
0 = Keep Lamp
1 = LED Off
Incoming :
300 IPM Red blink
Talking :
Green Lighting
LED Off
(on Talking TEL)
Holding :
60 IPM Green
LED Off
blink (on holding
TEL)
0 = Outgoing / Incoming
1 = Outgoing
2 = Incoming
0
0 = Idle / Busy (ON/OFF)
1 = Busy / Idle (ON/OFF)
1
0 = Not Holding (No Keep)
1 = Holding (Keep)
1
0 = No (Disable)
1 = Yes (Enable)
0
0 ~ 64800 seconds
5
1~8
Type 1 = (12 hour) 10 MAR TUE 3 : 15 PM
Type 2 = (12 hour) 3 : 15 PM MAR 10 TUE
Type 3 = (12 hour) 3-10 TUE 3 : 15 PM
Type 4 = (12 hour) 3 : 15 PM TUE 10 MAR
Type 5 = (24 hour) 10 MAR TUE 15 : 15
Type 6 = (24 hour) 15 : 15 MAR 10 TUE
Type 7 = (24 hour) 3-10 TUE 15 : 15
Type 8 = (24 hour) 15 : 15 TUE 10 MAR
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
4
Related
Program
Note
0
20-09-07
5
1
Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 1.1
Item
No.
SL1100
Item
10
Time Before Shifting to
Power-Saving Mode
11
Handsfree Microphone
Control
Use this option to control the
setting for Multiline Terminal
Handsfree microphone after
being disconnected and
reconnected. If set to 0, the
microphone is always off
when the terminal is
reconnected. If set to 1, the
microphone remains in the
same state it was in when the
terminal is reconnected.
Forced Intercom Ring (ICM
Call Type)
Use this option to enable or
disable Forced Intercom
Ringing. If enabled, incoming
Intercom calls normally ring.
If disabled, Intercom calls
voice-announce.
Caller ID Display Mode
12
15
18
19
24
Dialing Record Display
Time
DSS Key - Virtual Extension
Mode
Sets the mode of a virtual
extension key that appears
on a DSS console.
LCD scroll mode
Input Data
0 = No Shift
1 = 1 minute
2 = 2 minutes
3 = 4 minutes
4 = 8 minutes
5 = 16 minutes
6 = 32 minutes
7 = 64 minutes
0 = Off
1 = On
Default
Related
Program
0
15-02-18
Note
1
Program
20
0 = Disable (Voice)
1 = Enable (Signal)
1
0 = Name and Number (Both)
1 = Name
2 = Number
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0
0 = No
1 = Yes
0 = Character
1 = Dot
30
seconds
0
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-145
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-03 : System Options for Single Line Telephones
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 20-03 : System Options for Single Line Telephones to set up various options for
single line telephones.
20
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Description
Default
01
SLT Call Waiting
Answer Mode
For a busy single line telephone, set
the mode used to answer a
camped-on trunk call.
0
11-12-47
02
Ignore Received
DP Dial on
DTMF SLT Port
0 = Hook Flash
(Hooking)
1 = Hook Flash +
Service Code 794
0 = Do Not Ignore (No)
1 = Ignore (Yes)
Use this option to define whether
the system should receive dial pulse
and DTMF signals (0) or ignore dial
pulse and only accept DTMF signals
(1).
0
15-03-01
03
SLT DTMF Dial
to Trunk Lines
0 = Receive all dialed
data, before sending
(All)
1 = Direct through out
(Direct)
0
20-03-04
04
Dial Sending
Start Time for
SLT or ARS
0 ~ 64800 seconds
・Type 0 : The system keeps the
digits dialed by the single line
telephone on a trunk in a buffer.
After all the digits are received, the
system sends all the digits to the
trunk. If the time space between
digits is longer than the time in
Item 4, the system considers all
digits received.
・Type 1 : The system passes the
received digits from the single line
telephone to the trunk immediately.
If the single line telephone has a
Last Number Dial key without a
pause, this key may not be able to
use the Last Number Dial key with
the Type 1 setting.
When using a third-party external
paging device, set this option to 1. In
addition, set Program 20-03-04 to 1
When ARS or an analog extension
user accesses a trunk and dials an
outside call, the system waits this
time before outdialing the first digit.
When using a third-party external
paging device, set this option to 1. In
addition, set Program 20-03-03 to 1.
1
20-03-03
05
SLT Operation
Mode
06
Headset Ringing
Start Time (for
SLT)
0 = Normal Mode
1 = Extended Mode 1
2 = Extended Mode 2
0 ~ 64800 seconds
07
Trunk Call Dial
Forced Sending
Start Time
(Forced Dial)
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Related
Program
0
Define the headset ringing start
time. After this time expires from the
time when a single line telephone is
off-hook, the system sets the single
line telephone to headset ringing
mode.
5
20-13-38
0
20-03-03
20-03-04
Conditions
None
2-146
Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Feature Cross Reference

Single Line Telephones
Program
20
Programming Manual
2-147
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-04 : System Options for Virtual Extensions
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 20-04 : System Options for Virtual Extensions to set up various system options for
Virtual Extensions. There are 50 available Virtual Extension ports.
20
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
Virtual
Extension
Key Operation
Mode
0 = Release Virtual
Extension
Key
1 = Hold Virtual
Extension
Key
03
Virtual
Extension Delay
Interval
Virtual
Extension Key
Seize Mode
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Ringtone mode
for incoming to
VE (V2.0 Added)
0 = Off
1 = On
04
05
0 = Normal
1 = Enhanced Option
Description
Default
With an entry of “0”, after answering
a call on a virtual extension key,
once the call is picked up, the call
comes off the virtual extension key
and appears on the line or loop key.
With an entry of “1”, after answering
a call on a virtual extension key,
once the call is picked up, the call
will remain on the virtual extension
key.
Virtual Extensions set for Delayed
Ringing (see Program 15-11) ring
the extension after this time.
When set to Enhanced, the BLF will
not show as being busy when the
station is on a trunk call.
When set to Normal, the BLF will
show as being busy when on a trunk
call.
Defines whether incoming ring tone
mode of external call to VE is
enabled.
0
Related
Program
10
1
0
22-03-01
15-08-01
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Virtual Extensions
2-148
Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-05 : System Options for Charging Cost Service
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 20-05 : System Options for Charging Cost Service to defines the system options for
Charging Cost Service.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
04
06
Setting of Charge Cost per Unit
Advice of Charge for Telephone
Display
07
Advice of Charge for SMDR
Input Data
0 ~ 65535
0 = No decimal point
1 = Decimal point's character is period
2 = Decimal point's character is comma
0 = No decimal point
1 = Decimal point's character is period
2 = Decimal point's character is comma
Default
0
1
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-149
20
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-06 : Class of Service for Extensions
Level
IN
Program
20
Description
Use Program 20-06 : Class of Service for Extensions to assign a Class of Service (COS) to an
extension. There are 15 Classes of Service that can be assigned. To specify the options in each Class
of Service, refer to Programs 20-07 through 20-13. You make eight entries for Program 20-06, one for
each Night Service Mode.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum eight digits
Item No.
Day/Night Mode
Class of Service for Extensions
01
1~8
1 ~ 15
Default

Extension 101 is Class 15 and other Extension are Class 1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Class of Service
2-150
Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-07 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level)
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 20-07 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) to define the administrator
service availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).
20
Input Data
Class of Service Number
Item
No.
Item
01
Manual Night Service Enabled
Turns off or on an extension for manual
Night Service Switching.
Changing the Music on Hold Tone
Turns off or on an extension to change the
Music on Hold tone.
Time Setting
Turns off or on an extension to set the Time
via Service Code 728.
Storing Speed Dialing Entries
Turns off or on an extension to store System
or Group Speed Dialing numbers.
Set/Cancel Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer
Turns off or on an extension user ability to
use the Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding service
codes.
Charging Cost Display
02
03
04
05
06
10
11
12
13
14
15
18
19
20
23
01 ~ 15
Input Data
Default
COS 1 ~
14/COS
15
Programmable Function Key
Programming (Appearance Level)
Turns off or on the ability for an extension
user ability to program the Appearance
function keys using Service Code 752.
Forced Trunk Disconnect (analog trunk
only)
Turns off or on an extension user ability to
use Forced Trunk Disconnect.
Trunk Port Disable
VRS Record (VRS Msg Operation)
Turns off or on extension user ability to
record, erase and listen to VRS messages.
VRS General Message Play
Turns an extension off or on to dial 4 or
Service Code 611 to listen to the General
Message.
VRS General Message Record/Delete
Turns off or on an extension user ability to
dial Service Code 612 and record, listen to,
or erase the General Message.
SMDR Printout Accumulated Extension
Data
SMDR Printout Department Group (STG)
Data
SMDR Printout Accumulated Account
Code Data
CO MSG Waiting Indication Callback
Number Programming
Enable or Disable an extension ability to
receive CO Message Waiting Indication.
Programming Manual
Related
Program
0 = Off
1 = On
1
11-10-01
0 = Off
1 = On
1
11-10-02
0 = Off
1 = On
1
11-10-03
0 = Off
1 = On
1
11-10-04
0
11-10-06
11-10-07
11-10-08
0/1
11-10-09
1
11-11-38
1
11-10-26
1
11-10-27
0/1
11-10-20
0/1
11-10-21
0/1
11-10-22
1
11-10-23
1
11-10-24
1
11-10-25
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Note
0
2-151
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Item
Item
24
26
Set/Cancel Private Call Refuse
Enable or Disable an extension ability to set
or cancel Private Call Refuse.
Set/Cancel Caller ID Refuse
Enable or Disable an extension ability to set
or cancel Caller ID Refuse.
Dial-In Mode Switch
27
Do-Not-Call Administrator
25
Program
20
30
Date Setting
31
System Wide call forward clear
Default
Related
0 = Off
1 = On
Input Data
1
11-10-32
0 = Off
1 = On
1
11-10-33
11-10-34
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
1
11-10-35
0
25-01-07
15-07-89
20-01-19
1
11-10-41
Note
0/1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Class of Service
2-152
Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-08 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service)
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 20-08 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) to define the outgoing call
feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).
20
Input Data
Class of Service Number
Item
No.
Item
01
Intercom Calls
Turns off or on Intercom calling for the
extension.
Trunk Outgoing Calls
Turns off or on outgoing trunk calling for
the extension.
System Speed Dialing
Turns off or on an extension ability to
make outbound calls using system
speed dial numbers.
Group Speed Dialing
Turns off or on an extension ability to
make outbound calls using group speed
dial numbers.
Dial Number Preview (Preset Dial)
Turns off or on an extension for using
Dial Number Preview.
Toll Restriction Override
Turns off or on Toll Restricting Override
(Service Code 663).
Repeat Redial
Turns off or on an extension to use
Repeat Redial.
Toll Restriction Dial Block
Turns off or on an extension to use Dial
Block.
Hotline/Extension Ringdown
Turns off or on Ringdown Extension for
extensions with this COS.
Signal/Voice Call
Turns off or on an extension allowing it to
force Handsfree Answerback or Forced
Intercom Ringing for outgoing Intercom
calls.
Protect for the Call Mode Switching
from Caller
(Internal Call)
Department Group Step Calling
Turns off or on an extension to use
Department Group Step Calling.
ISDN CLIP
Determines if the ISDN calling line
identity presentation and screening
indicators are allowed.
Call Address Information
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
01 ~ 15
Input Data
Default
COS 01 ~ 15
Programming Manual
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Related
Program
Note
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
21-01-07
21-07
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
1
10-03-05
15-01-04
0
2-153
SL1100
Item
Item
15
Block Outgoing Caller ID
Turns off or on the system ability to
automatically block outgoing Caller ID
information when a user places a call.
If this option is on, the system
automatically inserts the Caller ID block
code (defined in Program 14-01-21)
before the user-dialed digits.
Display E911 Dialed Extension Name
and Number
Turns off or on an extension to display
the name and number of the extension
that dialed E911.
ARS Override of Trunk Access Map
Turns off or on an extension ability to
override the trunk access map
programming for outgoing calls.
Hotline for SPK
The ability of an extension to have
Hotline activated or deactivated when
going off hook via the speaker key.
Hot Key Pad
The ability of an extension to make a call
by just dialing the number without first
going off hook.
Automatic Trunk Seizing by Pressing
SPK Key
The ability of an extension to
automatically access Trunk Route when
going off hook via the speaker key.
Voice Over to Busy Virtual Extension
The ability of an extension to make Voice
Over to Busy Virtual Extension.
Display indication for security sensor
detection
Display indication for emergency call
by remote inspection
16
Program
17
20
ISSUE 1.1
19
20
21
22
23
24
Input Data
Default
Related
0
14-01-20
14-01-21
Note
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
20-08-09
0
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Class of Service
2-154
Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-09 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service)
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 20-09 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) to define the incoming call
feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).
20
Input Data
Class of Service Number
Item
No.
Item
01
Second Call for
DID/DISA/DIL/E&M Override
Turns off or on the extension ability
to receive a second call from a
DID, DISA, DIL, or tie line caller.
02
03
04
05
06
07
09
01 ~ 15
Input Data
Default
COS 01 ~ 15
With this option set to 1, the
destination extension must be busy for
a second DNIS caller to ring through.
If the destination extension does not
have a trunk key available for the
second call and a previous call is
ringing the extension but has not yet
been answered, the second caller hears
busy regardless of this program setting.
Caller ID Display
Turns off or on the Caller ID display
at an extension.
Sub Address Identification
Defines whether or not an
extension displays the Caller
Sub-Address.
Notification for Incoming Call
List Existence
Determines whether or not an
extension display shows Check List
when an incoming call is missed by
a user.
Signal/Voice Call
Turn off or on an extension ability
to enable Handsfree Answerback
or Forced Intercom Ringing for
their incoming Intercom calls.
Incoming Time Display
Call Queuing
Turn off or on an extension ability
to have calls queued if a call rings
the extension when it is busy.
Deny Collect Call Receiving
Related
Program
Note
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
1 (V1.5 Changed)
0
0 = Off
1 = On
0 (V2.1 Changed)
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
11-11-15
11-11-16
0
0
20-13-06
0
Conditions
None
Programming Manual
2-155
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Feature Cross Reference

Class of Service
Program
20
2-156
Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-10 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service)
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 20-10 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) to define the answer feature
availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).
20
Input Data
Class of Service Number
Item No.
01 ~ 15
Item
Input Data
Default
COS 01 ~ 15
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
Group Call Pickup (Within Group)
Turns off or on Group Call Pickup for calls
ringing an extension Pickup Group and ringing
group calls (Service Code *#).
Group Call Pickup (Another Group)
Turns off or on Group Call Pickup for calls
ringing outside a group (Service Code 769).
Group Call Pickup for Specific Group
Turns off or on Group Call Pickup for a specific
group (Service Code 768).
Telephone Call Pickup
Turns off or on an extension to be picked up by
a call pickup
Directed Call Pickup for Own Group
Turns off or on Directed Call Pickup for calls
ringing an extension Pickup Group (Service
Code 756).
Meet-Me Conference and Paging
Turns off or on an extension to use Meet-Me
Conference and Paging.
Automatic Off-Hook Answer
Turns off or on an extension to use Universal
Auto Answer (no service code required).
Virtual Extension Off-Hook Answer
Turns off or on an extension to answer an
incoming call on a Virtual Extension simply by
lifting the handset.
Call Pickup Callback
Turn off or on an extension ability to use Call
Pickup to pick up Callback calls.
Answer Preset
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
1
1
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-157
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-11 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service)
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 20-11 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) to define the Hold and
Transfer feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).
20
Input Data
Class of Service Number
Item No.
01 ~ 15
Item
Input Data
Default
COS 01 ~ 15
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
2-158
Call Forward All
Turns off or on an extension ability to initiate
Call Forwarding All.
Call Forward When Busy
Turns off or on an extension ability to use Call
Forward when Busy.
Call Forwarding When Unanswered
Turns off or on an extension ability to use Call
Forward when Unanswered.
Call Forwarding (Both Ringing)
Turns off or on an extension ability to activate
Call Forwarding with Both Ringing.
Call Forwarding with Follow Me
Turns off or on an extension ability to initiate
Call Forwarding with Follow Me.
Unscreened Transfer (Ring Inward Transfer)
Turns off or on an extension ability to use
Unscreened Transfer.
Transfer Without Holding
Turns off or on an extension ability to use
Transfer Without Holding.
Transfer Information Display
Turns off or on an extension ability for incoming
Transfer preanswer display.
Group Hold Initiate
Turns off or on an extension ability to initiate a
Group Hold.
Group Hold Answer
Turns off or on an extension ability to pick up a
call on Group Hold.
Automatic On-Hook Transfer
Turns off or on an extension ability to use
Automatic On Hook Transfer.
Call Forwarding Off Premise (External Call
Forwarding)
Turns off or on an extension ability to set up
Call Forwarding Off-Premise for their
telephone.
Operator Transfer After Hold Callback
Turns off or on an extension ability to have a
call which recalls from hold transfer to the
operator.
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Restriction
Turns off or on the Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Restriction. If enabled, Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
is not possible.
VRS Personal Greeting (Message Greeting)
Turns off or on a Service Code to record, listen
to, or erase the Personal Greeting Message.
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0
1
Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Item No.
Item
16
26
Call Redirect
Turns off or on a multiline terminal user ability
to transfer a call to a predefined destination
(such as an operator, voice mail, or another
extension) without answering the call.
Department Group Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
(Each Telephone Group Transfer)
Turns off or on an extension user ability to set
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding for a Department
Group.
No Recall
No Recall set to "Allow" (1) will not stop
transferred calls from recalling from a virtual
extension.
Hold/Extended Park
Determine if an extension Class of Service
should allow either a normal or extended Park.
No Callback
Turns off or on an extension to receive
callbacks.
Restriction for Tandem Trunking on Hang
Up
Allow (0) or Deny (1) an extension user ability
to set up a tandem/conference call
automatically when they hang up.
Restricted Unsupervised Conference
Allow (0) or Deny (1) an extension ability to
initiate an unsupervised conference.
VE Call Forward Set/Cancel
Turn on or off an extension ability to set or
cancel call forwarding for a virtual extension.
Trunk Park Hold Mode
Set the hold type when a trunk call is put on
hold by an extension.
Transfer Park Call
Turn off or on an extension ability to transfer a
parked call.
Station Park Hold mode
27
Call Park Automatically Search
28
Both Ring Enhancement
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Input Data
Default
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
Program
0
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0 = Off
1 = On
0
20
0 = Allow
1 = Deny
0
0 = Allow
1 = Deny
0
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Non Exclusive Hold (Off)
1 = Exclusive Hold (On)
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Normal
1 = Enhanced
0
1
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Class of Service
Programming Manual
2-159
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-12 : Class of Service Options (Charging Cost Service)
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 20-12 : Class of Service Options (Charging Cost Service) to define the Charging
Cost service availability for each extension service class.
20
Input Data
Class of Service Number
Item No.
01 ~ 15
Item
Input Data
Default
COS 01~15
02
03
Advice of Charge
ISDN-AOC
Cost Display (TTU)
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Class of Service
2-160
Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service)
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) to define the
supplementary feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).
20
Input Data
Class of Service Number
Item
No.
Item
01
Long Conversation Alarm
Turns off or on the Warning Tone for Long
Conversation (not for single line
telephones).
Long Conversation Cutoff (Incoming)
Turns off or on an extension ability to use
Long Conversation Cutoff for incoming
calls.
Long Conversation Cutoff (Outgoing)
Turns off or on an extension ability to use
Long Conversation Cutoff for outgoing
calls.
Call Forward/DND Override (Bypass
Call)
Turns off or on an extension ability to use
Call Forwarding/DND Override.
Intercom Off-Hook Signaling
Turns off or on an extension ability to
receive off-hook signals.
Automatic Off-Hook Signaling
(Automatic Override)
Allows a busy extension ability to
manually (0) or automatically (1) receive
off-hook signals.
Message Waiting
Turns off or on an extension ability to
leave Message Waiting.
Conference
Turns off or on an extension user ability to
initiate a conference or Meet-Me
Conference.
Privacy Release
Turns off or on an extension user ability to
initiate a Voice Call Conference.
Barge-In Monitor
Enables the extension Barge-In Mode to
be Speech mode (0) or Monitor mode (1).
Room Monitor, Initiating Extension
Turns off or on extension user ability to
Room Monitor other extensions.
Room Monitor, Extension Being
Monitored
Turn off or on an extension ability to be
monitored by other extensions.
Continued Dialing (DTMF) Signal on
ICM Call
Turn off or on an extension user ability to
use Continued Dialing, which allows
DTMF signal sending while talking on
extension.
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
01 ~ 15
Input Data
Default
COS 01 ~ 15
Programming Manual
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Related
Program
Note
0
0
0
1
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0
(V2.1 Changed)
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Speech
1 = Monitor
0
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0 = Off
1 = On
20-13-45
0
0 = Off
1 = On
1
2-161
SL1100
Item
Item
14
Department Calling (PLT No Called
Extension)
Turns off or on an extension user ability to
call a Department Group Pilot.
Barge-In, Initiate
Turns off or on an extension user ability to
barge-in on other's calls.
Barge-In, Receive
Turns off or on an extension ability to
have other extensions barge-in on calls.
Barge-in Tone/Display (Intrusion Tone)
Turns off or on the Barge-In tone. If on,
callers hear an alert tone and their display
indicates the Barge-In when another
extension barges into their conversation.
If off, there is no alert tone or display
indication.
Programmable Function Key
Programming (General Level)
Turns off or on extension user ability to
program General function keys using
Service Code 751 (by default). (Refer to
Program 20-07-10 for Service Code 752.)
Selectable Display Messaging (Text
Messaging)
Turns off or on an extension user ability to
use Selectable Display Messaging.
Account Code/Toll Restriction
Operator Alert (Restricted Operation
Transfer)
Turns off or on operator alert when an
extension user improperly enters an
Account Code or violates Toll Restriction.
Extension Name
Turns off or on an extension user ability to
program its name.
Busy Status Display (Called Party
Status)
Turns off or on the ability to display the
detailed state of the called party.
Display the Reason for Transfer
Select whether an extension should
display the reason a call is being
transferred to their extension (Call
Forward Busy, Call Forward No Answer,
and DND).
Privacy Release by Pressing Line Key
Turns off or on a user ability to press a
line key to barge into an outside call. The
Barge-In feature must be enabled if this
option is to be used.
Group Listen
Turns off or on an extension user ability to
use Group Listen.
Busy on Seizing Virtual Extension
If set to 1, you can call a busy extension
which is talking on a virtual extension key.
Program 20-13-06 (Call Waiting) must be
set to 0 for this option to work.
Allow Class of Service to be Changed
Turns off or on the ability of an extension
Class of Service to be changed via
Service Code 677.
Paging Display
Turns off or on an extension user ability to
display paging information.
Background Music
Allow or Deny an extension user to turn
Background Music on and off.
Connected Line Identification (COLP)
15
16
Program
20
ISSUE 1.1
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
2-162
Deny Multiple Barge-Ins
Allows or Denies an extension from
having multiple users Barge into their
conversation.
Input Data
0 = Off
1 = On
Default
Related
Note
1
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0
20-13-06
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Deny
1 = Allow
1
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Item
Item
34
Block Manual Off-Hook Signaling
Turns off or on an extension user ability to
block off-hook signals manually sent from
a co-worker.
Block Camp On
Turns off or on an extension user ability to
block callers from dialing to Camp On.
Call Duration Timer Display
Turns off or on an extension display of the
Call Duration Time. The system waits until
the interdigit time (Program 21-01-01)
expires before beginning this timer.
Headset Ringing for SLT
Turn off or on an extension user ability to
use the Headset ringing
Do Not Disturb
Turn off or on an extension user ability to
set or cancel Do Not Disturb.
Voice Mail Message Indication on DSS
Turn off or on the Voice Mail Message
Indication for an extension on a DSS
console.
Extension Data Swap Enabling
Turn off or on an extension user ability to
use Extension Data Swap.
Live Monitor Enabling
Turn off or on an extension user ability to
use Live Monitor.
Mute Key Mode while Call Monitoring
Set per class of service, when in Call
Monitoring Mode determines if the
monitored parties receive the barge in
alert tone when Coaching Mode is
enabled.
Remote Conference
35
36
38
40
41
42
44
45
46
47
48
49
51
52
53
54
55
Station Number Display
Determine if a station Number will be
displayed (On) or not displayed (Off) in
the LCD when the phone is in an idle
state.
Station Name Display
Determine if a station Number will be
displayed (On) or not displayed (Off) in
the LCD when the phone is in an idle
state.
BLF Indication on CO Incoming State
Determine if a BLF of the station will light
when a Normal CO call is ringing the
phone.
Number and Name appear in the
Directory
Determine if an extension name and
number will be listed (On) or unlisted (Off)
in the directory.
VoIPDB All DSP Busy Display
Set whether “All DSP Busy” alarm
displays on LCD when the caller makes
an IP call and there is no VoIPDB DSP
resource.
Language Selection for specific
extension
Call waiting for standard SIP terminal
Intercom Call to Room Monitor
Input Data
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Default
Related
Note
0
0
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
Program
20
11-11-08
15-07-03
0
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
11-15-12
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
1
20-13-10
1
11-19
20-34
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
1
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0
11-11-68
15-02-01
47-02-16
20-13-05
20-13-06
20-09-01
20-09-07
0
Conditions
None
Programming Manual
2-163
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Feature Cross Reference

Class of Service
Program
20
2-164
Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-14 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 20-14 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M to enable/disable DISA and tie line
Class of Service options. You assign a DISA Class of Service to DISA users in Program 25-09. Assign
tie line Classes of Service in 34-02. Up to 15 DISA/E&M Classes of Service can be defined.
Analog trunk-to-analog trunk and ISDN trunk-to-ISDN trunk calls are supported by this program. However,
analog trunk-to-ISDN trunk and ISDN trunk-to-analog trunk calls are NOT supported by this program.
Input Data
Class of Service Number
Item No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
01 ~ 15
Item
First Digit Absorption (Delete First Digit Dialed)
For tie lines, enable or disable the ability to absorb
(ignore) the first incoming digit. Use this to make the
tie trunk compatible with 3- and 4-digit tie line
service. This option does not apply to DISA.
Trunk Group Routing/ARS Access
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk
caller ability to dial 9 for Trunk Group Routing or
Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route).
Trunk Group Access
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk
caller ability to access trunk groups for outside calls
(Service Code 704).
Outgoing System Speed Dial
This option enables or disables DISA or tie trunk
caller ability to use the System Speed Dialing.
Operator Calling
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk
caller ability to dial 0 for the telephone system
operator.
Internal Paging
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk
caller ability to use the telephone system Internal
Paging.
External Paging
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk
caller ability to use the telephone system External
Paging.
Direct Trunk Access
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk
caller ability to use Direct Trunk Access (Service
Code #9).
Forced Trunk Disconnect <Not for ISDN T-point>
This option enables or disables a tie trunk caller
ability to use Forced Trunk Disconnect (Service
Code 11-10-26). This option is not available to DISA
callers.
Call Forward Setting by Remote via DISA
Enable or disable a DISA caller ability to use the
Call Forward service codes (Programs 11-11-01 ~
11-11-05).
DISA/Tie Trunk Barge-In
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk
caller ability to use the Barge-In.
Retrieve Park Hold
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk
caller ability to retrieve a Park Hold call.
Programming Manual
Input Data
0 = Off
1 = On
Default
COS 01 ~ 15
0
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0 = Off
1 = On
0
0 = Off
1 = On
1
2-165
20
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
Program


Class of Service
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
20
2-166
Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-15 : Ring Cycle Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 20-15 : Ring Cycle Setup to define the ringing cycles for each ring type.
Input Data
Item No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
Incoming Signal Type
Ringing Cycle
Default
1 ~ 13
3
8
3
8
8
12
8
8
11
5
8
Normal Incoming Call on Trunk
PBX, CES Incoming Call
Incoming Internal Call
DID/DISA/VRS
DID/DDI
Dial-In in the E&M Tie Line
Door Box Ringing for SLT
Virtual Extension Ring
Callback
Alarm for SLT
VRS Waiting Message Incoming Call
20
Table 2-4 Ringing Cycles
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Ringing Cycle
On
On : 2.0 / Off : 4.0
On : 1.0 / Off : 2.0
On : 0.5 / Off : 0.5
On : 0.25 / Off : 0.25
On : 0.5 / Off : 0.5 / On : 0.5 / Off : 1.5
On : 0.25 / Off : 0.25 / On : 0.25 / Off : 5.25
On : 0.375 / Off : 0.25 / On : 0.375 / Off : 2.0
On : 0.25 / Off : 0.125 / On : 0.25 / Off : 0.125 / On : 0.25 / Off : 2.0
On : 1.0 / Off : 4.0
On : 0.25 / Off : 0.25 / On : 0.25 / Off : 4.25
On : 1.0 / Off : 3.0
On : 0.25 / Off : 0.25 / On : 0.25 / Off : 2.25
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-167
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-16 : Selectable Display Messages
Level
SA
Program
20
Description
Use Program 20-16 : Selectable Display Messages to enter the Selectable Display Messages. There
are 20 alphanumeric messages, with up to 48 characters. Use the following chart when programming
messages.
Use this keypad digit ...
When you want to ...
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
*
#
Enter characters: 1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | }
ÁÀÂÃÅÆÇÉÊìó0
Enter characters : A-C, a-c, 2.
Enter characters : D-F, d-f, 3.
Enter characters : G-I, g-i, 4.
Enter characters : J-L, j-l, 5.
Enter characters : M-O, m-o, 6.
Enter characters : P-S, p-s, 7.
Enter characters : T-V, t-v, 8.
Enter characters : W-Z, w-z, 9.
Enter characters : 0 ! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) ô õ ú å ä æ ö ü α ε θ В
Enter characters : * + , - . / : ; < = > ? π Σ σ Ω ∞ ¢ £
# = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed - ex : TOM).
Pressing # again = Space. (In system programming mode, use the right arrow soft key
instead to accept and/or add a space.)
Clear the character entry one character at a time.
Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.
Clear/Back
Flash
Input Data
Selectable Display Message Number
01 ~ 20
Item No.
Input Data
01
48 characters
Default
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Message
IN MEETING UNTIL ## : ##
MEETING ROOM - ########
COME BACK ## : ##
PLEASE CALL ###########
BUSY CALL AFTER ## : ##
OUT FOR LUNCH BACK ## : ##
BUSINESS TRIP BACK ## / ##
BUSINESS TRIP ##########
GONE FOR THE DAY
ON VACATION UNTIL ## / ##
MESSAGE 11
MESSAGE 12
MESSAGE 13
MESSAGE 14
MESSAGE 15
MESSAGE 16
MESSAGE 17
MESSAGE 18
MESSAGE 19
MESSAGE 20
Conditions

Time value ## : ## must be followed by two spaces.
2-168
Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Feature Cross Reference

Selectable Display Messages
Program
20
Programming Manual
2-169
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-17 : Operator Extension
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 20-17 : Operator Extension to designate an operator. When an extension user dials 0
(defined by Program 11-01 Type 5), calls go to the operator selected in this program.
20
If you do not assign an extension in Program 90-11-01, system alarms appear on the extension
assigned in this option.
Input Data
Operator Number
Item
No.
01
02
Item
Input Data
Operator’s
Extension
Number
Operator
Console
Up to eight digits
0 = Normal key set
1 = Special Operator
Console
1~8
Description
Default
Define the extension numbers which
are to be used by operators.
101
Related
Program
11-01
20-01-01
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Intercom
2-170
Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-18 : Service Tone Timers
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 20-18 : Service Tone Timers to set the values for the system service tone timers. Refer
to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Description
Default
After getting Intercom dial tone, a
telephone user has this time to dial
the first digit of the Intercom call.
30
01
Extension Dial
Tone Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
02
Busy Tone
Timer
Congestion
Tone
0 ~ 64800 seconds
04
Call Waiting
Tone Timer
0 ~ 64800 seconds
05
Multiline
Confirmation
Tone
Interval of Call
Waiting Tone
Intrusion Tone
Repeat Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
10
0 ~ 64800 seconds
10
Conference
Tone Interval
Warning Beep
Tone Signaling
Interval
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0
0 ~ 64800 seconds
60
03
06
07
08
09
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Related
Program
15
A Busy Tone when system
resources run short. (Such as
DTMF receiver resources).
This option sets the time between
Call Waiting tones. This timer also
sets the time between Off-Hook
Signaling alerts.
After a call is interrupted (such as
Barge-In, Voice Mail Conversation
Recording, or Voice Over), the
system repeats the Intrusion Tone
after this time. Normally, you should
enter 0 to disable this time.
10
10
0
14-01-18
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Distinctive Ringing, Tones, and Flash Patterns
Programming Manual
2-171
20
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-19 : System Options for Caller ID
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 20-19 : System Options for Caller ID to define the system options for the Caller ID
feature.
20
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
Caller ID Displaying
Format
02
Caller ID Wait Timer
0 = First 10 digits
(Upper)
1 = Last 10 digits
(Lower)
0 ~ 30 seconds
03
Caller ID Edit Mode
(V2.0 Added)
0 = Off
1 = On
04
Wait Facility IE Timer
0 ~ 64800 seconds
05
Caller ID Sender
Queuing Time
(Sender Wait)
Long Distance Code
Area Code
0 ~ 64800 seconds
07
08
Up to two digits
Up to six digits
Description
Default
(if displaying digits are more than 12
digits)
0
When an incoming CO call is received, the
SL1100 starts the timer. It will wait the
programmed time for Caller ID information
from Telco before connecting the CO call.
If Caller ID Edit Mode is disabled (0), no
access code will be added to the Caller ID.
If this option is enabled (1), the access
code entered in PRG 10-02-02 & 10-02-03
will be added to the beginning of the Caller
ID.
This timer is used with ISDN trunks to
determine how long the system waits for
the Caller ID name from the Telco.
2
1
10
0
No Setting
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Caller ID
2-172
Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-20 : Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 20-20 : Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data to define the messages which are
displayed when no Caller ID information is received.
20
Input Data
Item No.
01
02
03
Item
Private Call
Call from Out of Service Area
Call Information with Error
Input Data
24 Alphanumeric
Characters
Default
PRIVATE
OUT OF AREA
NO CALLER INFO
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Caller ID
Programming Manual
2-173
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-21 : System Options for Long Conversation
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 20-21 : System Options for Long Conversation to define the system options for the
Long Conversation feature.
20
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
Long
Conversation
Alarm 1
Long
Conversation
Alarm 2
Long
Conversation
Cutoff for
Incoming Call
Long
Conversation
Cutoff for
Outgoing Call
Conversation
cutoff for
remote monitor
02
03
04
05
Input Data
Description
Default
Related
Program
0 ~ 64800 seconds
The warning tone for long toll calls
sounds after this time.
170
14-01-15
0 ~ 64800 seconds
After the initial long toll call warning
tone, additional warning tones
sound after this time.
This timer determines how long the
system waits before disconnecting
an incoming call.
180
14-01-15
0
14-01-14
This timer determines how long the
system waits before disconnecting
an outgoing call.
0
14-01-14
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
180
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Long Conversation Cutoff
2-174
Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-23 : System Options for CTI
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 20-23 : System Options for CTI to define the system options for the CTI feature.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
Delayed ring timer for
CTI
ALERT replay time
(CTI)
Trunk Virtual Bridge TSP Driver
0 ~ 64800 seconds
30 second
0 ~ 64800 seconds
8 second
The Timer that waits
for an off-hook for
Single Line
Telephone
0 ~ 64800 seconds
02
03
04
Input Data
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
Description
Enable or disable the system to send trunk
or virtual extension information to the TSP
driver.
Default
1
30 second
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-175
20
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-25 : ISDN Options
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 20-25 : ISDN Options to define the ISDN system options.
20
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
Send the Release
Message After
Subscriber Hangs Up
Progress Indicate
Information Element
Detect
Bearer Capability
Select from SLT
Outgoing
Send DT until user
dials first digit (Local
Dial Tone)
0 = Service Off
1 = Service On
1
0 = Service Off
1 = Service On
1
0 = 3.1 KHz Audio
1 = Speech
0
T305 Timer Start
After Sending
Disconnect Message
Call Proceeding Send
Mode
Local Busy Tone
Mode Set When
Disconnect Message
Received
Use of Lower Layer
Compatibility (LLC)
0 = Service Off
1 = Service On
1
0 = Service Off
1 = Service On
0 = Local Busy Tone Off
1 = Busy Tone from NT
(network side)
1
High Layer
Compatibility (HLC)
Sending
S-Point Terminal
Seizes Analog Trunk
Automatic Changing
System Clock When
Date/Time
Information Element
Received
Call Forward Options
(Auto Connect Send)
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
0
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
1
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
Local Busy Tone
(Release)
No Response
Release Send
14
Input Data
0 = Service Off
1 = Service On
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
0 = Normal - No
Message (Off)
1 = Normal - No
Message (On)
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Description
With Overlap Sending Mode, if the network
side stops dial tone when CLI is included in
the SETUP message, the system sends
dial tone until the user dials the first digit
instead of the network.
Default
0
0
This Program must be set to (0 = Disable)
for International Dialing when using Calling
Number Presentation (CPN) from station.
0
0
Incoming Calls Forwarded Out
Automatically Return Connect Message
When Outgoing Call Receives Alerting
Message.
Busy tone sends when T-point receiving a
RELEASE message from Network.
Operation mode setting for when second
T303 timer expires.
0
1
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

ISDN Compatibility
2-176
Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-26 : Multiplier for Charging Cost
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 20-26 : Multiplier for Charging Cost to define the Multiplier for charging cost to each
extension service class.
20
Input Data
Service Class
Item
No.
01
01 ~ 15
Item
Value (%)
Input Data
100 ~ 500
Default
100
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-177
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-28 : Trunk to Trunk Conversation
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 20-28 : Trunk to Trunk Conversation to define system options for Trunk to Trunk
Conversation.
20
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Description
Default
01
Conversation
Continue Code
0 ~ 9, *, #
(Set for one digit only)
Input the code that can be dialed to
continue the conversation after the
Trunk-to-Trunk Release Warning
Tone is heard.
No Setting
02
Conversation
Disconnect
Code
0 ~ 9, *, #
(Set for one digit only)
Input the code that can be dialed to
disconnect the conversation after
the Trunk-to-Trunk Release
Warning Tone is heard.
No Setting
03
Conversation
Continue Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Input how long the conversation
extends when the Conversation
Continue Code is dialed.
0
Related
Program
14-01-25
20-28-03
24-02-07
24-02-10
25-07-07
25-07-08
14-01-25
24-02-07
24-02-10
25-07-07
25-07-08
14-01-25
20-28-01
24-02-07
24-02-10
25-07-07
25-07-08
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-178
Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-29 : Timer Class for Extension
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 20-29 : Timer Class for Extension to assign the timer class to each extension. There
are 16 Classes that can be assigned. You make eight entries for this Program, one for each Night
Service Mode. This entry includes virtual extension numbers.
The details of classes are assigned by Program 20-31.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Up to eight digits
Item
Day/Night Mode 1 ~ 8
Input Data
0 ~ 15
0 = Not assigned
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-179
20
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-30 : Timer Class for Trunks
Level
IN
Program
20
Description
Use Program 20-30 : Timer Class for Trunks to assign the timer class to each trunk. There are 16
Classes that can be assigned. You make eight entries for this Program, one for each Night Service
Mode. The details of classes are assigned by Program 20-31.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
01
001 ~ 096
Item
Day/Night Mode 1 ~ 8
Input Data
0 ~ 15
0 = Not assigned
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-180
Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-31 : Timer Class Timer Assignment
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 20-31 : Timer Class Timer Assignment to assign values to the timers on a class of
service basis.
20
Input Data
Timer Class Number
Item
No.
Item
01
Trunk Queuing
Callback
Duration Time
Callback / Trunk
Queuing Cancel
Time
Virtual
Extension Delay
Interval
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Trunk Queuing Callback rings an
extension for this amount of time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
The system cancels an extension
Callback or Trunk Queuing request
after this amount of time.
Virtual Extensions set for Delayed
Ringing (refer to 15-11 : Virtual
Intercom
Interdigits Time
(Intercom I/D
Timer)
Trunk Interdigits
Time (Trunk I/D
Timer)
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Hotline Time
Start Time
(Hotline Start)
Ring No Answer
Alarm Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
08
DIL/Incoming
Ring Group No
Answer Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
09
DID
Ring-No-Answer
Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
10
Hold Recall
Time (Non
Exclusive Hold)
0 ~ 64800 seconds
11
Hold Recall
CallBack Time
(Non Exclusive
Hold)
0 ~ 64800 seconds
02
03
04
05
06
07
Programming Manual
Input Data
0 ~ 15
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Description
Default
Related
Program
15 seconds
20-01-08
64800 seconds
20-01-09
10 seconds
20-04-03
10 seconds
21-01-02
10 seconds
21-01-03
0 seconds
21-01-09
60 seconds
22-01-03
0 second
22-01-04
20 seconds
22-01-06
90 seconds
(V1.5 Changed)
24-01-01
30 seconds
24-01-02
Extension Delayed Ring
Assignment ring the extension after
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
this time.
When placing Intercom calls,
extension users must dial each digit in
this time.
The system waits for this time to
expire before placing the call in a talk
state (Call Timer starts after time
expires, Voice Over and Barge-In are
not allowed until after time expires).
A Ringdown extension automatically
calls the programmed destination after
this time.
If a trunk rings a multiline telephone
longer than this time, the system
changes the ring cadence. This
indicates to the user that the call has
been ringing too long.
A DIL that rings its programmed
destination longer than this time
diverts to the DIL No Answer Ring
Group (set in Program 22-08).
In systems with DID Ring-No-Answer
Intercept, this time sets the
Ring-No-Answer time. This time is
how long a DID call rings the
destination extension before rerouting
to the intercept ring group.
A call on Hold recalls the extension
that placed it on Hold after this time.
This time works with the Hold Recall
Callback Time (Program 24-01-02 ).
A trunk recalling from Hold or Park
rings an extension for this time. This
time works with Hold Recall Time or
Park Hold Time. After this time, the
system invokes the Hold Recall Time
again. Cycling between time Program
24-01-01 and 24-01-02 and Program
24-01-06 and 24-01-07 continues until
a user answers the call.
2-181
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Item
No.
Input Data
12
Exclusive Hold
Recall Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
13
Exclusive Hold
Recall Callback
Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
14
Park Hold Time Normal
0 ~ 64800 seconds
15
Delayed Call
Forwarding
Time (Call
Forward No
Answer)
0 ~ 64800 seconds
16
Transfer Recall
Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
17
DID/DISA No
Answer Time
(Disconnect or
IRG or VM)
0 ~ 64800 seconds
18
Disconnect after
Re-transfer to
IRG
Long
Conversation
Warning Tone
Time (Trunk to
Trunk)
Long
Conversation
Disconnect
(Trunk to Trunk)
0 ~ 64800 seconds
21
DISA Internal
Paging Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
22
DISA External
Paging Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
23
Page
Announcement
Duration
Mobile
Extension
answer time
Mobile
Extension
callback time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Program
20
Item
19
20
24
25
Description
Default
Related
Program
A call left on Exclusive Hold recalls the
extension that placed it on Hold after
this time.
An Exclusive Hold Recall rings an
extension for this time. If not picked
up, the call goes back on System
Hold.
A call left parked longer than this time
interval recalls the extension that
initially parked it.
If activated at an extension, Delayed
Call Forwarding occurs after this time.
This also sets how long a Transferred
call waits at an extension forwarded to
Voice Mail before routing to the called
extension mailbox.
An unanswered transferred call recalls
after this time to the extension that
initially transferred it.
A VRS/DISA caller can ring an
extension for this time before the
system sets the call as a Ring No
Answer. After this time expires, the call
follows the programmed Ring No
Answer routing (set in Program 25-03
and 25-04).
90 seconds
24-01-03
30 seconds
24-01-04
90 seconds
(V1.5 Changed)
24-01-06
10 seconds
24-02-03
30 seconds
(V1.5 Changed)
24-02-04
0 seconds
25-07-02
60 seconds
25-07-03
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Determine the time a DISA caller or
any trunk-to-trunk (such as Tandem
Trunking) conversation can last before
the Long Conversation tone is heard
1800 seconds
25-07-07
0 ~ 64800 seconds
This time determines how long the
system waits before disconnecting a
DISA caller or any trunk-to-trunk (such
as Tandem Trunking) conversation call
after the Long Conversation tone is
heard.
This is the maximum length of an
Internal Page placed by a DISA caller.
If the Page continues longer than this
time, the system terminates the DISA
call.
This is the maximum length of an
External Page placed by a DISA caller.
If the Page continues longer than this
time, the system terminates the DISA
call.
This timer sets the maximum length of
Page announcements. (Affects
External Paging only)
15 seconds
25-07-08
30 seconds
25-07-09
30 seconds
25-07-10
1200 seconds
31-01-02
1 ~ 64800 seconds
3 seconds
22-01-12
1 ~ 64800 seconds
15 seconds
20-01-16
Conditions


These timers are used when an extension or trunk is assigned to a class from 1 to 16 in 20-29-01
or 20-30-01. When the timer class is set to 0, the system-wide timer is used.
All defaults are the same as the system-wide timers.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-182
Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-34 : Remote Conference Group Setup
Level
SA
Program
Description
Use Program 20-34 : Remote Conference Group Setup to define the Remote Conference options.
Input Data
Remote Conference Group Number
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
20
1~4
Description
Default
Group1 = Conf1
Group2 = Conf2
Group3 = Conf3
Group4 = Conf4
Group1 = 1111
Group2 = 2222
Group3 = 3333
Group4 = 4444
8
01
Conference Name
Up to 12 characters
Enter the name displayed at the time of a
Remote Conference. This entry will display
on the keyset LCD.
02
Password
4 digits Fixed
(0 ~ 9, @ = wild
character)
Define the password of a Remote
Conference.
03
Max participants
0 ~ 32
04
Max Conference
Duration
0 ~ 64800 seconds
05
End Tone Alert Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Define the maximum number of
participants of a Remote Conference.
Define the maximum duration of a Remote
Conference.
When this time passes, the conference is
disconnected by the SL1100.
Determine how long prior disconnecting a
Remote Conference call (based on the
maximum conference duration above) the
SL1100 should send out a beep. This is
used to warn the conference participants of
the pending disconnect.
7200 seconds
300 seconds
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Conference, Remote
Programming Manual
2-183
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-35 : Extension's Operator Setting
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 20-35 : Extension’s Operator Setting to assign an extension to an operator group.
20
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Extension’s Operator Setting
Up to eight digits
Input Data
0 ~ 15 ( 0 = Not Set)
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-184
Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-36 : Trunk's Operator Setting
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 20-36 : Trunk’s Operator Setting to assign a trunk to an operator group.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Trunk’s Operator
Setting
20
001 ~ 096
Input Data
0 ~ 15
(0 = Not assigned)
Description
Default
Allows the user to select Operator Group
per trunk when DISA is being used. After
the user enters the 6 digit DISA password if
the user dials 0 this command will decide
which operator to route the call to.
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-185
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-37 : Operator Extension Group Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 20-37 : Operator Extension Group Setup to define the operator(s) in the operator
group.
20
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Operator Group
1 ~ 15
Operator Number
1~8
Item
Operator Extension Group Setup
Input Data
Up to eight digits
Default
None
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-186
Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-38 : Operator Group Setting
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 20-38 : Operator Group Setting to set up priority of a call when calling an operator
telephone.
20
Input Data
Operator Group
Item
No.
01
Item
Operator Access
Mode
1 ~ 15
Input Data
0 = Step
1 = Circular
Description
Assign if the operator is called, starting
with the first operator, every time (0) or a
different operator is tried first (1)
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-187
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-42 : Night Mode for each package
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 20-42 : Night Mode for each package to assigns the Night Mode to each package. This
Program uses ecology function (Program 20-43).
20
Input Data
PKG Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Ecology Mode
group No
Input Data
1~4
02 ~ 09
Description
Assign Night mode group number
per each package (slot)
Default
1
Related
Program
12-02
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-188
Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-43 : Power supply for each package
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 20-43 : Power supply for each package to assigns the Night Mode to each package.
This Program uses ecology function (Program 20-43).
20
Input Data
Item
No.
01
PKG Number
02 ~ 09
Operation Mode
01 ~ 08
Item
Ecology Mode
Input Data
0 = Cut the power
1 = Power Supply
Description
Assigns the power supply mode to each
package base
Default
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-189
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-44 : Watch Mode Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 20-44 : Watch Mode Setup to defines the watch mode.
20
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
Item
Internal Paging
Group for Watch
Message
External Paging
Group for Watch
Message
VRS Message for
Watch Mode
Interval Timer for
Watch Message
Input Data
Description
Default
0 ~ 32
Define Internal paging group number for
Watching message.
0
0~8
Define External paging group number for
Watching message
0
0 ~ 100
Define VRS number used for Watching
message
Define interval time for sending Watching
message.
0
0 ~ 60
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-190
Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-45 : Remote Watch Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 20-45 : Remote Watch Setup to defines the remote watch.
Input Data
Terminal Number
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
Item
20
1~6
Input Data
Ring Terminal for
Remote Inspection
Ring Time Setting
Ring Timer
Extension Number (Up
to 8 digits)
0000 ~ 2359
0 ~ 60
Auto Dial Number
Area Setting
VRS Message for
Answer
VRS Message for
Auto Dial
Time of Repeat Auto
Dial
Auto Dial Calling
Time
Interval of Auto Dial
0 ~ 999
0 ~ 100
0 ~ 100
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 3600
0 ~ 3600
Description
Extension number for Remote Inspection
Ringing start time for Inspected Extension
Ringing continue time for inspected
extension
Speed dial number when detect no answer
at extension and make emergency call
VRS message number when inspected
extension answered
VRS message number when emergency
call destination answered.
Repeat number for making emergency
call.
Calling continue time when making
emergency call.
Default
No Setting
0000
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-191
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-46 : Security Sensor Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 20-46 : Security Sensor Setup to defines the security sensor.
20
Input Data
Security Sensor Number
Item
No.
Item
01
Sensor Mode
02
Internal Paging
Group for Warning
Message
Ring Timer
03
04
Input Data
0
0~8
Define External paging group number for
Warning message.
Define VRS number used for Warning
message.
Define Speed dial number when sensor
detects warning.
Define VRS message number when
emergency call destination answered.
Define wait time before making emergency
auto dial.
Define repeat number for making
emergency call.
Define calling continue time when making
emergency call.
Define extension number for monitor from
outside. IP terminal cannot set as
monitored extension.
0
0 ~ 255
10
Time of Repeat Auto
Dial
Auto Dial Calling
Time
Monitored Terminal
11
Interval of Auto Dial
0 ~ 3600
07
08
09
Default
Define door port (084M 3, 4) to use as
Sensor.
Define Internal paging group number for
Warning message
0 ~ 100
06
Description
0 = Off
1 = On
0 ~ 32
VRS Message for
Warning
Auto Dial Number
Area Setting
VRS Message for
Answer
Auto Dial Wait Timer
05
1~6
0 ~ 999
0 ~ 100
0 ~ 64800
0 ~ 3600
Extension Number (Up
to 8 digits)
0
0
0
0
30
3
30
No Setting
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-192
Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-47 : Time pattern setting for Watch Mode
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 20-47 : Time pattern setting for Watch Mode to defines the watch mode time pattern.
Input Data
Time Pattern
Item
No.
01
Item
Watch Mode Time
Pattern
20
01 ~ 08
Input Data
0 = Off
1 = On
Description
Define watch mode on/off against time
pattern 1-8
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-193
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-48 : Time pattern setting for Security Sensor
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 20-48 : Time pattern setting for Security Sensor to defines the Security Sensor time
pattern.
20
Input Data
Time Pattern
Item
No.
Item
01
Security Sensor Time
Pattern
01 ~ 08
Input Data
0 = Off
1 = On
Description
Define security sensor on/off against time
pattern 1-8
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-194
Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-49 : Caller ID Shared Group Basic Data Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 20-49 : Caller ID Shared Group Basic Data Setup to defines the function mode for
each Caller ID shared group.
20
Input Data
Caller ID shared group Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Group Name
Input Data
Maximum 12
characters
01 ~ 08
Description
Caller ID shared group Name
Default
Related
Program
Refer below
15-02-67
Default
Group
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Group Name
Group1
Group2
Group3
Group4
Group5
Group6
Group7
Group8
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-195
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-55 : Delay Timer for Security Sensor
Level
IN
Program
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)
Description
20
Use Program 20-55 : Delay Timer for Secuirty Sensor to set time for Security to be operational.
Once it reach the time the Security will starts if the Security sets manually.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Sensor delay timer
Input Data
0 ~ 3600 (seconds)
0 = Sensor will start immediately
Default
60
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-196
Program 20 : System Option Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-01 : System Options for Outgoing Calls
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 21-01 : System Options for Outgoing Calls to set the system options for Outgoing Call
Service.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
Seizure Trunk
Line Mode
0 = Priority Route
1 = Circular Route
02
Intercom
Interdigit Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
03
Trunk Interdigit
Time (External)
0 ~ 64800 seconds
04
Dial Tone
Detection Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
05
Disconnect Time
when Dial Tone
not Detected
0 ~ 64800 seconds
06
Dial Pause at First
Digit
Toll Restriction
Override Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Preset Dial
Display Hold Time
Ringdown
Extension Timer
(Hotline Start)
Dial Digits for Toll
Restriction Path
0 ~ 64800 seconds
07
08
09
10
Programming Manual
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 36
Description
Default
Select the trunk based off the Trunk
Route Priority (0) or based off the
trunk that has not been used in the
longest time (1).
When placing Intercom calls,
extension users must dial each digit
in this time.
The system waits for this time to
expire before placing the call in a
talk state (Call Timer starts after
time expires, Voice Over and
Barge-In is not allowed until after
time expires).
If dial tone detection is enabled, the
system waits this time for the Telco
to return dial tone. When the time
expires, the system assumes dial
tone is not present. To disable this
time (and have the system wait
continuously), enter 0.
If 14-02-11 is enabled, the system
skips over a trunk if dial tone is not
detected. This option pertains to
calls placed using Speed Dial, ARS,
Last Number Redial or Save
Number dialed. It does not pertain
to line key or Direct Trunk Access
calls.
0
Related
Program
14-05
14-06
10 seconds
10
14-02-08
5 seconds
14-02-05
0
(V2.1 Changed)
1
After dialing the Toll Restriction
Override codes, the system
removes Toll Restriction from the
extension for this time.
10 seconds
20-08-06
21-07
10
A Ringdown extension
automatically calls its programmed
destination after this time.
If this option is programmed with an
entry other than 0, a call does not
have a talk path unless the user
dials at least the number of digits
entered in this option when placing
an outgoing call.
This means that an entry of 4 or
higher in this program causes a
problem when dialing 911 (USA
only). Since it is only a 3-digit
number, the call does not have a
talk path, preventing the emergency
dispatcher from hearing the caller.
This option should be kept at its
default setting of 0 to prevent any
problems with dialing 911 (USA
only).
0 seconds
20-08-09
21-11
0
2-197
21
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Item
No.
Item
11
Inter-Digit Time
for Toll
Restriction Path
Control
Dial E911 Routing
Without Trunk
Access
0 ~ 60 seconds
13
Alarm Ring Timer
(E911)
0, 1~ 64800 seconds
(0 = Off)
14
Forced Account
Code Inter-digit
Timer
Outgoing Disable
on Incoming Line
(Toll Restriction)
0 ~ 64800 seconds
16
Supervise Dial
Detection Timer
0 ~ 64800 seconds
17
Restriction Digit
in Outgoing
Disable on
Incoming Line
Digits 1 ~ 9
18
Reset Dial After
Failure of Trunk
Access
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
19
Do-Not-Call-Setup
0 = No service
1 = Extented common
restriction
12
Input Data
0 = Trunk Access
Code Required
1 = Trunk Access
Code Not Required
Program
21
15
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
Description
Default
Related
Program
0
If enabled (1), an extension user
can dial 911 (USA only) without first
dialing a trunk access code or
pressing a line key. If disabled (0),
an extension user must dial a trunk
access code (e.g., 9) or press a line
key before dialing 911 (USA only).
Use this option to set the duration of
the E911 Alarm Ring Time. If set for
0, the E911 Alarm does not ring.
The system waits this time for a
user to enter a Forced Account
code.
Enable or disable the Outgoing
Disable on Incoming Line feature.
With the Outgoing Disable on
Incoming Line feature, if dial tone is
not detected after the extension
answers an incoming line, the
system determines the call is
unable to complete and releases
the DTMF receiver.
With the Outgoing Disable on
Incoming Line feature, determine
the number of digits to be dialed
before the call should be
disconnected.
Enable (1) or Disable (0) the ability
to continue to dial codes or
extensions after receiving Trunk
Busy. This needs to be set to
Enabled (1) for the Forced Trunk
Disconnect feature to work.
0
0
11-12-56
20-08-16
3 seconds
0
(V2.1 Changed)
20 seconds
4
15-01-05
21-01-16
21-01-17
80-03-01
15-01-05
21-01-16
21-01-17
80-03-01
15-01-05
21-01-15
21-01-16
80-03-01
1
0
15-01-07
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Central Office Calls, Placing
2-198
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions to assign Program 14-06 routes to
extensions.
21
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum eight digits
Item
No.
Day/Night Mode
Route Table Number
Default
Related Program
01
1~8
0 ~ 25
(0 = No setting)
1
14-06
14-01-07
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-199
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-03 : Trunk Group Routing for Trunks
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 21-03 : Trunk Group Routing for Trunks to set the Trunk Route Table for Automatic
External Call Forward. The Route Table is set in Program 14-06.
21
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
001 ~ 096
Item
No.
Day/Night Mode
Route Table Number
Default
Related Program
01
1~8
0 ~ 25
(0 = No setting)
1
14-06
14-07-01
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Trunk Group Routing
2-200
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-04 : Toll Restriction Class for Extensions
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 21-04 : Toll Restriction Class for Extensions to assign a Toll Restriction class to an
extension. The details of Toll Restriction are defined in Program 21-05 and 21-06.
21
A telephone and a trunk will have a Restriction Class. The higher class applies for outgoing calls.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum eight digits
Item
No.
Day/Night Mode
Restriction Class
Default
Related Program
01
1~8
1 ~ 15
2
14-01-08
21-05
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-201
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-05 : Toll Restriction Class
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 21-05 : Toll Restriction Class to set the system Toll Restriction classes (1 ~ 15).
21
Input Data
Toll Restriction Class Number
Item
No.
Item
01
International
Call Restriction
Table
0 = Unassigned (No)
1 = Assigned (Yes)
02
International
Call Permit
Code Table
0 = Unassigned (No)
1 = Assigne02 d (Yes)
04
Maximum
Number of
Digits Table
Assignment
1 ~ 4 = Table
0 = Disable (None)
05
Common Permit
Code Table
0 = Unassigned (No)
1 = Assigned (Yes)
It chooses whether the table set up
by 21-06-04 is referred to, or not
referred to.
06
Common
Restriction
Table
0 = Unassigned (No)
1 = Assigned (Yes)
It chooses whether the table set up
by 21-06-05 is referred to, or not
referred to.
07
Permit Code
Table
1 ~ 4 = Table
0 = Disable (None)
Set the tables 1 ~ 4 when referring
to the table set up by 21-06-06.
08
Restriction
Table
Restriction for
Common Speed
Dials
1 ~ 4 = Table
0 = Disable (None)
0 = Does Not Restrict
1 = Following
Restriction Check
10
Restriction for
Group Speed
Dials
0 = Does Not Restrict
1 = Following
Restriction Check
11
Intercom Call
Restriction
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
Set the tables 1 ~ 4 when referring
to the table set up by 21-06-07.
Use this option to enable/disable
Toll Restriction for Common Speed
Dialing numbers. If enabled, System
Speed Dialing numbers have the
same restrictions as manually dialed
numbers.
Use this option to enable/disable
Toll Restriction for Group Speed
Dialing numbers. If enabled, Group
Speed Dialing numbers have the
same restrictions as manually dialed
numbers.
Determines if incoming and
outgoing intercom calls are allowed.
09
2-202
Input Data
1 ~ 15
Description
This option assigns/unassigns the
International Call Restrict Table for
the Toll Restriction Class you are
programming. Enter International
Call Restrict Table data in Program
21-06-01.
This option assigns/unassigns the
International Call Permit Table for
the Toll Restriction Class you are
programming. Enter International
Call Permit Table data in Program
21-06-02.
Select the table (defined in
21-06-03) to be used to determine
the maximum number of digits
allowed for outgoing calls.
Default
Related
Program
Class No1, 6 ~
15 : 0
Class No2 ~ 5 :
1
21-06-01
Class No1, 3 ~
15 : 0
Class No2 : 1
21-06-02
Class No1 ~ 2, 6
~ 15 : 0
Class No3 : 1
Class No4 : 2
Class No5 : 3
Class No1, 8 ~
15 : 0
Class No2 ~ 7 :
1
Class No1, 6 ~
15 : 0
Class No2 ~ 5 :
1
Class No1 ~ 2, 6
~ 15 : 0
Class No3 : 1
Class No4 : 2
Class No5 : 3
0
21-06-03
21-06-04
21-06-05
21-06-06
21-06-07
0
0
0
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
ISSUE 1.1
Item
No.
12
SL1100
Item
PBX Call
Restriction
Input Data
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
13
Restriction of
Tie Line Calls
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
14
Trunk Transfer
Restriction on
Incomplete
Dial
Common Hold
Restriction on
Incomplete
Dial
0 = Not allow
1 = Allow
15
0 = Not allow
1 = Allow
Description
Default
Use this option to set how the
system Toll Restricts calls over PBX
trunks. If you enable PBX Toll
Restriction, the system begins Toll
Restriction after the PBX access
code. The user cannot dial a PBX
extension. If you disable PBX Toll
Restriction, the system only restricts
calls that contain the PBX access
code. The system does not restrict
calls to PBX extensions. Refer to
the PBX compatibility feature. Make
sure Program 21-05-04 (Maximum
Number of Digits Table Assignment)
allows for PBX Toll Call Dialing
(normally 12 digits).
It chooses whether the toll
restriction of the dial set up by 34-08
is enabled or disabled.
If this program is set to 1, you can
transfer the outgoing trunk which
you dialed incompletely.
Class No1 ~ 6, 8
~ 15 : 0
Class No7 : 1
If this program is set to 1, you can
hold the outgoing trunk which you
dialed in restriction check.
Related
Program
Program
0
34-08
0
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-203
21
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-06 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 21-06 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup to set the system Toll Restriction data. Dial 1
~ 9, 0, *, # can be entered in each table.
21
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Table
Input Data
01
International Call Restriction Table
This option lets you program the Restrict
Table for international calls.
The system has 10 International Call Restrict
Tables.
Each entry can have up to four digits.
International Call Permit Code Table
This option lets you program the Permit
Table for international calls.
The system has 20 International Call Permit
Tables.
Each entry can have up to six digits.
Maximum Number Digits Table
Assignment
This option selects the maximum number of
digits allowed in outgoing calls for each table.
Common Permit Code Table
This option lets you program the Common
Permit Code Table.
This table contains up to 10 codes you
commonly allow users to dial.
Common Restriction Table
This option lets you program the Common
Restrict Code Table.
This table contains up to 10 codes you
commonly prevent users from dialing.
Permit Code Table
This option lets you program the Permit
Code Tables.
If the system has Toll Restriction enabled,
users can dial numbers only if permitted by
these tables and the Common Permit Table
(21-06-04).
There are four Permit Code Tables, with up
to 200 entries in each table.
The system permits calls exactly as you
enter the code.
Deny Restriction Table
This option lets you program the Restrict
Code Tables.
If the system has Toll Restriction enabled,
users cannot dial numbers listed in these
tables.
There are four Restrict Code Tables, with up
to 60 entries in each table.
The system restricts calls exactly as you
enter the code.
1 ~ 10
Dial
(Up to four digits)
Tables 1 ~ 10 = No
setting
1 ~ 20
Dial
(Up to six digits)
Tables 1 ~ 20 = No
setting
1~4
4 ~ 30
Tables 1 ~ 4 = 30
1 ~ 10
Dial
(Up to four digits)
Tables 1 ~ 10 = No
setting
1 ~ 10
Dial
(Up to 12 digits)
Tables 1 ~ 10 = No
setting
1 ~ 4 (table)
001 ~ 200 (Entry)
Dial
(Up to 12 digits)
Tables 1 ~ 4 = No setting
1 ~ 4 (table)
1 ~ 60 (Entry)
Dial
(Up to 12 digits)
Tables 1 ~ 4 = No setting
02
03
04
05
06
07
2-204
Default
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Item
No.
Item
Table
Input Data
Default
08
1~4
Dial
(Up to two digits)
Tables 1 ~ 4 = No setting
09
PBX Access Code
Use this option to enter the PBX Access
Code.
When the system is behind a PBX, this is the
code users dial to access a PBX trunk.
Toll Restriction begins after the PBX access
code.
For PBX trunks (Program 14-04) the system
only Toll Restricts calls that contain the
access code.
Always program this option when the system
is behind a PBX, even if you don’t want to
use Toll Restriction.
PBX Access Codes can have up to two
digits, using 0-9, #, * and LINE KEY 1 (don’t
care).
When using Account Codes, do not use an
asterisk in a PBX access code. Otherwise,
after the *, the trunk stops sending digits to
the central office.
Entries 1~4 correspond to the 4 PBX Access
Codes.
Each code can have up to two digits.
Specific Dial Outgoing Code
1 ~ 20
10
Outgoing Call Code Setup
1 ~ 20
Program
21
Dial
(Up to eight
digits)
Dial
(Up to four digits)
Tables 1 ~ 20 = No
setting
Tables 1 ~ 20 = No
setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-205
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-07 : Toll Restriction Override Password Setup
Level
SA
Program
21
Description
Use Program 21-07 : Toll Restriction Override Password Setup to assign Toll Restriction Override
codes to extension ports. Each code must have four digits, using any combination of 0 ~ 9, # and *.
Each extension can have a separate code, or many extensions can share the same override code.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Maximum eight digits
Item
Password
Input Data
Four Digits (Fixed)
Default
No setting
Related
Program
21-01-07
20-08-06
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-206
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-08 : Repeat Dial Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 21-08 : Repeat Dial Setup to define the automatic Repeat Dial data.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
Repeat Redial Count
0 ~ 255
02
Repeat Redial
Interval Time
Repeat Dial Calling
Timer
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Time for Send Busy
Tone for ISDN Trunk
0 ~ 64800 seconds
03
04
Input Data
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Description
Default
Sets how many times a Repeat Redial
automatically repeats if the call does not
go through.
Set the time between Repeat Redial
attempts.
After dialing the trunk call, Repeat Redial
maintains the call after this time. After this
time, the system terminates the call, waits
the Repeat Redial Time (Timer 02) and
tries again.
Sets the time (sec) to send out Busy Tone
with an ISDN line, when called party is
busy.
3
60 seconds
30 seconds
0 second
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-207
21
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-09 : Dial Block Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 21-09 : Dial Block Setup to define the Dial Blocking Toll Restriction Class and Dial
Block Password to be used by the Supervisor extension.
21
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
Toll Restriction Class
With Dial Block
Supervisor Password
02
Input Data
1 ~ 15
0 ~ 9,*, #
(4-digit fixed)
Description
Assign a Toll Restriction Class of Service
when the Dial Block feature is used.
Assign a 4-digit password to be used by
the supervisor to enable or disable Dial
Block for other extensions.
Default
15
No Setting
Conditions

This function works by password and Class of Service control (the supervisor is not an assigned
extension). If Dial Block is available for all Classes of Service, everyone may become a
supervisor if they know the Dial Block password.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-208
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-10 : Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extension
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 21-10 : Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extension to define the Toll Restriction Class
to each extension when the extension is set for Dial Block Restriction. If this data is 0, Toll Restriction
Class follows Program 21-09-01.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Maximum eight digits
Item
Toll Restriction Class
Input Data
0, 1 ~ 15
(0 = No setting)
Default
0 (No setting)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-209
21
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-11 : Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 21-11 : Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment to define the Hotline destination
number for each extension number.
21
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
Item
01
Hotline Destination Number
Maximum eight digits
Input Data
Default
1 ~ 0, *, #, Pause, Hook Flash, @ (Code to wait
for answer supervision) (maximum 36 digits)
No Setting
Related
Program
20-08-09
21-01-09
Conditions

The @ code is used to make an outbound call automatically to a DISA Trunk or to VM Auto
Attendant. This code can only be used on ISDN outbound calls. Internal calls and analog
outbound calls are not supported.
Feature Cross Reference

Ringdown Extension (Hotline), Internal/External
2-210
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-12 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 21-12 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks to assign Calling Party Numbers
for each trunk (maximum 16 digits per entry). When a call is made by an extension which does not have
an Extension Calling Number assigned (Program 21-13), the system sends the calling number for the
ISDN trunk defined in 21-12.
If the Calling Party Number is assigned in both Programs 21-12 and 21-13, the system sends the data in
Program 21-13.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item No.
01
Item
Calling Party Number Data
001 ~ 096
Input Data
1 ~ 0, *, # (maximum 16 digits)
Default
No setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

ISDN Compatibility
Programming Manual
2-211
21
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-13 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions
Level
IN
Program
Description
21
Use Program 21-13 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions to assign each extension a
Calling Party Number (maximum 16 digits per entry). The calling number is the subscriber number of
the dial-in number. When a call is made by an extension which does not have an Extension Calling
Number assigned (Program 21-13), the system sends the calling number for the ISDN trunk defined in
Program 21-12.
If a Calling Party Number is assigned in both Programs 21-12 and 21-13, the system sends the data in
Program 21-13.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item No.
01
Item
Calling Party Number Data
Maximum eight digits
Input Data
Default
1 ~ 0, *, # (maximum 16 digits)
No setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

ISDN Compatibility
2-212
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-14 : Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup
Level
SA
Program
Description
Use Program 21-14 : Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup to assign the password and Toll
Restriction Class for Walking Toll Restriction. Each code has six digits, using any combination of 0 ~ 9,
# and *.
Input Data
ID Table Number
Item
No.
01
02
1 ~ 100
Item
User ID
Walking Toll Restriction Class
Number
Input Data
Dial (Six digits)
1 ~ 15
Default
No Setting
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Code Restriction/Toll Restriction
Programming Manual
2-213
21
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-15 : Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions
Level
IN
Program
Description
21
Use Program 21-15 : Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions to designate the alternate
trunk access route accessed when a user dials the Alternate Trunk Route Access Code. Refer to
Program 11-09 : Trunk Access Code when setting up alternate trunk codes. Refer to 14-06 : Trunk
Group Routing to set up the trunk routes. When entering data for this option, enter the route number or
0 to prevent routing.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum eight digits
Item No.
Day/Night Mode
Route Table Number
Default
01
1~8
0 ~ 25
(0 = No setting)
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Central Office Calls, Placing
2-214
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-17 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 21-17 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk set the SIP calling party
number for individual trunks.
21
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
01
001 ~ 096
Item
Calling Party Number (V2.0
Changed)
Input Data
Up to 16 digits
(1 ~ 0, *, #)
Default
No Setting
Related
Program
15-01-04
20-08-13
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-215
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-18 : IP Trunk (H.323) Calling Party Number Setup for
Extension
Level
Program
IN
Description
21
Use Program 21-18 : IP Trunk (H.323) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension to assign the
Calling Party Number for each extension. The assigned number is sent to the exchange when the caller
places an outgoing call.
When the Calling Party Number is assigned by Programs 21-17, 21-18 and 21-19, the system uses the data
in Programs 21-18 and 21-19.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Up to eight digits
Item
Calling Party Number
Input Data
Up to 16 digits
(1 ~ 0, *, #)
Default
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-216
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-19 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for
Extension
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 21-19 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension to set the SIP
calling party number for an individual extension.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Up to eight digits
Item
Calling Party Number
Input Data
Up to 16 Digits
(1 ~ 0, *, #)
Default
No Setting
Related
Program
15-01-04
20-08-13
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-217
21
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-20 : SIP Trunk Call Discernment Setup for Extension
Level
SB
Program
Description
Use Program 21-20 : SIP Trunk Call Discernment Setup for Extension to set the SIP Trunk Call
Discernment.
21
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Up to eight digits
Item
Discernment Tone
Input Data
0 = Off
1 = On
Default
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-218
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-21 : Toll Restriction for Trunks (Seized Trunk Basis
Setting)
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 21-21 : Toll Restriction for Trunks (Seized Trunk Basis Setting) to define the toll
restriction class to each trunk. The details of toll restriction are defined by Programs 21-05 and 21-06.
This program is compared to Station Restriction Class. The higher class is applied.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Trunk Port Number
001 ~ 096
Day/Night Mode
1 ~ 9 (9 = Power Failure mode)
Item
Restriction Class
Input Data
1 ~ 15
Description
Enter the Toll Restriction Class for
the selected trunk.
Default
1
Related
Program
14-01-08
21-05
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-219
21
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-22 : CO Message Waiting Indication - Call Back Settings
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 21-22 : CO Message Waiting Indication - Call Back Settings to define the settings of
CO Message Waiting Indication.
21
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
Item
01
CO MWI Call Back
Enabling
02
CO MWI Call Back
Number Area Setting
001 ~ 096
Input Data
0 = No VMWI Service
1 = Enable VMWI
Service
0 ~ 999
Description
Enable or Disable CO MWI Call Back.
Define the Speed Dial Bin number for MWI
Call Back.
Default
0
999
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-220
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-24 : Forced Access Dial Data
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 21-24 : Forced Access Dial Data to set for Emergency number data. First digit of dialing
data should be same as trunk access code.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Dialing Number
Input Data
1 ~ 0, *, #
(maximum 16 digits)
Description
Define the Emergency Number Data.
Default
No Setting
(V2.1 Changed)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-221
21
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-01 : System Options for Incoming Calls
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 22-01 : System Options for Incoming Calls to define the system options for incoming
calls.
22
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Description
Default
Use this option to determine if
Intercom calls or trunk calls have
answer priority when both are
ringing simultaneously.
If enabled, an incoming call that
rings longer than the Ring No
Answer Alarm interval (22-01-03),
changes to a unique ring cadence to
indicate that the call has been
ringing too long. If disabled, this
does not occur.
If a trunk rings a multiline telephone
longer than this interval, the system
changes the ring cadence. This
indicates to the user that the call
has been ringing too long.
A DIL that rings its programmed
destination longer than this interval
diverts to the DIL No Answer Ring
Group (set in Program 22-08).
In systems with DID
Ring-No-Answer Intercept, this sets
the Ring-No-Answer time. This time
is how long a DID call rings the
destination extension before
rerouting to the intercept ring group.
1
15-02-22
0
22-01-03
22-01-04
60 seconds
22-01-02
01
Incoming Call
Priority
0 = Intercom Call
Priority
1 = Trunk Call Priority
02
Incoming Call
Ring No Answer
Alarm
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
03
Ring No Answer
Alarm Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
04
DIL No Answer
Recall Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
06
DID
Ring-No-Answer
Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
07
DID Incoming
Ring Group No
Answer Time
DID Pilot Call No
Answer Time
DID to Trunk to
Trunk no answer
timer
VRS Waiting
Message
Operation
0 ~ 64800 seconds
20 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
60 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
20 seconds
0 = Enable Always
1 = Change by Manual
Operation
Set up the operation mode for Auto
Attendant and Queuing Message.
0
11
VRS Waiting
Message
Interval Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Setup the sending duration time of
the Auto - Attendant & Queuing.
The message is repeatedly sent out
during the specified time.
20 seconds
12
Mobile
Extension
answer time
0~ 64800 seconds
08
09
10
Related
Program
0 second
20 seconds
3 seconds
22-12
22-14
22-15
22-08
22-04
22-01-04
20-15-11
15-07
22-14-06
22-15-06
41-11-06
15-22-04
Conditions
None
2-222
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Feature Cross Reference

Central Office Calls, Answering
Program
22
Programming Manual
2-223
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-02 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 22-02 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup to assign the incoming trunk type for each trunk.
There is one item for each Night Service Mode.
22
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
Day/Night
Mode
01
1~8
001 ~ 096
Incoming Type
Default
Description
0 = Normal
1 = VRS (second dial tone if
no VRS installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS
8 = DID (DDI) Mode
Switching
0
Use this option to set the feature type for
the trunk you are programming.
Related
Program
14-04
Conditions



When connecting to T1 trunks, after changing Program 22-02-01 to match the Telco connected
T1 service type, the T1 cable or the T1 unit must be unplugged and then reconnected for the T1
unit to sync.
When the trunk type is set to 3 (DID), the DID Transfer to Destination in 22-11-04 for each DID
feature is not supported. This feature is supported only for DID trunks when assigned as VRS.
When the trunk type is set to 3 (DID), the DID Intercept Destination feature for each DID is not
supported. This feature is supported only for DID trunks assigned as VRS.
Feature Cross Reference

Central Office Calls, Answering
2-224
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-03 : Trunk Ring Tone Range
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 22-03 : Trunk Ring Tone Range to select the ring tone range for the trunk. The trunk
uses a ring tone in the range selected when it rings an extension. Eight ring tones are available.
Customize the Trunk Ring Tones in Program 82-01.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
01
001 ~ 096
Input Data
Description
Default
Related
Program
0= Ring Tone Pattern 1
1= Ring Tone Pattern 2
2= Ring Tone Pattern 3
3= Ring Tone Pattern 4
4= Melody 1
5= Melody 2
6= Melody 3
7= Melody 4
8= Melody 5
Use this program to select the ring
tone range for the trunk. The trunk
uses a ring tone in the range
selected when it rings an extension.
Eight ring tones are available.
0
15-02
Item
Ring Tone
Pattern
Table 2-5 Program 22-03 - Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns
Incoming Signal
Frequency Pattern
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Pattern 3
Pattern 4
Type
Frequency 1
Frequency 2
Modulation
High
Middle
Low
High
Middle
Low
High
Middle
Low
High
Middle
Low
1100Hz
660Hz
520Hz
1100Hz
660Hz
520Hz
2000Hz
1400Hz
1100Hz
2000Hz
1400Hz
1100Hz
1400Hz
760Hz
660Hz
1400Hz
760Hz
660Hz
760Hz
660Hz
540Hz
760Hz
660Hz
540Hz
16Hz
16Hz
16Hz
8Hz
8Hz
8Hz
16Hz
16Hz
16Hz
8Hz
8Hz
8Hz
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Selectable Ring Tones
Programming Manual
2-225
22
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-04 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment
Level
SA
Program
22
Description
Use Program 22-04 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment to assign extensions to Ring
Groups. Calls ring extensions according to Ring Group programming. Use Program 22-05 to assign
trunks to Ring Groups and use Program 22-06 to set the ringing for the phones. An Incoming Ring
Group (IRG) can have up to 32 extension numbers assigned.
There are 25 available Ring Groups.
Input Data
Incoming Ring Group Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Extension
Number
01 ~ 25
Input Data
Maximum eight Digits
Description
Use this program to assign
extensions (up to 32) to Ring
Groups. Calls ring extensions
according to Ring Group
programming.
Default
Refer below
Related
Program
22-02
22-05
22-06
Default

Group01 has 101, 102, 103, 104, 105, 106, 107, and 108 (First 8 ports ringing)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Ring Groups
2-226
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment to assign trunks to incoming Ring
Groups. There are 25 available Ring Groups.
22
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
Day/Night
Mode
01
1~8
Incoming Group
Number
0 = No setting
01 ~ 25 = Incoming
Ring group
102 = VM
001 ~ 096
Default
1
Description
Use this program to assign Normal
Ring Trunks (22-02) to Incoming
Ring Groups (22-04).
Related
Program
Note
22-04
22-06
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Ring Groups
Programming Manual
2-227
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-06 : Normal Incoming Ring Mode
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 22-06 : Normal Incoming Ring Mode to define whether or not an extension should ring
for the Normal Incoming Ring Mode.
22
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum eight digits
Item No.
Day/Night Mode
01
1~8
Incoming Group
Number
0 = No Ring
1 = Ring
Default
Related Program
1
22-04
22-05
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Central Office Calls, Answering
2-228
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-07 : DIL Assignment
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 22-07 : DIL Assignment to assign the destination extension or Department Calling
Group for each DIL Incoming trunk. A DIL rings an extension directly, without any other Access Map or
Ring Group programming. If an extension has a line key, the DIL rings the line key. Use Program 22-02
to designate a trunk as a DIL. You can make eight DIL assignments, one for each Night Service mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item No.
Day/Night Mode
01
1~8
001 ~ 096
Number of Transferring Destination
Assign extension or department group number for DIL trunk
Extension Number (maximum eight digits)
Default
No setting
Conditions

Program 22-02 must be set to four for the trunk.
Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward Line (DIL)
Programming Manual
2-229
22
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination
Level
IN
Program
22
Description
For DIL Delayed Ringing, use Program 22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination to assign the DIL No
Answer Ring Group. An unanswered DIL rings this group after the DIL No Answer Time expires
(Program 22-01-04). DIL Delayed Ringing can also reroute outside calls ringing a Ring Group. Make
eight assignments, one for each Night Service mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
Day/Night
Mode
01
1~8
001 ~ 096
Incoming Group Number
0 = No setting
01 ~ 25 = Incoming Ring group
102 = VM
Default
Note
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference


Direct Inward Line (DIL)
Ring Group
2-230
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-09 : DID Basic Data Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 22-09 : DID Basic Data Setup to define the basic setting of Dial-In incoming calls for
each trunk group.
22
Input Data
Trunk Group Number
01 ~ 25
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
Expected Number of
Digits
1~8
02
Received Vacant
Number Operation
03
Sub-Addressing
Mode
04
05
DID Receiving Mode
for ISDN
Local Code Digits
06
Local Code
07
08
Pilot Code
T302 Time-out
Operation
0 = Disconnect (Cut)
1 = Transfer (Refer to
22-12 : DID Intercept
Ring Group)
0 = Extension # Specify
(Intercom)
1 = DID Conversion
Table
0 = Enbloc Receiving
1 = Overlap Receiving
0 ~ 15 (0 = No Local
Code)
Dial (maximum 16
digits)
Dial (1 digit : 0 ~ 9)
0 = Disconnect (Cut)
1 = Transfer (Refer to
22-12 : DID Intercept
Ring Group)
2 = Search
Description
Default
Enter the number of digits the table
expects to receive from the Telco. Use this
program to make the system compatible
with 3- and 4-digit DID service. If ISDN
trunks, we analyze the last digits that are
set here. If it is T-1 or analog DID, it
analyzes the first digits that are assigned
here.
Use this option to enable or disable Vacant
Number Intercept.
2
0
0
0
(Only Overlap Receiving Mode)
0
(Only Overlap Receiving Mode)
No Setting
(Only Overlap Receiving Mode)
(Only Overlap Receiving Mode)
No Setting
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Programming Manual
2-231
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-10 : DID Translation Table Setup
Level
IN
Program
22
Description
Use Program 22-10 : DID Translation Table Setup to specify the size of the DID Translation Tables.
There are 800 (V1.5 or higher) Translation Table entries that you can allocate among 20 Translation
Tables.
Input Data
Conversion Table Area Number
Item No.
01
01 ~ 20
Item
Input Data
1st Area Setup (Start Address)
1st Area Setup (End Address)
2nd Area Setup (Start Address)
2nd Area Setup (End Address)
0 ~ 800
(0 = No setting)
Default Table
Conversion
Table Area
1
2
3
4
5
:
20
1st
Start Table
1
201
401
601
0
:
0
2nd
End Table
200
400
600
800
0
:
0
Start Table
0
0
0
0
0
:
0
End Table
0
0
0
0
0
:
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
2-232
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-11 : DID Translation Number Conversion
Level
SA
Program
Description
Use Program 22-11 : DID Translation Number Conversion to specify for each Translation Table
entry (800).

The digits received by the system (eight maximum)

The extension the system dials after translation (36 digits maximum)

The name that should show on the dialed extension display when it rings (12 characters
maximum)

The Transfer Target - 1 and 2
If the Transfer Targets are busy or receive no answer, those calls are transferred to the final transfer
destination (Program 22-10).
Operation Mode

Use the following chart when entering and editing text for names. Press the key once for the first
character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press 2 three times.
Key for Entering Names
When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can have up to 12 digits.
Use this keypad digit ...
When you want to ...
1
Enter characters: 1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | }
ÁÀÂÃÅÆÇÉÊìó0
2
Enter characters: A-C, a-c, 2.
3
Enter characters: D-F, d-f, 3.
4
Enter characters: G-I, g-i, 4.
5
Enter characters: J-L, j-l, 5.
6
Enter characters: M-O, m-o, 6.
7
Enter characters: P-S, p-s, 7.
8
Enter characters: T-V, t-v, 8.
9
Enter characters: W-Z, w-z, 9.
0
Enter characters: 0 ! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) ô õ ú å ä æ ö ü α ε θ В
*
Enter characters: * + , - . / : ; < = > ? π Σ σ Ω ∞ ¢ £
#
# = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed - ex :
TOM). Pressing # again = Space. (In system programming mode, use the right arrow
soft key instead to accept and/or add a space.)
Clear/Back
Clear the character entry one character at a time.
Flash
Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.
Input Data
Conversion Table Number
Item
No.
01
Input Data
04
Received Number
This is the received DID digits.
Target Number
Enter the destination number to which
the DID number is sent.
DID Name
This is the name that is assigned to the
DID digits when it rings the extension.
Transfer Operation Mode
05
Transfer Destination Number 1
02
03
Programming Manual
001 ~ 800
Description
Maximum eight digits
(0 ~ 9, *, #, @)
Maximum 36 digits
(0 ~ 9, *, #, @)
Maximum 12 characters
0 = No Transfer
1 = Busy
2 = No Answer
3 = Busy/No Answer
0 = No setting
Default
See Default Value
See Default Value
No setting
0
0
2-233
22
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Item
No.
Input Data
06
Transfer Destination Number 2
400 - Allow the outside party to dial a
different extension number in the
translation table (for example, ring no
answer to a dialed number, the caller
then hears a dial tone, allowing them to
enter another Valid Extension Number).
401 - Provide the caller with DISA dialing
options (requires using the DISA
password).
Program
22
This applies to 22-11-05 and
22-11-06.
Call Waiting
Program 20-09-07 overrides this setting.
Maximum Number of DID Calls
Music on Hold Source
07
08
09
11
Incoming Ring Group Transfer
Enable (1) or disable (0) each
conversation tables ability to follow the
Ring Group programming defined in
Program 22-12-01 : DID Intercept Ring
Group.
If Program 22-11-05 : DID Translation
Number Conversion, Transfer
Destination Number 1 and Program
22-11-06 : DID Translation Number
Conversion, Transfer Destination
Number 2 are set, the priority of
transferring is in this order: Program
22-11-05 then Program 22-11-06 then if
Program 22-11-11 is enabled, Program
22-12-01.
Description
Default
01 ~ 25 = Incoming Rin Group
102 = VM
201 ~ 232 = Department Group
400 = VRS
401 = DISA
501 ~ 599 = DISA (VRS Message No.)
1000 ~ 1999 = Common ABB Dial (000 ~ 999)
0
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
0 ~ 096 (0 = No limit)
0 = IC/MOH Port
1 = BGM Port
0 = Disable (Caller will hear Ringback)
1 = Enabled (Go to normal ring)
0
0
0
0
If the terminal is in Power Cutting
mode from the ecology feature this command
will not be applied.
Default
The default value of Programs 22-11-01 and 22-11-02 is shown as below.
Conversion Table
Received number
Target number
1
2
:
99
100
101
:
800
1
2
:
99
0
No Setting
:
No Setting
101
102
:
199
100
No Setting
:
No Setting
Conditions
When the trunk type is set to 3 (DID) in 22-02-01, the DID Transfer Destination for each DID feature is
not supported. This feature is supported only for DID trunks when assigned as VRS.
Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
2-234
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group
Level
IN
Program
Description
For each DID Translation Table, use Program 22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group to define the first
destination group for DID calls.
Depending on the entry in Programs 22-09-02 and 22-11-04, the incoming calls route to the first
destination group by the following:

Vacant number intercept (vacant number means that no phone is connected, no station unit is
installed, or the extension number is not defined in Program 11-02)

Busy intercept

Ring-no-answer intercept
If the destination is 0, the calls are forwarded to the trunk ring group defined in Program 22-11 based on
the table assigned to the DID trunk.
If Programs 22-11-05 and 22-11-06 are set, the priority of transferring is in this order: Program 22-11-05
+ Program 22-11-06 + Program 22-12.
For busy and no-answer calls, if the first and third destinations are programmed, but the second
destination is not, the incoming call goes to the third destination after the first destination. If the
first and second destinations are not defined, but the third destination is, the call goes directly
to the third destination.
Input Data
Conversion Table Area Number
Item
No.
Day/Night Mode
01
1~8
01 ~ 20
Incoming Group Number
0 = No setting
01 ~ 25 = Incoming Ring group
102 = VM
Default
Note
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Programming Manual
2-235
22
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-13 : DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment
Level
IN
Program
22
Description
Use Program 22-13 : DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment to assign the DID Trunk
Groups to DID Translation Tables. DID trunks should be in their own group. If you have more than one
type of DID trunk, put each type in a separate Trunk Group. For each Trunk Group, you make a
Translation Table entry for each Night Service mode.
Input Data
Trunk Group Number
1 ~ 25
Item No.
Day/Night Mode
Conversion Table Area Number
Default
01
1~8
0 ~ 20
(0 = No setting)
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
2-236
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-14 : VRS Delayed Message for IRG
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 22-14 : VRS Delayed Message for IRG (Incoming Group Ring) to define for each
incoming ring group the timers, VRS message number and type of tone for VRS Waiting Message.
22
Input Data
Incoming Ring Group Number
Item
No.
Item
01
1 Delayed Message
Start Time
st
1 Delayed Message
Number
02
st
st
03
1 Delayed Message
Sending Count
04
2 Delayed Message
Number
05
2 Delayed Message
Sending Count
06
Tone Kind at
Message Interval
07
Disconnect Time
After the End of VRS
Delayed Message
nd
nd
1 ~ 25
Input Data
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 101
0 = No Message
101 = Fixed Message
0 ~ 255 (time)
0 ~ 101
0 = No Message
101 = Fixed Message
0 ~ 255 (time)
0 = Ring Back Tone
1 = MOH Tone
2 = BGM Source
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 = No Disconnect
Description
Time before the VRS Delay Message is
played for IRG.
VRS message that is used for the 1st
Delayed Message.
Default
0
0
This is the number of times the 1st Delay
Message is played. If set to 0, the 1st
Delay Message is not played.
VRS message that is used for the 2nd
Delayed Message.
0
This is the number of times the 2nd Delay
Message is played. If set to 0, the 2nd
Delay Message is not played.
What is heard between the Delay
Message.
0
Time, after all 2nd Delay Messages are
played, before the caller is disconnected.
60
0
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-237
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-15 : VRS Delayed Message for Department Group
Level
IN
Program
22
Description
Use Program 22-15 : VRS Delayed Message for Department Group to define for each Department
(Extension) Group the timers, VRS message number and tone kind for VRS Delayed Message. There
are 32 available Department Groups.
Input Data
Extension Group Number
Item
No.
Item
01
1 Delayed Message
Start Time
st
1 Delayed Message
Number
st
02
st
03
1 Delayed Message
Sending Count
04
2 Delayed Message
Number
05
2 Delayed Message
Sending Count
06
Tone Kind at
Message Interval
07
Disconnect Time
After the End of VRS
Delayed Message
nd
nd
Input Data
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 101
0 = No Message
101 = Fixed Message
0~255 (time)
0 ~ 101
0 = No Message
101 = Fixed Message
0 ~ 255 (time)
0 = Ring Back Tone
1 = MOH Tone
2 = BGM Source
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 = No Disconnect
01 ~ 32
Description
Time before the VRS Delay Message is
played for Department Group.
VRS message that is used for the 1st
Delayed Message.
This is the number of times the 1st Delay
Message is played. If set to 0, the 1st
Delay Message is not played.
VRS message that is used for the 2nd
Delayed Message.
Default
0
101
0
101
This is the number of times the 2nd Delay
Message is played. If set to 0, the 2nd
Delay Message is not played.
What is heard between the Delay
Message.
0
Time, after all 2nd Delay Messages are
played, before the caller is disconnected.
60
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Department Group
2-238
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-16 : Private Call Refuse Target Area Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 22-16 : Private Call Refuse Target Area Setup to define Speed Dial group number for
Private Call Refuse.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Speed Dial Group Number
Input Data
0 ~ 32
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Department Group
Programming Manual
2-239
22
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-17 : Dial-In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time
Pattern
Level
Program
SA
Description
22
Use Program 22-17: Dial-In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern to define Time Zone
and Dial-In Conversion Table (Program 22-11) for Time Pattern.
Input Data
Conversion Table Number
001 ~ 500 (V2.0 Changed)
Time Pattern Number
1~8
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
Item
Received Dial
Start of Time
End of Time
Dial-In Conversion
Table Number
Day of week (V2.0
Added)
Input Data
Description
Up to eight digits
0000 ~ 2359 (Time)
0000 ~ 2359 (Time)
0 ~ 800
1: Sun
2: Mon
3: Tue
4: Wed
5: Thu
6: Fri
8: Sun
9: Holiday
0 = Off
1 = On
Default
No Setting
0000
0000
0
It checks it on a day of the week that uses
the translation table number. Order to turn
it ON set 1 for each day.
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-240
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-18 : Private Call Assignment Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 22-18: Private Call Assignment Setup to define assignment and incoming ring pattern
for Private Calls.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
Transfer Mode
02
Destination Number
03
Incoming Ring Pattern
Input Data
0 = Not defined
1 = Internal dial
2 = Incoming Ring Group
1 = Internal Dial (up to 36 digits)
0 ~ 9, *, #, P, R, @
2 = Incoming Ring Group
0 ~ 25
Incoming Ring Pattern (0 ~ 9)
0 = Normal pattern
1 ~ 4 = Tone pattern (1 ~ 4)
5 ~ 9 = Scale pattern (1 ~ 5)
Default
Related Program
0
14-01-27
15-02-02
40-10-06
No setting
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-241
22
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-19 : DID MFC Dialing Options
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 22-19 : DID MFC Dialing Options to define the MFC Dialing for each DID table entry.
This option is used for Latin America only.
22
Input Data
Conversion Table Number
Item
No.
01
Item
DID MFC Dialing Category
1 ~ 800
Input Data
0 = Normal
1 = Without Charge
2 = Called Party Release
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-242
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-20 : Flexible Ringing by Caller ID Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 22-20: Flexible Ringing by Caller ID Setup to set flexible ringing by Caller ID per timer
pattern mode.
22
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Trunk Port Number
001 ~ 096
Day/Night Mode
01 ~ 08
Item
Flexible Ringing
Input Data
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Default
1
Related
Program
13-04
14-01-30
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-243
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 23 : Answer Features Setup
23-02 : Call Pickup Groups
Level
IN
Program
23
Description
Use Program 23-02 : Call Pickup Groups to assign extensions to Call Pickup Groups. This program
also lets you assign an extension Call Pickup Group priority. If two extensions in a group are ringing at
the same time, Group Call Pickup intercepts the highest priority extension first.
There are 32 available Call Pickup Groups.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum eight digits
Item
No.
Group Number
Priority
Default
Description
01
1 ~ 32
1 ~ 999
1 - xxx
Use this program to assign
extensions to Call Pickup Groups
other than the extension group set
up by a Program 16-02.
Related
Program
11-12-26
11-12-27
11-12-28
15-07-24
15-07-25
15-07-26
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Group Call Pickup
2-244
Program 23 : Answer Features Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 23 : Answer Features Setup
23-03 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 23-03 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer to assign trunk routes (set in Program 14-06)
to extensions for Universal Answer. If the call ringing the paging system is in an extension assigned
route, the user can dial the Universal Answer code (#0) to pick up the call.
You can also use this program to let an extension user automatically answer trunk calls that ring other
extensions (not their own). When the user lifts the handset, they automatically answer the ringing calls
based on Trunk Group Routing programming (defined in Program 14-06). The extension user ringing
calls, however, always have priority over calls ringing other co-worker extensions. Refer to the Line
Preference feature in the SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual for more information.
Make one entry for each Night Service mode.
Input Data
Extension Number
Maximum eight digits
Item
No.
Day/Night Mode
Route Table
Number
Default
Description
01
1~8
0 ~ 25
0
Use this program to let an extension
user automatically answer trunk calls
that ring other extensions. When the
user lifts the handset, they
automatically answer the ringing calls
based on Trunk Group Routing
programming (defined in Program
14-06).
Related
Program
14-06
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference


Line Preference
Night Service
Programming Manual
2-245
23
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 23 : Answer Features Setup
23-04 : Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 23-04 : Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions to set the off-hook automatic
response priority for calls ringing virtual extension keys on a telephone.
23
There are 50 available Virtual Extension Ports.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
Priority Order
01
1~4
Maximum eight digits
Extension
Group Number
0 ~ 32
(0 = No setting)
Default
Description
0
When an extension has a virtual
extension assigned to a
Programmable Function Key, this
program determines the priority for
automatically answering the ringing
calls when the handset is lifted. If 0
or 00 is selected, when the user lifts
the handset, the user answers a
ringing call from any group.
Related
Program
16-02
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Virtual Extensions
2-246
Program 23 : Answer Features Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-01 : System Options for Hold
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 24-01 : System Options for Hold to define the system options for the Hold feature.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
Hold Recall
Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
02
Hold Recall
Callback Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
03
Exclusive Hold
Recall Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
04
Exclusive Hold
Recall Callback
Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
05
Forced Release
of Held Call
0 ~ 64800 seconds
06
Park Hold Time Normal
0 ~ 64800 seconds
07
Park Hold Time Extended
(Recall)
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Description
Default
A call on Hold recalls the extension
that placed it on Hold after this time.
This time works with the Hold Recall
Callback Time (Item 2).
A trunk recalling from Hold or Park
rings an extension for this time. This
time works with Hold Recall Time or
Park Hold Time. After this time, the
system invokes the Hold recall time
again. Cycling between time 01 and
02 and 06 and 07 continues until a
user answers the call.
A call left on Exclusive Hold recalls
the extension that placed it on Hold
after this time.
An Exclusive Hold Recall rings an
extension for this time. If not picked
up, the call goes back on System
Hold.
Depending on the setting of
Program 14-01-16, the system
disconnects calls on Hold longer
than this time.
A call left parked longer than this
time recalls the extension that
initially parked it.
A call left parked longer than this
time recalls the extension that
initially parked it.
90 seconds
(V1.5 Changed)
Related
Program
0 seconds
90 seconds
0 seconds
1800 seconds
14-01-16
90 seconds
(V1.5 Changed)
20-31-14
300 seconds
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference


Hold
Park
Programming Manual
2-247
24
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-02 : System Options for Transfer
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 24-02 : System Options for Transfer to define the system options for the Transfer
feature.
24
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
Busy Transfer
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
02
MOH or
Ringback on
Transferred
Calls
0 = Hold Tone
1 = Ring Back Tone
03
Delayed Call
Forwarding
Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
04
Transfer Recall
Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
05
Message Wait
Ring Interval
Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
07
Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer
Release
Warning Tone
0 ~ 64800 seconds
08
Delayed
Transfer Time
for all
Department
Groups
Two B-Channel
Transfer Retry
Timer
Disconnect
Trunk-to-Trunk
No Answer Step
Transfer
09
10
11
2-248
Description
Default
Use this option to prevent or allow
extensions to Transfer calls to busy
extensions. If disabled, calls
transferred to busy extensions recall
immediately.
Use this option to enable or disable
MOH on Transfer. If enabled (0), a
transferred caller hears MOH while
their call rings the destination
extension. If disabled (1), a
transferred caller hears ringback
while their call rings the destination
extension.
If activated at an extension, Delayed
Call Forwarding occurs after this
time. This also sets how long a
Transferred call waits at an
extension forwarded to Voice Mail
before routing to the called
extension mailbox.
An unanswered transferred call
recalls to the extension that initially
transferred it after this time.
For Single Line Telephones (SLTs)
without message waiting lamps, this
is the time between intermittent
ringing. If this value is set to 0, the
system rings once.
Time starts when a trunk begins
talking with another trunk (for
example : trunk-to-trunk transfer,
outgoing from trunk, Tandem
Trunking). When this time expires, a
warning tone is heard. If Program
24-02-10 is set, the conversation
disconnects after time expires. This
time is set again when the external
digit timer expires. One of the trunks
used must be an analog trunk (or
leased line).
1
Related
Program
0
(V1.5
Changed)
20-03-02
10 seconds
20-31-15
30 seconds
(V1.5 Changed)
20-31-16
30 seconds
1800 seconds
14-01-25
20-28-01
20-28-02
20-28-03
24-02-10
0 ~ 64800 seconds
10 seconds
11-11-28
11-11-29
15-07-59
0 ~ 30 seconds
10 seconds
10-03-16
(PRI)
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0
0 ~ 64800 seconds
10 seconds
14-01-25
20-28-01
20-28-02
20-28-03
24-02-07
14-01-26
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
ISSUE 1.1
Item
No.
12
13
SL1100
Item
No Answer
Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer
Hook Flash
Sending Timer
When the
System
Answers
Automatically
Input Data
Description
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Default
0
Time before sending the hook flash
for Call Forward Centrex.
Related
Program
14-01-26
2 seconds
Program
Conditions
24
None
Feature Cross Reference

Transfer
Programming Manual
2-249
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-03 : Park Group
Level
IN
Program
24
Description
Use Program 24-03 : Park Group to assign an extension to a Park Group. The system allows a total of
64 Park Groups. An extension user can pick up only a call parked in orbit by an extension user in own
group.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Park Group
Number
Maximum eight digits
Input Data
1 ~ 64
Description
Default
Related
Program
Assign an extension to a Park
Group. The system allows a total of
64 Park Groups.
1
15-07-01
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Park
2-250
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-04 : Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 24-04 : Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target Setup to assign the Speed Dialing
number bin which should be used as the destination of the Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer.
24
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
001 ~ 096
Item
No.
Day/Night
Mode
Speed Dial
Area Number
Default
Description
01
1~8
0 ~ 999
999
The destination telephone number of the
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer uses the number
registered into the Speed Dial. Use this program
to setup the Speed Dial Bin Number.
Related
Program
11-10-08
13-04
24-05
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
Programming Manual
2-251
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-05 : Department Group Transfer Target Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 24-05 : Department Group Transfer Target Setup to assign the Speed Dialing bin
which is used as the destination of the extension for the Extension Group.
24
There are 32 available Department Groups.
Input Data
Extension Group Number
01 ~ 32
Item
No.
Day/Night Mode
Speed Dial
Area
Number
Default
Description
01
1~8
0 ~ 999
999
The Speed Dialing area is used to
program the destination number of
the transferred telephone number
when a Department Group call is
transferred using the
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding feature.
Related
Program
11-11-27
13-04
24-04
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Transfer
2-252
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-09 : Call Forward Split Settings
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 24-09 : Call Forward Split Settings to assign Call Forwarding Type and the destination
number for each extension/virtual extension. The destination can have up to 24 digits, using 0 ~ 9, *, #,
and @. Be sure to include the trunk access code (e.g., 9) in the number if the destination is off-premise.
Only ISDN uses the @ symbol.
Pause can be set by LK 1.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
Item
01
Call Forwarding Type
02
CO Call Forwarding Destination for
Both Ring, All Call, No Answer
03
Intercom Call Forwarding
Destination for Both ring, All Call,
No Answer
CO Call Forwarding Busy
Destination
Intercom Call Forwarding Busy
Destination
Call Forwarding Destination for
CTX/PBX for All Call, No Answer
Call Forwarding Destination for
CTX/PBX for Busy
04
05
06
07
Maximum eight digits
Input Data
0~5
0 = Call Forwarding Off
1 = Call Forwarding with both ring
2 = Call Forwarding when no answer
3 = Call Forwarding all calls
4 = Call Forwarding busy or no answer
5 = Call Forwarding when busy
1 ~ 9, 0, #, *, R, @
(Up to 36 digits) (V1.5 Changed)
Only ISDN uses the @ symbol
1 ~ 9, 0, #, *, R, @
(Up to 36 digits) (V1.5 Changed)
1 ~ 9, 0, #, *, R, @
(Up to 36 digits) (V1.5 Changed)
1 ~ 9, 0, #, *, R, @
(Up to 36 digits) (V1.5 Changed)
1 ~ 9, 0, #, *, R, @
(Up to 36 digits) (V1.5 Changed)
1 ~ 9, 0, #, *, R, @
(Up to 36 digits) (V1.5 Changed)
Default
0
None
None
None
None
None
None
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
Programming Manual
2-253
24
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-01 : VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 25-01 : VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup to define the basic setting of each VRS/DISA
line.
25
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
001 ~ 096
Item
01
VRS/DISA Dial - In Mode
02
DISA User ID
03
VRS/DISA Transfer Alarm
Input Data
Default
0 = Extension Number Service Code Specify
(Intercom)
1 = Use Dial Conversion Table
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Normal (Off)
1 = Alarm (On)
Related
Program
0
22-11
0
25-08
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
2-254
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-02 : DID/DISA VRS Message
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 25-02 : DID/DISA VRS Message to assign the VRS message number to be used as the
Automated Attendant Message for each trunk which is assigned as a VRS/DISA.
25
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
Day/Night Mode
01
1~8
001 ~ 096
Message (Talkie)
Source
0 = No Talkie
1 = VRS
3 = SLT
Additional Data
Default
1 = 01 ~ 100 (VRS
Message Number)
3 = 01 ~ 32 (Station Group
Number)
Talkie Type = 1
Additional Data = 1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Programming Manual
2-255
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-03 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect
Dialing
Level
Program
IN
Description
25
Use Program 25-03 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing to set what happens to
a call when the DISA or Automated Attendant caller dials incorrectly or waits too long to dial. The call
can either disconnect (0) or Transfer to an alternate destination (a ring group or voice mail). When
setting the DISA and DID Operating Mode, make an entry for each Night Service mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
Day/Night
Mode
01
1~8
001 ~ 096
Incoming Group Number
0 = Disconnect
01 ~ 25 = Incoming Ring Group
102 = VMI
Default
Related
Program
1
22-04
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
2-256
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No
Answer/Busy
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy to set the operating
mode of each DISA trunk. This sets what happens to the call when the DISA or Automated Attendant
caller calls a busy or unanswered extension. The call can either disconnect (0) or Transfer to an
alternate destination (a ring group or voice mail). When setting the DISA and DID Operating Mode,
make an entry for each Night Service mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
Day/Night Mode
01
1~8
001 ~ 096
Incoming Group Number
0 = Disconnect
01 ~ 25 = Incoming Ring Group
102 = VMI
Default
Related Program
0
22-04
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Programming Manual
2-257
25
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-05 : VRS/DISA Error Message Assignment
Level
IN
Program
25
Description
Use Program 25-05 : VRS/DISA Error Message Assignment to assign the VRS message number to
be used as the Automated Attendant error message. For each VRS/DISA trunk that the VRS answers,
enter the VRS message (1 ~ 100) the outside caller hears if they dial incorrectly. If you enter 0 (i.e., no
error message), the call reroutes according to Programs 25-03 and 25-04.
For each trunk, make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
001 ~ 096
Item No.
Day/Night Mode
01
1~8
VRS Message Number
0 ~ 100
(0 = No setting)
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
2-258
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-06 : VRS/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup
Level
IN
Description
Program
Use Program 25-06 : VRS/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup to set up single digit dialing
through the VRS. This gives VRS callers single key access to extensions, the company operator,
Department Calling Groups and Voice Mail. For each VRS message set to answer outside calls (refer
to Programs 25-04 and 25-05), you specify:

The digit the VRS caller dials (0 ~ 9, *, #). Keep in mind that if you assign destinations to digits,
outside callers cannot dial system extensions.

The destination reached (Maximum eight digits ) when the caller dials the specified digit.
25
The destination can be an extension, a Department Calling pilot number or the Voice Mail master
number. A one-digit code can be assigned for each Automated Attendant message.
Example:
Message Number = 01, Destination = 2, Next Message Number = 0, Dial = 399
In this example, when 2 is dialed by an outside caller, the system transfers the call to 399. This means
that extension 200~299 cannot receive calls from VRS/DISA users during/after VRS Message 01.
Input Data
Attendant Message Number
01 ~ 100
Received Dial
1 ~ 9, 0, *, #
Item
No.
Item
01
Next Attendant
Message Number
02
Destination Number
Input Data
0 ~ 100 (0 = No setting)
101 = Voice Mail
answers
104 = Refer to 25-04 :
VRS/DISA Transfer
Ring Group With No
Answer/Busy
105 = Dial the other
extension
106 =record VRS
Up to eight digits
Description
Defines the next attendant message
number or destination number for each
1-digit access code in Automated
Attendant service
Default
0
No Setting
Must be a valid
extension number that is
programmed in command
11-02 or 11-04.
Conditions

Outside caller may not be able to dial individual extensions or lines if the same first digit is defined
here.
Feature Cross Reference


Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Voice Response System (VRS)
Programming Manual
2-259
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-07 : System Timers for VRS/DISA
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 25-07 : System Timers for VRS/DISA to set the value for the system timers which affect
DID and DISA. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting.
25
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
VRS/DISA Dial
Tone Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
02
VRS/DISA No
Answer Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
03
Disconnect after
VRS/DISA
retransfer to IRG
0 ~ 64800 seconds
04
Calling Time to
Automatic
Answering
Telephone Set
Duration Time
for Guidance
Message by
Automatic
Answering
Telephone Set
Long
Conversation
Warning Tone
Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
08
Long
Conversation
Disconnect
Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
09
DISA Internal
Paging Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
10
DISA External
Paging Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
11
VRS/DISA
Answer Delay
Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
05
07
2-260
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Description
Default
After answering a DISA trunk, the
system waits this time for the caller
to dial the first digit of the DISA
password. If the caller fails to dial
during this time, the system drops
the call.
A VRS/DISA caller can ring an
extension for this time before the
system sets the call as a Ring No
Answer. After this time expires, the
call follows the programmed Ring
No Answer routing (set in Programs
25-03 and 25-04).
From DISA trunk, when the call may
go to Incoming Ring Group of
Programs 25-03 and 25-04. This
setting determines how long the call
is ringing in the IRG.
Set the answering waiting time of
the automatic answering extension
when an incoming DID trunk call is
received.
Set the announcement time of the
automatic answering extension after
which an incoming DID trunk caller
is disconnected.
10 seconds
Determine the time a DISA caller or
any trunk-to-trunk (such as Tandem
Trunking) conversation can talk
before the Long Conversation tone
is heard.
This time determines how long the
system waits before disconnecting a
DISA caller or any trunk-to-trunk
(such as Tandem Trunking)
conversation call after the Long
Conversation tone is heard.
This is the maximum length of an
Internal Page placed by a DISA
caller. If the Page continues longer
than this time, the system
terminates the DISA call.
This is the maximum length of an
External Page placed by a DISA
caller. If the Page continues longer
than this time, the system
terminates the DISA call.
Sets up the time the system waits
after receiving an incoming
VRS/DISA call before the system
automatically answers the call.
Related
Program
25-04
0 second
25-04
20-31-17
60 seconds
20-31-18
10 seconds
10 seconds
1800 seconds
30 seconds
14-01-25
20-28-01
20-28-02
20-28-03
20-31-19
14-01-25
20-28-01
20-28-02
20-28-03
30 seconds
20-31-21
30 seconds
20-31-22
0 second
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
13
VRS/DISA Busy
Tone Interval
0 ~ 64800 seconds
14
Delayed VRS
Answer Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Description
Default
If a DISA caller dials a busy
extension (and Program 25-04 = 0),
the system plays busy tone for this
time before disconnecting.
Assign the delay time from
switching from a normal incoming
status to DID mode. If this time is
set to 0, the call switches to DID
mode immediately.
5 seconds
Related
Program
10 seconds
Program
Conditions
25
None
Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Programming Manual
2-261
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-08 : DISA User ID Setup
Level
SA
Program
Description
Use Program 25-08 : DISA User ID Setup to set the 6-digit DISA password for each user. There are
15 users each with one 6-digit password.
25
Input Data
DISA User Number
Item
No.
01
01 ~ 15
Item
Password
Input Data
Dial (Fixed - six digits)
0 ~ 9, *, #
Default
01=000001
02=000002
03=000003
04=000004
05=000005
06=000006
07=000007
08=000008
09=000009
10=000010
11=000011
12=000012
13=000013
14=000014
15=000015
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
2-262
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-09 : Class of Service for DISA Users
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 25-09 : Class of Service for DISA Users to set the DISA Class of Service for each user.
When a DISA caller enters a password (defined in Program 25-08), the system identifies the user and
associates the appropriate DISA Class of Service with the call. Assign the DISA Class of Service
options in Program 20-14. When programming DISA Class of Service, make one entry for each Night
Service mode.
Input Data
DISA User Number
1 ~ 15
Item No.
Day/Night Mode
Function Class
Default
01
1~8
1 ~ 15
1
Conditions


DISA Class of Service cannot be 0.
Program 20-06 cannot be used to assign Class of Service to DISA trunks.
Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Programming Manual
2-263
25
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-10 : Trunk Group Routing for DISA
Level
IN
Program
25
Description
Use Program 25-10 : Trunk Group Routing for DISA to assign the Trunk Group route chosen when a
user places a DISA call to the system and dials 9. Set Trunk Group Routing in Program 14-06. Enable
or disable the DISA caller ability to dial 9 in Program 20-14-02. Assign a route to each DISA Class of
Service (1 ~ 15). The system assigns a DISA Class of Service to a call based on the password the
DISA caller dials.
When programming, make a separate entry for each Night Service Mode.
Input Data
DISA User Number
1 ~ 15
Item No.
Day/Night Mode
Route Table Number
Default
01
1~8
0 ~ 25
(0 = No setting)
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
2-264
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-11 : DISA Toll Restriction Class
Level
IN
Program
Description
For systems that use Toll Restriction, use Program 25-11 : DISA Toll Restriction Class to assign a
Toll Restriction Class (1-15) to each DISA user (1~15). The system uses the Toll Restriction Class you
enter in Programs 21-05 and 21-06. The Toll Restriction Class assigned to a DISA call is based on the
DISA Class of Service and user, which is determined by the password the caller dials.
When programming, make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.
Input Data
DISA User Number
1 ~ 15
Item No.
Day/Night Mode
Toll Restriction Class
Default
01
1~8
1 ~ 15
2
Conditions

Program 21-05 cannot be used to assign Toll Restriction to DISA trunks.
Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Programming Manual
2-265
25
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-12 : Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA
Level
IN
Program
25
Description
Use Program 25-12 : Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA to define the trunk route selected
when a DISA caller dials the Alternate Trunk Access Code. The route selected is based on the DISA
caller Class of Service, which in turn is determined by the password the caller dials. When
programming, make a separate entry for each Night Service Mode.
Use Program 11-09-02 to set the Alternate Trunk Access Code. Use Program 14-06 to set trunk routes.
Input Data
DISA User Number
1 ~ 15
Item No.
Day/Night Mode
Route Table Number
Default
01
1~8
0 ~ 25
(0 = No setting)
1
Conditions

You cannot use Program 21-15 to assign alternate trunk routing to DISA trunks.
Feature Cross Reference


Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Trunk Group Routing
2-266
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-13 : System Option for DISA
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 25-13 : System Option for DISA to enter the password DISA callers must dial before
the system allows them to record, listen to and or erase the VRS messages. This program also is used
to define additional DISA call options.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
VRS Message
Access Password
Input Data
1 ~ 9, 0, *, #
(Fixed six digits)
Description
Default
Enter the password DISA callers must dial
before the system allows them to record,
listen to and/or erase the VRS messages.
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference


Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Voice Response System (VRS)
Programming Manual
2-267
25
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-15 : DISA Transfer Target Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 25-15 : DISA Transfer Target Setup to assign a Speed Dial number when a dial tone
times-out, or when the wrong number is received and the target extension does not answer or is busy.
25
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
001 ~ 096
Day/Night Mode
1~8
Item
No.
Item
01
DISA Transfer Target Area At
Wrong Dial
DISA Transfer Target Area At
No Answer or Busy
02
Input Data
Default
Related
Program
Speed Dial bin number 0 ~ 999
999
25-03-01
Speed Dial bin number 0 ~ 999
999
25-04-01
Conditions

Related to Programs 25-03-01 25-04-01.
Feature Cross Reference


Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Voice Response System (VRS)
2-268
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-16 : DUD/DISA Single Digit Timer
Level
IN
(This Program is available for V2.0 or higher)
Program
Description
25
Use Program 25-16 : DUD/DISA Single Digit Timer to define DUD/DISA talkie base setup.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
DUD/DISA Single Digit Timer
Input Data
0 ~ 68400
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference


Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Voice Response System (VRS)
Programming Manual
2-269
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing
26-01 : Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route) Service
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 26-01 : Automatic Route Selection Service (ARS/F-Route) to define the system
options for Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route).
26
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Description
01
ARS Service
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
Enable or disable ARS.
02
Network
Outgoing
Inter-Digit ARS
Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
03
ARS Misdialed
Number
Handling
0 = Route to Trunk
Group 1
1 = Play Warning Tone
to Dialer
With Networking, this time replaces
20-03-04 when determining if all
network protocol digits have been
received. If ARS is enabled at Site
B, this time can be programmed for
5 (500 ms) at Site A. If ARS is
disabled and Site B is using F-Route
for outbound dialing, this time
should be programmed for 30 (three
seconds) at Site A.
If a user dials a number not
programmed in ARS, this option
determines if the system should
route over Trunk Group 1 or play
error tone.
04
LCR Mode
Option
06
Class of Service
Match Access
F-Route Access
COS Reference
07
Default
0
30 seconds
Related
Program
26-02
26-03
26-04
20-03-04
0
21-02
0 = UK style
1 = Not UK style
1
(V2.1 Changed)
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
0 = F-Route
1 = ARS
0
26-02
26-05
26-06
26-07
26-08
26-09
26-02
0
26-02
44-05
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)
2-270
Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing
26-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 26-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR to set pre-transaction tables for selecting
Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route).

Service Type 1 (Route to Trunk Group Number) - The number routes to a trunk group.

Service Type 2 (F-Route Selected) - The number is controlled by the F-Route table.
Input Data
Dial Analysis Table Number
Item
No.
1 ~ 400
Item
01
Dial
02
ARS Service Type
03
Additional Data/Service
Number
04
05
06
07
ARS Class of Service
Dial Treatment for ARS
LCR Carrier Table
Network Specified
Parameter Table
Input Data
Default
Dial Digits (maximum 16 digits)
0 ~ 9, *, #, or for wild character (Press line key 1)
0 = No Service (None)
1 = Route to Trunk Group
2 = Select F-Route Access
If Service Type 1 (in 26-02) : Select Trunk Group
Number
0 ~ 25 (Trunk Group Number 0 = No Route)
If Service Type 2 (in 26-02) :
F-Route Time Schedule Not Used = 0 ~ 100
(F-Route Table Number).
Refer to 44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table.
F-Route Time Schedule Used = 0 ~ 100
(F-Route Selection Number).
Refer to 44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time
Schedule.
0 ~ 16
0 ~ 15
0 ~ 25
0 ~ 16
No Setting
Related
Program
0
0
0
0
0
0
44-04
44-05
26-12
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)
Programming Manual
2-271
26
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing
26-03 : ARS Dial Treatments
Level
IN
Program
26
Description
Use Program 26-03 : ARS Dial Treatments to assign the 15 Dial Treatments for automatic ARS
dialing translation. Assign Dial Treatments to Service Numbers (Trunk Groups) in Program 26-02. The
ARS Dial Treatment options are:

An - For Alternate Carrier Access (n = 1 ~ 4). The numeric digit instructs the system to insert a
Transit Network Selection information element in the SETUP message and also identifies which
code in Program 26-11 will be included in the information element. This function is valid only for
outbound calls by ISDN trunks.

DNN - Outdial the NN number of digits or execute the code that follows. For example, D041234
outdials 1234. Valid entries are 0 ~ 9, #, *, Wnn (wait nn seconds) and P (pause). Each digits
code counts as a digit. So, for example, if a P was added for a pause, the entry would look like :
D05P1234.

Wnn - Wait nn seconds.

P - Pause in analog trunk.

R - Redial the initially dialed number, including any modifications.

E - End of Dial Treatment. All Dial Treatments must end with the E code.

X - When ARS is enabled, X must be entered in the Dial Treatment for the system to output the
extension number of the call originator to the black box for the E911 feature.
Input Data
Dial Treatment Table Number
Item
No.
01
1 ~ 15
Item
Treatment Code
Input Data
Maximum 36 characters
Default
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)
2-272
Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing
26-04 : ARS Class of Service
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 26-04 : ARS Class of Service to set the ARS Class of Service for an extension.
Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route) uses ARS Class of Service when determining how to route
extension calls.
Input Data
Extension Number
Up to eight digits
Item No.
Day/Night Mode
Class
Default
01
1~8
0 ~ 16
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)
Programming Manual
2-273
26
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing
26-05 : LCR Carrier Table
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 26-05 : LCR Carrier Table to define the LCR Access Codes and routing options.
These options include Authorization codes and Cost Center
26
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
Delete Digits
0 - 16
02
Access Code
03
Authorization Code
Table
04
Cost Center Code
Maximum 16 digits
(0 ~ 9, *, #, P, @)
P = Pause
@ = Change to DTMF
or wait for Connect
0 ~ 10
(0 = No Authorization
code)
0 = Not Used
1 = Used
Description
Enter the quantity of leading digits that
need to be deleted
Enter the Access Code and Option to route
to the Indirect Carrier
Default
0
No Setting
Enter the table number that contains the
correct Authorization code.
0
Optionally enter a cost center code.
0
Conditions
The settings must comply with the requirements of the Indirect Carrier. The operation of the @ symbol
within the Access Code depend on the type of trunk. For analog trunk set as Dial Pulse the @ symbol
defines change to DTMF dialing. For ISDN trunks the @ symbol defines that a Connect Message is
received and then DTMF digits are sent in the B-Channel.
Feature Cross Reference

LCR-Least Cost Routing
2-274
Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing
26-06 : LCR Authorization Code Table
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 26-06 : LCR Authorization Code Table to define the optional Authorization code (or
PIN code) required by the Indirect Carrier. The Authorization code is inserted if set in Program
26-05-03.
Input Data
Authorization Table Number
Item No.
01
Item
Authorization Code
1 ~ 10
Input Data
Up to 10 digits
Default
No Setting
Conditions
The settings must comply with the requirements of the Indirect Carrier. The Authorization Code is used
by the Indirect Carrier to identify the customer for billing purposes.
Feature Cross Reference

LCR-Least Cost Routing
Programming Manual
2-275
26
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing
26-07 : LCR Cost Center Code Table
Level
IN
Program
26
Description
Use Program 26-07 : LCR Cost Center Code Table to define the optional cost center code required
by the Indirect Carrier. The cost center code is set for each extension. The cost center code is inserted
if set in Program 26-05-04.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item No.
01
Item
Cost Center Code
Up to eight digits
Input Data
Up to 8 digits
Default
Extension Number
Conditions
The settings must comply with the requirements of the Indirect Carrier. The cost Center code is used
by the Indirect Carrier to identify the individual user for billing purposes.
Feature Cross Reference

LCR-Least Cost Routing
2-276
Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing
26-08 : LCR Manual Override Access Code Table
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 26-08 : LCR Manual Override Access Code Table to define the access codes that the
users can dial to select an indirect carrier i.e. bypass the automatic selection of Program 26-02.
26
Input Data
Manual Override Access Code Table Number
Item No.
Item
01
Manual Override
Code
02
Carrier Table No
Input Data
Maximum 4 digits
(0 ~ 9, *, #)
Carrier Table
number 0 ~ 25
1 ~ 10
Description
This code is dialed by the user to
bypass the automatic selection.
The carrier table number of Program
26-05.
Default
No Setting
0
Conditions
The override code must begin with a digit 1 or it will not be checked against this table. There can are
also exemptions to this table in Program 26-09.
Feature Cross Reference

LCR-Least Cost Routing
Programming Manual
2-277
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing
26-09 : LCR Manual Override Exemption Table
Level
IN
Program
26
Description
Use Program 26-09 : LCR Manual Override Exemption Table to define the numbers that must not
be sent via an indirect carrier when the user dials a Manual Override Access Code. The exemptions
are normally Emergency Services that may not be supported by the indirect carrier.
Input Data
Manual Override Exemption Table Number
Item No.
01
Item
Exemption Number
Input Data
Maximum 4 digits
(0 ~ 9, *, #)
Do not include the
Access Code.
1 ~ 25
Description
This code is dialed by the user to
bypass the automatic selection.
Default
Table 1 = 000
Table 2 ~ 25 =
No Setting
Conditions
If the number dialed by the user corresponds to an entry in Program 26-09 the Aspire will delete the
Manual Access code (Program 26-08) and route the call to the direct carrier. If the number specifies
an Emergency Service you must ensure that the direct carrier will accept the call.
Feature Cross Reference

LCR-Least Cost Routing
2-278
Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing
26-11 : Transit Network ID Table
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 26-11 : Transit Network ID Table to define Transit Network ID for Alternate carrier
access, which is referred from Program 26-03.
26
Input Data
Transit Network ID Table
Item
No.
01
Item
Transit Network ID (Carrier ID)
1~4
Input Data
0000 ~ 9999
(Fixed four digits or No setting)
Default
Table No. 1 ~ 4 = No
Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-279
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing
26-12 : Network Specific Parameter Table for ARS
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 26-12 : Network Specific Parameter Table for ARS to define the Network Specific
Parameter Table.
26
Input Data
Network Specific Parameter
Table
1 ~ 16
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Description
Default
01
Called Party Number
- Type of Number
Selection
This setting is used by Programs 26-02-07
and 44-05-11 to determine ISDN element.
0
02
Called Party number Numbering Plan
Identification
Selection
0 = System Default
1 = Unknown
2 = International No.
3 = National No.
4 = Network Specific No.
5 = Subscriber No.
6 = Abbreviated No.
0 = System Default
1 = Unknown
2 = ISDN Plan
3 = Data Plan
4 = Telex Plan
5 = National Standard
Plan
6 = Private Plan
This setting is used by Programs 26-02-07
and 44-05-11 to determine ISDN element.
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-280
Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
30-01 : DSS Console Operating Mode
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 30-01 : DSS Console Operating Mode to set the mode of the system DSS Consoles.
The entry for this option applies to all the system DSS Consoles. The available options are:

Regular (Business) Mode (0)

Hotel Mode (1)
Input Data
DSS Console Number
Item
No.
01
01 ~ 12
Item
DSS Operation Mode
Input Data
0 = Business Mode
1 = Hotel Mode
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference


Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
Hotel/Motel
Programming Manual
2-281
30
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
30-02 : DSS Console Extension Assignment
Level
IN
Program
30
Description
Use Program 30-02 : DSS Console Extension Assignment to identify which extensions have DSS
Consoles connected.

Up to 12 different extensions with DSS Consoles can be set up. A single extension can have up
to four 60-button DSS Consoles (12 is the maximum allowed per system).
When programming, each extension/DSS Console(s) combination is called a Console Number. There
are 12 Console Numbers (01 ~ 12). Console Numbers can be assigned to extensions. When entering
data, the assignment for Console Number 1 is normally made first.
Input Data
60-button DSS Console Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Extension Number
01 ~ 12
Input Data
Up to eight digits
Description
Default
The extension number for the multiline
terminal connected with the DSS console.
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
2-282
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment
Level
SA
Program
Description
Use Program 30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment to customize the key assignments for 60-button
DSS Consoles. A DSS Console key can have any function with up to eight digits (e.g., extension
number or Service Code).
To prevent lamp problems when reassigning DSS Console keys, clearing an extension programmed
key before reassigning it is recommended [Enter key to be cleared + 00 or *00 (If using WebPro or PC
Programming, delete the key assignments and upload the change to the system before proceeding.)]
Without clearing an extension key first, the DSS Console may not show the correct lamp display,
although the DSS function works correctly.
If you are programming the system from the extension to which the DSS Console is connected, either
by phone or using the WebPro or PC Program, you may need to unplug the DSS and plug it back in to
reset the console lamping.
Input Data
Index 1
DSS Console Number
01 ~ 12
Index 2
Item No.
Key Number
01
001 ~ 114
Function Number
0 ~ 99, #0 ~ #99 (General
Functional Level)
*00 ~ *99 (Appearance
Functional Level)
Additional Data
Refer to Function Number
List [1] General functional
level (00 ~ 99, #00 ~ #99).
Table 2-6 Function Number List
[1] General functional level (00 ~ 99, #00 ~ #99)
Function
Number
Function
01
DSS/One-Touch
02
Microphone Key
(ON/OFF)
DND Key
BGM (ON/OFF)
Headset
Transfer Key
Conference Key
Incoming Call ID List
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
Day/Night Mode Switch
Call Forward Immediate
Call Forward - Busy
Call Forward - No
Answer
Call Forward - Busy/No
Answer
Call Forward - Both
Ring
Programming Manual
Additional Data
Extension Number or
any Numbers (up to
36 digits)
Mode Number (1 ~ 8)
LED Indication
Note
On (Red) : DSS Ext. Busy
Off : DSS Ext. Idle, DND External, DND
Transfer, CFW Busy, CFW Noans, CFW
Busy/Noans, CFW Both, CFW FL ME
Fast Blink (Red) : DND Intercom, DND
All, CFW Imm
On (Red) : Mic On
Off : Mic Off
On (Red) : DND Setup
On (Red) : Active
On (Red) : Headset Operation
None
On (Red) : Conference Operation
Fast Blink (Red) : Existing New CID
On (Red) : Existing Checked CID
Off : No CID
On : While each mode
On (Red) : Setup
On (Red) : Setup
On (Red) : Setup
On (Red) : Setup
On (Red) : Setup
2-283
30
SL1100
Function
Number
ISSUE 1.1
Function
15
Follow Me
18
Text Message Setup
19
External Group Paging
20
21
External All Call Paging
Internal Group Paging
22
23
Internal All Call Paging
Meet-Me Answer to
Internal Paging
Call Pickup
Call Pickup for Another
Group
Call Pickup for
Specified Group
Speed Dial System/Private
Program
30
24
25
26
27
28
Speed Dial - Group
29
30
31
32
33
38
39
Repeat Redial
Saved Number Redial
Memo Dial
Meet-me Conference
Override (Off-Hook
Signaling)
Barge-In
Camp On
Department Step Call
DND/FWD Override
Call
Message Waiting
Room Monitoring
41
Secretary Buzzer
42
Boss - Secretary Call
Pickup
Series Call
Common Hold
Exclusive Hold
Department Group Log
Out
Call Redirect
34
35
36
37
43
44
45
46
49
50
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
62
63
66
2-284
Account Code
Automatic Answer with
Delay Message Setup
Automatic Answer with
Delay Message Starting
External Call Forward
by Door Box Setup
Extension Name Edit
General Purpose LED
Operation
General Purpose LED
Indication
Department Incoming
Call - Immediate
Department Incoming
Call - Delay
Department Incoming
Call - DND
Flash Key
Outgoing Call Without
Caller ID (ISDN)
CTI
Additional Data
Message Numbers
(01 ~ 20)
External Paging
Number (1 ~ 6)
Internal Paging
Number (01 ~ 32)
LED Indication
Note
Fast Blink (Red) : Setup
Slow Blink (Red) : To be setup
On (Red) : Setup
On (Red) : Active
On (Red) : Active
On (Red) : Active
None
None
None
None
Call Pickup Group
Number (1 ~ 32)
None or Speed Dial
Number (00 ~ 99 or
000 ~ 999)
None or Speed Dial
Number (00 ~ 99 or
000 ~ 999)
None
None
None
Fast Flash (Red) : Repeat Dialing
None
None
None
None
None
On (Red) : Active
None
None
Extension Number (8
digits)
Extension Number (8
digits)
None
Slow Blink (Red) : Monitoring
Fast Blink (Red) : To be monitored
On (Red) : Calling party
Fast Blink : Called party
On (Red) : Active
None
None
None
On (Red) : Withdrawing
Extension Number or
Voice Mail Number
( 8 digits)
Incoming Group
Number (01 ~ 25)
None
None
On (Red) : Setup
On (Red) : Delay Message Answering
On (Red) : Setup
001 ~ 100 :
None
(Red) On
Off
001 ~ 100 :
(Red) On
Off
Extension Group
Number (01 ~ 32)
Extension Group
Number (01 ~ 32)
Extension Group
Number (01 ~ 32)
Slow Blink (Red) : Set
Off : Cancel
Slow Blink (Red) : Set
Off : Cancel
Slow Blink (Red) : Set
Off : Cancel
None
On (Red) : Mode enabled
On (Red) : CTI active
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
ISSUE 1.1
Function
Number
72
73
74
75
76
77
SL1100
Function
Keypad Facility Key
Keypad Hold Key
Keypad Retrieve Key
Keypad Conference
Key
Application Key
Voice Mail (In-Skin)
78
Conversation
Recording (In0skin VM)
79
Automated Attendant
(In-Skin)
80
Tandem Ringing Set Up
Key
81
Automatic Transfer to
Transfer Key
Conversation
Recording Function
Additional Data
Extension Number or
Pilot Number (8
digits)
0 = Conversation
recording
1 = Delete,
Re-recording
2 = Delete
Extension Number or
Pilot Number (8
digits)
86
Private Call Refuse
0 = Cancel
1 = Set
Extension Number to
Tandem Ring (8
digits)
Trunk Line Number
001 ~ 096
0 = Pause
1 = Re-record
2 = Address
3 = Erase
4 = Urgent Page
None
87
Caller ID Refuse
None
88
Dial-In Mode Switching
Program 22-17, Table
No. 1 ~ 500
92
Wake Up Call Indication
None
93
Room Status Indication
None
94
Call Attendant
95
Page Switching
None
97
Door Box Access Key
Doorphone No. (1 ~
6)
98
Message Waiting
Indication Key
Alternate Answer Key
None
83
99
Programming Manual
LED Indication
Note
None
Fast Blink (Red) : Existing new message
Program
Fast Blink (Red) : Recording
30
On (Red) : Setup - All calls
Fast Blink (Red) : Setup - No answer
calls
(125msec on/125msec off/125msec
on/625msec off) (Red) : Setup - busy
calls
Slow Blink (Red) : Setup – busy/noans
calls
On (Red) : Master Side
Slow Blink (Red) : Slave Side
Off : Cancel
Slow Blink (Red) : Set
Off : Cancel
Slow Blink (Red) : Set
Off : Cancel
Slow Blink (Red) : Set
Off : pattern 1, pattern 5 ~ 8
On (Red) : pattern 2
Slow Blink (Red) : pattern 3
Set : On
No Set : Off
No answer : Blink(On (125ms)/Off
(125ms)
ON : Checked In and Clean
OFF : Checked Out (clean and available)
SLOW blink : Maid Required [On
(500ms)/Off (500ms)]
MEDIUM blink : Maid in Room [On
(250ms)/Off (250ms)]
FAST blink : Inspect Room [On
(125ms)/Off (125ms)]
Fast Blink (Red) : Setup - No answer
calls
(125msec:on
125msec:off
125msec:on
625msec:off) (Red) : Setup - Busy
calls
On (Red) : Setup - Busy/No answer calls
Red On : Page 1
Slow Blink (Red) Page 2
On (Red) : Door Box Busy
Off : Door Box Idle
Fast Blink (Red) : Door Box Incoming
ON : New Message
OFF : No Message
None
2-285
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Table 2-7 Function Number List
[2] Appearance Function Level (*00 - *99) (Service Code 752)
Function
Number
Program
Function
Additional Data
LED Indication
Fast Blink (Red) : Incoming
On (Red) : Speaking
Slow Blink (Red) :
Holding/Transferring/Recall
Slow Blink (Red) :
Holding/Recall
None
*01
Trunk Key
Trunk Line Number 001 ~ 096
*04
Park Key
Park Number (01 ~ 64)
*07
Station Park Hold
Default
30


The DSS keys 001 ~ 060 of all DSS consoles = DSS/One-Touch key 101 ~ 160.
The DSS keys 061 ~ 114 of all DSS consoles = No Setting.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
2-286
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
30-04 : DSS Console Alternate Answer
Level
SA
Program
Description
Use Program 30-04 : DSS Console Alternate Answer to assign the alternate DSS console station in
case off-duty mode is set (by pressing the ALT key on the DSS console).
30
Input Data
Index 1
DSS Console Number
01 ~ 12
Index 2
Item
No.
01
Item
DSS Console Alternate Answer
Input Data
Alternate DSS No. 01 ~ 12
(0 = No setting)
Default
0 = No Setting
Conditions

Related extension is assigned in Program 30-02. Alternate answer key (ALT key) is assigned at
Program 30-03.
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-287
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
30-05 : DSS Console Lamp Table
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 30-05 : DSS Console Lamp Table to define the LED patterns for functions on the DSS
consoles.
30
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
2-288
Item
Idle Extension
Busy Extension
DND Extension
Hotel Status Code 1 (Hotel DSS)
Hotel Status Code 2 (Hotel DSS)
Hotel Status Code 3 (Hotel DSS)
Hotel Status Code 4 (Hotel DSS)
Hotel Status Code 5 (Hotel DSS)
Hotel Status Code 6 (Hotel DSS)
Hotel Status Code 7 (Hotel DSS)
Hotel Status Code 8 (Hotel DSS)
Hotel Status Code 9 (Hotel DSS)
Hotel Status Code 0 (Hotel DSS)
Hotel Status Code*(Hotel DSS)
Hotel Status Code # (Hotel DSS)
VM Message Indication
Lamp Pattern Data
Default
0~7
0~7
0~7
0~7
0~7
0~7
0~7
0~7
0~7
0~7
0~7
0~7
0~7
0~7
0~7
0~7
0
7
3
7
1
2
3
5
3
6
4
3
0
4
5
3
Note
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program
30
LED Patterns for DSS Console
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
Programming Manual
2-289
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 31 : Paging Setup
31-01 : System Options for Internal/External Paging
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 31-01 : System Options for Internal/External Paging to define the system options for
Internal/External Paging.
31
The system shows the name you program on the telephone display. Use the following chart when
entering and editing text. When using the keypad digits, press the key once for the first character, twice
for the second character, etc. For example, to enter C, press 2 three times. Press 2 six times to display
the lower case letter.
Key for Entering Names
When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can have up to 12 digits.
Use this keypad digit ...
When you want to ...
1
Enter characters : 1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | }
ÁÀÂÃÅÆÇÉÊìó0
2
Enter characters : A-C, a-c, 2.
3
Enter characters : D-F, d-f, 3.
4
Enter characters : G-I, g-i, 4.
5
Enter characters : J-L, j-l, 5.
6
Enter characters : M-O, m-o, 6.
7
Enter characters : P-S, p-s, 7.
8
Enter characters : T-V, t-v, 8.
9
Enter characters : W-Z, w-z, 9.
0
Enter characters : 0 ! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) ô õ ú å ä æ ö ü α ε θ В
*
Enter characters : * + , - . / : ; < = > ? π Σ σ Ω ∞ ¢ £
#
# = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed - ex : TOM).
Pressing # again = Space. (In system programming mode, use the right arrow soft key instead to
accept and/or add a space.)
Clear/Back
Clear the character entry one character at a time.
Flash
Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
All Call Paging
Zone Name
Up to 12 Characters
02
Page
Announcement
Duration
Privacy Release
Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
04
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Description
Default
Assign a name to each All Call
Internal Paging zone. The name
shows on the display of the
telephone making the
announcement.
This timer sets the maximum length
of Page announcements. (Affects
External Paging only)
Once the user initiates a Meet-Me
Conference or Voice Call
Conference, the system waits this
time for the Paged party to join the
call.
Group all
Related
Program
11-12-19
31-02-02
1200 seconds
90 seconds
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference


Paging, External
Paging, Internal
2-290
Program 31 : Paging Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 31 : Paging Setup
31-02 : Internal Paging Group Assignment
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 31-02 : Internal Paging Group Assignment to assign extensions to Internal Paging
Groups (i.e., Page Zones). The setting in this program also determines if the Internal Page Group can
receive Internal All Call Paging. The system can have up to 32 paging groups. An extension can be in
only one Internal Paging Group.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
Item
Maximum eight digits
Input Data
01
Internal Paging
Group Number
0 ~ 32
(0 = No setting)
02
Internal All Call
Paging Receiving
0 = Off
1 = On
Description
Default
Assign extensions to Internal Paging
Groups (i.e., Page Zones). The system
allows up to 32 Internal Paging Groups. An
extension can be in only one Internal
Paging Group.
Allow or prevent All Call Internal Paging for
each extension. If allowed, extension can
place and receive All Call Internal Paging
announcements. If prevented, extensions
can only make (not receive) All Call
Internal Paging announcements. If
combined, Paging zones should be
restricted as well, change the internal page
zone group in Program 31-07-01 to 0.
1
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Paging, Internal
Programming Manual
2-291
31
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 31 : Paging Setup
31-03 : Internal Paging Group Settings
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 31-03 : Internal Paging Group Settings to assign names to Internal Paging Groups
(i.e., Page Zones) and to define the splash tone for Internal Paging.
31
The system shows the names you program on the telephone display. Use the following chart when
entering and editing text. When using the keypad digits, press the key once for the first character, twice
for the second character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press 2 three times. Press 2 six times to
display the lower case letter.
Key for Entering Names
When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can have up to 12 digits.
Use this keypad digit ...
When you want to ...
1
Enter characters : 1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | }
ÁÀÂÃÅÆÇÉÊìó0
2
Enter characters : A-C, a-c, 2.
3
Enter characters : D-F, d-f, 3.
4
Enter characters : G-I, g-i, 4.
5
Enter characters : J-L, j-l, 5.
6
Enter characters : M-O, m-o, 6.
7
Enter characters : P-S, p-s, 7.
8
Enter characters : T-V, t-v, 8.
9
Enter characters : W-Z, w-z, 9.
0
Enter characters : 0 ! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) ô õ ú å ä æ ö ü α ε θ В
*
Enter characters : * + , - . / : ; < = > ? π Σ σ Ω ∞ ¢ £
#
# = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed - ex : TOM).
Pressing # again = Space. (In system programming mode, use the right arrow soft key instead to
accept and/or add a space.)
Clear/Back
Clear the character entry one character at a time.
Flash
Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.
Input Data
Internal Paging Group Number
Item
No.
Item
01 ~ 32
Input Data
01
Internal Paging
Group Name
Up to 12 Characters
02
Internal Paging
Splash tone type
0 = Ordinary volume
1 = Mute
2 = No tone
Description
Default
Assign name to Internal Paging Groups
(i.e., Page Zones). The system shows the
name you program on the telephone
display.
Allow an extension to have normal (0),
muted (1) or no (2) Internal Paging alert
beeps before a Paging announcement.
Refer to default
table.
0
Default
Item 01 : Internal Paging Group Name
Extension Paging Group
Name
01
02
:
32
Group 1
Group 2
:
Group 32
Conditions
None
2-292
Program 31 : Paging Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Feature Cross Reference

Paging, Internal
Program
31
Programming Manual
2-293
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 31 : Paging Setup
31-04 : External Paging Zone Group
Level
IN
Program
31
Description
Use Program 31-04 : External Paging Zone Group to assign each External Paging zone to an
External Paging group. Users call the External Paging group when broadcasting announcements to the
external zone.
To simplify programming and troubleshooting, always make the External Paging Zone Group the same
number as the External Paging zone (i.e., 1 = 1, 2 = 2, etc.).
Input Data
External Speaker Number
Item No.
01
Item
Paging Group Number
1~3
Input Data
0 ~ 3 (0 = No setting)
Default
Speaker 1 (Basic) = 1 (Group 1)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Paging, External
2-294
Program 31 : Paging Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 31 : Paging Setup
31-05 : Universal Night Answer/Ring Over Page
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 31-05 : Universal Night Answer/Ring Over Page to assign Universal Night Answer
ringing to each External Paging zone. For each trunk port, make a separate entry for each External
Paging zone. For UNA ringing, make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
001 ~ 096
External Speaker Number
1~3
Item No.
Day/Night Mode
01
1~8
Input Data
0 = No Ringing (No)
1 = Ringing (Yes)
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference


Night Service
Paging, External
Programming Manual
2-295
31
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 31 : Paging Setup
31-06 : External Speaker Control
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 31-06 : External Speaker Control to define the settings for the external speaker using
an amplifier.
31
Input Data
External Speaker Number
Item
No.
Item
1~3
Input Data
01
Broadcast Splash
Tone Before Paging
(Paging Start Tone)
0 = No Tone (None)
1 = Splash Tone
2 = Chime Tone
02
Broadcast Splash
Tone After Paging
(Paging End Time)
0 = No Tone (None)
1 = Splash Tone
2 = Chime Tone
03
Speech Path
0 = Both Way (Duplex)
1 = One Way (Simplex)
04
CODEC Transmit
Gain Setup
CODEC Receive Gain
Setup
1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 ~ + 15.5
dB)
1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 ~ + 15.5
dB)
05
Description
Default
Use this option to enable or disable splash
tone before Paging over an external zone.
If enabled, the system broadcasts a splash
tone before the External Paging
announcement.
Use this option to enable or disable splash
tone after Paging over an external zone. If
enabled, the system broadcasts a splash
tone at the end of an External Paging
announcement.
Determine if the external speaker will be
used for talkback (As this option is not
available with the CPU external page zone,
speaker 9 should be left at 1).
2
2
1
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Paging, External
2-296
Program 31 : Paging Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 31 : Paging Setup
31-07 : Combined Paging Assignments
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 31-07 : Combined Paging Assignments to assign an External Paging Group (0 ~ 3) to
an Internal Paging Zone (0 ~ 32) for Combined Paging. When an extension user makes a Combined
Page, they simultaneously broadcast into both the External and Internal Zone.
Use Program 31-04-01 to assign an External Paging Zone (1 ~ 3) to an External Page Group (0 ~ 3).
Input Data
External Paging Group Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Internal Paging Group Number
0 ~ 3 (0 = All External Paging)
Input Data
0 ~ 32 (0 = All Internal Paging)
Default
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference


Paging, External
Paging, Internal
Programming Manual
2-297
31
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 31 : Paging Setup
31-08 : BGM on External Paging
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 31-08 : BGM on External Paging to set the Background Music option for each External
Paging zone. If enabled, the system plays Background Music over the zone when it is idle.
31
Input Data
External Speaker Number
Item
No.
01
Item
BGM
1~3
Input Data
0 = BGM Prevented (No)
1 = BGM allowed (Yes)
Description
Default
Use this option to allow or prevent the
External Paging zone you select from
broadcasting Background Music when it is
idle.
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference


Background Music
Paging, External
2-298
Program 31 : Paging Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 31 : Paging Setup
31-10 : External Paging Group Basic Setting
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 31-10 : External Paging Group Basic Setting assigns the name of external paging
group and defines the splash tone for external paging.
31
Input Data
External Speaker Number
Item
No.
01
Item
External Speaker Name
01 ~ 03
Input Data
Up to 12 Characters
Default
External Speaker
Number 01 = Group 1
External Speaker
Number 02 = Group 2
External Speaker
Number 03 = Group 3
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-299
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup
32-01 : Door Box Timers Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 32-01 : Door Box Timers Setup to assign the timers used for the Door Box.
32
The Door Box feature is called Door Phone when programming via WebPro and using a multiline terminal.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
Item
Input Data
Door Box Answer
Time
Door Lock Cancel
Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Off-Premise Call
Forward by Door Box
Disconnect Timer
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Description
Default
A multiline terminal user must answer Door
Box chimes during this time.
When a single line telephone user hook
flashes or a multiline user presses the
Recall key while talking to a Door Box, the
strike stays open for this time.
Define the conversation period for an
Off-Premise Call Forward by Door Box call.
When this timer expires, the caller hears
busy tone for three seconds (fixed time),
and the call is then disconnected.
30 seconds
10 seconds
60 seconds
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Door Box
2-300
Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup
32-02 : Door Box Ring Assignment
Level
SA
Program
Description
Use Program 32-02 : Door Box Ring Assignment to assign the extension which rings when a caller
presses the associated Door Box call button.
The Door Box feature is called Door Phone when programming via WebPro and using a multiline terminal.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Door Box Number
1~6
Day/Night Mode
1~8
Door Box Ring
Group Number
01 ~ 32
Extension Number
Maximum eight digits
Default
Door Box Ringing Member 1 = 101
Other : No setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Door Box
Programming Manual
2-301
32
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup
32-03 : Door Box Basic Setup
Level
IN
Program
32
Description
Use Program 32-03 : Door Box Basic Setup to select the chime pattern and gain level for each Door
Box. There are six distinctive chime patterns. The chime tones are defined in 80-01 : Service Tone
Setup
The Door Box feature is called Door Phone when programming via WebPro and using a multiline terminal.
Input Data
Door Box Number
Item
No.
Item
01
Chime Pattern
02
CODEC Transmit
Gain Setup
CODEC Receive Gain
Setup
03
1~6
Input Data
0 = None
1 = Door Box Ring 1
2 = Door Box Ring 2
3 = Door Box Ring 3
4 = Door Box Ring 4
5 = Door Box Ring 5
6 = Door Box Ring 6
1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 dB ~ +
15.5 dB)
1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 dB ~ +
15.5 dB)
Description
Default
Door Box 1 = 1
Door Box 2 = 2
Door Box 3 = 3
Door Box 4 = 4
Door Box 5 = 5
Door Box 6 = 6
(System to Door Box)
32 (0 dB)
(Door Box to System)
32 (0 dB)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Door Box
2-302
Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup
32-04 : Door Box Name Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 32-04 : Door Box Name Setup to define the name of each Door Box.
The Door Box feature is called Door Phone when programming via WebPro and using a multiline terminal.
Input Data
Door Box Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Door Box Name
1~6
Input Data
Up to 12 characters
Default
Door Box Name 1 = DOOR-1
Door Box Name 2 = DOOR-2
Door Box Name 3 = DOOR-3
Door Box Name 4 = DOOR-4
Door Box Name 5 = DOOR-5
Door Box Name 6 = DOOR-6
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Door Box
Programming Manual
2-303
32
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-01 : E&M Tie Line Basic Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 34-01 : E&M Tie Line Basic Setup to define the basic settings for each E&M Tie line.
34
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
Item
01
DID/E&M Start
Signaling
02
Receive Dial
Type for E&M
Tie Line
E&M Dial-In
Mode
03
001 ~ 096
Input Data
Description
Default
0 = 2 Dial Tone
1 = Wink
2 = Immediate
3 = Delay
0 = DP
1 = DTMF
Set the start signaling mode for DID
and Tie trunks. DID and Tie trunks
can use either immediate start or
wink start signaling.
2
22-02
1
10-09
0 = Specify Extension
Number (Intercom)
1 = Use Conversion
Table (NTT)
Determine if the incoming Tie Line
call should be directed as an
intercom call or if it should follow the
DID Translation Table in Program
22-11.
Enter 1 if the Tie Line should send
dial tone to the calling system after
the call is set up. Enter 0 if the Tie
Line should not send dial tone.
Determine if an incoming Tie Line
call should be subject to Toll
Restriction. If it is set to 0 then it will
use the Program 21-05-13, if it is set
to 1 then it will used Programs
21-05-01 ~ 21-05-13.
0
22-11
nd
04
E&M Line Dial
Tone
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
05
System Toll
Restriction
0 = System
1 = Each Extension
Related
Program
1
0
21-05
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-304
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-02 : E&M Tie Line Class of Service
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 34-02 : E&M Tie Line Class of Service to assign a Class of Service to a Tie line (there
are 15 Tie line Classes of Service). The Class of Service options are defined in Program 20-14. For
each Tie line, make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
001 ~ 096
Item No.
Day/Night Mode
Class
Default
Related Program
01
1~8
1 ~ 15
1
20-14
Conditions

Program 20-06 cannot be used to assign Class of Service to Tie lines.
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-305
34
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-03 : Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines
Level
IN
Program
34
Description
Use Program 34-03 : Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines to assign the trunk group route 01 ~
25) chosen when a user seizes a Tie Line and dials 9. (Set Trunk Group Routing in Program 14-07.) If
the system has Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route), dialing 9 accesses ARS. Make a separate
entry for each Tie Line - for each Night Service Mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
001 ~096
Item No.
Day/Night Mode
Route Table Number
Default
01
1~8
00 ~ 25
(0 = No setting)
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-306
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-04 : E&M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 34-04 : E&M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class to enter a Toll Restriction Class for each
Tie Line. There are 15 Toll Restriction Classes which are defined in Programs 21-05 and 21-06. For
each Tie Line, you make a separate Toll Restriction Class entry for each Night Service mode.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
001 ~ 096
Item
No.
Day/Night
Mode
Toll Restriction Class
Default
Related Program
01
1~8
1 ~ 15
2
21-05
14-01-08
Conditions

Program 20-06 cannot be used to assign Toll Restriction to Tie Lines.
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-307
34
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-05 : Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction
Level
IN
Program
34
Description
Use Program 34-05 : Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction to build a restriction matrix for outgoing
trunk calls placed from an inbound trunk (e.g., dialed from a Tie Line). For each inbound trunk group,
enable or disable access to each CO trunk group.
Input Data
Incoming Trunk Group Number
01 ~ 25
Outgoing Trunk Group Number
01 ~ 25
Input Data
0 = Enable (Y-Tandem)
1 = Restricted (N-Tandem)
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-308
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-06 : Add/Delete Digit for E&M Tie Line
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 34-06 : Add/Delete Digit for E&M Tie Line to set digits that the system should add or
delete for Tie Lines.

Delete Digit
Some Tie Line networks pass the location number and extension number to the remote side. This
program allows the system to ignore such numbers for a call.
If individual extension users do not want to receive an incoming call, they could delete all digits
including the extension number.

Add Digit
If a Tie Line network requires additional digits to reroute the call to a location, the digits for the
location can be added to the received digits.
Input Data
Incoming Trunk Group Number
Item
No.
01
02
Item
Delete Digit
Additional Dial Digits
01 ~ 25
Input Data
Default
0 ~ 255 (255 = delete all digits)
Up to four digits (0 ~ 9, *, #)
0
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-309
34
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-07 : E&M Tie Line Timer
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 34-07 : E&M Tie Line Timer to define the system service tone timers.
34
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
First Digit Pause (E&M Immediate
Start)
First Digit Pause (E&M Wink Start)
First Digit Pause (LD Trunk)
LD Trunk Guard Time
Trunk Answer Detect Timer for
E&M
02
03
04
05
Input Data
Default
0 ~ 64800 seconds
3 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0 ~ 64800 seconds
0
3 seconds
0
30 seconds
Conditions

If Program 34-07-05 is left at default (30) the transferred call recalls to the station that performed
the transfer when not answered.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-310
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-08 : Toll Restriction Data for E&M Tie Lines
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 34-08 : Toll Restriction Data for E&M Tie Lines to define the toll restriction data for
E&M Tie Lines. This data should be defined if Tie Line Toll Restriction is enabled in Program 21-05-13.
34
Input Data
Class of Service
Item No.
01
01 ~ 15
Table No.
01 ~ 20
Dial Data
Up to 10 Digits (0 ~ 9, *, #)
Default
Related
Program
No setting
21-05-13
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-311
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-09 : ANI/DNIS Service Options
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 34-09 : ANI/DNIS Service Options to define the ANI/DNIS service option setup for E&M
Class of Service.
34
Input Data
Class of Service
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
2-312
Item
Receive Format
Use this option to specify the
format of the ANI/DNIS data
received from the Telco. Make
sure your entry is compatible
with the service the Telco
provides. The character*
indicates a delimiter.
If Program 34-01-02 is
selected to 2 (MF), this Program
works only as 4 =*ANI*DNIS*.
Delimiter Dial Code
This option defines the
character Telco uses as a
delimiter (see entries 1 ~ 5 in
Item 1 above). Valid entries are
0 ~ 9, #, and *.
Route Setup of Receive Dial
This option specifies the source
of the data the system uses to
route incoming ANI/DNIS calls.
If option 2 is selected, refer to
Program 34-09-04.
Route Table Setup of Target
Dial
The option sets how the system
uses the route data (gathered in
Item 3) to route incoming
ANI/DNIS calls.
If option 2 is selected, and the
call is to be routed using the DID
table (1), up to eight digits can
be matched. The number of
expected digits set in Program
22-09-01 must match the ANI
digits defined in Program
22-11-01. For example, if an
ANI/ DNIS number received was
*2035551234*3001* and
Program 22-09- 01 = 4, the
entry in 22-11-01 must be 1234
with the defined target
extension.
If the call is to be routed using
the ABB table (0), up to 36 digits
can be matched. Define the
range of the ABB table to be
used in Program 34-09-06. The
data is compared to the entries
in Program 13-04-01 and then
routed according to Program
13-04-03.
01 ~ 15
Input Data
0 = Address
1 = * ANI*
2 = * DNIS*
3 = * ANI* Address*
4 = * ANI* DNIS*
5 = * DNIS* ANI*
(* = Delimiter Code)
1 ~ 9, 0, #, *
0 = Fixed Route (Item 08)
(No Routing)
1 = Routes on Received
DNIS or Address Data
2 = Routes on Received
ANI Data
0 = SPD Table
(Program 13-03)
1 = DID Table
(Program 22-11)
Default
Default
COS 01
0
COS 02 ~ 15
0
Related
Program
*
*
0
0
22-09-01
22-11-01
34-09-04
34-09-08
0
0
13-04
22-11-03
34-09-05
34-01-02
34-09-02
34-09-01
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Item
Item
05
ANI/DNIS Display as Target
Dial Name
Use this option to set whether or
not ANI data should appear on
telephone displays as part of
Caller ID display.
Routing SPD Table Setup
Use this option to define which
part of the ABB Table set up in
Program 13-04 the system uses
for ANI/DNIS Caller ID look-ups
and ANI/DNIS routing.
This is required if Items 4 and 5
above are 1 (Caller ID on).
When you specify a starting and
end address, the system uses
the part of the table for look-ups.
When you specify a starting
address and length, the system
uses that part of the table for
routing. If the incoming
ANI/DNIS number data matches
the Number entry in the table,
the system routes according to
the associated Name data. That
data can be an extension,
Department Group pilot number,
the voice mail master number or
a trunk ring group.
Routing on ANI/DNIS Error
This option lets you determine
how the system handles an
ANI/DNIS call if a data error is
detected in the incoming data
string.
Routing When Destination
Busy or No Answer
This option lets you determine
how the system handles an
ANI/DNIS call if destination is
busy or does not answer.
Calling Number Address
Length
When Item 01 = 0 (ANI/DNIS
receive format is the address),
use this option to specify the
address length. The choices are
from 1 ~ 8 digits.
06
07
08
09
Input Data
0 = Display Off
1 = Display On
Start = 0, 100 ~ 900
End = 0, 99 ~ 999
Default
Default
Related
1
0
13-04
20-09-02
22-11-03
23-09-04
Start = 900
End = 999
Start = 0
End = 0
13-04
Program
34
0 = Play Busy Tone to
Caller
1 = Route Caller to Ring
Group Specified in
Program 25-03 (Transfer)
1
0
25-03
0 = Play Busy or Ringback
Tone to Caller (Busy/
NoAns)
1 = Route Caller to Ring
Group Specified in
Program 25-04 (Transfer)
1~8
0
0
25-04
7
7
34-09-01
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-313
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-11 : E1 Trunk Basic Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 34-11 : E1 Trunk Basic Setup to define the basic setting of each E1 Trunk.
34
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
Item
01
E1 Trunk Type
02
MFC Dialing Type
03
MFC Group B
04
Expected Number of
MFC Digits
001 ~ 096
Input Data
0 = Standard Trunk
1 = Argentine Pulsed
Clear Back Trunk
2 = Argentine Pulsed
Answer Trunk
3 = Brazil With seizure
acknowledge Trunk
4 = Brazil Without
seizure acknowledge
Trunk
5 = Brazil E&M Signal A
(Idle = 0) Trunk
6 = Brazil E&M Signal A
(Idle = 1) Trunk
7 = Brazil E&M Signal B
(Idle = 0) Trunk
8 = Brazil Code for
collect call blocking
Trunk
0 = MFC Dialing not
used
1 = NEC Standard
2 = Argentina
3 = Brazil
4 = Chile
5 = Colombia
6 = Mexico
7 = Venezuela
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 ~ 20
Description
Default
Use this option to specify the E1 Signal
type (0 ~ 8). Set this option for
compatibility with the connected Telco.
0
Use this option to specify the MFC Dialing
Type. The following table shows the
available MFC Dialing Type choices, By
default, this option is 0 (MFC Dialing not
used).
0
Use this option to enable (1) or disable (0)
the MFC Dialing Group B supervisory
signaling. Since not all central offices
provide Group B signaling, set this option
for compatibility with the connected Telco.
By default, this option is Disable (0).
Use this option to specify the number of
digits in the ANI number. This is required
for ANI since delimiters do not mark the
beginning and end of the data string. The
system must know how many digits of
incoming ANI Caller ID data to interpret.
0
7
Conditions

After set Program 34-11-01, System needs to be re-started.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-314
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup
35-01 : SMDR Options
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 35-01 : SMDR Options to set the SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) options for
each of the eight SMDR ports. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and
default setting.
Input Data
SMDR Port Number
Item
No.
Item
1~2
Input Data
Description
Default
This option specifies the type of connection
used for SMDR. The baud rate for the
COM port should be set in Program
10-21-02 or 15-02-19.
SMDR port1 : 3
SMDR port2 : 0
01
Output Port Type
03
Header Language
04
Omit Digits
0 = None
1 = --Reserve-2 = --Reserve-3 = LAN
4 = --Reserve-0 = English
1 = German
2 = French
3 = Italian
4 = Spanish
0 ~ 24 (0 = Not applied)
05
Minimum Digits
0 ~ 24 (0 = Not applied)
06
Minimum Call
Duration
0 ~ 65535 seconds (0 =
All)
07
Minimum Ring Time
(For Incoming Calls)
Format Selection
0 ~ 65535 seconds (0 =
All)
0 = Format1 Type (North
America)
1 = Format2 Type
(Overseas)
08
Specify the language in which the SMDR
header should be printed.
0
The number of digits entered in this option
does not print on the SMDR report. For
example, if the entry is 10, the first 10
digits a user dials do not appear on the
SMDR report.
Outgoing calls must be at least this
number of digits for inclusion in the SMDR
report.
The duration of the call must be at least
this time to be included on the SMDR
report.
A call must ring for at least this time to be
included on the SMDR report.
0
0
0
0
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Station Message Detail Recording
Programming Manual
2-315
35
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup
35-02 : SMDR Output Options
Level
IN
Program
35
Description
Use Program 35-02 : SMDR Output Options to set the SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
output options for each of the eight SMDR ports. Refer to the following chart for a description of each
option, its range and default setting.
Input Data
SMDR Port Number
Item
No.
Item
01
Toll Restricted Call
02
PBX Calls
03
Trunk Number or
Name
1~2
Input Data
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
0 = Name
1 = Number
04
Summary (Daily)
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
05
Summary (Weekly)
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
06
Summary (Monthly)
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
07
Toll Charge Cost
08
Incoming Call
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
09
Extension Number or
Name
0 = Name
1 = Number
10
All Lines Busy (ALB)
Output
Walking Toll
Restriction Table
Number
DID Table Name
Output
CLI Output When DID
to Trunk
Date
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
0 = Not Output
1 = Output
11
12
13
14
15
2-316
CLI/DID Number
Switching
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
0 = Not Displayed
1 = Displayed
0 = CLI (CLIP)
1 = DID Calling Number
2 = Calling Party Name
Description
Default
SMDR can include or exclude calls
blocked by Toll Restriction.
When the system is behind a PBX, SMDR
can include all calls (1) or just calls dialed
using the PBX trunk access code (0).
Select whether the system should display
the trunk name (0) or the number (1) on
SMDR reports.
1
If this option is set to 1, Program
35-02-14 must be set to 0.
Set this option to (1) to have the SMDR
report provides a daily summary (at
midnight every night).
Set this option to (1) to have the SMDR
report provides a weekly summary (every
Saturday at midnight).
Set this option to (1) to have the SMDR
report provides a monthly summary (at
midnight on the last day of the month).
Set this option to (1) have the SMDR report
include toll charges.
Enable this option (1) to have the SMDR
report include incoming calls. If you disable
this option (0), incoming calls do not print.
Set this option (1) to have the SMDR report
include extension numbers. Set this option
(0) to have the SMDR report include
extension names.
Determine if the All Lines Busy (ALB)
indication should be displayed.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
Determine if the DID table name should be
displayed.
Determine if the CLI output should be
displayed for DID.
Determine whether or not the date should
be displayed on SMDR reports.
This option must be set to 0 if the trunk
name is set to be displayed in Program
35-02-03.
Determine whether or not the CLI/DID
Number Switching should be displayed.
0
0
0
0
Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup
ISSUE 1.1
Item
No.
SL1100
Item
Input Data
Description
Default
0
16
Trunk Name or
Received Dialed
Number
0 = Trunk Port Name
1 = Received Dialed
Number
2 = Both
17
Print Account Code
or Caller Name of
Incoming Call
Print Mode for Caller
Name of Incoming
Call
Dialed Number
Output Format
0 = ACC
1 = CNAME
Determine how the SMDR should print
incoming calls on ANI/DNIS or DID trunks.
If set to (1), ANI/DNIS trunks can print
DNIS digits. If set to (0) trunk names are
printed instead.
Determine if SMDR should print Account
Code or Caller Name of Incoming Call.
0 = Normal
1 = Line Feed
Determine how SMDR should print Caller
Name of Incoming Call.
0
0 = Display from the first
digit
1 = Display from the last
digit
0 = Transfer Information
1 = Incoming
Information
Determine if the dialed number should
display from the first digits or from the last
digits. This option is only available for
outgoing calls.
Determine which information is displayed
in the "STATION" area for a transferred call
when the extension has Call Forward set
with an Abbreviated Dial number as the
destination. Selecting "0" (Transfer Info)
will display the extension number which
called the extension with external Call
Forward set. Selecting "1" (Incoming Info)
will display the extension number which
has the external Call Forward set.
This option only applies when Call Forward
is set using a service code (Programs
11-11-01 ~ 11-11-07) and the destination
uses an Abbreviated Dial bin. It does not
include Off-Premise or Centrex transfers.
0
18
19
20
External Information
CFW Mode
21
22
S-Point Terminal
Number
Security Auto Dialing
0 = MSN Number
1 = Extension Number
0 = Not Output
1 = Output
23
Watch Auto Dialing
0 = Not Output
1 = Output
0
0
0
Emergency call from Watch Mode. Define
SMDR output on/off. Output is SAD
(Security auto dialing).
Emergency call from Remote Inspection.
Define SMDR output on/off. Output is WAD
(Watch auto dialing )
1
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Station Message Detail Recording
Programming Manual
2-317
Program
35
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup
35-03 : SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group
Level
IN
Program
35
Description
Use Program 35-03 : SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group to assign the SMDR port for each
trunk group. For each Trunk Group, select the SMDR port where the incoming SMDR information
should be sent.
Input Data
Trunk Group Number
01 ~ 25
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
01
SMDR Port No.
1~2
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference


Station Message Detail Recording
Trunk Group Routing
2-318
Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup
35-04 : SMDR Port Assignment for Department Groups
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 35-04 : SMDR Port Assignment for Department Groups to assign the SMDR port for
each Department Group. For each Department Group, select the SMDR port where the outgoing
SMDR information should be sent.
There are 32 available Department Groups.
Input Data
Department Group Number
01 ~ 32
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
01
SMDR Port No.
1~2
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Station Message Detail Recording
Programming Manual
2-319
35
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup
35-05 : Account Code Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 35-05 : Account Code Setup to set various Account Code options for an extension
Class of Service. Assign a Class of Service to extensions in Program 20-06.
35
Input Data
Class of Service Number
Item
No.
Item
01
Account Code Mode
02
Forced Account
Code Toll Call Setup
03
Account Codes for
Incoming Calls
04
Hiding Account
Codes
01 ~ 15
Input Data
Description
Default
0 = Account Codes
Disabled (None)
1 = Account Codes
optional
2 = Account Codes
Required but not verified
(No verify)
3 = Account Codes
Required and Verified
(Verify)
0 = Account Codes for
toll and local calls (All)
1 = Account Codes just
for toll calls (STD)
0 = Account Codes for
incoming calls disabled
(No)
1 = Account Codes for
incoming calls enabled
(Yes)
0 = Account Codes
displayed
1 = Account Codes not
displayed
Use this option to select the Account Code
Mode (0 ~ 3).
0
Use this option enable Account Codes for
all calls or just toll calls (for mode 2 or 3 in
Item 01 above).
0
Use this option to allow users to enter
Account Codes for incoming calls. If
disabled, any codes entered dial out on the
connected trunk.
0
Use this option to either hide or show the
Account codes on a telephone display.
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Account Code Forced/Verified/Unverified
2-320
Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup
35-06 : Verified Account Code Table
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 35-06 : Verified Account Code Table to enter Account Codes into the Verified Account
Code list. You can enter up to 800 codes with 1 ~ 16 digits, using the characters 0 ~ 9 or #. Use the LK1
to enter a wild card. For example, the entry @234 means the user can enter 0234-9234.
Input Data
Verified Account Code Bin
Number
Item
No.
01
1 ~ 800
Item
Verified Account Code
Input Data
1 ~ 9, 0, #, @ (@ = Wild card)
(Up to 16 digits)
Default
No setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Account Codes - Forced/Verified/Unverified
Programming Manual
2-321
35
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 40 : Voice Recording System
40-07 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 40-07 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS to specify the language to be
used for the VRS prompts.
40
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Voice Prompt Language
Assignment for VRS
Input Data
01 = US English
02 = UK English
03 = Australian English
04 = French Canadian
05 = Dutch
06 = Mexican Spanish
07 = Latin America Spanish
08 = Italian
09 = German
10 = Madrid Spanish
11 = Norwegian
12 = Parisian French
13 = Brazilian Portuguese
14 = Japanese
15 = Mandarin Chinese
16 = Korean
17 = Iberian Portuguese
18 = Greek
19 = Danish
20 = Swedish
21 = Thai
22 = Mandarin Chinese (Taiwan)
23 = Flemish
24 = Turkish
Default
3
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Voice Mail Integration (Analog)
2-322
Program 40 : Voice Recording System
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 40 : Voice Recording System
40-10 : Voice Announcement Service Option
Level
IN
Program
Description
In Program 40-10 : Voice Announcement Service Option define the system options for the Voice
Announcement feature.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
VRS Fixed
Message
0 = Not Used
1 = Used
02
General
Message
Number
VRS No Answer
Destination
0 ~ 100
(0 = No General
Message Service)
0 ~ 25
(Incoming Ring Group
Number)
04
VRS No Answer
Time
0 ~ 64800 seconds
05
Park and Page
Repeat Timer
(VRS Msg
Resend)
Set VRS
Message for
Private Call
Refuse (VRS
Msg Private
Call)
Set VRS
Message for
Caller ID Refuse
(VRS Msg CID)
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Call Attendant
Busy Message
Call Attendant
No Answer
Message
Call Forward
Remainder
Announcement
(V2.0 Added)
Call Forward
Notification
Announcement
(V2.0 Added)
0 ~ 100
(0 = No message)
0 ~ 100
(0 = No message)
03
06
07
08
09
10
11
0 ~ 101
(0 = No message)
(101 = Fixed message)
0 ~ 101
(0 = No message)
(101 = Fixed message)
Description
Default
Enable (1) or disable (0) the system
ability to play the fixed VRS
messages (such as You have a
message).
This item assigns the VRS message
number to use for the General
Message.
This item assigns the transferred
Ring Group when the VRS is
unanswered after Call Forwarding
with Personal Greeting Message.
If an extension has Personal
Greeting enabled and all VRS ports
are busy, a DIL or DISA call to the
extension waits this time for a VRS
port to become free.
If a Park and Page is not picked up
during this time, the Paging
announcement repeats.
0
This item assigns the VRS Message
number to be used as Private Call
Refuse.
When Fixed message is set, VRS
message guidance is: “Your call
cannot go through.”
This item assigns the VRS Message
number to be used as Caller ID
Refuse.
When Fixed Message is set, VRS
message guidance is: “Your call
cannot go through.”
Related
Program
0
0
(No Setting)
0
0
0
14-01-27
0
14-01-27
0
15-01-08
0
15-01-09
0 = Do not play
1 = Play
Flag that control the playback of the
VRS announcements for 'on the
forwarded phone'.
1
40-10-01
0 = Do not play
1 = Play
Flag that control the playback of the
VRS announcements for 'towards
the incoming call'.
1
40-10-01
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Voice Response System (VRS)
Programming Manual
2-323
40
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 40 : Voice Recording System
40-11 : Preamble Message Assignment
Level
IN
Program
40
Description
In Program 40-11 : Preamble Message Assignment to assign the VRS message number to be used
as the Preamble Message for each trunk. When the extension user answers the incoming call, the
assigned VRS message is sent to the outside caller.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item No.
Day/Night Mode
01
1~8
001 ~ 096
VRS Message Number
0 ~ 100 (0 = No Service)
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Voice Response System (VRS)
2-324
Program 40 : Voice Recording System
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
42-01 : System Options for Hotel/Motel
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 42-01 : System Options for Hotel/Motel to assign the system options for Hotel/Motel
Service.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
Answering Message
Mode for Wake Up
Call (Hotel Mode)
02
Wake Up Call
Message Assignment
03
Wake Up Call No
Answer
04
Setup Message Mode
for Wake Up Call
(Hotel Mode)
05
Wake Up Call
Message Assignment
Flexible Room Status
(V2.0 Added)
06
Input Data
0 = MOH (Hold Time)
1 = VAU Message
2 = VAU Message +
Time
0 ~ 100
(0 = No setting)
0 = No Transfer
1 = Transfer to the
Operator
0 = Confirmation Tone
1 = VAU Message
2 = Time Stamp + VAU
Message
0 ~ 100
(0 = No setting)
0 = Off
1 = On
Description
Default
0
VAU Message for Wake Up Calls. You
must make an entry for this program if you
have selected 1 or 2 in Item 01 above.
0
0
0
0
When PRG42-01-06 is set to on, any room
status change from any status can be
made.
Ex)
Hotel Status Code 4 -> 3
Hotel Status Code 4 -> 4
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Hotel/Motel
Programming Manual
2-325
42
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
42-02 : Hotel/Motel Telephone Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 42-02 : Hotel/Motel Telephone Setup to define the basic operation of the Hotel/Motel
extensions.
42
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
Item
Up to eight digits
Input Data
01
Hotel Mode
0 = Normal
1 = Hotel
02
Toll Restriction Class
When Check In
1 ~ 15
03
Room Status
(Reference Only)
(V2.0 Added)
1 = Room Clean
(Occupied)
2 = Maid Required
3 = Maid in Room
4 = Inspection Required
5 = Maintenance
Request
6 = Out of Order
7 = Reserve 1
8 = Reserve 2
9 = Reserve 3
0 = Room Clean
(Vacant)
* = Reserve 5
# = Reserve 6
Description
Default
If you want an extension to operate in the
Hotel/Motel mode, enter 1. If you want the
telephone to operate in the business
mode, enter 0.
Assign an extension Toll Restriction Class
when it is checked in. The system has 15
Toll Restriction Classes (1 ~ 15). The entry
you make in this option affects the
telephone in all Night Service modes.
(Refer to Programs 21-05 and 21-06 to set
up the Toll Restriction dialing options.)
When the extension is checked out, it uses
the Toll Restriction Class set in Program
21-04.
This Program shows the hotel room
status of each Hotel extension.
0
1
-
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Hotel/Motel
2-326
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
42-03 : Class of Service Options (Hotel/Motel)
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 42-03 : Class of Service Options (Hotel/Motel) to set the Hotel/Motel Class of Service
(COS) options. Assign Class of Service to extensions in Program 42-02 : Hotel/Motel Telephone Setup.
There are 15 Classes of Service. Refer to the following chart for a description of each COS option, its
range and default setting. For additional Class of Service options, refer to Programs 20-06.
Input Data
Class of Service Number
Item
No.
Item
01
Check-In Operation
02
Check-Out Operation
03
Room Status Output
04
DND Setting for Other Extension
05
Wake up Call Setting for Other Extension
06
Room Status Change for Other Extension
07
Restriction Class Changing for Other Extension
08
Room to Room Call Restriction
09
DND Setting for Own Extension
10
Wake Up Call Setting for Own Extension
11
Change Room Status for Own Extension
12
SLT Room Monitor
Enable (1) or disable (0) a single line telephone ability
to use Room Monitor.
PMS Restriction Level
13
01 ~ 15
Input Data
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Default
Note
Class
01 ~ 15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference


Class of Service
Hotel/Motel
Programming Manual
2-327
42
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
42-04 : Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes
Level
IN
Program
42
Description
Use Program 42-04 : Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes to set up the Hotel Mode one-digit
service codes which are assigned in 42-02-01. For each Department Calling Group (01 ~ 32), you enter
the destination for each single digit code (1 ~ 9, 0, *, #). The destination can be any code with up to
eight digits, such as an extension number or access code.
Input Data
Department (Extension) Group Number
01 ~ 32
Item No.
Received Dial
Destination Number
Default
01
1 ~ 9, 0, *, #
Up to eight digits
No setting
Conditions

The one-digit service codes you assign in this program wait until the inter-digit time expires
before executing.
Feature Cross Reference

Hotel/Motel
2-328
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
42-05 : Hotel Room Status Printer
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 42-05 : Hotel Room Status Printer to set the LAN port to output the Hotel Data
(Check-Out sheet, Room Status, etc.) and the output options for the Hotel/ Motel feature.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
Output Port Type
03
Wake Up Call No Answer Data
04
Check-Out Sheet
05
PMS Protocol type
Input Data
0 = No setting
3 = LAN
0 = Not Output
1 = Output
0 = Not Output
1 = Output
0 = Normal
1 = Fidelio
Default
0
0
0
0
Conditions

Room Status Reports can be output via LAN port.
Feature Cross Reference

Hotel/Motel
Programming Manual
2-329
42
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
42-06 : PMS Service Setting
Level
IN
Program
(This Program is available for V2.0 or higher)
Description
42
Use PRG 42-06 : PMS Service Setting to set the PMS integration settings when using PMS-U13 and
PMS feature.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
PMS Port Number
0 ~ 65535
02
0 = Off
1 = On
03
3:00 AM Auto Room Scan
At 3:00 AM sets ‘maid required’
status for all checked-in rooms.
CheckIn Message Type
04
CheckOut Auto Status Change
05
AREYUTHERE/LINETEST Send
Timing
0 = Off
1 = On
1 ~ 128 seconds
06
AREYUTHERE/LINETEST Send
Count
0 ~ 20 (times)
07
Check-Out Auto Flexible Status
Change
0 = Off
1 = On
08
Status for Check-Out Auto
Flexible Status Change
1 = Room
Clean(Occupied)
2 = Maid
Required
3 = Maid in
Room
4 = Inspection
Required
5 = Maintenance
Request
6 = Out of Order
7 = Reserve 1
8 = Reserve 2
9 = Reserve 3
0 = Room
Clean(Vacant)
* = Reserve 5
# = Reserve 6
0 = Off
1 = On
Description
Default
Determine the TCP port the application
should connect to for the integration
stream.
Determine if the system scans the
status
of Hotel rooms at 3:00 AM.
Determines whether a check-in or Out
Message is sent when the action is
performed on th ePBX.
Determines the room status when a
room is checked out.
Defines the time that passes after any
PMS message sent from the PBX that
the PBX sends an AREYUTHERE
message.
This is the retry count for
un-acknowledged AREYUTHERE
messages. When this consecutive
count of AREYUTHERE messages is
unacknowledged, the PBX assumes the
PMS link to be in-operational (off-line).
When PRG 42-06-07 and PRG
42-06-04
are set to on, the status programmed
with PRG 42-06-08 can be set upon
checkout regardless of the previous
status.
When PRG 42-06-07 is set to on, the
status programmed with PRG 42-06-08
can be set upon checkout.
5129
0
0
0
10
3
0
4
Conditions

None
2-330
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Feature Cross Reference

Hotel/Motel
Program
42
Programming Manual
2-331
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
42-07 : PMS Restriction Level Conversion Table
Level
IN
Program
(This Program is available for V2.0 or higher)
Description
42
Use PRG 42-07 : PMS Restriction Level Conversion Table to change the default Toll Restriction
class on check in for a room (PRG 42-02-02). This command translates the Toll Restriction level
received from the hospitality application into a system Toll restriction Class.
Input Data
Restriction Level
0~3
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
PMS Restriction Level Conversion
Table
1 ~ 15
Default
Level 0 = 10
Level 1 = 11
Level 2 = 12
Level 3 = 13
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Hotel/Motel
2-332
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
42-08 : Text Message Setup for Hotel Room Status
Level
IN
(This Program is available for V2.0 or higher)
Program
Description
Use Program 42-08 : Text Message Setup for Hotel Room Status to define the text message for
Hotel Room Status.
Input Data
Room Status Number
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0, *, #
Room Status
0 = Check In
1 = Check Out
Item
No.
Item
01
02
Input Data
Fedelio Room Status Number
Text Message Data
0~#
Maximum 32 characters
Default
Refer to Default value.
Default
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
*
#
Room Status
Check In
Check Out
Check In
Check Out
Check In
Check Out
Check In
Check Out
Check In
Check Out
Check In
Check Out
Check In
Check Out
Check In
Check Out
Check In
Check Out
Check In
Check Out
Check In
Check Out
Check In
Check Out
Fidelio
Code
alphanumeric
12345678901234567890123456789012
6
5
2
1
2
1
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
6
5
4
3
4
3
Conditions
None
Programming Manual
2-333
42
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Feature Cross Reference

Hotel/Motel
Program
42
2-334
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
42-09 : Flexible Setup for Room Status
Level
IN
(This Program is available for V2.0 or higher)
Program
Description
Use Program 42-09 : Flexible Setup for Room Status to enable dial room status codes. Note the
code definitions only apply to the system itself.
Input Data
Room Status
Item
No.
01
Item
Flexible Setup for Room Status
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0, *, #
Input Data
0 = Room Clean (Vacant)
1 = Room Clean (Occupied)
2 = Maid Required
3 = Maid in Room
4 = Inspection Required
5 = Maintenance Request
6 = Out of order
7 = Reserve 1
8 = Reserve 2
9 = Reserve 3
* = Reserve 5
# = Reserve 6
Default
1 - # = None
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Hotel/Motel
Programming Manual
2-335
42
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-01 : System Options for ARS/F-Route
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 44-01 : System Options for ARS/F-Route to define the system options for the
ARS/F-Route feature.
44
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
ARS/F-Route Time
Schedule
0 = Not Used
1 = Used
02
Dial Tone Simulation
(V2.0 Added)
1 digit (0 ~ 9)
*, # cant be used
03
Tone Kind (V2.0
Added)
0 = Internal DT
1 = External DT
Description
Default
If this option is set to 0, the F-Route table
selected is determined only by the digits
dialed without any relation to the day or
time of the call.
If this option is set to 1, the system first
refers to PRG 44-10. If there is a match,
the pattern defined in that program is used.
If not, the F-Route pattern in PRG 44-09
and time setting in 44-08 are used.
When first dialed digit matches with the
data set in this Program, system send
simulated DT to calling party after receiving
first digit. Numbering plan for the dial
needs to configure as F-Route at PRG
11-01.
Set simulated DT kind which can change
the tone used at PRG 44-01-02 and PRG
44-02-04.
0
None
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)
2-336
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 44-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access to set the Pre-Transaction Table
for selecting ARS/F-Route.
44
Input Data
Dial Analysis Table Number
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
Dial
Up to eight digits
(Use line key 1 for a
Don’t Care digit, @)
0 = No setting (None)
1 = Extension Call
(Own)
2 = ARS/F-Route Table
(F-Route)
3 = Dial Extension
Analyze Table (Option)
02
Service Type
03
Additional Data
1 = Delete Digit = 0 ~
255 (255 = Delete All
Digits)
2 = 0 ~ 100 (0 = No
setting)
3 = Dial Extension
Analyze Table Number
= 0 ~ 4 (0 = No setting)
04
Dial Tone Simulation
0 = Off
1 = On
001 ~ 120
Description
Default
Set the number of digits to be analyzed by
the system for ARS routing.
No Setting
・Service Type 1 (Extension Number)
The number goes to an extension after
deleting the front digit(s).
Additional Data
Assign the digit(s) to be deleted on top of
the number for extension number usage.
At least one digit must be deleted.
・Service Type 2 (ARS/F-Route)
The number is controlled by ARS/F-Route
table.
Additional Data:
If the ARS/F-Route Time Schedule is not
used, assign the ARS/F-Route table
number for Program 44-05.
If the ARS/F-Route Time Schedule is used,
assign the ARS/F-Route selection number
for Program 44-04.
・Service Type 3 (Dial Extension Analyze
Table)
The total length of the number exceeds
more than 8 digits.
Additional Data:
Assign the Dial Extension Analysis Table
number to be used in Program 44-03.
For the Service Type selected in 44-02-02,
enter the additional data required.
・1 : Delete Digit = 0 ~ 255
(255 = Delete All Digits)
・2 : [Program 44-01 : 0]
ARS/F-Route Table Number = 0 ~ 100 (0 =
No setting)
Refer to Program 44-05.
[Program 44-01 : 1]
ARS/F-Route Select Table Number = 0 ~
100 (0 = No setting)
Refer to Program 44-04.
・3 : Dial Extension Analyze Table Number
= 0 ~ 4 (0 = No setting)
Refer to Program 44-03.
If enabled, this option sends dial tone to
the calling party after the routing is
determined. This may be required if the
central office at the destination does not
send dial tone.
0
0
0
Conditions
None
Programming Manual
2-337
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)
Program
44
2-338
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-03 : Dial Analysis Extension Table
Level
IN
Program
Description
When Program 44-02-02 is set to type 3, use Program 44-03 : Dial Analysis Extension Table to set
the dial extension analysis table. These tables are used when the analyzed digits must be more than
eight digits. If the received digits do not match the digits set in tables 1 ~ 250, table number 252 is used
to refer to the next Extension Table Area (1 ~ 4) to be searched. If the received digits are not identified
in tables 1 ~ 250, the F-Route selection table number defined in table 251 is used.
Input Data
Extension Table Area Number
1~4
Dial Analysis Table Number
1 ~ 252
Dial Analysis Table Number : 1 ~ 250
Item
No.
Item
01
Dial
02
ARS/F-Route Select Table Number
Input Data
Up to 36 digits
Digits = 1 ~ 9, 0, *, #, @
(Press Line Key 1 for wild character @)
0 ~ 100 (ARS/F-Route Table Number)
With Program 44-01 set to 0, Program 44-05 is
checked.
With Program 44-01 set to 1, Program 44-04 is
checked.
Default
No Setting
0
Dial Analysis Table Number : 251
Item
No.
Item
03
ARS/F-Route Select Table Number
Input Data
0 ~ 100 (ARS/F-Route Table Number)
With Program 44-01 set to 0, Program 44-05 is
checked.
With Program 44-01 set to 1, Program 44-04 is
checked.
Default
0
Dial Analysis Table Number : 252
Item
No.
04
Item
Next Table Area Number
Input Data
Default
0~4
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)
Programming Manual
2-339
44
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule
Level
IN
Program
44
Description
Use Program 44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule to assign each ARS/ F-Route
Selection number to an ARS/F-Route table number for each ARS/F-Route time mode. There are eight
time modes for ARS/F-Route Access.
Input Data
ARS/F-Route Selection Number
Item No.
ARS/F-Route Time Mode
01
1~8
001 ~ 100
ARS/F-Route Table Number
0 ~ 100
(0 = No Service)
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)
2-340
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table to set the ARS/F-Route table. There are four kinds of order.
If the higher priority trunk groups are busy, the next order group is used. If a lower priority route is
selected, the caller may be notified with a beep tone.
Input Data
ARS/F-Route Table Number
001 ~ 100
Priority Number
1~4
Item
No.
Item
01
Trunk Group Number
02
Delete Digits
03
Additional Dial
Number Table
04
Beep Tone
0 = Off
1 = On
05
0 ~ 100
0 = No setting
0 ~ 100
0 = No setting
07
Gain Table Number
for Internal Calls
Gain Table Number
for Tandem
Connections
ARS Class of Service
08
Dial Treatment
0 ~ 15
09
Maximum Digit
0 ~ 24
11
Network Specified
Parameter Table
0 ~ 16
06
Input Data
0 = No setting
1 ~ 25 = Trunk Group
255 = Extension Call
0 ~ 255
(255 = Delete All)
0 ~ 100
0 ~ 16
Description
Default
Select the trunk group number to use for
the outgoing ARS call.
0
Enter the number of digits to be deleted
from the dialed number.
Enter the table number (defined in
Program 44-06) for additional digits to be
dialed.
Select whether or not a beep is heard if a
lower priority trunk group is used to dial
out.
Select the gain table number to use for the
internal call (defined in Program 44-07).
Select the gain table number to use for the
tandem call (defined in Program 44-07).
0
Select the ARS Class of Service to use for
the table. An extension ARS COS is
determined in Program 26-04-01.
Select the Dial Treatment to use for the
table. If a Dial Treatment is selected,
Programs 44-05-02 and 44-05-03 are
ignored and the Dial Treatment defined in
Program 26-03-01 is used instead.
Input the maximum number of digits to
send when using the F-Route.
Enter a table number from Program 26-12.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)
Programming Manual
2-341
44
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-06 : Additional Dial Table
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 44-06 : Additional Dial Table to set the additional dial table to add prior to the dialed
ARS/F-Route number. The Additional Dial Table used is determined in Program 44-05-03.
44
Input Data
Additional Dial Table Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Additional Dial
001 ~ 100
Input Data
Default
Up to 36 digits
Enter : 1 ~ 9, 0, *, #, Pause (press LK 1 to enter a
pause)
No setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)
2-342
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-07 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 44-07 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access to set the gain/PAD table. If an extension
dials ARS/F-Route number:

The Extension Dial Gain Table, assigned in Program 44-05, is activated.

The Extension Dial Gain Table follows Outgoing transmit and Outgoing receive settings.
If the incoming call is transferred to another line using ARS/F-Route:

The Tandem Gain Table, assigned in Program 44-05, is activated.

The Tandem Gain Table follows the Incoming transmit and Incoming receive settings for incoming
line, and Outgoing transmit and Outgoing receive settings for the outgoing line.
For ARS/F-Route calls, the CODEC gains defined in Programs 14-01-02 and 14-01-03 are not activated.
Input Data
Gain Table Number
Item
No.
001 ~ 100
Item
01
Incoming Transmit
02
Incoming Receive
03
Outgoing Transmit
04
Outgoing Receive
Input Data
1 ~ 63
(- 15.5 dB ~ + 15.5 dB)
1 ~ 63
(- 15.5 dB ~ + 15.5 dB)
1 ~ 63
(- 15.5 dB ~ + 15.5 dB)
1 ~ 63
(- 15.5 dB ~ + 15.5 dB)
Default
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)
Programming Manual
2-343
44
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-08 : Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route
Level
IN
Program
44
Description
Use Program 44-08 : Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route to define the daily pattern of the ARS/F-Route
feature. ARS/F-Route has 10 time patterns. These patterns are used in Programs 44-09 and 44-10.
The daily pattern consists of 20 time settings.
Input Data
Schedule Pattern Number
01 ~ 10
Item No.
Time Number
Start Time
End Time
Mode
01
01 ~ 20
0000 ~ 2359
0000 ~ 2359
1~8
Default
All Schedule Patterns = 0 : 00 - 0 : 00, Mode 1
Example :
Pattern 1
Time Number 01 = 00 : 00 - 08 : 00 Mode 3
Time Number 02 = 08 : 00 - 18 : 00 Mode 1
Time Number 03 = 18 : 00 - 22 : 00 Mode 2
Time Number 04 = 22 : 00 - 00 : 00 Mode 3
Pattern 2
Time Number 01 = 00 : 00 - 00 : 00 Mode 2
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)
2-344
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-09 : Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 44-09 : Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route to define a weekly schedule for using
ARS/F-Route. The pattern number is defined in Program 44-08-01.
44
Input Data
Item No.
01
Day Number
1 = Sunday
2 = Monday
3 = Tuesday
4 = Wednesday
5 = Thursday
6 = Friday
7 = Saturday
Schedule Pattern
Number
Default
0 ~ 10
(0 = No setting)
Pattern 1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)
Programming Manual
2-345
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-10 : Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route
Level
IN
Program
44
Description
Use Program 44-10 : Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route to define a yearly schedule for
ARS/F-Route. This schedule is used for setting special days such as national holidays. The pattern
number is defined in Program 44-08-01.
Input Data
Item No.
Date
01
0101 ~ 1231
Schedule Pattern Number
0 ~ 10 (0 = No setting)
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)
2-346
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration
45-01 : Voice Mail Integration Options
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 45-01 : Voice Mail Integration Options to customize certain voice mail integration
options.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
Voice Mail
Department
Group Number
0 ~ 32
0 = No Voice Mail
02
Voice Mail
Master Name
Voice Mail Call
Screening
Up to 12 Characters
04
Park and Page
0 = Off
1 = On
05
Message Wait
0 = Off
1 = On
06
Record Alert
Tone Interval
Time
New NSL
Protocol
support
Prefix for Call
Screening
Prefix for Park
and Page
Prefix for
Message Wait
Analog Voice
Mail Protocol
Selection
0 ~ 64800 seconds
Voice Mail Fax
Digit Add
Assignment
Reply Mailbox
Number
Up to four digits
Trunk Number
Mapping
2~3
03
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
Programming Manual
0 = Off
1 = On
Description
Default
Assign which Extension
(Department) Group number is to
be assigned as the voice mail
group.
Enter the Voice Mail Master Name.
0
Enable/disable the ability to process
the Call Screening commands (1 +
extension number) sent from the
Voice Mail. You should normally
enable this option to allow for Voice
Mail Call Screening. Disable this
option if your system has been
modified so that extensions begin
with the digit 1(e.g., 101, 102, etc.).
Also see the “Flexible System
Numbering” feature.
Enable/disable the system ability to
process the Voice Mail Park and
Page (*) commands. You should
normally enable this option.
Enable/disable the system ability to
process the Voice Mail Message
Wait (#) commands. You should
normally enable this option. If
enabled, be sure that the
programmed Message Notification
strings don’t contain the code for
trunk access.
This time sets the interval between
Voice Mail Conversation Record
alerts.
Related
Program
VOICE MAIL
0
45-01-11
1
45-01-12
1
45-01-13
0 seconds
0 = Off
1 = On
0
Dial (One digit)
1
45-01-03
Dial (One digit)
*
45-01-04
Dial (One digit)
#
45-01-05
0
45-04
11-11-50/51
0 = Fixed
1 = Program
0 = No
1 = Yes
Assigns whether fixed codes are
used or the codes used in Program
45-04 are used for analog voice
mail protocol.
Assign up to four digits in front of
the station number sent to the SLT
port when a call is forwarded.
Whether or not to include the
mailbox number in the analog voice
mail protocol.
Assign the digits of trunk number
mapping.
No Setting
1
15-03-16
45-04
2
2-347
45
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Voice Mail Integration (Analog)
45
2-348
Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration
45-02 : NSL Option Setup
Level
SA
Program
Description
Use Program 45-02 : NSL Option Setup to setup the NSL options for Voice Mail integration.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
Send DTMF tone or 6KD message
03
Send 51A Message
05
Send 4PM message
Input Data
0 = Send DTMF tone to SLT-VM port
1 = Send 6KD message to Serial port
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Default
1
1
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-349
45
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration
45-04 : Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment
Level
IN
Description
Use Program 45-04 : Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment to define the digits to add.
45
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
Item
Remote Logon (Internal)
Direct Logon
Transfer Message
Forward-All
Forward-Busy
Forward RNA
Remote Logon
Conversation Recording
Clear Down String
Input Data
Up to four digits
Up to four digits
Up to four digits
Up to four digits
Up to four digits
Up to four digits
Up to four digits
Up to four digits
Up to four digits
Default
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
Related
Program
45-01-15
45-01-15
45-01-15
45-01-15
45-01-15
45-01-15
45-01-15
45-01-15
45-01-15
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-350
Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration
45-05 : Voice Mail Send Protocol Signal Without Additional
Digits
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 45-05 : Voice Mail Send Protocol Signal Without Additional Digits to send trunk
number and/or station number information if integrating to Voice Mail when Program 45-04-XX is left
blank and 45-01-15 is set to "Program".
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
Remote Log-On Internal
02
Direct Log-On
03
Transfer Message/QVM
04
Forward-All
05
Forward-Busy
06
Forward RNA
07
Remote Log-On
08
Conversation Recording
09
Clear Down String
Input Data
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Default
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Related
Program
45-01-15
45-04-01
45-01-15
45-04-02
45-01-15
45-04-03
45-01-15
45-04-04
45-01-15
45-04-05
45-01-15
45-04-06
45-01-15
45-04-07
45-01-15
45-04-08
45-01-15
45-04-09
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-351
45
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 47 : InMail
47-01 : InMail System Options
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 47-01 : InMail System Options to set up the InMail system-wide options.
47
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
02
InMail Master Name
03
Subscriber Message
Length
Input Data
Up to 12 characters
1 ~ 4095 seconds
Description
Default
(MasterName)
The CPU must be reset for a change to
this program to take effect.
Use this option to modify the name for all
InMail ports. The system briefly displays
this name when a display multiline terminal
user calls a Voice Mail port (either by
pressing Message, their voice mail key, or
by dialing the master number). You should
always end the name with the ##
characters. The system substitutes the
port number for the last #. Using the
default name InMail ##, for example, the
telephone display shows InMail #1 when
calling port 1.
(Subs Msg Length)
Use this option to set the maximum length
of recorded messages for:
・Subscriber Mailbox users dialing RS to
record and send a message.
・Extension users leaving a message in a
Subscriber Mailbox.
・Outside Automated Attendant callers
accessing a mailbox via a GOTO
command and then dialing RS to record
and send a message.
・Subscriber Mailbox Greetings.
InMail ##
(The system
substitutes the
port number for
the # when
calling the port.)
120 seconds
・Announcement Messages.
・Call Routing Mailbox Instruction Menus.
04
Non-Subscriber
Message Length
1 ~ 4095 seconds
05
Message Backup/Go
Ahead Time
1 ~ 6015 seconds
2-352
The length of a Conversation
Record is 10 times the Subscriber
Message Length. Since the
Conversation Record time cannot
exceed 4095 seconds, any setting in
Subscriber Message Length larger than
409 has no effect on the length of
recorded conversations.
(Mbox Msg Length)
Use this option to set the maximum length
of recorded messages for:
・Automated Attendant callers leaving a
message or Quick Message in a
Subscriber Mailbox.
・Outside callers transferred by an
extension user to a Subscriber Mailbox.
(Msg Bkup/Adv Time)
Use this option to set the backup/ go
ahead time. This time sets how far InMail
backs up when a user dials B while
listening to a message. This interval also
sets how far InMail jumps ahead when a
user dials G while listening to a message.
120 seconds
5 seconds
Program 47 : InMail
ISSUE 1.1
Item
No.
07
SL1100
Item
Digital Pager
Callback Number
Input Data
Description
Default
Digits
(12 maximum, using 0 ~
9, # and*)
M (Number of
messages - entered by
pressing LK1)
X (Extension number entered by pressing
LK2)
InMail automatically
replaces the X
command with the
number of the extension
that initially received the
message.
(Pager CBack)
Use this option to set the Digital Pager
Callback Number portion of the Message
Notification callout number for a digital
pager. This is the portion of the callout
number that is appended to the pager
service telephone number. Normally, this
option should be X*M#, where:
・X is the number of the extension that
generated the notification.
・* is a visual delimiter (to make the pager
display easier to read).
・M is the number of new messages in the
extension mailbox.
・# is the digit normally used by the pager
service for positive disconnect.
(Pager Dial Delay)
Use this option to set the delay (0 ~ 99
seconds) that occurs just before InMail
dials the Digital Pager Callback Number
portion of the Message Notification callout
number for a digital pager.
Set this delay so the pager service has
enough time to connect to the digital pager
before sending the callback number.
Your pager service may be able to help you
determine the best value for this option (0
~ 99 seconds).
By default, this option is 9 seconds. When
placing a digital pager notification, the
system: Seizes the trunk specified. Dials
the user-entered notification number (in
Message + OP + N).
Waits the 47-01-08: Delay in Dialing Digital
Pager Callback Number interval.
Dials the number entered in 47-01-07:
Digital Pager Callback Number.
The system assumes that the notification
number completes dialing approximately 4
seconds after trunk seizure. This means
that, by default, the Digital Pager Callback
Number is dialed into the pager service
about 13 seconds after trunk seizure.
(Notify Pager Intvl)
Use this option to set the minimum time (1
~ 255 minutes) between unacknowledged
or unanswered digital pager Message
Notification callouts. (A subscriber
acknowledges a digital pager notification
by logging onto their mailbox.)
After this time expires, InMail tries the
callout again (for up to the number of times
set in 47-01-14: Number of Callout
Attempts).
If the system dials the callout number and
the pager service is busy, it retries the
number in one minute.
(Notify N-Pgr Intvl)
Use this option to set the minimum time (1
~ 255 minutes) between non-pager
Message Notification callouts in which the
destination answers, says Hello, dials 1 to
acknowledge and then enters the wrong
security code.
(Notify Busy Intvl)
Use this option to set how long InMail waits
(1 ~ 255 minutes) after it dials a busy
non-pager callout destination, before
retrying the callout number.
X*M#
08
Delay in Dialing
Digital Pager
Callback Number
0 ~ 99 seconds
09
Wait Between Digital
Pager Callout
Attempts
1 ~ 255 minutes
10
Wait Between
Non-Pager Callout
Attempts
1 ~ 255 minutes
11
Wait Between Busy
Non-Pager Callout
Attempts
1 ~ 255 minutes
Programming Manual
Program
47
30 seconds
15 minutes
20 minutes
15 minutes
2-353
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
12
Wait Between RNA
Non-Pager Callout
Attempts
1 ~ 255 minutes
13
Number of RNA rings
(V1.5 Changed)
1 ~ 99 rings
14
Number of
Cascading Attempts
(V1.5 Changed)
1 ~ 99 rings
15
Send Pager Callout
Until Acknowledged
0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
16
Name Format
17
InMail Port
0 = First-Last
1 = Last-First
0 ~ 105 (V2.0 Changed)
18
Play PAD Control
19
Record PAD Control
(for Networking)
Program
47
1 ~ 63
(- 15.5 dBm ~ + 15.5
dBm)
1 ~ 63
(- 15.5 dBm ~ + 15.5
dBm)
Description
Default
(Notify RNA Intvl)
Use this option to set how long InMail waits
(1 ~ 255 minutes), after it dials an
unanswered non-pager callout destination,
before retrying the callout number.
There are 3 types of unanswered
non-pager callouts:
・If the callout rings the destination longer
than the 47-01-13: Wait for Answer
Non-Pager Callout Attempts option.
・If the destination answers, says Hello
(or the system detects answer
supervision) and then hangs up without
dialing 1 to log onto their mailbox. This
typically happens if someone unfamiliar
with notification answers the callout, or if
the callout is picked up by an answering
machine.
・If the destination answers and then
hangs up without saying Hello. This
typically happens if someone unfamiliar
with the notification answers the callout
(like the above example), or if the call is
picked up by an answering machine with
insufficient outgoing message volume.
If a non-pager callout rings the destination
longer than this interval (1 ~ 99 rings),
InMail marks the call as unanswered (Ring
No Answer) and hangs up.
Use this option to set how many times (1 ~
99 rings) InMail retries an incomplete
Message Notification callout.
This total includes unacknowledged
callouts, callouts to a busy destination, and
callouts to an unanswered destination.
This option applies to pager and non-pager
callouts.
(Retry Until Ack)
When this option is enabled (1), InMail
continues to retry a digital pager Message
Notification callout until the notification is
acknowledged.
If this option is disabled (0), InMail retries a
digital pager Message Notification the
number of times specified in 47-01-14
Number of Callout Attempts. This option
does not apply to Message Notification
callouts to telephone numbers.
A digital pager notification is considered
acknowledged when the recipient logs
onto the mailbox.
Specify if names are displayed in First-Last
format or Last-First.
The first port of InMail must start with one
of the following ports:
5, 9, 13, 17, 21, 25, 29, 33, 37, 41, 45, 49,
53, 57, 61, 65, 69, 73, 77, 79, 81, 85, 89,
93, 97, 101, 105 and uses the first port
assigned + next three consecutive
ports
30 minutes
5 rings
1 ring
0
0
0
32
32
Conditions

When changing 47-01-01 or 47-01-02, a system reset is required for the new setting to take
effect.
2-354
Program 47 : InMail
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
47
Programming Manual
2-355
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 47 : InMail
47-02 : InMail Station Mailbox Options
Level
IN
Program
47
Description
Use Program 47-02 : InMail Station Mailbox Options to set up a station/extension mailbox. Station
mailboxes are automatically assigned as Subscriber Mailboxes. Normally, InMail Station Mailbox
numbers 1 ~ 64 should correspond to extensions 101-164.
Station Mailboxes are one of three mailbox categories: Station, Routing, or Master. You can also set up
Master Mailboxes as Subscriber Mailboxes.
Input Data
Station Mailbox Number
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
Mailbox Type
0 = None
1 = Personal
2 = Group
02
Mailbox Number
Up to eight digits
03
Number of Messages
0 ~ 99 messages
To conserve storage
space, enter 0 for all
unused mailboxes.
04
Message Playback
Order
0 (FIFO = first-in/
first-out, or oldest
messages first).
1 (LIFO = last-in/
first-out, or newest
messages first)
2-356
001 ~ 120
Description
Default
Use this option to enable or disable the
mailbox. An extension mailbox is not
accessible when it is disabled (even
though its stored messages and
configuration are retained in memory.) If
disabled, a user pressing Message
initiates a remote logon and is asked to
enter their mailbox number. A voice prompt
then announces: “That mailbox does not
exist.”
To make programming easier, consider
associating a mailbox number with a
station port. For example, mailbox 1 could
correspond to port 1, which in turn
corresponds to extension 101.
Use this option to select the extension
number associated with the mailbox you
are programming. Normally, mailbox 1
should use Mailbox Number 101, mailbox
2 should use Mailbox Number 201, 101
etc.
To make programming easier, consider
associating a mailbox number with a
station port. For example, mailbox 1 could
correspond to port 1, which in turn
corresponds to extension 101.
Use this option to set the maximum
number of messages that can be left in the
Subscriber Mailbox. If a caller tries to leave
a message after this limit is reached, they
hear : “That mailbox is full.” InMail then
hangs up.
Use this option to set the Subscriber
Mailbox message playback order. When a
subscriber listens to their messages,
InMail can play the oldest messages first
(first-in/first-out, or FIFO), or the newest
messages first (last-in/first-out, or LIFO).
Mailbox 1 ~ 64 :
1
Mailbox 65 ~ : 0
Mailbox 1 = 101
Mailbox 2 ~ 64 =
102 ~ 164
Mailbox 65 ~ =
No Setting
Mailbox 1 = 99
Mailbox 2 ~ = 20
0
Program 47 : InMail
ISSUE 1.1
Item
No.
05
06
SL1100
Item
Auto Erase/Save of
Messages
Message Retention
Input Data
Description
Default
0 = Erase
After the subscriber
listens to the entire new
message and hangs up,
InMail erases the
message.
1 = Save
After the subscriber
listens to the entire new
message and hangs up,
InMail saves the
message.
0 ~ 99 Days
(0 = Indefinite)
Use this option to determine what happens
when a Subscriber Mailbox user
completely listens to a new message and
then exits the mailbox without either saving
(SA) or erasing (E) the message.
Depending on the setting of this option,
InMail either automatically saves or erases
the message. If the mailbox user hangs up
before listening to the entire new message,
InMail retains the message as a new
message.
1
Use this option to determine how long a
Subscriber Mailbox retains held and saved
messages. If a message is left in a
Subscriber Mailbox longer than this
interval, InMail deletes it.
(Rec Conv Beep)
Use this option to enable or disable the
Conversation Record beep. If enabled, all
parties on a call hear the voice prompt
“Recording”, followed by a single beep
when the extension user initiates
Conversation Record. If disabled, the voice
prompt and beep do not occur. When you
disable the Conversation Record beep, the
following voice prompts do not occur while
InMail records the conversation:
Recording
(followed by a beep)
That mailbox is full
(if the mailbox message storage capacity is
reached)
You have reached the recording limit
(if the recorded message is too long)
Provides an additional Conversation
Record beep. This beep repeats according
to the setting of Program 45-01-06 : Voice
Mail Integration Options : Record Alert
Tone Interval Time (0 ~ 64800 seconds).
To disable the Conversation Record beep,
enter 0 for this option.
(Update MW Lamp)
Use this option to enable or disable
Message Waiting lamping at the extension
associated with the Subscriber mailbox.
For Subscriber Mailboxes, you should
leave this option enabled. For Guest
Mailboxes, you should leave this option
disabled.
(Auto-ATT DND)
Use this option to enable or disable Auto
Attendant Do Not Disturb. When a
subscriber enables Auto Attendant Do Not
Disturb, an Automated Attendant caller
routes directly to the mailbox, hears the
greeting, and is asked to leave a message.
A subscriber can also enable Auto
Attendant Do Not Disturb while recording
their mailbox greeting.
(Forced UTRF)
Use this option to enable or disable
Automated Attendant Forced Unscreened
Transfer for the Subscriber Mailbox. If
enabled, each Screened Transfer (TRF) to
the extension is converted to an
Unscreened Transfer (UTRF). If disabled,
Screened Transfers from the Automated
Attendant occur normally.
0
07
Recording
Conversation Beep
0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
08
Message Waiting
Lamp
0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
09
Auto Attendant
Direct to Voice Mail
0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
10
Forced Unscreened
Transfer
0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
Programming Manual
Program
47
1
1
0
0
2-357
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
11
Auto Time Stamp
0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
12
System
Administrator
0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
13
Dialing Option
0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
14
Next Call Routing
Mailbox
Call Routing Mailbox
Number (1 ~ 3 digits, 00
~ 32)
(00 = Undefined)
No entry (Entered by
pressing CLEAR)
15
Directory List
Number
16
Voice Prompt
Language
0 = None
1 ~ 8 = List Number
* = All
Refer to 47-02-16
Default Table.
17
Enable Paging
18
Paging Option
19
Telephone User
Interface Type
Enable E-mail
Notification
E-mail Address
Include Message as
Attachment
All Message
Notification Enabled
All Find-Me
Follow-Me Enabled
Security Code Option
Program
47
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Auto Play (V1.5
Added)
Email message
Save/Delete Option
(V1.5 Added)
27
Description
Default
Use this option to enable or disable Auto
Time
Stamp for the Subscriber Mailbox. If
enabled, after the subscriber listens to a
message InMail announces the time and
date the message was left. Auto Time
Stamp also announces the message
sender (if known).
A subscriber can also enable Auto Time
Stamp from their mailbox.
Use this option to designate the Subscriber
Mailbox as a System Administrator. This
allows the subscriber to use the SA options
after logging onto their mailbox.
Dialing Option provides additional dialing
options for Next Call Routing Mailbox calls
(see Next Call Routing Mailbox below). If
enabled, a caller who accesses the
Subscriber Mailbox to leave a message
can dial any of the options in the Next Call
Routing Mailbox Dial Action Table. If
disabled, the caller can dial only 0 (to use
the Next Call Routing Mailbox 0 action).
(Next CR Mbox)
Use this option to assign a Next Call
Routing Mailbox to the Subscriber Mailbox.
This provides callers with additional dialing
options while listening to a Subscriber
Mailbox recorded or default greeting. The
digits the caller can dial depend on the
setting of the Next Call Routing Mailbox
and Alternate Next Call Routing Mailbox
options.
0
Mailbox 1 (101)
=1
Mailbox 2 ~= 0
0
1
0
Station Mailbox
Number
3
0
0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
0 = RNA
1 = Immediately
0 = Numeric
1 = Mnemonic
0 = No
1 = Yes
Up to 48 characters
0 = No
1 = Yes
0 = No
1 = Yes
0 = No
1 = Yes
0 = Always
1 = Remote Logon only
0 = Disabled
1 = Enable
0 = No Change
1 = Save
2 = Delete
0
0
0
No Setting
1
1
0
0
0
0
Table 2-8 47-02-16 Default Table
Item
Name
47-02-16
Voice Prompt Language
2-358
Input Data
01 = US English
02 = UK English
03 = Australian English
04 = French Canadian
05 = Dutch
06 = Mexican Spanish
07 = Latin American Spanish
08 = Italian
Program 47 : InMail
ISSUE 1.1
Item
SL1100
Name
Input Data
09 = German
10 = Madrid Spanish
11 = Norwegian
12 = Parisian French
13 = Brazilian Portuguese
14 = Japanese
15 = Mandarin Chinese
16 = Korean
17 = Iberian Portuguese
18 = Greek
19 = Danish
20 = Swedish
21 = Thai
22 = Mandarin Chinese (Taiwan)
23 = Flemish
24 = Turkish
Program
47
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-359
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 47 : InMail
47-03 : InMail Group Mailbox Options
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 47-03 : InMail Group Mailbox Options to set up the 32 Group Mailboxes (01 ~ 32). A
Group Mailbox is used for Department Group overflow and can be a Subscriber or Call Routing.
47
Input Data
Group Mailbox Number
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
02
Mailbox Number
Up to eight digits
No setting (entered by
pressing Hold)
03
Mailbox Type
0 = None
1 = Subscriber
2 = Routing
03
Routing Mailbox
Number
01 ~ 32
01 ~ 32
Description
Default
(Mailbox Number)
The Group Mailbox Number is the same as
the Department Group master (pilot)
number. Use this option to select the
Department Group master (pilot) number
associated with the Group Mailbox you are
programming.
(Mailbox Type)
Use this option to set the Group Mailbox
type. There are three types of InMail
mailboxes : None (0), Subscriber (1) and
Routing (2).
No Setting
1
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-360
Program 47 : InMail
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 47 : InMail
47-06 : Group Mailbox Subscriber Options
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 47-06 : Group Mailbox Subscriber Options to set up a Master Mailbox assigned as a
Subscriber Mailbox in 47-03-03 : Master Mailbox Type.
47
Input Data
Group Mailbox Number
Item
No.
Item
01
Number of Messages
00 ~ 99 messages
To conserve storage
space, enter 0 for all
unused mailboxes.
02
Message Playback
Order
03
Auto Erase/Save of
Messages
04
Message Retention
0 (FIFO = first-in/
first-out, or oldest
messages first).
1 (LIFO = last-in/
first-out, or newest
messages first).
0 = Erase
After the subscriber
listens to the entire new
message and hangs up,
InMail erases the
message.
1 = Save
After the subscriber
listens to the entire new
message and hangs up,
InMail saves the
message.
0 ~ 90 days
(0 = Indefinite)
05
Recording
Conversation Beep
Programming Manual
Input Data
0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
01 ~ 32
Description
Default
Use this option to set the maximum
number of messages that can be left in the
Subscriber Mailbox. If a caller tries to leave
a message after this limit is reached, they
hear, “That mailbox is full.” InMail then
hangs up.
Use this option to set the Subscriber
Mailbox message playback order. When a
subscriber listens to their messages,
InMail can play the oldest messages first
(first-in/first-out, or FIFO), or the newest
messages first (last-in/first-out, or LIFO).
Use this option to determine what happens
when a Subscriber Mailbox user
completely listens to a new message and
then exits the mailbox without either saving
(SA) or erasing (E) the message.
Depending on the setting of this option,
InMail either automatically saves or erases
the message. If the mailbox user hangs up
before listening to the entire new message,
InMail retains the message as a new
message.
20
Use this option to determine how long a
Subscriber Mailbox retains held and saved
messages. If a message is left in a
Subscriber Mailbox longer than this
interval, InMail deletes it.
(Rec Conv Beep)
Use this option to enable or disable the
Conversation Record beep. If enabled, all
parties on a call hear the voice prompt
“Recording”, followed by a single beep
when the extension user initiates
Conversation Record. If disabled, the voice
prompt and beep do not occur. When you
disable the Conversation Record beep, the
following voice prompts do not occur while
InMail records the conversation:
Recording
(followed by a beep)
That mailbox is full
(if the mailbox message storage capacity is
reached)
You have reached the recording limit
(if the recorded message is too long)
Provides an additional Conversation
Record beep. This beep repeats according
to the setting of Program 45-01-06 : Voice
Mail Integration Options : Record Alert
Tone Interval Time (0 ~ 64800 seconds).
To disable Conversation Record beep,
enter 0 for this option.
0
0
1
1
2-361
SL1100
Item
No.
ISSUE 1.1
Item
Input Data
06
Message Waiting
Lamp
0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
Program
07
Auto Attendant
Direct to Voice Mail
0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
47
08
Forced Unscreened
Transfer
0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
09
Auto Time Stamp
0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
10
System
Administrator
0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
11
Dialing Option
0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
12
Next Call Routing
Mailbox
0 ~ 32
(0 = Undefined)
13
Directory List
Number
14
15
Voice Prompt
Language
Enable Paging
16
Paging Option
17
Telephone User
Interface
18
Enable Email
Notification
Email Address
0 = None
1 ~ 8 = List Number
* = All
Refer to 47-06-14
Default Table.
0 = No
1 = Yes
0 = RNA
1 = Immediate
0 = Numeric interface
1 = Mnemonic interface
2 = Octel (future)
0 = No
1 = Yes
Up to 48 characters
19
2-362
Description
Default
(Update MW Lamp)
Use this option to enable or disable
Message Waiting light at the extension
associated with the Subscriber mailbox.
For Subscriber Mailboxes, you should
leave this option enabled. For Guest
Mailboxes, you should leave this option
disabled.
Use this option to enable or disable Auto
Attendant Direct to VM. When a subscriber
enables Auto Attendant Direct to VM, an
Automated Attendant caller routes directly
to the mailbox, hears the greeting, and is
asked to leave a message. A subscriber
can also enable Auto Attendant Direct to
VM while recording their mailbox greeting.
(Forced UTRF)
Use this option to enable or disable
Automated Attendant Forced Unscreened
Transfer for the Subscriber Mailbox. If
enabled, each Screened Transfer (TRF) to
the extension is converted to an
Unscreened Transfer (UTRF). If disabled,
Screened Transfers from the Automated
Attendant occur normally.
Use this option to enable or disable Auto
Time Stamp for the Subscriber Mailbox. If
enabled, after the subscriber listens to a
message InMail announces the time and
date the message was left. Auto Time
Stamp also announces the message
sender (if known).
A subscriber can also enable Auto Time
Stamp from their mailbox.
(System Admin)
Use this option to designate the Subscriber
Mailbox as a System Administrator. This
allows the subscriber to use the options
after logging onto their mailbox.
Dialing Option provides additional dialing
options for Next Call Routing Mailbox calls
(see Next Call Routing Mailbox below). If
enabled, a caller who accesses the
Subscriber Mailbox to leave a message
can dial any option in the Next Call Routing
Mailbox Dial Action Table. If disabled, the
caller can dial only 0 (to use the Next Call
Routing Mailbox 0 action).
(Next CR Mbox)
Use this option to assign a Next Call
Routing Mailbox to the Subscriber Mailbox.
This provides callers with additional dialing
options while listening to a Subscriber
Mailbox recorded or default greeting. The
digits the caller can dial depends on the
setting of the Next Call Routing Mailbox
and Alternate Next Call Routing Mailbox
options.
Specify the Directory List number to which
the Group Mailbox belongs.
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
(Call Routing
Mailbox 01)
By default, Call
Routing Mailbox
numbers are 01
= 16.
0
3
0
0
0
0
No Setting
Program 47 : InMail
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
20
Include Msg as
Attachment
All Message
Notification Enabled
All Find-Me
Follow-Me Enabled
Security Code Option
0 = No
1 = Yes
0 = No
1 = Yes
0 = No
1 = Yes
0 = Always
1 = Remote Logon only
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = No Change
1 = Save
2 = Delete
21
22
23
24
Auto Play (V1.5
Added)
Email message Save
/ Delete Option (V1.5
Added)
25
Description
Default
1
1
0
0
0
Program
0
47
Table 2-9 47-06-14 Default Table
Item
Name
47-06-14
Voice Prompt Language
Input Data
01 = US English
02 = UK English
03 = Australian English
04 = French Canadian
05 = Dutch
06 = Mexican Spanish
07 = Latin American Spanish
08 = Italian
09 = German
10 = Madrid Spanish
11 = Norwegian
12 = Parisian French
13 = Brazilian Portuguese
14 = Japanese
15 = Mandarin Chinese
16 = Korean
17 = Iberian Portuguese
18 = Greek
19 = Danish
20 = Swedish
21 = Thai
22 = Mandarin Chinese (Taiwan)
23 = Flemish
24 = Turkish
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-363
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 47 : InMail
47-07 : InMail Routing Mailbox Options
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 47-07 : InMail Routing Mailbox Options to set up the 32 Routing Mailboxes. Routing
Mailboxes can be either Announcement or Call Routing Mailboxes.
47
Input Data
Routing Mailbox Number
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
02
Routing Mailbox
Type
0 = None
1 = Call Routing
2 = Announcement
3 = Directory
4 = Distribution
03
Prompt Language
04
Telephone User
Interface
Refer to 47-07-03
Default Table .
0 = Numeric interface
1 = Mnemonic interface
2 = Octel (future)
01 ~ 32
Description
Default
(Mailbox Type)
Use this option to set the Routing Mailbox
type.
Mailboxes 01 ~
08 = 1 (Call
Routing)
Mailboxes 09 ~
32 = 2
(Announcement)
3
0
Table 2-10 47-07-03 Default Table
Item
Name
47-07-03
Voice Prompt Language
Input Data
01 = US English
02 = UK English
03 = Australian English
04 = French Canadian
05 = Dutch
06 = Mexican Spanish
07 = Latin American Spanish
08 = Italian
09 = German
10 = Madrid Spanish
11 = Norwegian
12 = Parisian French
13 = Brazilian Portuguese
14 = Japanese
15 = Mandarin Chinese
16 = Korean
17 = Iberian Portuguese
18 = Greek
19 = Danish
20 = Swedish
21 = Thai
22 = Mandarin Chinese (Taiwan)
23 = Flemish
24 = Turkish
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-364
Program 47 : InMail
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 47 : InMail
47-08 : Call Routing Mailbox Options
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 47-08 : Call Routing Mailbox Options to set the options for mailboxes assigned as Call
Routing Mailboxes in 47-07-02 : Routing Mailbox Type.
47
Input Data
Routing Mailbox Number
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
Dial Action Table
1 ~ 16
(Dial Action Table 1 ~
16)
02
Screened Transfer
Timeout
0 ~ 255 seconds
Entering 0 causes
immediate recall.
03
Time Limit for Dialing
Commands
0 ~ 99 seconds
Entering 0 causes the
Automated Attendant to
immediately route
callers to the Timeout
destination programmed
in the active Dial Action
Table.
04
Fax Detection
0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
05
Fax Extension
Up to eight digits
01 ~ 32
Description
Default
Use this option to assign the Dial Action
Table to the Call Routing Mailbox. The Dial
Action Table defines the dialing options for
the call Routing Mailbox.
(Scrn Trf Timeout)
Use this option to set how long a Screened
Transfer (TRF) from the Automated
Attendant rings an unanswered extension
before recalling.
This option has a similar function as
Customize: Mailbox Options: Call Routing:
[Call Handling] Options: Delay Rings
Before Redirect Transfer in InMail.
(Dialing Timeout)
This option determines how long InMail
waits for an Automated Attendant caller to
dial before routing the call to the Timeout
destination.
Be sure your Dial Action Tables have a
Timeout action programmed.
If the caller waits too long to dial:
When the associated Dial Action Table has
a Timeout action programmed, the caller
routes to that destination.
When the associated Dial Action Table
does not have a Timeout action
programmed, the Instruction Menu repeats
three times and then InMail hangs up.
Use this option to enable or disable Fax
Detection for the Call Routing Mailbox. In
enabled, the InMail Automated Attendant
(when using this Call Routing Mailbox)
detects incoming fax CNG tone. The fax
call then routes to the company fax
machine according to the setting of
47-01-06 : Fax Extension. If disabled, the
Automated Attendant does not detect
incoming fax calls.
1 (Dial Action
Table 1)
15 seconds
5 seconds
0
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-365
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 47 : InMail
47-09 : Announcement Mailbox Options
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 47-09 : Announcement Mailbox Options to set the options for mailboxes assigned as
Announcement Mailboxes in 47-07-02 : Routing Mailbox Type.
47
Input Data
Routing Mailbox Number
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
Next Call Routing
Mailbox
Call Routing Mailbox
Number (01 ~ 32)
Next Call Routing
Mailbox 00 ~ 32
00 = Undefined
02
Repeat Count
0 ~ 10 (Announcement
repeats 1 ~ 10 times)
(0 = No Repeats)
03
Hang Up After
0 = None
1 = Goodbye
2 = Silent
01 ~ 32
Description
Default
(Next CR Mbox)
If you set up an Announcement Mailbox to
answer Automated Attendant calls, use
this option to provide additional routing
options to the Automated Attendant callers.
This option interacts with Repeat Count
and Hang Up After below.
For more detail on this interaction, refer to
Direct Announcement Mailbox Routing and
Routed Announcement Mailbox Routing in
the InMail System Guide.
Enter the number of times you want the
Announcement Mailbox message to repeat
to callers. After an Announcement Mailbox
caller initially listens to the message, it
repeats the number of times specified in
this option. This option interacts with Next
Call Routing Mailbox and Hang Up After
when providing routing options.
For more detail on this interaction, refer to
Direct Announcement Mailbox Routing and
Routed Announcement Mailbox Routing in
the InMail System Guide.
(HangUp)
Use this option along with Next Call
Routing Mailbox and Repeat Count above
to provide additional routing options to
Automated Attendant callers.
For more detail on this interaction, refer to
Direct Announcement Mailbox Routing and
Routed Announcement Mailbox Routing in
the InMail System Guide.
0
0
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-366
Program 47 : InMail
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 47 : InMail
47-10 : InMail Trunk Options
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 47-10 : InMail Trunk Options to assign InMail options for each trunk. Currently, only
47-10-01 : Answer Table Assignment is available.
47
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
Answer Table
Assignment
Answer Table (1 ~ 8)
02
Record PAD Control
03
Voice Prompt
Language
Telephone User
Interface
1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 dBm ~ +
15.5 dBm)
Refer to 47-10-03
Default Table .
0 = Numeric interface
1 = Mnemonic interface
04
001 ~ 096
Description
Default
(Answer Table)
Use this option to assign an InMail Answer
Table to each Direct Inward Line (DIL) the
Automated Attendant should answer. The
Automated Attendant follows the routing
specified by the selected Answer Table.
1
32
3
0
Table 2-11 47-10-03 Default Table
Item
Name
47-10-03
Voice Prompt Language
Input Data
01 = US English
02 = UK English
03 = Australian English
04 = French Canadian
05 = Dutch
06 = Mexican Spanish
07 = Latin American Spanish
08 = Italian
09 = German
10 = Madrid Spanish
11 = Norwegian
12 = Parisian French
13 = Brazilian Portuguese
14 = Japanese
15 = Mandarin Chinese
16 = Korean
17 = Iberian Portuguese
18 = Greek
19 = Danish
20 = Swedish
21 = Thai
22 = Mandarin Chinese (Taiwan)
23 = Flemish
24 = Turkish
Conditions
None
Programming Manual
2-367
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
47
2-368
Program 47 : InMail
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 47 : InMail
47-11 : InMail Answer Table Options
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 47-11 : InMail Answer Table Options to set options for the Answer Tables. InMail
provides eight Answer Tables (1 ~ 8). To set up the schedules for each Answer Table, go to 47-12 :
InMail Answer Table Schedule.
Input Data
Answer Table Number
Item
No.
Item
01
Answer Schedule Override
(Schedule Override)
Use this option to enable or disable
Answer Schedule Override for the
selected Answer Table. If enabled (and
you make an entry for Override Mailbox
below), the active Answer Table routes
calls to the Override Mailbox.
Override Mailbox Category
(Override MB Ctg)
Use this option to specify the category
of the mailbox where Automated
Attendant calls should route when you
enable Answer Schedule Override.

If the Override Mailbox is a
Subscriber Mailbox, the
outside caller hears the mailbox
greeting (if recorded) and can
leave a message.

If the Override Mailbox is a
Master Mailbox, the outside
caller shears the recorded
announcement. Depending on
how the Announcement Mailbox
is programmed, InMail then
hangs up, reroutes the call, or
provides additional dialing
options.

If the Override Mailbox is a
Routing Mailbox, the outside
caller hears the instruction menu
and can dial any option allowed
by the associated Dial Action
Table.
02
1~8
Input Data
Default
0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
0
0 = Undefined
1 = Subscriber Mailbox
- STA
2 = Master Mailbox
3 = Routing Mailbox
0
Description
Category 0 = Skip Mailbox No.
setting
Category 1 = Mailbox No.
should be 1 ~ 120. refer to
<47-02 : InMail Station Mailbox
Options>
Category 2 = Mailbox No.
should be 1 ~ 32. refer to
<47-03 : InMail Group Mailbox
Options>
Category 3 = Mailbox No.
should be 1 ~ 32. refer to
<47-07 : InMail Routing Mailbox
Options>
If any of the Input Data values are
entered, the terminal displays the Override
Mailbox Number selection (below).
Programming Manual
2-369
47
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Item
No.
Program
47
03
Item
Default
Description
Category 0 = Skip Mailbox No.
setting
Category 1 = Mailbox No.
should be 1 ~ 120. refer to
<47-02 : InMail Station Mailbox
Options>
Category 2 = Mailbox No.
should be 1 ~ 32. refer to
<47-03 : InMail Group Mailbox
Options>
Category 3 = Mailbox No.
should be 1 ~ 32. refer to
<47-07 : InMail Routing Mailbox
Options>
Category 0 = Skip Mailbox No.
setting
Category 1 = Mailbox No.
should be 1 ~ 120. refer to
<47-02 : InMail Station Mailbox
Options>
Category 2 = Mailbox No.
should be 1 ~ 32. refer to
<47-03 : InMail Group Mailbox
Options>
Category 3 = Mailbox No.
should be 1 ~ 32. refer to
<47-07 : InMail Routing Mailbox
Options>
Override Mailbox Number
(Override MB Num)
Use this option to specify the mailbox
where Automated Attendant calls
should route when you enable Answer
Schedule Override. The mailbox
number you select in this option should
match the mailbox category specified in
47-11-02 : Override Mailbox Category
above.
Up to 3 digits (using 0
~ 9)
No setting
Default Mailbox Category
(Default MB Ctg)
Use this option to specify the category
of mailbox used as the Default Mailbox.

If the Default Mailbox is a
Subscriber Mailbox, the
outside caller hears the mailbox
greeting (if recorded) and can
leave a message.

If the Default Mailbox is a
Master Mailbox, the outside
caller hears the recorded
announcement. Depending on
how the Announcement Mailbox
is programmed, InMail then
hangs up, reroutes the call, or
provides additional dialing
options.

If the Default Mailbox is a
Routing Mailbox, the outside
caller hears the instruction menu
and can dial any option allowed
by the associated Dial Action
Table.
0 = Undefined
1 = Subscriber Mailbox
- STA
2 = Master Mailbox
3 = Routing Mailbox
Answer
Table 1 = 3
Answer
Table 2 ~ 8 =
0
Up to 3 digits (using 0
~ 9)
Answer
Table 1 = 1
Answer
Table 2 ~ 8 =
No setting
Answer Table (0 ~ 8)
0 = Undefined
0
If any of the Input Data values are
entered, the terminal displays the Override
Mailbox Number selection (below). If any of
the Input Data values are entered, the
terminal displays the Override Mailbox
Number selection (below).
Default Mailbox Number
(Default MB Num)
Use this option to set the Answer Table
Default Mailbox number. InMail uses
the Default Mailbox when an Answer
Schedule is not in effect. By default, this
occurs at all times other than Monday
through Friday from 8:30 AM to 5:00
PM.
04
Input Data
Next Answer Table
When 10 Answer Schedules in an
Answer Table are not sufficient, use this
option to link two Answer Tables
together. InMail treats the two linked
tables as a single 20 entry Answer
Table.
Category 0 = Skip Mailbox No.
setting
Category 1 = Mailbox No.
should be 1 ~ 120. refer to
<47-02 : InMail Station Mailbox
Options>
Category 2 = Mailbox No.
should be 1 ~ 32. refer to
<47-03 : InMail Group Mailbox
Options>
Category 3 = Mailbox No.
should be 1 ~ 32. refer to
<47-07 : InMail Routing Mailbox
Options>
Conditions
None
2-370
Program 47 : InMail
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
47
Programming Manual
2-371
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 47 : InMail
47-12 : InMail Answer Schedules
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 47-12 : InMail Answer Schedules to set up the InMail Automated Attendant Answer
Schedules. There are eight Answer Tables, with up to 10 Answer Schedules in each Answer Table.
47
Input Data
Item
No.
2-372
Item
Answer Table Number
1~8
Schedule Entry Number
1 ~ 10
Input Data
Default
Description
Program 47 : InMail
ISSUE 1.1
Item
No.
01
SL1100
Item
Schedule Type
Programming Manual
Input Data
0 = Undefined
1 = Day of the Week
2 = Range of Days
3 = Date
Default
Description
Answer Table 1/
Schedule 1 = 2
All other schedules
=0
(Entryxx Schedule Type)
Use this option to assign a
Schedule Type to the selected
Answer Schedule. The Schedule
Type determines how the Answer
Schedule answers calls.
The schedule can be one of the
following types:

1. Day of the Week
A Type 1 Answer Schedule runs on
a specific day of the week. For this
type of schedule, you select:
The day of the week
the schedule should
run:
The schedule start
time.
The schedule end time.
The Call Routing or
Announcement
Mailbox used to
answer calls.

2. Range of Days
A Type 2 Answer Schedule runs for
a range of days. For this type of
schedule, you select:
The day of the week
the schedule should
start.
The day of the week
the schedule should
stop.
The time on the start
day the schedule
should start.
The time on the stop
day the schedule
should stop.
The Call Routing or
Announcement
Mailbox used to
answer the calls.

3. Date
A type 3 Answer Schedule runs
only on a specific day of the year.
For this type of schedule, you
select:
The specific date the
schedule should run.
On the selected date,
the time the schedule
should start.
On the selected date,
the time the schedule
should stop.
The Call Routing or
Announcement
Mailbox used to
answer the calls.
2-373
Program
47
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
Description
02
Answering Mailbox
Category
(Entryxx MB Ctg)
Use this option to specify the
category of mailbox to which
Automated Attendant calls
should route when the
schedule is in effect.
If the Answering Mailbox is a
Subscriber Mailbox, the
outside caller hears the
mailbox greeting (if recorded)
and can leave a message.
If the Answering Mailbox is a
Master Mailbox, the outside
caller hears the recorded
announcement. Depending on
how the Announcement
Mailbox is programmed,
InMail then hangs up,
reroutes the call, or provides
additional dialing options.
If the Answering Mailbox is a
Routing Mailbox, the outside
caller hears the instruction
menu and can dial any option
allowed by the associated Dial
Action Table.
Answering Mailbox Number
(Entryxx MB Num)
Use this option to set the
number of the Answering
Mailbox the Automated
Attendant uses when the
selected schedule is in effect.
This mailbox is defined in
47-12-02 : Answering Mailbox
Category.
0 = Undefined
1 = Subscriber Mailbox
- STA
2 = Master Mailbox
3 = Routing Mailbox
Answer Table 1/
Schedule 1 = 3
All Other Schedules
=0
Category 0 = Skip Mailbox No.
setting
Category 1 = Mailbox No. should
be 1 ~ 120. refer to <47-02 : InMail
Station Mailbox Options>
Category 2 = Mailbox No. should
be 1 ~ 32. refer to <47-03 : InMail
Group Mailbox Options>
Category 3 = Mailbox No. should
be 1 ~ 32. refer to <47-07 : InMail
Routing Mailbox Options>
Up to 3 digits (using 0 ~
9)
Answer Table 1/
Schedule 1 = 1
All Other Answer
Schedules = No
setting
Category 0 = Skip Mailbox No.
setting
Category 1 = Mailbox No. should
be 1 ~ 120. refer to <47-02 : InMail
Station Mailbox Options>
Category 2 = Mailbox No. should
be 1 ~ 32. refer to <47-03 : InMail
Group Mailbox Options>
Category 3 = Mailbox No. should
be 1 ~ 32. refer to <47-07 : InMail
Routing Mailbox Options>
1 = Sunday
2 = Monday
3 = Tuesday
4 = Wednesday
5 = Thursday
6 = Friday
7 = Saturday
1 = Sunday
2 = Monday
3 = Tuesday
4 = Wednesday
5 = Thursday
6 = Friday
7 = Saturday
1 = Sunday
2 = Monday
3 = Tuesday
4 = Wednesday
5 = Thursday
6 = Friday
7 = Saturday
MMDD
For example :
- 0101 = January 1
- 1231 = December 31
(0000 = Undefined)
All Schedules = 1
Program
47
03
04
05
06
2-374
Day of the Week
(Entryxx Day)
For Day of the Week (Type 1)
Answer Schedules, use this
option to select the day of the
week the Answer Schedule
should be active.
Start Day
(Entryxx Start Day)
For Range of Days (Type 2)
Answer Schedules, use this
option to select the day of the
week the Answer Schedule
should start.
End Day
(Entryxx End Day)
For Range of Days (Type 2)
Answer Schedules, use this
option to select the day of the
week the Answer Schedule
should end.
Date
(Entryxx Date)
For Date (Type 3) Answer
Schedules, use this option to
select the date the Answer
Schedule should be active.
Answer Table 1/
Schedule 1 = 2
All Other Schedules
=1
Answer Table 1/
Schedule 1 = 6
All Other Answer
Schedules = 1
All Schedule = 0000
Program 47 : InMail
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Default
07
Schedule Start Time
(Entryxx Start Time)
Use this option to specify the
time the Answer Schedule
should start. It applies to Day
of the Week (Type 1), Range
of Days (Type 2), and Date
(Type 3) schedules. (To make
a schedule run continuously,
make the same entry for
47-12-07 : Schedule Start
Time and 47-12-08 : Schedule
End Time.)
Schedule End Time
(Entryxx End Time)
Use this option to specify the
time the Answer Schedule
should end. It applies to Day
of the Week (Type 1), Range
of Days (Type 2), and Date
(Type 3) schedules. (To make
a schedule run continuously,
make the same entry for
47-12-07 : Schedule Start
Time and 47-12-08 : Schedule
End Time.)
HHMM (24-hour clock)
For example :
- 0130 = 1 : 30 AM
- 1700 = 5 : 00 PM
(0000 = Undefined)
Answer Table 1/
Schedule 1 = 0830
All other schedules
are 0000.
08
Description
Program
HHMM (24-hour clock)
For example :
- 0130 = 1 : 30 AM
- 1700 = 5 : 00 PM
(0000 = Undefined)
Answer Table 1/
Schedule 1 = 1700
All Other Schedules
= 0000
47
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-375
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 47 : InMail
47-13 : InMail Dial Action Tables
Level
IN
Program
Description
47
Use Program 47-13 : InMail Dial Action Tables to set up the InMail Dial Action Tables. The Dial Action
Table defines the options than an Automated Attendant caller can dial. A Dial Action Table is associated
with a Call Routing Mailbox, which is in turn associated with an Answer Table. When an Answer Table is
active, its associated Call Routing Mailbox selects the Dial Action Table which provides dialing options
to callers. The illustration below shows how this works in a default InMail system. There are 16 Dial
Action Tables.
Input Data
Item No.
01
Dial Action Table Number
01 ~ 16
Key Number
0 ~ 9, *, #, TIMEOUT
Name
Action
Input Data
0 = UND (Undefined)
1 = TRF (Transfer)
2 = UTRF (Unscreened Transfer)
3 = REC1
4 = REC2
5 = LOGON
6 = Hang Up
7 = GOTO
Description








2-376
TRF Action - Screened Transfer (1) (TRF)
UTRF Action - Unscreened Transfer (2) (UTRF)
REC1 Action - Quick Message With Greeting (3)
(REC1)
REC2 Action - Quick Message Without Greeting (4)
(REC2)
LOGON Action - Log Onto Voice Mail (5) (LOGON)
Hang Up Action (6) (HNGUP)
GOTO Action - Go to Mailbox (7) (GOTO)
UND Action - Undefined Routing (0) (UND)
Program 47 : InMail
ISSUE 1.1
Item No.
SL1100
Name
Data
Input Data
Description
Up to 8 digits
(0 ~ 9, *, #)
X = Caller Dialed Digits
I = Ignore Digits
N = No Routing
P = Pause
Digits
Entry : 0 ~ 9, #, and * (8 digits max.)
Use Dial Action Table digits to route an Automated Attendant
call to a specific location (such as an extension). For example,
to set up a TRF Action to route to extension 305, for 3 enter
TRF for the Action and 305 for the corresponding Number.

Caller Dialed Digits
Entry : X(Entered by pressing LK2)
Use the X option to route an Automated Attendant call based
on digits the caller dials. Each X entry represents one caller
dialed digit. For example, to set up a TRF Action to route to
any caller dialed extension in the 301 ~ 399 range, for 3 enter
TRF for the Action and XXX for the corresponding Number.

Ignore Digits
Entry : I(Entered by pressing LK3)
Use the I option to represent any digit dialed by the Automated
Attendant caller that PZ-VM21 InMail ignores for routing. An
example of this is REC action assigned to the * key in Dial
Action Table 1 by default. The Action is REC2 and the Number
is IXXX. This means that a caller can dial * + any mailbox
number to leave a Quick Message in that mailbox. InMail
ignores the first digit dialed by the caller (*), and routes
according to the next 3 digits dialed.

No Routing
Entry : N(Entered by pressing LK1)
Use the N option when you want no Automated Attendant
routing to automatically occur. This can be used with the
LOGON action when you want to prompt the caller to enter a
mailbox number. To do this for the # key (for example), for the
# key enter LOGON for the Action and N for the corresponding
Number. When the caller dials #, they hear, Please enter the
mailbox number. Or, to exit, press the pound key.

Pause
Entry : P(Entered by pressing LK4)

Use the P option when you want the Automated Attendant to
pause while dialing.
Defaults
Dial Action Table Default Settings
Key
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
*
#
TIMEOUT
Dial Action Table 1
Action
2 (UTRF)
0 (UND)
2 (UTRF)
0 (UND)
0 (UND)
0 (UND)
0 (UND)
0 (UND)
6 (Hang Up)
2 (UTRF)
3 (REC1)
5 (LOGON)
2 (UTRF)
Dial Action Table 2 ~ 16
Action
Data
0 (UND)
0
0 (UND)
0
0 (UND)
0
0 (UND)
0
0 (UND)
0
0 (UND)
0
0 (UND)
0
0 (UND)
0
0 (UND)
0
0 (UND)
0
0 (UND)
0
0 (UND)
0
0 (UND)
0
Data
XXX
0
XXXX
0
0
0
0
0
0
101
IXXX
IXXX
101
TIMEOUT provides the routing for rotary dial callers.
Note
Programming Manual
2-377
Program
47
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Note
Program
47
If Action is set 0 or 6 skip Data setting.
"XXX"= change as it fit
The “Data” data needs to follow these rules below.
0 (UND) = none
1 (TRF) = dial data (any), X, I, N, or P
2 (UTRF) = dial data (any), X, I, N, or P
3 (REC1) = mailbox number (subscriber or group)
4 (REC2) = mailbox number (subscriber or group)
5 (LOGON) = mailbox number (subscriber or group)
6 (HANGUP) = none
7 (GOTO) = routing mailbox number index (1 ~ 32)
Otherwise it will not be routed properly.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-378
Program 47 : InMail
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 47 : InMail
47-15 : Routing Directory Mailbox Options
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 47-15 : Routing Directory Mailbox Options to define the Routing Directory Mailbox
Options. This data is referred if Program 47-07-02 (Routing Master Mailbox Type) was set to Type 4
(Directory).
Input Data
Master Mailbox Number
Item
No.
01
01 ~ 32
Item
02
03
Minimum Number of Letters
Required
Directory List Number to Use
Name Match
04
Transfer Option
05
06
07
Screened Transfer Timeout
Time Limit for Dialing Commands
Fax Detection
08
09
Next Call Routing Mailbox
Fax Extension
Input Data
Default
1~3
1
1~8
0 = First
1 = Last
0 = TRF
1 = UTRF
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 99
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 ~ 32
Up to eight digits
1
0
0
15
5
0
0
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-379
47
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 47 : InMail
47-17 : Routing Distribution Mailbox Options
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 47-17 : Routing Distribution Mailbox Options to assign data when Program 47-07-02
is set to 4 (Distribution).
47
Input Data
Routing Mailbox Number
01 ~ 32
Entry Number
01 ~ 20
Item
No.
01
Item
Distribution Mailbox Category
Use Undefined (0) to skip Mailbox
Number setting.
Use Station Mailbox (1) for setting
Mailbox Number to 1 ~ 120
(Program 47-02).
Use Group Number (2) for setting
Group Mailbox (1 ~ 32)
(Program 47-03).
Distribution Mailbox Number
Input Data
Default
This Program is ..
0 = Undefined
1 = Station
Mailbox
2 = Group Mailbox
0
Category 1 = Mailbox No. should be
1 ~ 120. refer to <47-02 : InMail
Station Mailbox Options>
Category 2 = Mailbox No. should be
1 ~ 32. refer to <47-03 : InMail
Group Mailbox Options>
Up to 3 digits
No setting
Category 1 = Mailbox No. should be
1 ~ 120. refer to <47-02 : InMail
Station Mailbox Options>
Category 2 = Mailbox No. should be
1 ~ 32. refer to <47-03 : InMail
Group Mailbox Options>
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-380
Program 47 : InMail
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 47 : InMail
47-18 : InMail SMTP Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 47-18 InMail SMTP Setup to set the SNMP e-mail notification.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
SMTP Enabled
02
03
04
Server Name
SMTP Port
Encryption
05
Authentication
06
07
08
09
User Name
Password
E-mail Address
Reply to Address
Input Data
0 = No
1 = Yes
Up to 48 characters
0 ~ 65535
0 = No
1 = Yes
0 = No
1 = Yes
2 = POP3
Up to 48 characters
Up to 48 characters
Up to 48 characters
Up to 48 characters
Default
0
No Setting
25
0
0
No Setting
No Setting
No Setting
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-381
47
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 47 : InMail
47-19 : InMail POP3 Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 47-19 : InMail POP3 Setup to set the InMail e-mail notification.
47
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
02
03
Server Name
POP3 Port
Encryption
04
05
User Name
Password
Input Data
Up to 48 characters
0 ~ 65535
0 = No
1 = Yes
Up to 48 characters
Up to 48 characters
Default
No Setting
110
0
No Setting
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-382
Program 47 : InMail
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 47 : InMail
47-20 : Station Mailbox Message Notification Options
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 47-20 : Station Mailbox Message Notification Options to define the IntraMail Station
Mailbox Message Notification Options.
47
Input Data
Station Mailbox Number
Index Number
Item
No.
Item
01
Notification
02
Notification Begin Hour
03
Notification End Hour
04
Notification Type
05
06
07
08
Notification Number
Notification Busy Attempts
Notification RNA Attempts
Notification Security
09
Notification Day of week - Sunday
(V1.5 Added)
Notification Day of week - Monday
(V1.5 Added)
Notification Day of week - Tuesday
(V1.5 Added)
Notification Day of week Wednesday (V1.5 Added)
Notification Day of week Thursday (V1.5 Added)
Notification Day of week - Friday
(V1.5 Added)
Notification Day of week - Saturday
(V1.5 Added)
10
11
12
13
14
15
001 ~ 120
1~5
Input Data
0 = Off
1 = On
00 ~ 23
(00 (12 : 00 AM) ~ 23 (11 : 00 PM))
00 ~ 23
(00 (12 : 00 AM) ~ 23 (11 : 00 PM))
0 = Undefined
1 = Voice
2 = Pager
Up to 16 digits
1 ~ 99 (attempts)
1 ~ 99 (attempts)
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Default
0
00
00
1
No Setting
5
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-383
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 47 : InMail
47-21 : Station Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 47-21 : Station Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options to define the IntraMail Station
Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options.
47
Input Data
Item
No.
Station Mailbox Number
001 ~ 120
Index Number
1~3
Item
01
Find-Me Follow-Me
02
Find-Me Follow-Me Begin Hour
03
Find-Me Follow-Me End Hour
04
05
Find-Me Follow-Me Number
Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week Sunday (V1.5 Added)
Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week Monday (V1.5 Added)
Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week Tuesday (V1.5 Added)
Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week Wednesday (V1.5 Added)
Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week Thursday (V1.5 Added)
Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week Friday (V1.5 Added)
Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week Saturday (V1.5 Added)
06
07
08
09
10
11
Input Data
0 = Off
1 = On
00 ~ 23
(00 (12 : 00 AM) ~ 23 (11 : 00 PM))
00 ~ 23
(00 (12 : 00 AM) ~ 23 (11 : 00 PM))
Up to 16 digits
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Default
0
00
00
No Setting
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-384
Program 47 : InMail
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 47 : InMail
47-22 : Group Mailbox Message Notification Options
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 47-22 : Group Mailbox Message Notification Options to define the IntraMail Group
Mailbox Message Notification Options.
47
Input Data
Group Mailbox Number
01 ~ 32
Index Number
1~5
Item
No.
Item
01
Notification
02
Notification Begin Hour
03
Notification End Hour
04
Notification Type
05
06
07
08
Notification Number
Notification Busy Attempts
Notification RNA Attempts
Notification Security
09
Notification Day of week - Sunday
(V1.5 Added)
Notification Day of week - Monday
(V1.5 Added)
Notification Day of week - Tuesday
(V1.5 Added)
Notification Day of week Wednesday (V1.5 Added)
Notification Day of week Thursday (V1.5 Added)
Notification Day of week - Friday
(V1.5 Added)
Notification Day of week - Saturday
(V1.5 Added)
10
11
12
13
14
15
Input Data
0 = Off
1 = On
00 ~ 23
(00 (12 : 00 AM) ~ 23 (11 : 00 PM))
00 ~ 23
(00 (12 : 00 AM) ~ 23 (11 : 00 PM))
0 = Undefined
1 = Voice
2 = Pager
Up to 16 digits
1 ~ 99 (attempts)
1 ~ 99 (attempts)
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Default
0
00
00
1
No Setting
5
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-385
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 47 : InMail
47-23 : Group Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 47-23 : Group Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options to define the IntraMail Group
Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options.
47
Input Data
Item
No.
Group Mailbox Number
01 ~ 32
Index Number
1~3
Item
01
Find-Me Follow-Me
02
Find-Me Follow-Me Begin Hour
03
Find-Me Follow-Me End Hour
04
05
Find-Me Follow-Me Number
Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week Sunday (V1.5 Added)
Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week Monday (V1.5 Added)
Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week Tuesday (V1.5 Added)
Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week Wednesday (V1.5 Added)
Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week Thursday (V1.5 Added)
Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week Friday (V1.5 Added)
Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week Saturday (V1.5 Added)
06
07
08
09
10
11
Input Data
0 = Off
1 = On
00 ~ 23
(00 (12 : 00 AM) ~ 23 (11 : 00 PM))
00 ~ 23
(00 (12 : 00 AM) ~ 23 (11 : 00 PM))
Up to 16 digits
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Default
0
00
00
No Setting
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-386
Program 47 : InMail
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-01 : Service Tone Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 80-01 : Service Tone Setup to define up to 64 Service Tones. Each service tone is
defined by the combination of 32 Basic Tones.
80
Input Data
Service Tone Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Repeat Count
01 ~ 64
Input Data
0 ~ 255 (0 = Endless)
Unit Number
Item
No.
Default
Item
02
Basic Tone Number
03
04
Duration Count
Gain Level (dB)
Refer below
1~8
Input Data
0 ~ 33
(0 = No Tone)
(33 = Default Time Slot)
0 ~ 255 (0, 100 ~ 25500 ms)
0 ~ 63 (- 15.5 ~ + 15.5)
Default
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Table 2-12 Basic Tones
Basic Tone No.
Frequency (Hz)
Level (dB)
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
420
520
580
660
700
800
880
1050
430
440 / 480
480 / 620
440
-- Reserve -520 / 650
650 / 780
780 / 1040
520 / 650
650 / 780
780 / 1040
1040
450
950
1800
400 / 450
400
350 / 440
420 (Amplitude Modulated)
-- Reserve --- Reserve --- Reserve --- Reserve --- Reserve --
- 13
- 13
- 13
- 13
- 13
- 13
- 13
- 13
- 13
- 13 / - 13
- 13 / - 13
-16
-19 / -13
-19 / -13
-19 / -13
-13 / -19
-13 / -19
-13 / -19
-13
-13
-13
-13
-13/-13
-13
-13/-13
-13
-
Programming Manual
2-387
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Default
Service
Tone
No.
Service Tone Name
Repeat
Count
Unit
Count
Basic Tone
No.
Duration
Gain Level (dB)
0
26
0
26
0
26
0
26
26
10
10
2
1
1
1
1
77
10
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
27
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
6
0
0
27
0
27
0
0
6
0
6
6
0
6
0
0
4
4
2
2
2
0
7
7
5
5
5
0
8
8
6
6
6
0
4
4
2
2
2
0
7
7
5
5
5
0
10
4
4
2
2
4
4
5
5
1
1
5
1
0
0
4
2
4
20
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
7
0
2
2
3
4
6
5
2
2
3
4
6
5
2
2
3
4
6
5
1
1
2
2
3
2
1
1
2
2
3
2
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
38 (+ 3 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
38 (+ 3 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
14 (- 9 dB)
32 (0 dB)
38 (+ 3 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
38 (+ 3 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
14 (- 9 dB)
32 (0 dB)
38 (+ 3 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
38 (+ 3 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
14 (- 9 dB)
32 (0 dB)
38 (+ 3 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
38 (+ 3 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
14 (- 9 dB)
32 (0 dB)
38 (+ 3 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
38 (+ 3 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
14 (- 9 dB)
32 (0 dB)
1
2
3
No tone
Internal Dial Tone
Stutter Dial Tone
(Special Dial Tone)
0
0
0
1
1
6
4
0
1
0
0
1
2
7
Internal Recall Dial Tone
(Transfer Dial Tone)
Trunk Dial Tone
Internal Busy Tone
(Busy Tone)
DND Busy Tone
0
2
8
B-busy Tone
0
2
9
Internal Reorder Tone
(Congestion Tone)
Internal Interrupt Tone
(Warning Tone)
Internal Confirmation Tone
(Confirmation Tone)
Internal Hold Tone
External Hold Tone
Internal Ring-back Tone
(Internal Audible Ring)
(Ring Back Tone)
0
2
0
2
1
2
0
0
0
0
0
4
15
Override Tone
1
2
16
Lock-out Tone
0
2
17
Clock alarm tone
0
4
18
19
BGM
Doorphone chime 1
0
3
0
6
20
Doorphone chime 2
3
6
21
Doorphone chime 3
3
6
22
Doorphone chime 4
3
6
23
Doorphone chime 5
3
6
Program
80
5
6
10
11
12
13
14
2-388
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
ISSUE 1.1
Service
Tone
No.
Service Tone Name
SL1100
Repeat
Count
Unit
Count
Basic Tone
No.
Duration
Gain Level (dB)
8
8
6
6
6
0
0
6
0
6
0
6
0
6
0
6
0
6
6
0
0
6
0
6
0
6
6
10
0
0
11
0
11
0
11
0
11
10
0
6
1
1
2
2
3
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
10
10
30
2
3
5
5
5
5
5
5
10
20
1
38 (+ 3 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
38 (+ 3 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
14 (- 9 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
10 (-11 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
8
8
0
1
1
4
2
4
20
25
5
0
1
2
10
2
30
3
2
3
10
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
10
8
32 (0 dB)
38 (+3 dB)
24
Doorphone chime 6
3
6
25
Service Set Tone
1
2
26
Service Clear Tone
1
2
27
Talk-Back Tone
2
2
28
Speaker Monitor Tone
1
2
29
Door Relay Tone
1
2
30
Doorphone Call Tone
1
2
31
Paging Tone
2
2
32
Splash Tone 1
1
2
33
Splash Tone 2
2
2
34
Splash Tone 3
3
2
35
36
1 Sec Signal Tone
External audible ring tone
1
0
1
2
37
External reorder tone
0
2
38
External busy tone
0
2
39
Special audible ring-busy
tone
0
6
40
Internal Call Waiting Tone
(Transfer, Call Waiting
Tone)
Intrusion tone
Conference tone
Intrusion tone 2
External Dial Tone
(DUD,DISA Dial Tone)
External Ring Back Tone
(Ring Tone DDI)
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
2
0
4
External Busy Tone
(Busy Tone DDI)
Number unobtainable tone
VM message indication
tone
External special audible
ring tone
0
2
0
0
1
2
0
3
51
External intercept tone
0
2
52
53
External call waiting tone
External executive override
tone
Generate tone for TAPI2.1
Warning Beep Tone
Signaling
1
1
1
1
2
2
0
1
2
27
0
27
0
1
0
11
0
1
10
12
0
12
4
12
12
0
1
1
1
6
2
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
50
55
56
Programming Manual
2-389
Program
80
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Service
Tone
No.
Service Tone Name
Repeat
Count
Unit
Count
Basic Tone
No.
Duration
Gain Level (dB)
57
Headset Ear Piece Ringing
Tone
0
5
58
Opening Chime tone
1
8
59
Ending Chime tone
1
8
60
Splash tone 1 (Mute)
1
2
61
Splash tone 2 (Mute)
2
2
62
Splash tone 3 (Mute)
3
2
63
EXT SPK Ring-back Tone
0
2
64
Special Hold Tone
3
4
0
2
0
2
0
2
2
14
14
15
15
16
16
20
20
19
19
18
18
17
17
0
6
0
6
0
6
3
0
11
0
11
0
2
1
1
1
20
2
2
2
2
2
2
6
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
6
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
10
20
2
3
2
12
32 (0 dB)
38 (+3 dB)
32 (0 dB)
38 (+3 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
32 (0 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
32 (0 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
32 (0 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
32 (0 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
32 (0 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
32 (0 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
32 (0 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
32 (0 dB)
8 (- 12 dB)
32 (0 dB)
8 (- 12 dB)
32 (0 dB)
8 (- 12 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
35 (+ 1.5 dB)
32 (0 dB)
35 (+ 1.5 dB)
32 (0 dB)
Program
80
Conditions

The system must be reset for any changes to these items to take affect.
Feature Cross Reference

Selectable Ring Tones
2-390
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-02 : DTMF Tone Setup
Level
MF
Program
Description
Use Program 80-02 : DTMF Tone Setup to define the duration (On time) and pause (Off time) for
DTMF dialing. This option affects all trunk line calls system wide. Make separate entries for duration
and pause. It is also possible to adjust the level of both high and low frequency tone.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
02
03
Duration
Pause
Tone Level (Low) (dB)
04
Tone Level (High)
Input Data
1 ~ 255
1 ~ 255
1 ~ 97
(- 45.0 ~ 0 = + 3)
1 ~ 97
(- 45.0 ~ 0 = + 3)
Default
5 (100 ms)
5 (100 ms)
73 (- 9 dB)
77 (- 7 dB)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-391
80
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-03 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 80-03 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup to define the various levels and timers for the
DTMF Tone Receiver.
80
DTMF Tone Receiver Type :

1 = DTMF Receiver for Extension

2 = DTMF Receiver for Trunk

3 ~ 5 = Reserved
Input Data
DTMF Tone Receiver Type Number
Item
No.
1 = DTMF Receiver for Extension
2 = DTMF Receiver for Trunk
3 = --- Reserved --4 = --- Reserved --5 = --- Reserved ---
Item
01
Detect Level
02
03
Start Delay Time
Min. Detect Level
04
Max. Detect Level
05
06
07
08
09
Forward Twist Level
Backward Twist Level
ON Detect Time
OFF Detect Time
Area Type
Input Data
Default
0 = 0 dBm ~ - 25 dBm
1 = - 5 dBm ~ - 30 dBm
2 = - 10 dBm ~ - 35 dBm
3 = - 15 dBm ~ - 40 dBm
4 = - 20 dBm ~ - 45 dBm
5 = - 25 dBm ~ - 50 dBm
6 = - 30 dBm ~ - 55 dBm
0 ~ 255 (0.25 ms ~ 64 ms)
0 ~ 15
DTMF Tone 0 = - 10 dBm (0) to - 25 dBm (15)
DTMF Tone 1 = - 15 dBm (0) to - 30 dBm (15)
DTMF Tone 2 = - 20 dBm (0) to - 35 dBm (15)
DTMF Tone 3 = - 25 dBm (0) to - 40 dBm (15)
DTMF Tone 4 = - 30 dBm (0) to - 45 dBm (15)
DTMF Tone 5 = - 35 dBm (0) to - 50 dBm (15)
DTMF Tone 6 = - 40 dBm (0) to - 55 dBm (15)
0 ~ 15
DTMF Tone 0 = 0 dBm (0) to - 15 dBm (15)
DTMF Tone 1 = - 5 dBm (0) to - 20 dBm (15)
DTMF Tone 2 = - 10 dBm (0) to - 25 dBm (15)
DTMF Tone 3 = - 15 dBm (0) to - 30 dBm (15)
DTMF Tone 4 = - 20 dBm (0) to - 35 dBm (15)
DTMF Tone 5 = - 25 dBm (0) to - 40 dBm (15)
DTMF Tone 6 = - 30 dBm (0) to - 45 dBm (15)
0 ~ 9 (1 dB ~ 10 dB)
0 ~ 9 (1 dB ~ 10 dB)
1 ~ 255 (15 + 15 ms ~ 3825 ms)
1 ~ 255 (15 + 15 ms ~ 3825 ms)
0 = Other
1 = Aust
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Default
Item
No
01
02
03
04
05
06
2-392
Item
Detect Level
Start delay time
Min. detect level
Max. detect level
Forward twist level
Backward twist level
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
Type 4
Type 5
0
0
15 (- 25 dBm)
0 (0 dBm)
9 (10 dBm)
9 (10 dBm)
0
0
15 (- 25 dBm)
0 (0 dBm)
9 (10 dBm)
9 (10 dBm)
0
0
15 (- 25 dBm)
0 (0 dBm)
9 (10 dBm)
9 (10 dBm)
0
0
15 (- 25 dBm)
0 (0 dBm)
9 (10 dBm)
9 (10 dBm)
0
0
15 (- 25 dBm)
0 (0 dBm)
9 (10 dBm)
9 (10 dBm)
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
ISSUE 1.1
Item
No
07
08
09
SL1100
Item
ON detect time
OFF detect time
Area Type
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
Type 4
Type 5
1 (30 ms)
1 (30 ms)
1
1 (30 ms)
1 (30 ms)
1
1 (30 ms)
1 (30 ms)
1
1 (30 ms)
1 (30 ms)
1
1 (30 ms)
1 (30 ms)
1
Conditions
None
Program
Feature Cross Reference
80
None
Programming Manual
2-393
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-04 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 80-04 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup to define the various levels and timers for
the Call Progress Tone Detector.
80
Tone Detector Type :

1 = Dial Tone for Trunk

2 = Busy Tone for Trunk

3 = Ring Back Tone for Trunk

4 = Special Busy Tone for Trunk

5 = Special Ring Back Tone for Trunk
Input Data
Tone Detector Type Number
Item
No.
Item
01
Detection Level
02
Min. Detection Level
03
04
S/N Ratio
No Tone Time
05
06
07
08
09
12
Pulse Count
ON Minimum Time
ON Maximum Time
OFF Minimum Time
OFF Maximum Time
Frequency No. 1
13
Frequency No. 2
14
Twist Level
2-394
1 = Dial Tone for Trunk
2 = Busy Tone for Trunk
3 = Ring Back Tone for Trunk
4 = Special Busy Tone for Trunk
5 = Special Ring Back Tone for Trunk
Input Data
0 = 0 dBm ~ - 25 dBm
1 = - 5 dBm ~ - 30 dBm
2 = - 10 dBm ~ - 35 dBm
3 = - 15 dBm ~ - 40 dBm
4 = - 20 dBm ~ - 45 dBm
5 = - 25 dBm ~ - 50 dBm
6 = - 30 dBm ~ - 55 dBm
0 ~ 15
0 = - 10 dBm (0) ~ - 25 dBm (15)
1 = - 15 dBm (0) ~ - 30 dBm (15)
2 = - 20 dBm (0) ~ - 35 dBm (15)
3 = - 25 dBm (0) ~ - 40 dBm (15)
4 = - 30 dBm (0) ~ - 45 dBm (15)
5 = - 35 dBm (0) ~ - 50 dBm (15)
6 = - 40 dBm (0) ~ - 55 dBm (15)
0 ~ 4 (0 dB ~ - 20 dB)
0 ~ 255 (30 + 30 ~ 7680 ms)
(0 = not detect)
1 ~ 255 = 60 ~ 7680 ms
The formula is 30 + 30N
When set to N = 1, it means 30 + 30 * 1 = 60.
When set to N = 255, it means 30 + 30 * 255 =
7680.
1 ~ 255
1 ~ 255 (30 + 30 ~ 7680 ms)
0 ~ 255 (30 + 30 ~ 7680 ms)
1 ~ 255 (30 + 30 ~ 7680 ms)
0 ~ 255 (30 + 30 ~ 7680 ms)
1~8
(Frequency Table No. set by 80-07)
0 ~ 8 (0 = Not Used)
(Frequency Table No. set by 80-07)
0 ~ 10 (1 dB ~ 10 dB)
(0 = Not Used)
Default
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Default
(V1.5 or higher)
Item
Name
Type 1 (DT)
Type 2 (BT)
Type 3 (RBT)
Type 4
Type 5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
12
13
14
Detect Level
Min. detect level
S/N ratio
No tone time
Pulse Count
ON min. time
ON max. time
OFF min. time
OFF max. time
Frequency No 1
Frequency No 2
Twist Level
0 (- 25 dBm)
15 (- 25 dBm)
4 (- 20 dB)
132 (3990 ms)
1
9 (300 ms)
0
1 (60 ms)
1 (60 ms)
1
0
0
0 (- 25 dBm)
15 (- 25 dBm)
4 (- 20 dB)
13 (420 ms)
2
10 (330 ms)
14 (450 ms)
10 (330 ms)
14 (450 ms)
1
0
0
0 (- 25 dBm)
15 (- 25 dBm)
4 (- 20 dB)
132 (3990 ms)
1
25 (780 ms)
40 (1230ms)
83 (2520 ms)
115 (3480 ms)
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
Program
80
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-395
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-05 : Date Format for SMDR and System
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 80-05 : Date Format for SMDR and System to define the date format when printing out
the SMDR, alarm report, and system information report.
80
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Date Format
Input Data
0 = American Format (Month / Day / Year)
1 = Japanese Format (Year / Month / Day)
2 = European Format (Day / Month / Year)
Default
2
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-396
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-06 : Reference Impedance Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 80-06: Reference Impedance Setup to define the change of Reference Impedance
(600 Ω or complex) in SLIU PKG and COIU PKG
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Reference Impedance Setup
Input Data
0 = 600 Ω
1 = Complex
Default
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-397
80
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-07 : Call Progress Tone Detector Frequency Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 80-07 : Call Progress Tone Detector Frequency Setup to set the frequency of the
detection tone set with Program 80-04-12 and Program 80-04-13.
80
Input Data
Frequency Table Number
1~8
Frequency
Table No.
Input Data
Default
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0, 10 ~ 255
(100 ~ 2550 Hz)
(0 = Not used)
41 (410 Hz)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-398
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-08 : MFC Tone Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 80-08 : MFC Tone Setup to define the duration (On time) and pause (Off time) for MFC
dialing. This option affects all trunk line calls system wide. And also it is possible to adjust the level of
tone.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
Item
Duration (On time)
Pause (Off time)
Tone Level
Input Data
1 ~ 255 (20 ms ~ 5100 ms)
1 ~ 255 (20 ms ~ 5100 ms)
1 ~ 97 (- 45 dB ~ + 3 dB)
Default
5 (100 ms)
5 (100 ms)
77 (- 7 dB)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-399
80
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-09 : Short Ring Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 80-09 : Short Ring Setup to define the short ring tone for SL1100 multiline terminals.
80
Input Data
Short Ring Number
Item
No.
Item
01
02
03
Frequency 1
Frequency 2
Ring Cycle
01 ~ 32
Input Data
Description
00 = No setting, 01 ~ 15
00 = No setting, 01 ~ 15
00 = No setting, 01 ~ 14
Default
Refer to Frequency 1/2 Table .
Refer to Frequency 1/2 Table .
Refer to Ring Cycle Table .
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
When a single tone is sent, Frequency 1/2 is set to the same value.
Table 2-13 Frequency 1/2 Table
Data
Frequency (Hz)
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
392
440
494
523
587
659
698
784
880
988
1046
1175
1318
1397
1568
Table 2-14 Ring Cycle Table
Data
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
Ring Cycle (ms)
125 (On) / Off
125 (On) / 125 (Off) / 125 (On) / Off
125 (On) / 125 (Off) / 125 (On) / 125 (Off) / 125 (On) / Off
125 (On) / 125 (Off) / 125 (On) / 125 (Off) / 125 (On) / 125 (Off) / 125 (On) / Off
250 (On) / Off
250 (On) / 250 (Off) / 250 (On) / Off
250 (On) / 250 (Off) / 250 (On) / 250 (Off) / 250 (On) / Off
250 (On) / 250 (Off) / 250 (On) / 250 (Off) / 250 (On) / 250 (Off) / 250 (On) / Off
325 (On) / Off
325 (On) / 325 (Off) / 325 (On) / Off
325 (On) / 325 (Off) / 325 (On) / 325 (Off) / 325 (On) / Off
500 (On) / Off
500 (On) / 500 (Off) / 500 (On) / Off
1000 (On) / Off
Table 2-15 Default Table
Short Ring No.
Short Tone Name
Frequency 1
Frequency 2
Ring Cycle
1
2
Confirmation Tone
Error Tone
8
8
8
8
1
14
2-400
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Short Ring No.
Short Tone Name
Frequency 1
Frequency 2
Ring Cycle
3
Alarm Tone for long
conversation call
Not defined
:
Not defined
4
4
14
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
:
0
4
:
32
Conditions
Program
None
Feature Cross Reference
80
None
Programming Manual
2-401
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-11 : MFC Tone Receiver Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 80-11 : MFC Tone Receiver Setup to various data for the MFC signal detection.
80
Input Data
MFC Tone Receiver Type Number
Item
No.
1 = MFC Receiver for Extension
2 = MFC Receiver for Trunk
3 = Reserved
4 = Reserved
5 = Reserved
Item
01
Detect Level
02
03
Start delay time
Min. detect level
04
Max. detect level
05
06
07
08
Twist level
S/N ratio
ON detect time
OFF detect time
Input Data
Default
0 = 0 dBm ~ - 25 dBm
1 = - 5 dBm ~ - 30 dBm
2 = - 10 dBm ~ - 35 dBm
3 = - 15 dBm ~ - 40 dBm
4 = - 20 dBm ~ - 45 dBm
5 = - 25 dBm ~ - 50 dBm
6 = - 30 dBm ~ - 55 dBm
0 ~ 255 (0.25 step, 0 ms ~ 64 ms)
0 ~ 15
detect level 0 = - 10 dBm (0) ~ - 25 dBm (15)
detect level 1 = - 15 dBm (0) ~ - 30 dBm (15)
detect level 2 = - 20 dBm (0) ~ - 35 dBm (15)
detect level 3 = - 25 dBm (0) ~ - 40 dBm (15)
detect level 4 = - 30 dBm (0) ~ - 45 dBm (15)
detect level 5 = - 35 dBm (0) ~ - 50 dBm (15)
detect level 6 = - 40 dBm (0) ~ - 55 dBm (15)
0 ~ 15
detect level 0 = 0 dBm (0) ~ - 15 dBm (15)
detect level 1 = - 5 dBm (0) ~ - 20 dBm (15)
detect level 2 = - 10 dBm (0) ~ - 25 dBm (15)
detect level 3 = - 15 dBm (0) ~ - 30 dBm (15)
detect level 4 = - 20 dBm (0) ~ - 35 dBm (15)
detect level 5 = - 25 dBm (0) ~ - 40 dBm (15)
detect level 6 = - 30 dBm (0) ~ - 45 dBm (15)
0 ~ 9 (1 dB ~ 10 dB)
0 ~ 4 (- 5 step, 0 dB ~ - 20 dB)
1 ~ 255 (15 step, 30 ms ~ 3840 ms)
1 ~ 255 (15 step, 30 ms ~ 3840 ms)
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Table 2-16 Default Table
Item
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Name
Detect Level
Start delay time
Min. detect level
Max. detect level
Twist level
S/N ratio
ON detect time
OFF detect time
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
Type 4
Type 5
0
0
15 (- 25 dBm)
0 (0 dBm)
9 (10 dBm)
2 (0 dBm)
1 (30 ms)
1 (30 ms)
0
0
15 (- 25 dBm)
0 (0 dBm)
9 (10 dBm)
2 (0 dBm)
1 (30 ms)
1 (30 ms)
0
0
15 (- 25 dBm)
0 (0 dBm)
9 (10 dBm)
2 (0 dBm)
1 (30 ms)
1 (30 ms)
0
0
15 (- 25 dBm)
0 (0 dBm)
9 (10 dBm)
2 (0 dBm)
1 (30 ms)
1 (30 ms)
0
0
15 (- 25 dBm)
0 (0 dBm)
9 (10 dBm)
2 (0 dBm)
1 (30 ms)
1 (30 ms)
Conditions
None
2-402
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
80
Programming Manual
2-403
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-12 : Caller ID Receiver Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 80-12 : Caller ID Receiver Setup defines the type and level for Caller ID detection of
DSP.
80
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
Type
02
03
04
Level (Mark)
Level (Space)
Bit Sampling Type
05
06
07
1st Bit Offset
Minimum Seizure Count
Guard Time when Mark
Input Data
0 = NTT
1 = Other
2 = Korea
0 ~ 32766
0 ~ 32766
0 = Other
1 = Malaysia
0 ~ 32766
0 ~ 32766
0 ~ 32766
Default
1
50
50
0
10
10
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-404
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-01 : CO Initial Data Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 81-01 : CO Initial Data Setup to define the various basic data parameters for the COIU.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
Item
PCM Encoding Method
Specification
Loop Current Detection Time
14
Clear Signal (Open Loop)
Detection Time
Ringing Signal Detection Minimum
Time
Single Ringing Detection Minimum
Time
Double Ringing Detection
Minimum Off Time
Double Ringing Detection
Maximum Off Time
Ringing Signal not Detection
Minimum
Time Ringing Signal Stop
Detection Time
Continuous Ringing Minimum
Time
Continuous Ringing Maximum
Time
Hook Flash 1 Time
15
Hook Flash 2 Time
16
Pause Time
17
PFT Idle Detection Time
20
27
Loop Reverse Detect Minimum
Time
Loop Reverse Detect Maximum
Time
Loop Disconnect Detect Minimum
Time
Loop Disconnect Detect Maximum
Time
Dial Pulse Break Time (10pps)
28
Dial Pulse Make Time (10pps)
29
DP Inter-digit Time (10pps)
36
Long Ringing Detection Minimum
Time
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
21
22
23
Input Data
0 = μ-law
1 = A-law
1 ~ 255
(10 ~ 2550 ms)
1 ~ 255
(5 ~ 1275 ms)
1 ~ 255
(10 ~ 2550 ms)
0 ~ 255
(0, 10 ~ 2550 ms)
0 ~ 255
(0, 10 ~ 2550 ms)
0 ~ 255
(0, 10 ~ 2550 ms)
1 ~ 255
(10 ~ 2550 ms)
1 ~ 255
(100 ~ 25500 ms)
0 ~ 255
(0, 10 ~ 2550 ms)
0 ~ 255
(0, 10 ~ 2550 ms)
1 ~ 255
(10 ~ 2550 ms)
1 ~ 255
(100 ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255
(100 ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255
(100 ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255
(10 ~ 2550 ms)
1 ~ 255
(10 ~ 2550 ms)
1 ~ 255
(10 ~ 2550 ms)
1 ~ 255
(10 ~ 2550 ms)
1 ~ 255
(5 ~ 1275 ms)
1 ~ 255
(5 ~ 1275 ms)
1 ~ 255
(10 ~ 2550 ms)
1 ~ 255
(100 ~ 25500 ms)
Default
1 (A-law)
18 (180 ms)
62 (310 ms)
10 (100 ms)
66 (660 ms)
10 (100 ms)
60 (600 ms)
70 (700 ms)
24 (2400 ms)
20 (200 ms)
70 (700 ms)
10 (100 ms)
25 (2500 ms)
30 (3000 ms)
30 (3000 ms)
10 (100 ms)
86 (860 ms)
50 (500 ms)
70 (700 ms)
21 (105 ms)
11 (55 ms)
80 (800 ms)
24 (2400 ms)
Conditions
None
Programming Manual
2-405
81
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
81
2-406
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-04 : ISDN BRI Layer 1 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup
Level
MF
Program
Description
Use Program 81-04 : ISDN BRI Layer 1 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup to define the various basic data
for layer 1 of ISDN BRI.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
Item
Wait time for Physical Activation
(Timer 3)
Detection time for Physical
Deactivation
Input Data
Default
1 ~ 255 (200 ~ 51000 ms)
100 (20 sec)
1 ~ 255 (200 ~ 51000 ms)
5 (1 sec)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-407
81
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-05 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 2 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup
Level
MF
Program
Description
Use Program 81-05 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 2 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup to define the various basic
data for layer 2 of ISDN BRI and PRI.
81
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Description
Default
Specify the timer value in 1/100ths of a
second at the end of which transmission of
a frame may be initiated.
Specify the minimum time in 1/100ths of a
second between retransmissions of the
TEI Identity check messages.
Specify the minimum time in 1/100ths of a
second between retransmissions of the
TEI Identity check messages.
Specify the maximum time in 1/100ths of a
second allowed without exchanging
frames.
Specify the retransmission count.
Specify the frame lengths in ocelots.
Specify the maximum number of
transmissions from a TEI identity request
message when the user requests a TEI.
10 (1 sec)
01
Timer T200
1 ~ 255 (100 ~ 25500 ms)
02
Timer T201
1 ~ 255 (100 ~ 25500 ms)
03
Timer T202
1 ~ 255 (100 ~ 25500 ms)
04
Timer T203
1 ~ 255 (100 ~ 25500 ms)
05
06
07
N200
N201
N202
1 ~ 255
1 ~ 65535 (Byte)
1 ~ 255
10 (1 sec)
20 (2 sec)
250 (25 sec)
3
260
3
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-408
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (T-Point) Timer Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 81-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (T-Point) Timer Setup to define the various basic
timers for layer 3 of ISDN BRI/PRI (defined in Program 10-03-04).
81
Input Data
Layer 3 Timer Type Number
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
T301
0, 180 ~ 254 seconds
02
T302
1 ~ 254 seconds
03
T303
1 ~ 254 seconds
04
T304
0 ~ 254 seconds
05
T305
1 ~ 254 seconds
06
T306
0 ~ 254 seconds
07
T307
1 ~ 254 seconds
08
T308
1 ~ 254 seconds
09
T309
1 ~ 254 seconds
10
T310
0 ~ 180 seconds
11
T312
1 ~ 254 seconds
12
T313
1 ~ 254 seconds
13
T314
1 ~ 254 seconds
14
T316
(T317 + 1) ~ 254
seconds
15
T317
1 ~ (T316-1)
Programming Manual
1~5
Description
Default
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a
second of the timer to be started when the
ALERT message is received.
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a
second of the timer to be started when the
SETUP ACK is sent. Timer is also
restarted when INFO is received.
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a
second of the timer to be started when
SETUP is sent.
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a
second of the timer to be started when the
SETUP ACK is received. Timer is also
restarted when INFO is received.
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a
second of the timer to be started when
DISC without progress No. 8 is sent.
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a
second of the timer to be started when
DISC with progress indicator No. 8 is sent.
This timer is valid for Network side use
only.
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a
second of the timer to be started when
SUSPEND ACK is sent. This timer is valid
only for Network side use only.
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a
second of the timer to be started when REL
is sent.
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a
second upon data link disconnection.
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a
second of the timer to be started when
CALL PROC is sent.
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a
second of the timer to be started when
SETUP is sent or re-sent on broadcast
data link. This timer is only valid for
Network side use only.
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a
second of the timer to be started when
connection request is sent. Valid range 1 ~
4 seconds in 1 second increments. Value
of 0 indicates timer not used.
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a
second of the timer to be started when
message segment is received.
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a
second of the timer to be started when
RESTART is sent.
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a
second of the timer to be started when
RESTART is received.
180 seconds
15 seconds
4 seconds
30 seconds
30 seconds
30 seconds
180 seconds
4 seconds
90 seconds
180 seconds
6 seconds
4 seconds
4 seconds
120 seconds
60 seconds
2-409
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
16
T318
1 ~ 254 seconds
17
T319
1 ~ 254 seconds
Program
18
T320
1 ~ 254 seconds
81
19
T321
1 ~ 254 seconds
20
T322
1 ~ 254 seconds
Description
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a
second of the timer to be started when
RES is sent. This timer is valid for user
side use only.
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a
second of the timer to be started when
SUSPEND is sent. This timer is valid for
user side use only.
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a
second when B-channel access:
connection is received or D-channel
access: DL-ESTABLISH confirmation or
indication is received.
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a
second of the timer to be started when
STATUS ENQ is received.
Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a
second upon D-channel failure.
Default
4 seconds
4 seconds
30 seconds
30 seconds
4 seconds
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

ISDN Compatibility
2-410
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Port
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 81-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Port to define the CODEC (QSLAC)
Filter for each analog trunk port.
81
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item No.
01
001 ~ 096
CODEC Filter Type
0 = Type 0
1 = Type 1
2 = Type 2
3 = Type 3
4 = Type 4
5 = Type 5
6 = Type 6
7 = Type 7
8 = Type 8
9 = Type 9
10 = Type 10
11 = Type 11
12 = Type 12
13 = Type 13
14 = Type 14
15 = Type 15
Default
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-411
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-08 : T1 Trunk Timer Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 81-08 : T1 Trunk Timer Setup to define the basic timer setting of each T1 Trunk type.
81
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
Answer Signal Detection Time
(Loop)
Answer Signal Detection Time
(Ground)
Answer Signal Detection Time
(DID)
Answer Signal Detection Time
(E&M)
Answer Signal Detection Time
(OPX)
Clear Signal Detection Time (Loop)
Clear Signal Detection Time
(Ground)
Clear Signal Detection Time (DID)
Answer Signal Detection Time
(E&M)
Clear Signal Detection Time (OPX)
Ringing Signal Detection Time
(Loop)
Ringing Signal Detection Time
(Ground)
Ringing Signal Detection Time
(DID)
Ringing Signal Detection Time
(E&M)
Ringing Signal Detection Time
(OPX)
Ringing Signal Stop Detection
Time (Loop)
Ringing Signal Stop Detection
Time (Ground)
Ringing Signal Stop Detection
Time (DID)
Ringing Signal Stop Detection
Time (E&M)
Ringing Signal Stop Detection
Time (OPX)
Loop Current Detection Time
(Loop)
Loop Current Detection Time
(Ground)
Loop Current Detection Time (DID)
Loop Current Detection Time
(E&M)
Loop Current Detection Time
(OPX)
DP Break Send Time (ALL)
DP Make Send Time (ALL)
DP InterDigit Send Time (ALL)
HookFlash Send Time (Loop)
HookFlash Send Time (Ground)
HookFlash Send Time (DID)
HookFlash Send Time (E&M)
HookFlash Send Time (OPX)
Pause Send Time (ALL)
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
2-412
Input Data
Default
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
15 (60 ms)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
15 (60 ms)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
15 (60 ms)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
15 (60 ms)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
15 (60 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
6 (600 ms)
6 (600 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
6 (600 ms)
6 (600 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms)
6 (600 ms)
10 (80 ms)
1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms)
10 (80 ms)
1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms)
10 (80 ms)
1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms)
10 (80 ms)
1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms)
10 (80 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
50 (5000 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
50 (5000 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
50 (5000 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
50 (5000 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
50 (5000 ms)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
40 (160 ms)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
40 (160 ms)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
40 (160 ms)
40 (160 ms)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
40 (160 ms)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (1 sec ~ 255 sec )
15 (60 ms)
10 (40 ms)
7 (700 ms)
5 (500 ms)
5 (500 ms)
5 (500 ms)
5 (500 ms)
5 (500 ms)
3 (3 sec)
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Item
No.
Item
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
Wink Send Duration Time (DID)
Delay Send Duration Time (DID)
Incoming-Wink Send Time (DID)
Wink Send Duration Time (E&M)
Delay Send Duration Time (E&M)
Incoming-Wink Send Time (E&M)
Seizure-WINK/DELAY Receive Max.
Time (DID)
Receive Wink Duration Min. Time
(DID)
Receive Wink Duration Max. Time
(DID)
Seizure-WINK/DELAY Receive Max.
Time (E&M)
Receive Wink Duration Min. Time
(E&M)
Receive Wink Duration Max. Time
(E&M)
Receive DP Make Min. Time (ALL)
Receive DP Make Max. Time (ALL)
Receive DP Break Min. Time (ALL)
Receive DP Break Max. Time (ALL)
Receive DP InterDigit Min. Time
(ALL)
Receive HookFlash Duration Min.
Time (E&M)
Receive HookFlash Duration Max.
Time (E&M)
Receive HookFlash Duration Min.
Time (OPX)
Receive HookFlash Duration Max.
Time (OPX)
Loop Off Guard Time (Loop)
Loop Off Guard Time (Ground)
Loop Off Guard Time (DID)
Loop Off Guard Time (E&M)
Loop Off Guard Time (OPX)
Double Ringing Send Time 1 (OPX)
Double Between Ringing Send
Time 1 (OPX)
Double Ringing Send Time 2 (OPX)
Double Between Ringing Send
Time 2 (OPX)
Single Ringing Send Time (OPX)
Single Between Ringing Send Time
(OPX)
Guard Time 1 (LOOP)
Guard Time 1 (GROUND)
Guard Time 1 (DID)
Guard Time 1 (E&M)
Guard Time 1 (OPX)
Guard Time 2 (ALL)
Dial Sending Complete Time
ON-HOOK bit Send Time
Open Loop Time (LOOP)
Open Loop Time (GROUND)
Open Loop Time (DID)
Open Loop Time (E&M)
Open Loop Time (OPX)
Close Loop Time (LOOP)
Close Loop Time (DID)
Ring GND Time (GROUND)
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
Input Data
1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms)
1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms)
1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
Default
25 (200 ms)
25 (200 ms)
3 (300 ms)
25 (200 ms)
25 (200 ms)
3 (300 ms)
48 (4800 ms)
1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms)
12 (96 ms)
1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms)
45 (360 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
48 (4800 ms)
1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms)
12 (96 ms)
1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms)
45 (360 ms)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
3 (12 ms)
19 (76 ms)
3 (12 ms)
25 (100 ms)
125 (500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
3 (300 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
6 (600 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
3 (300 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
6 (600 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
20 (2000 ms)
20 (2000 ms)
20 (2000 ms)
20 (2000 ms)
20 (2000 ms)
5 (500 ms)
5 (500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
25 (2500 ms)
30 (3000 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
10 (1000 ms)
9 (900 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
9 (900 ms)
9 (900 ms)
9 (900 ms)
9 (900 ms)
9 (900 ms)
3 (12 ms)
20 (2000 ms)
40 (4000 ms)
6 (600 ms)
6 (600 ms)
6 (600 ms)
6 (600 ms)
6 (600 ms)
13 (52 ms)
13 (52 ms)
13 (52 ms)
Conditions
None
Programming Manual
2-413
Program
81
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
81
2-414
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-09 : COT CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Setting
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 81-09 : COT CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Setting to define the filter setting data (when
Program 81-07 is set to 4).
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
Item
B1 Filter Setup (1)
B1 Filter Setup (2)
B1 Filter Setup (3)
B1 Filter Setup (4)
B1 Filter Setup (5)
B1 Filter Setup (6)
B1 Filter Setup (7)
B1 Filter Setup (8)
B1 Filter Setup (9)
B1 Filter Setup (10)
B1 Filter Setup (11)
B1 Filter Setup (12)
B1 Filter Setup (13)
B1 Filter Setup (14)
B2 Filter Setup (1)
B2 Filter Setup (2)
AISN and Analog Gains
Z Filter Coefficients (1)
Z Filter Coefficients (2)
Z Filter Coefficients (3)
Z Filter Coefficients (4)
Z Filter Coefficients (5)
Z Filter Coefficients (6)
Z Filter Coefficients (7)
Z Filter Coefficients (8)
Z Filter Coefficients (9)
Z Filter Coefficients (10)
Z Filter Coefficients (11)
Z Filter Coefficients (12)
Z Filter Coefficients (13)
Z Filter Coefficients (14)
Z Filter Coefficients (15)
R Filter Coefficients (1)
R Filter Coefficients (2)
R Filter Coefficients (3)
R Filter Coefficients (4)
R Filter Coefficients (5)
R Filter Coefficients (6)
R Filter Coefficients (7)
R Filter Coefficients (8)
R Filter Coefficients (9)
R Filter Coefficients (10)
R Filter Coefficients (11)
R Filter Coefficients (12)
R Filter Coefficients (13)
R Filter Coefficients (14)
X Filter Coefficients (1)
X Filter Coefficients (2)
X Filter Coefficients (3)
X Filter Coefficients (4)
X Filter Coefficients (5)
X Filter Coefficients (6)
Programming Manual
Input Data
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
Default
43
102
228
58
75
189
58
194
45
194
219
45
178
208
178
208
17
250
173
50
165
59
70
106
175
163
79
179
83
84
31
1
170
192
187
32
203
42
171
165
42
35
67
91
43
37
202
48
37
187
170
189
2-415
81
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Item
No.
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
Program
81
Item
X Filter Coefficients (7)
X Filter Coefficients (8)
X Filter Coefficients (9)
X Filter Coefficients (10)
X Filter Coefficients (11)
X Filter Coefficients (12)
GR Filter Coefficients (1)
GR Filter Coefficients (2)
GX Filter Coefficients (1)
GX Filter Coefficients (2)
Input Data
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
Default
162
163
165
204
164
165
202
160
58
178
Conditions

This is used if Program 81-07 is set to 4 (Specified data).
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-416
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-13 : E1 Trunk Timer Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 81-13 : E1 Trunk Timer Setup to define the basic timer setting of E1 Trunk.
Input Data
Trunk Port Number
Item
No.
Item
01
Loop Current Detection Time
(Loop)
Clear Signal (Open Loop)
Detection Time
Transmit Clear Signal Time for
Forced Release
Receive DP Inter-digit min. Time
Pause Time
Pulse Dial Break Time
Pulse Dial Make Time
Pulse Dial Inter-digit Time
Receive DP Make min Time
Receive DP Make max Time
Receive DP Break min Time
Receive DP Break max Time
Transmit Answer duration Time
Transmit Double Answer duration
Time
Receive Answer min Time
Receive Answer max Time
Receive Double Answer min Time
Receive Double Answer max Time
Transmit Seizure Acknowledge
duration Time
Receive Seizure Acknowledge min
Time
Receive Seizure Acknowledge max
Time
Transmit Digit Acknowledge
duration Time
Receive Digit Acknowledge min
Time
Receive Digit Acknowledge max
Time
Receive Meter Pulse min Time
Receive Meter Pulse max Time
Receive Line Block min Time
Receive Line Block recover min
Time
Transmit Remove Ring Time
Transmit Clear Signal Send Time
Transmit Seizure Signal Time
Group A Response Time
Group A Tone Complete Time
Group B Response Time
Group B Tone Complete Time
Group C Response Time
Group C Tone Complete Time
Group I Signal Time
Group I Tone Complete Time
Group II Signal Time
02
03
04
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
Programming Manual
81
001 ~ 096
Input Data
Default
1 ~ 255 (16 ms ~ 4080 ms)
3 (48 ms)
1 ~ 255 (16 ms ~ 4080 ms)
50 (800 ms)
1 ~ 255 (16 ms ~ 4080 ms)
50 (800 ms)
1 ~ 255 (4 ms ~ 1020 ms)
1 ~ 255 (64 ms ~ 16320 ms)
1 ~ 255 (4 ms ~ 1020 ms)
1~255 (4ms ~ 1020ms)
1 ~ 255 (16 ms ~ 4080 ms)
1 ~ 255 (4 ms ~ 1020 ms)
1 ~ 255 (4 ms ~ 1020 ms)
1 ~ 255 (4 ms ~ 1020 ms)
1 ~ 255 (4 ms ~ 1020 ms)
1 ~ 255 (8 ms ~ 2040 ms)
1 ~ 255 (64 ms ~ 16320 ms)
125 (500 sec)
47 (3008 ms)
15 (60 ms)
10 (40 ms)
50 (800 ms)
3 (12 ms)
19 (76 ms)
5 (20 ms)
26 (104 ms)
38 (304 ms)
32 (2048 ms)
1 ~ 255 (8 ms ~ 2040 ms)
1 ~ 255 (8 ms ~ 2040 ms)
1 ~ 255 (64 ms ~ 16320 ms)
1 ~ 255 (64 ms ~ 16320 ms)
1 ~ 255 (4 ms ~ 1020 ms)
25 (200 ms)
50 (400 ms)
24 (1536 ms)
47 (3008 ms)
25 (100 ms)
1 ~ 255 (4 ms ~ 1020 ms)
25 (100 ms)
1 ~ 255 (4 ms ~ 1020 ms)
75 (300 ms)
1 ~ 255 (4 ms ~ 1020 ms)
25 (100 ms)
1 ~ 255 (4 ms ~ 1020 ms)
25 (100 ms)
1 ~ 255 (4 ms ~ 1020 ms)
75 (300 ms)
1 ~ 255 (4 ms ~ 1020 ms)
1 ~ 255 (4 ms ~ 1020 ms)
1 ~ 255 (64 ms ~ 16320 ms)
1 ~ 255 (64 ms ~ 16320 ms)
25 (100 ms)
75 (300 ms)
32 (2048 ms)
32 (2048 ms)
0 ~ 255 (0 ms ~ 1020 ms)
1 ~ 255 (16 ms ~ 4080 ms)
1 ~ 255 (8 ms ~ 2040 ms)
1 ~ 32 (1 sec ~ 32 sec)
1 ~ 32 (1 sec ~ 32 sec)
1 ~ 32 (1 sec ~ 32 sec)
1 ~ 32 (1 sec ~ 32 sec)
1 ~ 32 (1 sec ~ 32 sec)
1 ~ 32 (1 sec ~ 32 sec)
1 ~ 32 (1 sec ~ 32 sec)
1 ~ 32 (1 sec ~ 32 sec)
1 ~ 32 (1 sec ~ 32 sec)
0 (0 ms)
63 (1008 ms)
100 (800 ms)
12 (12 sec)
12 (12 sec)
12 (12 sec)
12 (12 sec)
12 (12 sec)
12 (12 sec)
12 (12 sec)
12 (12 sec)
12 (12 sec)
2-417
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Conditions

After set from Program 81-13-01 to 42, the E1 unit will be reset.
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
81
2-418
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for
Extension
82-01 : Incoming Ring Tone
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 82-01 : Incoming Ring Tone to set the incoming ring tones, which are the tones a user
hears when a call rings an extension. These tones are grouped into four ring tone Ranges (1 ~ 4), also
called patterns, that consist of a combination of frequencies. (You assign a specific Range to trunks in
Program 22-03 and to extensions in Program 15-02.) Within each range there are three frequency
Types : High, Middle and Low. (Service Code 720 allows users to choose the Type for their incoming
calls.) Each Type in turn consists of two frequencies and the modulation played simultaneously to make
up the tone. These frequencies are determined by their Frequency Number selected in Items 1 and 2
(see below). In this program, you assign the two Frequency Numbers and Modulation for each Type, for
each of the four Ranges. The chart below shows the default Frequency Numbers for each Type in each
Range.
Input Data
Incoming Ringing Tone Number
1 = Pattern 1 (Trunk Incoming)
2 = Pattern 2 (Trunk Incoming)
3 = Pattern 3 (Trunk Incoming)
4 = Pattern 4 (Trunk Incoming)
5 = Intercom Incoming Pattern
6 = Alarm Sensor Tone Pattern
Ringing Tone Type Number
Item No.
1 = High
2 = Mid
3 = Low
Item
01
02
Frequency 1
Frequency 2
03
Modulation
Input Data
1 = 520 Hz
2 = 540 Hz
3 = 660 Hz
4 = 760 Hz
5 = 1100 Hz
6 = 1400 Hz
7 = 2000 Hz
0 = No Modulation
1 = 8 Hz Modulation
2 = 16 Hz Modulation
3 = Envelope
Default
Incoming Ringing
Tone Number
Pattern 1
(Trunk Incoming)
Pattern 2
(Trunk Incoming)
Pattern 3
(Trunk Incoming)
Pattern 4
(Trunk Incoming)
Pattern 5
(Intercom Incoming
Pattern)
Programming Manual
Tone Type
Frequency 1 (Hz)
Frequency 2 (Hz)
Modulation
High
Mid
Low
High
Mid
Low
High
Mid
Low
High
Mid
Low
High
Mid
Low
1100 Hz
660 Hz
520 Hz
1100 Hz
660 Hz
520 Hz
2000 Hz
1400 Hz
1100 Hz
2000 Hz
1400 Hz
1100 Hz
1100 Hz
660 Hz
520 Hz
1400 Hz
760 Hz
660 Hz
1400 Hz
760 Hz
660 Hz
760 Hz
660 Hz
540 Hz
760 Hz
660 Hz
540 Hz
1400 Hz
760 Hz
660 Hz
16 Hz Modulation
16 Hz Modulation
16 Hz Modulation
8 Hz Modulation
8 Hz Modulation
8 Hz Modulation
16 Hz Modulation
16 Hz Modulation
16 Hz Modulation
8 Hz Modulation
8 Hz Modulation
8 Hz Modulation
8 Hz Modulation
8 Hz Modulation
8 Hz Modulation
2-419
82
SL1100
Incoming Ringing
Tone Number
Pattern 6
(Alarm Sensor Pattern)
ISSUE 1.1
Tone Type
Frequency 1 (Hz)
Frequency 2 (Hz)
Modulation
High
Mid
Low
760 Hz
760 Hz
760 Hz
760 Hz
760 Hz
760 Hz
No Modulation
No Modulation
No Modulation
Conditions
Program
None
Feature Cross Reference
82


Distinctive Ringing Tones and Flash Patterns
Selectable Ring Tones
2-420
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for
Extension
82-04 : ASTU Initial Data Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
82
Use Program 82-04 : ASTU Initial Data Setup to set the basic data of the SLT.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
Companding Method Type
02
Ringing Frequency
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
Minimum Break Time
Maximum Break Time
Minimum Make Time
Maximum Make Time
Minimum Hook Flash Time
Maximum Hook Flash Time
Minimum Ground Flash Time
Minimum Off-Hook Time
No Detection Time after Off-Hook
No Detection Time after Pulse Dial
Detection
Loop Disconnect Time, Reversal
Time
Ring, Message Wait Period Time
13
14
Input Data
Default
0 = μ-law
1 = A-law
0 = 25 Hz
1 = 20 Hz
2 = 16 Hz
1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms)
1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms)
1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms)
1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms)
1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms)
1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms)
1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms)
1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms)
1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms)
1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms)
2 (10 ms)
15 (75 ms)
2 (10 ms)
15 (75 ms)
17 (85 ms)
120 (600 ms)
21 (105 ms)
21 (105 ms)
60 (300 ms)
70 (350 ms)
1 ~ 255 (10 ms ~ 2550 ms)
60 (600 ms)
1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms)
150 (750 ms)
1
0 (25 Hz)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-421
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for
Extension
82-05 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer2 (S-Point) Initial Data Setup
Level
Program
MF
Description
82
Use Program 82-05 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer2 (S-Point) Initial Data Setup to set the basic data for the
Layer 2 of ISDN BRI/PRI S-Point.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
Item
Timer T200
Timer T201
Timer T202
Timer T203
N200
N201
N202
Input Data
1 ~ 255 (100 ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ~ 25500 ms)
1 ~ 255
1 ~ 65535 (Byte)
1 ~ 255
Default
10 (1 sec)
10 (1 sec)
20 (2 sec)
100 (10 sec)
3
260
3
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-422
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for
Extension
82-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer3 (S-point) Timer Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 82-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer3 (S-Point) Timer Setup to set the basic timer for the
layer 3 of ISDN BRI & PRI S-Point.
Input Data
Layer3 Timer Type No.
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Item
T301
T302
T303
T304
T305
T306
T307
T308
T309
T310
T312
T313
T314
T316
T317
T318
T319
T320
T321
T322
1~5
Input Data
0, 180 ~ 254 (sec)
1 ~ 254 (sec)
1 ~ 254 (sec)
0 ~ 254 (sec)
1 ~ 254 (sec)
0 ~ 254 (sec)
1 ~ 254 (sec)
1 ~ 254 (sec)
1 ~ 254 (sec)
0 ~ 180 (sec)
1 ~ 254 (sec)
1 ~ 254 (sec)
1 ~ 254 (sec)
(T317 + 1) ~ 254 (sec)
1 ~ (T316 - 1) (sec)
1 ~ 254 (sec)
1 ~ 254 (sec)
1 ~ 254 (sec)
1 ~ 254 (sec)
1 ~ 254 (sec)
Default
180 (sec)
10 (sec)
4 (sec)
20 (sec)
30 (sec)
30 (sec)
180 (sec)
4 (sec)
90 (sec)
30 (sec)
6 (sec)
4 (sec)
4 (sec)
120 (sec)
60 (sec)
4 (sec)
4 (sec)
30 (sec)
30 (sec)
4 (sec)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-423
82
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for
Extension
82-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Station Port
Level
Program
IN
Description
82
Use Program 82-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Station Port to set the filter value of the
CODEC (QSLAC) filter of each analog port.
Input Data
Station Port Number
001 ~ 120
Item No.
CODEC Filter Type
Default
01
0 = Type 0
1 = Type 1
2 = Type 2
3 = Type 3
4 = Type 4
5 = Type 5
6 = Type 6
7 = Type 7
8 = Type 8
9 = Type 9
10 = Type 10
11 = Type 11
12 = Type 12
13 = Type 13
14 = Type 14
15 = Type 15
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Direct Station Selection (DSS)
2-424
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for
Extension
82-08 : Sidetone Volume Setup
Level
MF
Program
Description
Use Program 82-08 : Sidetone Volume Setup for adjusting the telephone sidetone volume. There are
two levels, based on whether the connected trunk is a digital trunk or analog trunk.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Description
Input
Digital Sidetone
Level
Analog Sidetone
Level
Side tone Volume
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
- 54 (dB)
- 48 (dB)
- 42 (dB)
- 36 (dB)
- 30 (dB)
- 24 (dB)
- 18 (dB)
- 12 (dB)
- 12 (dB)
- 12 (dB)
- 54 (dB)
- 54 (dB)
- 54 (dB)
- 48 (dB)
- 42 (dB)
- 36 (dB)
- 30 (dB)
- 24 (dB)
- 18 (dB)
- 12 (dB)
Default
9
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference


Central Office Calls, Answering
Central Office Calls, Placing
Programming Manual
2-425
82
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for
Extension
82-09 : SLIU CODEC Filter Data Setup
Level
Program
IN
Description
82
Use Program 82-09 : SLIU CODEC Filter Data Setup to define the filter setting data (when Program
82-07 is set to 4).
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
2-426
Item
B1 Filter Setup (1)
B1 Filter Setup (2)
B1 Filter Setup (3)
B1 Filter Setup (4)
B1 Filter Setup (5)
B1 Filter Setup (6)
B1 Filter Setup (7)
B1 Filter Setup (8)
B1 Filter Setup (9)
B1 Filter Setup (10)
B1 Filter Setup (11)
B1 Filter Setup (12)
B1 Filter Setup (13)
B1 Filter Setup (14)
B2 Filter Setup (1)
B2 Filter Setup (2)
AISN and Analog Gains
Z Filter Coefficients (1)
Z Filter Coefficients (2)
Z Filter Coefficients (3)
Z Filter Coefficients (4)
Z Filter Coefficients (5)
Z Filter Coefficients (6)
Z Filter Coefficients (7)
Z Filter Coefficients (8)
Z Filter Coefficients (9)
Z Filter Coefficients (10)
Z Filter Coefficients (11)
Z Filter Coefficients (12)
Z Filter Coefficients (13)
Z Filter Coefficients (14)
Z Filter Coefficients (15)
R Filter Coefficients (1)
R Filter Coefficients (2)
R Filter Coefficients (3)
R Filter Coefficients (4)
R Filter Coefficients (5)
R Filter Coefficients (6)
R Filter Coefficients (7)
R Filter Coefficients (8)
R Filter Coefficients (9)
R Filter Coefficients (10)
R Filter Coefficients (11)
R Filter Coefficients (12)
R Filter Coefficients (13)
R Filter Coefficients (14)
X Filter Coefficients (1)
X Filter Coefficients (2)
X Filter Coefficients (3)
Input Data
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
Default
105
122
166
42
227
46
169
242
151
41
122
135
168
112
45
1
14
178
162
53
83
42
171
194
43
106
163
43
169
166
159
1
220
1
58
32
35
202
195
174
74
51
170
171
74
197
1
17
1
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
ISSUE 1.1
Item
No.
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
SL1100
Item
X Filter Coefficients (4)
X Filter Coefficients (5)
X Filter Coefficients (6)
X Filter Coefficients (7)
X Filter Coefficients (8)
X Filter Coefficients (9)
X Filter Coefficients (10)
X Filter Coefficients (11)
X Filter Coefficients (12)
GR Filter Coefficients (1)
GR Filter Coefficients (2)
GX Filter Coefficients (1)
GX Filter Coefficients (2)
Input Data
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
Default
144
1
144
1
144
1
144
1
144
1
17
35
32
Program
82
Conditions

This is used if Program 82-07 is set to 4 (Specified data).
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-427
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for
Extension
82-14 : Handset/Headset Gain Setup for Multi Line
Telephone
Program
Level
IN
82
Description
Use Program 82-14: Handset/Headset Gain Setup for Multi Line Telephone to define the
Handset/Headset Gain Level for Multi Line Telephone.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
Item
01
Handset/Headset Transmit Gain
level
02
Handset/Headset Receive Gain
level
Up to eight digits
Input Data
0 = Fixed
(6 = + 6.5 dB)
1 ~ 32 = LR value : - 3.5 ~ + 58.5 dB
0 = Fixed
(15 = + 4.0 dB)
1 ~ 32 = LR value : - 24 ~ + 38.0 dB
Default
0
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-428
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for
Extension
82-21 : Sensor Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
82
Use Program 82-21 : Sensor Setup to setup the Sensor for SL1100.
Input Data
Sensor Number
Item
No.
Item
01
Sensor Type
02
Sensor Alarm Detect
Minimum Level
Sensor Idle Detect
Minimum Level
03
1~6
Input Data
Description
Default
0 = Close Detect
1 = Open Detect
1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms)
Set sensor type.
0
Set minimum level for Alarm detection.
24 (120 ms)
1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms)
Set minimum level for Idle detection.
24 (120 ms)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-429
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
84-01 : H.323 Trunk Basic Information Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 84-01 : H.323 Trunk Basic Information Setup to set the basic information of the H.323
Trunk.
84
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
02
03
Number of G.711 audio frames
G.711 VAD mode
04
G.711 Type
05
06
Number of G.729 audio frames
G.729 VAD mode
07
08
09
11
15
G.729 Jitter Buffer( min)
G.729 Jitter Buffer (average)
G.729 Jitter Buffer (average)
Number of G.723 audio frames
Jitter Buffer Mode
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
G.711 Jitter Buffer( min)
G.711 Jitter Buffer (average)
G.711 Jitter Buffer (average)
G.723 Jitter Buffer( min)
G.723 Jitter Buffer (average)
G.723 Jitter Buffer (average)
VAD Threshold
33
Priority CODEC setting
Priority of voice encoding method.
36
The Maximum FAX Transmission
Rate
41
46
FAX Communication no
Communication Time-Out
Low-speed Signal Data (FAX
Procedure Signal)
High-speed Signal Data (FAX
Procedure Signal)
TCF Operation Setting
59
FAX Relay Function
61
62
Auto Gain Control
DTMF Relay Mode
Set up information of VoIPDB is set
by Program 84-06-10.
44
45
2-430
Input Data
1~4
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = A-law
1 = μ-law
1~6
0 = A-law
1 = μ-law
0 ~ 300 ms
0 ~ 300 ms
0 ~ 300 ms
1~2
1 = Fixed
3 = Self adjusting
0 ~ 255 ms
0 ~ 255 ms
0 ~ 255 ms
0 ~ 300 ms
0 ~ 300 ms
0 ~ 300 ms
1 ~ 30 (- 19 dB ~ + 10 dB and self adjustment)
1 = - 19 dB (- 49 dBm)
:
20 = 0 dB (- 30 dBm)
:
29 = 9 dB (- 21 dBm)
30 = 10 dB (- 20 dBm)
0~3
0 = G711_PT
1 = G723_PT
2 = G729_PT
3 = G722_PT
1 = V.27ter, 4800 bps
3 = V.29, 9600 bps
5 = V.17, 14400 bps
10 ~ 32000 seconds
Default
3
0
0
3
0
30
60
120
1
3
30
60
120
30
60
120
20
0
5
30
0~2
0
0~2
0
1 = Training signal (TCF) of the fax is locally
generated
and checked.
2 = Training signal (TCF) of the fax is sent over
the network.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
2 = Each port mode
0~5
0 = VoIPDB
1 = RFC2833
2 = H.245
3 = Disable
1
0
0
0
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
ISSUE 1.1
Item
No.
SL1100
Item
63
Number of G.722 audio frames
65
66
67
68
G.722 Jitter Buffer( min)
G.722 Jitter Buffer (average)
G.722 Jitter Buffer (average)
RTP Filter
69
DTMF Level mode
70
DTMF Level High
71
DTMF Level Low
Input Data
1~4
1 = 10 ms
2 = 20 ms
3 = 30 ms
4 = 40 ms
0 ~ 255 ms
0 ~ 255 ms
0 ~ 255 ms
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = Use the Default of VoIPDB Unit
1 = Use the Main System
1 = - 33 dBm
:
28 = - 6 dBm
1 = - 33 dBm
:
28 = - 6 dBm
Default
3
30
60
120
1
Program
0
28
84
28
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-431
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
84-02 : H.225 and H.245 Information Basic Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 84-02 : H.225 and H.245 Information Basic Setup to define the basic setup information
of H.225 and H.245.
84
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
02
03
04
05
07
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
H.225 Alerting Time
H.225 Setup Acknowledge Timer
H.225 Setup Timer
H.225 Info Ack Timer
H.225 Call Proceeding Timer
H.245 Master Slave Determination
Timer
H.245 Master Slave Determination
Retry Count
H.245 Capability Exchange Timer
H.245 Logical Channel
Establishment Timer
H.245 Mode Request Procedures
Timer
H.245 Close Logical Channel Timer
H.245 Round Trip Delay Timer
H.245 Maintenance Loop
RAS GRQ Timer
GRQ Retry Count
RAS RRQ Timer
RRQ Retry Count
RAS URQ Timer
URQ Retry Count
RAS ARQ Timer
ARQ Retry Count
RAS BRQ Timer
BRQ Retry Count
RAS IRR Timer
IRR Retry Count
RAS DRQ Timer
DRQ Retry Count
RAS LRQ Timer
LRQ Retry Count
RAS RAI Timer
RAI Retry Count
Call Signaling Port Number
35
Fast Start Mode
36
37
RAS Unicast Port Number
Terminal Type setting
08
09
10
11
Input Data
Default
0 ~ 255 seconds
0 ~ 255 seconds
0 ~ 255 seconds
0 ~ 255 seconds
0 ~ 255 seconds
0 ~ 255 seconds
180
9
4
9
10
5
0 ~ 255 seconds
3
0 ~ 255 seconds
0 ~ 255 seconds
5
50
0 ~ 255 seconds
50
0 ~ 255 seconds
0 ~ 255 seconds
0 ~ 255 seconds
0 ~ 255 seconds
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255 seconds
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255 seconds
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255 seconds
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255 seconds
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255 seconds
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255 seconds
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255 seconds
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255 seconds
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 65535 :
0 ~ 1719, 1721 ~ 65535
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 ~ 65535
0 ~ 255
50
50
50
5
2
5
3
3
1
5
2
5
2
5
2
8
2
5
2
3
2
1730
1
20001
60
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-432
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
84-07 : Firmware Download Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 84-07 : Firmware Download Setup to configure the settings related to Central
Firmware Download for IP Phones.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
Server Mode
02
File Server IP
Address
03
04
Login Name
Password
Input Data
0 = TFTP
1 = FTP
0.0.0.0 ~
126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~
191.255255.254
192.0.0.1 ~
223.255.254.254
Up to 20 Characters
Up to 20 Characters
Description
Default
0
0.0.0.0
Enable only 84-07-01 is 1
Enable only 84-07-01 is 1
None
None
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-433
84
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
84-09 : VLAN Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 84-09 : VLAN Setup to set up the VLAN data. I/F No.2 The packets send from LAN I/F
on VoIPDB is set the VLAN tag.
84
Input Data
Interface
Number
1~2
Item No.
Item
01
VLAN
02
03
VLAN ID
Priority
Input Data
0 = Disable (Off)
1 = Enable (On)
0 ~ 4094
0~7
Default
0
0
0
Conditions

System programming must be exited before these program options take affect.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-434
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
84-10 : ToS Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 84-10 : ToS Setup to set up the Type of Service data.
Input Data
Protocol Type
Item
No.
84
1 ~ 3 = Not used
4 = H.323
5 = RTP/RTCP
6 = SIP
7 = Not used
8 = SIP-MLT
9 = SIP Trunk
10 = Not used
Item
01
ToS Mode
02
Priority, IP
Precedence
03
Low Delay
04
Wideband
(Throughout)
05
High Reliability
07
Priority (D.S.C.P. Differentiated
Services Code Point)
Input Data
Description
Default
0 = Disable (Invalid)
1 = IP Precedence
2 = Diffserv
0~7
0 = Low
7 = High
0~1
0 = Normal Delay, Low
Delay
0~1
0 = Normal Throughput
1 = High Throughput
0~1
0 = Normal Reliability
1 = Low Reliability
0 ~ 63
When Input Data is set to 1, Item No. 07 is
invalid. When Data is set to 2, Item No. 02
~ 06 are invalid.
1 = Router queuing priority
0
1 = Optimize for low delay routing
0
1 = Optimize for high bandwidth routing
0
1 = Optimize for reliability routing
0
DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point)
0
0
Conditions

The system must be reset for these program options to take affect.
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-435
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
84-13 : SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 84-13 : SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup to set up the basic CODEC
options for SIP trunks.
84
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
Number of G.711
Audio Frame
1 = 10 ms
2 = 20 ms
3 = 30 ms
4 = 40 ms
02
G.711 Silence
Detection (VAD)
Mode
G.711 Type
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
2-436
G.711 Jitter Buffer
- Minimum
G.711 Jitter Buffer
- Minimum
G.711 Jitter Buffer
- Maximum
G.729 Audio
Frame
0 = A-law
1 = μ-law
0 ~ 255 ms
0 ~ 255 ms
0 ~ 255 ms
1~6
(1 = 10 ms, 2 = 20 ms,
etc.)
G.729 Silence
Compression
(VAD) Mode
G.729 Jitter Buffer
- Minimum
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
G.729 Jitter Buffer
- Standard
G.729 Jitter Buffer
- Maximum
Number of G.723
Audio Frame
G.723 Jitter Buffer
- Minimum
G.723 Jitter Buffer
- Standard
G.723 Jitter Buffer
- Maximum
Jitter Buffer Mode
0 ~ 300 ms
0 ~ 300 ms
0 ~ 300 ms
1 = 30 msec
2 = 60 msec
0 ~ 300 ms
0 ~ 300 ms
0 ~ 300 ms
1 = static
3 = adaptive
immediately
Description
Default
Maximum number of G711 Audio
Frames. When the voice is encoded
using the PCM (Pulse Code
Modulation) method, a unit is a
frame of 10ms.
Select whether to compress silence
with G.711. When there is silence,
the RTP packet is not sent.
Set the type of G.711.
2
Set the minimum value of the G.711
Jitter Buffer.
Set the average value of the G.711
Jitter Buffer.
Set the maximum value of the
G.711 Jitter Buffer.
Maximum number of G729 Audio
Frames. G.729 assumes the audio
signal made by a specimen by 8
kHz and the frame of 10 ms is
assumed to be a unit to 8 kbps by
the encoding compressed method.
Select whether to compress silence
with G.729. When there is silence,
the RTP packet is not sent.
Set the minimum value of the Jitter
Buffer of G.729 is set. Jitter is the
variation in the time between
packets arriving and the buffer
allows this variation to be absorbed.
Set the average G.729 Jitter Buffer.
20
Set the maximum G.729 Jitter
Buffer.
Maximum number of the G.723
Audio Frame.
Set the minimum value of the G.723
Jitter Buffer.
Set the average value of the G.723
Jitter Buffer.
Set the maximum value of the
G.723 Jitter Buffer.
Set the mode of the Jitter Buffer.
1 = Size set to the fixed amount for
the codec.
2 = The minimum/maximum range
for the codec is used.
3 = The minimum/maximum range
for the codec is used and adjusts at
any time, regardless of silence.
Related
Program
0
0
40
80
2
0
20
40
80
1
30
60
120
3
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
ISSUE 1.1
Item
No.
18
28
30
31
32
SL1100
Item
Silence
Compression
(VAD) Threshold
Priority Codec
Setting
EchoAuto Gain
Control
DTMF Payload
Number
DTMF Relay Mode
Input Data
Set the voice level judged to be
silence. Change value based .30
This entry is ignored if silence
compression is disabled in
84-01-03 with G.711 or 84-01-06
with G.729.
96 ~ 127
Define the DTMF Payload Number.
0 = Disable
1 = RFC2833
1 = 10 ms
2 = 20 ms
3 = 30 ms
4 = 40 ms
Determine the DTMF setup.
0
Maximum number of G.722 Audio
Frames. G.722 assumes the audio
signal made by a specimen by 16
kHz and the frame of 10 ms is
assumed to be a unit to 64 kbps by
the encoding compressed method.
Set the minimum value of the Jitter
Buffer of G.722 is set. Jitter is the
variation in the time between
packets arriving and the buffer
allows this variation to be absorbed.
Set the average G.722 Jitter Buffer.
3
G.722 Audio
Frame
35
G.722 Jitter Buffer
- Minimum
0 ~ 255 ms
36
G.722 Jitter Buffer
- Standard
G.722 Jitter Buffer
- Maximum
G.726 Audio
Frame
0 ~ 255 ms
G.726 Silence
Compression
Mode
G.726 Jitter Buffer
- Minimum
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
G.726 Jitter Buffer
- Standard
G.726 Jitter Buffer
- Maximum
iLBC Audio Frame
0 ~ 255 ms
38
39
40
41
42
43
45
iLBC Jitter Buffer
- Minimum
46
iLBC Jitter Buffer
- Standard
iLBC Jitter Buffer
- Maximum
ILBC Payload
Number
47
48
Programming Manual
Default
1 ~ 30
(self-adjustment and 19 dB ~ + 10dB)
1 = - 19 dB (- 49 dBm)
:
20 = 0dB (- 30 dBm)
:
29 = 9 dBm (- 21 dBm)
30 = 10dBm (- 20
dBm)
0 = G.711 PT
1 = G.723 PT
2 = G.729 PT
3 = G.722 PT
4 = G.726 PT
5 = iLBC PT
6 = G.711 Only (V1.5
Added)
7 = G.729 Only (V1.5
Added)
0~5
33
37
Description
0 ~ 255 ms
20
Program
The option selected here
determines what other codec
options are applied by priority.
0
84
Define the Auto Gain Control.
0
110
30
60
Set the maximum G.722 Jitter
Buffer.
Maximum number of G.726 Audio
Frames. G.726 assumes the audio
signal made by a specimen by 16
kHz and the frame of 10 ms is
assumed to be a unit to 32 kbps by
the encoding compressed method.
Select whether to compress silence
with G.726. When there is silence,
the RTP packet is not sent.
Set the minimum value of the Jitter
Buffer of G.726 is set. Jitter is the
variation in the time between
packets arriving and the buffer
allows this variation to be absorbed.
Set the average G.726 Jitter Buffer.
120
120
0 ~ 255 ms
Set the maximum G.726 Jitter
Buffer.
Maximum number of iLBC Audio
Frames. iLBC assumes the frame
of 10 ms is a unit.
Set the minimum value of the Jitter
Buffer of iLBC is set. Jitter is the
variation in the time between
packets arriving and the buffer
allows this variation to be absorbed.
Set the average iLBC Jitter Buffer.
0 ~ 255 ms
Set the maximum iLBC Jitter Buffer.
120
96 ~ 127
The payload number of iLBC is set.
However, the same number as Item
31 cannot be set.
98
1 = 10 ms
2 = 20 ms
3 = 30 ms
4 = 40 ms
0 ~ 255 ms
0 ~ 255 ms
2 = 20 ms
3 = 30 ms
4 = 40 ms
0 ~ 255 ms
Related
Program
3
0
30
60
3
30
60
2-437
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Item
No.
Item
49
RTP Filter
50
Fax Relay mode
51
T.38 Protocol
mode
52
Fax Max Rate
56
Low Speed Data
Redundancy
High Speed Data
Redundancy
TCF Handling
Program
84
57
58
61
62
T.38 RTP Format
Payload Number
DTMF Level mode
63
DTMF Level High
64
DTMF Level Low
65
VAD Negotiation
on SDP(Future)
(V2.0 Added)
Input Data
Description
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = R/U (V1.5
Changed)
1 = U/R (V1.5
Changed)
2 = RTP (V1.5
Changed)
3 = UDPTL (V1.5
Changed)
1 = V.27ter, 4800 bps
3 = V.29, 9600 bps
5= V.17, 14400 bps
0~2
Default
0
0
1
5
0
0~2
0
0 = Local
1 = Network
96 ~ 127
1
0 = VoIPDB Unit
1 = Main Soft
1 = — 33 dBm
:
28 = - 6 dBm
1 = - 33 dBm
:
28 = - 6 dBm
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
66
Voice Band Data
(VBD)(Future)(V2.0
Added)
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
67
VBD Payload
Type(Future)(V2.0
Added)
96 ~ 127
Related
Program
100
0
28
28
This PRG is used to determine the
VAD determination method setting
VAD information on SDP.
This PRG is effective when VAD is
enabled on each codec.
G.711 and G.729 are targets at
this time.
This PRG is used for setting VBD to
is "Enable/Disable".
This PRG is necessary to set the 1:
Special in PRG15-03-03 for target
terminal.
This PRG is specifies the Payload
Type number used by VBD.
0
0
15-03-03
97
15-03-03
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-438
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
84-14 : SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 84-14 : SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup to define the basic setup for SIP trunks.
Input Data
Item No.
01
Item
04
05
06
07
08
09
INVITE ReTx Count
Specifies the number of times the
INVITE message is sent.
Request ReTx Count
Specifies the number of times Request
message except INVITE are sent.
Response ReTx Count
Specifies the number of times the
Response message is sent.
Request ReTx Start Time
Request Maximum ReTx Interval
SIP Trunk Port Number
Session Timer Value
Minimum Session Timer Value
Called Party Information
10
URL Type
11
URL/To HeaderSetting Information
13
SIP Trunk Incoming/Outgoing via
E164SIP_URI
15
100rel Settings
16
SIP Trunk SIP-URI E.164 Incoming
Mode
02
03
Input Data
Default
Note
7
11
0 ~ 255
7
0 ~ 65535
(0 ms ~ 6553.5 seconds)
1 ~ 65535
0 ~ 65535
0 ~ 65535
0 = Request URI
1 = To Header
0 = SIP-URL
1 = TEL-URL
0 = Proxy Server Domain
1 = SIP UA Domain
0 = Off
1 = On
2 = International Access Mode
(V2.0 Added)
0 = Use default Settings
1 = Use opposite Default
Setting
0 = OFF
1 = Mode 1
2 = Mode 2
5 (500 ms)
40 (4000 ms)
5060
0
1800
0
0
0
0
(V1.5 Added)
0
(V1.5 Added)
0
(V2.0 Added)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-439
84
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
84-15 : H.323/SIP Phone Keep Alive Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 84-15 : H.323/SIP Phone Keep Alive Setup to set the Keep Alive Configuration of the
H.323/SIP phone.
84
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
Item
Registration
Information
Automatic Deletion
Keep Alive Message
Interval
Keep Alive Message
Timeout
Keep Alive Timeout
Input Data
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
1 ~ 10 minutes
1 ~ 10 seconds
1 ~ 5 times
Description
Default
When set to 1 (Enable), the registration
information is automatically deleted (for
H.323).
Time interval that system sends a Ping to
the terminal.
Time that system waits for a Ping response
from the terminal.
How many times the system waits for a
non response before determining the
terminal is down.
0
1 minutes
5 seconds
3 times
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-440
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
84-16 : VoIPDB Limiter Control Gain Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 84-16 : VoIPDB Limiter Control Gain Setup to set the Limiter Control Gain
configuration of VoIPDB.
84
Input Data
Item No.
Item
Input Data
Default
01
RX Limiter Control Gain
Gain setting to control limiter in the direction of
IP
PCM.
This option adds gain to the voice input from
the LAN and removes it from the voice output
to highway.
TX Limiter Control Gain
Gain setting to control limiter in the direction of
PCM
IP.
This option adds the gain to the voice input
from highway and removes it from the voice
output to the LAN.
RX Limiter Control Gain (COIU)
This option controls the limiter gain for a COIU
call in the IP to PCM direction.
TX Limiter Control Gain (COIU)
This option controls the limiter gain for a COIU
call in the PCM to IP direction.
0 ~ 30 (- 15 dBm ~ + 15 dBm)
0 = - 15 dBm
1 = - 14 dBm
:
15 = 0 dBm
:
29 = 14 dBm
30 = 15 dBm
15 (0 dBm)
02
03
04
15 (0 dBm)
15 (0 dBm)
15 (0 dBm)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-441
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
84-19 : SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 84-19 : SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup to define the CODEC
information for the SIP extensions.
84
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
Number of G.711
Audio Frame
02
G.711 Silence
Detection (VAD)
Mode
G.711 Type
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
2-442
G.711 Jitter Buffer Minimum
G.711 Jitter Buffer Standard
G.711 Jitter Buffer Maximum
G.729 Audio Frame
Input Data
1 = 10 ms
2 = 20 ms
3 = 30 ms
4 = 40 ms
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = A-law
1 = μ-law
0 ~ 255 ms
Description
Default
Maximum number of G711 Audio Frames.
When the voice is encoded using the PCM
(Pulse Code Modulation) method, a unit is
a frame of 10ms.
Select whether to compress silence with
G.711. When there is silence, the RTP
packet is not sent.
Set the type of G.711.
2
20
0
0
G.729 Silence
Compression (VAD)
Mode
G.729 Jitter Buffer Minimum
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
G.729 Jitter Buffer Standard
G.729 Jitter Buffer Maximum
Number of G.723
Audio Frame
G.723 Jitter Buffer Minimum
G.723 Jitter Buffer Standard
G.723 Jitter Buffer Maximum
Jitter Buffer Mode
0 ~ 300 ms
Set the minimum value of the G.711 Jitter
Buffer.
Set the average value of the G.711 Jitter
Buffer.
Set the maximum value of the G.711 Jitter
Buffer.
Maximum number of G729 Audio Frames.
G.729 assumes the audio signal made by a
specimen by 8 kHz and the frame of 10 ms
is assumed to be a unit to 8 kbps by the
encoding compressed method.
Select whether to compress silence with
G.729. When there is silence, the RTP
packet is not sent.
Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer
of G.729 is set. Jitter is the variation in the
time between packets arriving and the
buffer allows this variation to be absorbed.
Set the average G.729 Jitter Buffer.
0 ~ 300 ms
Set the maximum G.729 Jitter Buffer.
80
1 = 30 msec
2 = 60 msec
0 ~ 300 ms
Maximum number of the G.723 Audio
Frame.
Set the minimum value of the G.723 Jitter
Buffer.
Set the average value of the G.723 Jitter
Buffer.
Set the maximum value of the G.723 Jitter
Buffer.
Set the mode of the Jitter Buffer.
1 = Size set to the fixed amount for the
codec.
2 = The minimum/maximum range for the
codec is used.
3 = The minimum/maximum range for the
codec is used and adjust at any time,
regardless of silence.
1
0 ~ 255 ms
0 ~ 255 ms
1~6
(1 = 10 ms, 2 = 20ms,
etc.)
0 ~ 300 ms
0 ~ 300 ms
0 ~ 300 ms
1 = static
3 = adaptive
immediately
40
80
2
0
20
40
30
60
120
3
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
Description
Default
18
Silence Compression
(VAD) Threshold
Set the voice level judged to be silence.
Change value based .30
This entry is ignored if silence compression
is disabled in 84-01-03 with G.711 or
84-01-06 with G.729.
20
28
Priority Codec
Setting
The option selected here determines what
other codec options are applied by priority.
For the system to utilize the G.723 or iLBC
Codecs, program 84-27-02 must be set to
G.723/iLBC.
0
30
Define the Auto Gain Control.
0
96 ~ 127
Define the DTMF Payload Number.
96
32
EchoAuto Gain
Control
DTMF Payload
Number
DTMF Relay Mode
1 ~ 30
(self-adjustment and 19 dB ~ + 10 dB)
1 = - 19 dB (- 49 dBm)
:
20 = 0 dB (- 30 dBm)
:
29 = 9 dBm (- 21 dBm)
30 = 10 dBm (- 20 dBm)
0 = G.711 PT
1 = G.723 PT
2 = G.729 PT
3 = G.722
4 = G.726
5 = iLBC
0~5
0 = Disable
1 = RFC2833
0
33
G.722 Audio Frame
1 = 10 ms
2 = 20 ms
3 = 30 ms
4 = 40 ms
35
G.722 Jitter Buffer Minimum
0 ~ 255 ms
36
G.722 Jitter Buffer Standard
G.722 Jitter Buffer Maximum
G.726 Audio Frame
0 ~ 255 ms
Determine the DTMF setup used between
the SIP extensions. It is effective when a
terminal call is made through the VoIPDB.
Maximum number of G.722 Audio Frames.
G.722 assumes the audio signal made by a
specimen by 16 kHz and the frame of 10
ms is assumed to be a unit to 64 kbps by
the encoding compressed method.
Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer
of G.722 is set. Jitter is the variation in the
time between packets arriving and the
buffer allows this variation to be absorbed.
Set the average G.722 Jitter Buffer.
0 ~ 255 ms
Set the maximum G.722 Jitter Buffer.
1 = 10 ms
2 = 20 ms
3 = 30 ms
4 = 40 ms
G.726 Silence
Compression (VAD)
Mode
G.726 Jitter Buffer Minimum
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
G.726 Jitter Buffer Standard
G.726 Jitter Buffer Maximum
iLBC Audio Frame
0 ~ 255 ms
Maximum number of G.726 Audio Frames.
G.726 assumes the audio signal made by a
specimen by 16 kHz and the frame of 10
ms is assumed to be a unit to 32 kbps by
the encoding compressed method.
Select whether to compress silence with
G.726. When there is silence, the RTP
packet is not sent.
Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer
of G.726 is set. Jitter is the variation in the
time between packets arriving and the
buffer allows this variation to be absorbed.
Set the average G.726 Jitter Buffer.
0 ~ 255 ms
Set the maximum G.726 Jitter Buffer.
2 = 20 ms
3 = 30 ms
4 = 40 ms
0 ~ 255 ms
Maximum number of iLBC Audio Frames.
iLBC assumes the frame of 10ms is a unit.
3
30
31
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
0 ~ 255 ms
3
30
60
120
3
0
30
60
120
45
iLBC Jitter Buffer Minimum
46
0 ~ 255 ms
0 ~ 255 ms
Set the maximum iLBC Jitter Buffer.
120
48
iLBC Jitter Buffer Standard
iLBC Jitter Buffer Maximum
ILBC payload number
Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer
of iLBC is set. Jitter is the variation in the
time between packets arriving and the
buffer allows this variation to be absorbed.
Set the average iLBC Jitter Buffer.
96 ~ 127
The payload number of iLBC is set.
However, the same number as Item 31
cannot be set.
98
49
RTP Filter
50
Fax Relay mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
47
Programming Manual
60
1
0
2-443
Program
84
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Item
No.
Program
51
T.38 Protocol mode
52
Fax Max Rate
56
Low Speed Data
Redundancy
High Speed Data
Redundancy
TCF Handling
57
84
Item
58
61
62
T.38 RTP Format
Payload Number
DTMF Level mode
63
DTMF Level High
64
DTMF Level Low
Input Data
Description
Default
0 = R/U (V1.5 Changed)
1 = U/R (V1.5 Changed)
2 = RTP (V1.5
Changed)
3 = UDPTL (V1.5
Changed)
1 = V.27ter, 4800 bps
3 = V.29, 9600 bps
5 = V.17, 14400 bps
0~2
1
0~2
0
0 = Local
1= Network
96 ~ 127
1
0 = VoIPDB Unit
1 = Main Soft
1 = - 33 dBm
:
28 = - 6 dBm
1 = - 33 dBm
:
28 = - 6 dBm
5
0
100
0
28
28
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-444
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
84-20 : SIP Extension Basic Information Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 84-20 : SIP Extension Basic Information Setup to set up proxy information, session
timers, called party information and expire value of invite.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
02
03
04
Registrar/Proxy Port
Session Timer Value
Minimum Session
Timer Value
Called Party Info
05
Expire Value of Invite
06
Expire Value of Invite
(send)
Input Data
Description
1 ~ 65535
0 ~ 65535
0 ~ 65535
0 = Request URI
1 = To Header
0 ~ 256 seconds
1 ~ 3600 seconds
Default
5070
180 seconds
180 seconds
0
Arrival of a message is ended when this
time expires and there is no cut from the
caller.
The expiration time is set for the Invite
message.
180 seconds
180 seconds
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-445
84
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
84-22 : DR700 Multiline Logon Information Setup
Level
SA
Program
Description
Use Program 84-22 : DR700 Multiline Logon Information Setup to set the DR700 Multiline logon
information.
84
Input Data
Personal ID Index
Item
No.
Item
001 ~ 120
Input Data
01
User ID
Up to 32 characters
02
Password
Up to 16 characters
03
User ID Omission
04
Log Off
05
Nick Name
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Up to 32 characters
Description
Default
Input the User ID when using manual or
auto registration (10-46-01).
Input the Password when using manual or
auto registration (10-46-01).
Input the Personal ID from terminal
automatically when log on again.
Input the Personal ID from terminal
automatically when log on again.
Input the Personal ID from terminal
automatically when log on again.
No Setting
No Setting
0
1
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-446
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
84-23 : DR700 Multiline Basic Information Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 84-23 : DR700 Multiline Basic Information Setup to set the basic information for the
DR700 Multiline Terminal.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
Registration Expire
Timer
60 ~ 65535 seconds
02
Subscribe Expire
Timer
60 ~ 65535 seconds
03
Session Expire Timer
60 ~ 65535 seconds
04
Minimum Session
Expire Timer
Invite Expire Timer
60 ~ 65535 seconds
06
Signal Type of
Service
0x00 ~ 0xFF
(0 ~ 9, A ~ F)
07
08
Error Display Timer
Digest Authorization
Registration Expire
Timer
Temporally Password
0 ~ 65535 seconds
0 ~ 4294967295
seconds
05
09
10
Number of Password
Retries
11
Password Lock Time
12
Reference Number
13
Media Type of
Service
Refer Expire Timer
14
60 ~ 65535 seconds
Maximum 16 characters
(0 ~ 9, a ~ f, A ~ F)
0 ~ 255
(0 = No Limit)
0 ~ 120
(0 = No Limit)
Up to 32 digits
(0 ~ 9, *, #, P, R, @)
0x00 ~ 0xFF
(0 ~ 9, A ~ F)
0 ~ 65535 seconds
Description
Default
The Expires value of the REGISTER
message which received from DR700
terminal is out of range or when the Expire
value is not set up, in case it assigns the
effective time to the DR700 terminal. The
timer for supervising whether DR700
terminal is connected or not.
The subscribe Expire timer to transmit and
receive the terminal operation instructions
between the Main Device and DR700
terminal.
Set effective time for supervising the Voice
Path.
Set minimum value of effective time for
supervising the Voice Path.
Set effective time for Incoming/Outgoing
call when the Expire value is not set in the
INVITE message received from DR700
terminal.
Set Type of Service value which applied to
send SIP Message Packet from DR700
terminal to Main Device.
180 seconds
3600 seconds
180 seconds
180 seconds
180 seconds
00
0
0
None
Input the number of times an incorrect
password can be entered when the
security key is pressed.
0
0
No Setting
00
60 seconds
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-447
84
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
84-24 : DR700 Multiline CODEC Basic Information Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 84-24 : DR700 Multiline CODEC Basic Information Setup to set the codec of each
type of DR700 Multiline Telephone.
84
Input Data
Type
Item
No.
01
Item
Number of G.711
Audio Frame
1 = Type 1
2 = Type 2
3 = Type 3
4 = Type 4
5 = Type 5
Input Data
1 = 10 ms
2 = 20 ms
3 = 30 ms
4 = 40 ms
02
G.711 Silence
Detection (VAD)
Mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
03
G.711 Type
04
G.711 Jitter Buffer Minimum
G.711 Jitter Buffer Standard
G.711 Jitter Buffer Maximum
G.729 Audio Frame
0 = A-law
1 = μ-law
0 ~ 255 ms
05
06
07
08
2-448
G.729 Silence
Compression (VAD)
Mode
0 ~ 255 ms
0 ~ 255 ms
1~4
(1 = 10 ms, 2 = 20 ms,
etc.)
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Description
Default
Maximum number of G711 Audio Frames.
When the voice is encoded using the PCM
(Pulse Code Modulation) method, a unit is
a frame of 10ms.
The Audio frame size setting is only from
IP phone to IP phone. When the IP phone
communicates to a TDM device it will
always use a 20 ms frame size.
2
Softphone (SP310) only supports 20 ms
or 40 ms.
Select whether to compress silence with
G.711. When there is silence, the RTP
packet is not sent.
When VAD is enabled the CPU will stop
sending silence packets but the IP phone
will continue to transmit silence packets.
Set the type of G.711.
Set the minimum value of the G.711 Jitter
Buffer.
Set the average value of the G.711 Jitter
Buffer.
Set the maximum value of the G.711 Jitter
Buffer.
Maximum number of G.729 Audio Frames.
G.729 assumes the audio signal made by a
specimen by 8 kHz and the frame of 10 ms
is assumed to be a unit to 8 kbps by the
encoding compressed method.
The Audio frame size setting is only from
IP phone to IP phone. When the IP phone
communicates to a TDM device it will
always use a 20 ms frame size.
Softphone (SP310) only supports 20 ms
or 40 ms.
Select whether to compress silence with
G.729. When there is silence, the RTP
packet is not sent.
When VAD is enabled the CPU will stop
sending silence packets but the IP phone
will continue to transmit silence packets.
0
0
20
40
80
2
0
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
ISSUE 1.1
Item
No.
SL1100
Item
Input Data
Description
Default
20
09
G.729 Jitter Buffer Minimum
0 ~ 300 ms
10
G.729 Jitter Buffer Standard
G.729 Jitter Buffer Maximum
Jitter Buffer Mode
Set the mode of the
Jitter Buffer.
0 ~ 300 ms
Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer
of G.729 is set. Jitter is the variation in the
time between packets arriving and the
buffer allows this variation to be absorbed.
Set the average G.729 Jitter Buffer.
0 ~ 300 ms
Set the maximum G.729 Jitter Buffer.
80
1 = static
3 = adaptive
immediately
3
18
Silence Compression
(VAD) Threshold
28
Priority Codec
Setting
30
EchoAuto Gain
Control
DTMF Payload
Number
G.722 Audio Frame
1 ~ 30
(self-adjustment and 19 dB ~ + 10dB)
1 = - 19 dB (- 49 dBm)
:
20 = 0 dB (- 30 dBm)
:
29 = 9 dBm (- 21 dBm)
30 = 10dBm (- 20dBm)
0 = G711 PT
2 = G729 PT
3 = G.722 PT
0~5
1 = Size set to the fixed amount for the
codec.
2 = The minimum/maximum range for the
codec is used.
3 = The minimum/maximum range for the
codec is used and adjust at any time,
regardless of silence.
Set the voice level judged to be silence.
Change value based .30
This entry is ignored if silence compression
is disabled in 84-01-03 with G.711, or
84-01-06 with G.729.
11
17
31
32
0
Define the Auto Gain Control.
0
96
Maximum number of G.722 Audio Frames.
G.722 assumes the audio signal made by a
specimen by 16kHz and the frame of 10ms
is assumed to be a unit to 64kbps by the
encoding compressed method.
The Audio frame size setting is only from
IP phone to IP phone. When the IP phone
communicates to a TDM device it will
always use a 20 ms frame size.
34
G.722 Jitter Buffer Minimum
0 ~ 255 ms
35
0 ~ 255 ms
0 ~ 255 ms
Set the maximum G.722 Jitter Buffer.
37
G.722 Jitter Buffer Standard
G.722 Jitter Buffer Maximum
RTP Filter
Softphone (SP310) only supports 20 ms.
Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer
of G.722 is set. Jitter is the variation in the
time between packets arriving and the
buffer allows this variation to be absorbed.
Set the average G.722 Jitter Buffer.
38
DTMF Level mode
39
DTMF Level High
40
DTMF Level Low
36
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = Use the Default of
VoIPDB Unit
1 = Use the Main
System
1 = - 33 dBm
:
28 = - 6 dBm
1 = - 33 dBm
:
28 = - 6 dBm
20
The option selected here determines what
other codec options are applied by priority.
96 ~ 127
1 = 10 ms
2 = 20 ms
3 = 30 ms
4 = 40 ms
40
3
30
60
120
1
0
28
28
Conditions
None
Programming Manual
2-449
Program
84
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
84
2-450
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
84-26 : VoIP Basic Setup (DSP)
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 84-26 : VoIP Basic Setup to set the IP address and the port of VoIP.
Input Data
Slot Number
84
0
VoIPDB GW Number
1
GW Number will not be shown in Telephone
Programming mode.
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
02
IP Address
RTP Port Number
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
0 ~ 65534
03
RTCP Port Number
RTP Port Number + 1
Default
172.16.0.20 ~
VoIP GW1 =
10020~10051
VoIPDB GW1 = 10021
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-451
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
84-27 : VoIP Basic Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 84-27 : VoIP Basic Setup to set the DTMF Relay and the SRTP mode of the VoIPDB.
84
Input Data
Slot Number
Item
No.
Item
01
DTMF Relay Setup
02
Setup CODEC Mode
03
SRTP Mode Setup
04
06
07
08
SRTP Mode Select
H.245 Port Number
Preparation
Completion
Response Port
Number
DTMF Duration
09
DTMF Pause
10
12
13
DTMF Twist Positive
Level
DTMF Twist Negative
Level
DTMF Duration
DTMF Level
14
ICMP REDIRECT
15
DTMF Detect
Minimum Duration
16
DTMF Detect
Minimum Level
11
2-452
0
Input Data
0 = DTMF Relay disabled
1 = In-Band DTMF Relay
- Do not report to host
processor
2 = Out Band Relay - Do
not pass tones as voice
0 = Default
1 = Mode 1 (G.723/iLBC)
Description
Default
2
Default means the system uses another
CODEC except G.723.
Mode 1 means the system uses all
CODECs, but the limitation of the total
number of available DSP will be applied.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = Mode1
0 ~ 65535
0 ~ 65535
0
0
0
10100
4000
0 = Use RFC2833
25 ~ 2000 ms
0 = Use RFC2833
25 ~ 2000 ms
0 ~ 24 dB
0
0 ~ 24 dB
0
30 ~ 2000 ms
1 ~ 61 (- 36 dB ~ + 24 dB
1 = - 36 dB
2 = - 35 dB
:
37 = 0 dB
:
60 = 23 dB
61 = 24 dB
0 = Enabled, Voice
packets will follow ICMP
redirect messages.
1 = Disabled, Voice
packets will NOT follow
the ICMP redirect
message.
23 ~ 2000 ms
0: -40dbm
1: -39dbm
2: -38dbm
:
31: -9dbm
0
5
100
25 (- 12 dB)
1
This setting is the minimal time setting to
distinguish DTMF tones for the IPLB. If
the signal is shorter than the value set,
the signal is deemed not a DTMF.
This setting is the minimal level setting to
distinguish DTMF tones. If the signal is
shorter than the value set, the signal is
deemed not a DTMF.
30
2 (-38dbm)
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
ISSUE 1.1
Item
No.
17
SL1100
Item
DTMF Detect
Minimum S/N Ratio
Input Data
0: -9db
1: -8db
:
6: -3db
7: -2db
8: -1db
9: 0db
Description
Default
This is a frequency ratio setting of the
DTMF for the frequency other than the
DTMF tone. When this value comes to
0db, the DTMF is distinguished only when
the signal level except DTMF is low. In
case of wrong DTMF detection by a
person’s voice, there is the possibility that
the level except DTMF is large. The
system will be able to protect a wrong
DTMF detection by choosing 0db value or
so.
6 (-3db)
Program
Conditions
84
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-453
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
84-28 : DR700 Multiline Firmware Name Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 84-28 : DR700 Multiline Firmware Name Setup to set the firmware name to download
for the IP Phone.
84
Input Data
Terminal Type
Item
No.
01
02
1 ~ 3 = Not used
4 = IP4WW-24TIXH
Item
Firmware Directory
Firmware File Name
Input Data
Maximum 64 characters
Maximum 30 characters
Default
No Setting
No Setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-454
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
84-29 : SIP-MLT CODEC Information Fixed Mode Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 84-29 : SIP-MLT CODEC Information Fixed Mode Setup to set the CODEC data of the
SIP-MLT when it uses Multicast.
84
Input Data
Type
1 = Type 1 (Multicast)
2 = Type 2 (reserved)
3 = Type 3 (reserved)
4 = Type 4 (reserved)
5 = Type 5 (reserved)
Item
No.
Item
01
Audio Capability
02
Number of Audio Frames
03
RTP Filter
Input Data
1 = G.711 A-law
2 = G.711 μ-law
3 = G.729
5 = G.722
1 ~ 4 (V2.0 Changed)
1 = 10 ms (G.711 / G.722 / G.729)
2 = 20 ms (G.711 / G.722 / G.729)
3 = 30 ms (G.711 / G.722 / G.729)
4 = 40 ms (G.711 / G.722 / G.729)
5 = 50 ms (G.729) (V2.0 Deleted)
6 = 60 ms (G.729) (V2.0 Deleted)
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Default
1
2
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-455
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
84-31 : VoIPDB Echo Canceller Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 84-31 : VoIPDB Echo Canceller Setup to sets VoIPDB echo canceller value.
84
Input Data
Type
Item
No.
01
02
1 = H.323 Trunk
2 ~ 7 = Not Used
8 = SIP Trunk
9 = SIP Extension
10 = Not used
11 = DR700 Type 1
12 = DR700 Type 2
13 = DR700 Type 3
14 = DR700 Type 4
15 = DR700 Type 5
16 = Not used
Item
TDM Echo Canceller
mode
TDM Echo Canceller
NLP mode(2W)
Input Data
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
2 = Echo Path Mode
3 = Echo Path Auto Detect
Mode
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
03
TDM Echo Canceller
ComfortNoise mode
(V2.0 Added)
04
TDM Echo Canceller
NLP Threshold
TDM Echo Canceller
Tail Displacement
(V2.0 Added)
0 ~ 15
06
TDM Echo canceller
tail length (V2.0 Added)
07
TDM Echo Canceller
Default ERL Level
(V2.0 Added)
08
TDM Echo Canceller
Echo Type
1 = 32 ms
2 = 48 ms
3 = 64 ms
4 = 80 ms
5 = 96 ms
6 = 112 ms
7 = 128 ms
0 ~ 6 (- 9 db ~ 9 db)
0 = - 9 db
1 = - 6 db
2 = - 3 db
:
5 = 6 db
6 = 9 db
0 = Disable
1 = Line Echo Canceller
2 = Acoustic Echo
Canceller
05
2-456
0 ~ 89 (0 ms ~ 890 ms)
Description
Default
Related
Program
1
1
Do not change the setting
unless asked to change by
engineer. Select comfort noise
as background noise.
Effective when PRG 84-31-01 =
1
1
84-31-01
12
Do not change the setting
unless asked to change by
engineer.
Effective when PRG 84-31-01 =
1
Do not change the setting
unless asked to change by
engineer.
Select length of echo. Effective
when PRG 84-31-01 = 1
Do not change the setting
unless asked to change by
engineer.
Select length of echo. Effective
when PRG 84-31-01 = 1
0
84-31-01
7
84-31-01
5
84-31-01
1
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
ISSUE 1.1
Item
No.
SL1100
Item
09
TDM Max ERLE (V2.0
Added)
10
TDM Tx Level Control
11
TDM Tx LevelControl
Level
12
TDM Tx
AutomaticLevelControl
Level (V2.0 Added)
13
TDM Tx HLC Threshold
14
TDM Tx Gain
Compression mode
TDM Tx Gain
Compression
Threshold
15
16
TDM Rx Level Control
(V2.0 Added)
17
TDM Rx LevelControl
Level (V2.0 Added)
18
TDM Rx
AutomaticLevelControl
Level (V2.0 Added)
19
RTP Echo Canceller
mode
RTP Echo Canceller
NLP mode
20
Programming Manual
Input Data
0 ~ 6 (- 9 db ~ 9 db)
0 = - 9 db
1 = - 6 db
2 = - 3 db
:
5 = 6 db
6 = 9 db
0 = Disable
1 = TxLevelControl mode
2=
TxAutomaticLevelControl
mode
3 = HLC
0 ~ 16 (- 24 ~ 24 dB)
0 = - 24 dB
1 = - 21 dB
2 = - 18 dB
:
8 = 0 dB
:
14 = 18 dB
15 = 21 dB
16 = 24 dB
0 ~ 12 (- 42 ~ - 6 dBm)
0 = - 42 dBm
1 = - 39 dBm
:
7 = - 21 dBm
:
11 = - 9 dBm
12 = - 6 dBm
0 ~ 42 (- 42 ~ 0 dBm)
0 = - 42 dBm
1 = - 41 dBm
:
42 = 0 dBm
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = - 42 dBm
1 = - 41 dBm
:
42 = 0 dBm
0 = Disable
1 = RX Level Control
Mode
2 = RX Automatic Level
Control Flag
0 ~ 16 (- 24 ~ 24 db)
0 = - 24 db
1 = - 21 db
2 = - 18 db
:
8 = 0 db
:
14 = 18 db
15 = 21 db
16 = 24 db
0 ~ 12 (- 42 ~ - 6 dBm)
0 = - 42 dBm
1 = - 39 dBm
:
7 = - 21 dBm
:
11 = - 9 dBm
12 = - 6 dBm
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Description
Default
Do not change the setting
unless asked to change by
engineer.
Select maximum echo return
loss level.
Effective when PRG 84-31-01 =
1
2 (30 db)
Related
Program
84-31-01
3
Program
8
Do not change the setting
unless asked to change by
engineer.
Select target gain.
Effective when PRG 84-31-10 =
2
7
84
84-31-10
41
1
41
Do not change the setting
unless asked to change by
engineer.
Select receive level control
mode.
Do not change the setting
unless asked to change by
engineer.
Select receive voice level.
Effective when PRG 84-31-16 =
1
Do not change the setting
unless asked to change by
engineer.
Select target gain.
Effective when PRG 84-31-16 =
2
0
8
84-31-16
7
84-31-16
0
0
2-457
SL1100
Item
No.
Program
84
ISSUE 1.1
Item
Input Data
21
RTP Echo Canceller
ComfortNoise mode
(V2.0 Added)
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
22
RTP Echo Canceller
NLP Threshold
RTP Echo Canceller
Tail Displacement
(V2.0 Added)
0 ~ 15
24
RTP Echo Canceller
Tail Length (V2.0
Added)
25
RTP Echo Canceller
Default ERL Level
(V2.0 Added)
26
RTP Echo Canceller
Echo Type
27
RTP Max ERLE (V2.0
Added)
1 = 32 ms
2 = 48 ms
3 = 64 ms
4 = 80 ms
5 = 96 ms
6 = 112 ms
7 = 128 ms
0 ~ 6 (- 9 dB ~ + 9 dB)
0 = - 9 dB
1 = - 6 dB
2 = - 3 dB
:
5 = 6 dB
6 = 9 dB
0 = Disable
1 = Line Echo Canceller
2 = Acoustic Echo
Canceller
0 ~ 10 (24 ~ 54 dB)
0 = 24 dB
1 = 27 dB
:
9 = 51 dB
10 = 54 dB
28
RTP Tx Level Control
29
RTP Tx Level Control
Level
30
RTP Tx
AutomaticLevelControl
Level (V2.0 Added)
31
RTP Tx HLC Threshold
32
RTP Tx Gain
Compression mode
23
2-458
0 ~ 89 (0 ms ~ 890 ms)
0 = Disable
1 = TxLevelControl mode
2=
TxAutomaticLevelControl
mode
3 = HLC
0 ~ 16 (- 24 ~ 24 dB)
0 = - 24 dB
1 = - 21 dB
2 = - 18 dB
:
8 = 0 dB
:
14 = 18 dB
15 = 21 dB
16 = 24 dB
0 ~ 12 (- 42 dbm~ - 6 dbm)
0 = - 42 dBm
1 = - 39 dBm
:
7 = - 21 dBm
:
11 = - 9 dBm
12 = - 6 dBm
0 ~ 42 (- 42 dBm ~ 0 dBm)
0 = - 42 dBm
1 = - 41 dBm
:
42 = 0 dBm
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Description
Default
Do not change the setting
unless asked to change by
engineer.
Select comfort noise as
background noise on or off.
Effective when PRG 84-31-19 =
1
1
Related
Program
84-31-19
12
Do not change the setting
unless asked to change by
engineer.
Effective when PRG 84-31-19 =
1
Do not change the setting
unless asked to change by
engineer.
Select length of echo.
Effective when PRG 84-31-19 =
1
0
84-31-19
7
84-31-19
Do not change the setting
unless asked to change by
engineer.
Select length of echo.
Effective when PRG 84-31-19 =
1
5
84-31-19
0
Do not change the setting
unless asked to change by
engineer.
Select maximum echo return
loss level.
Effective when PRG 84-31-19 =
1
2
84-31-19
Type 1, 8 = 3
Type 9,
11~15 = 0
8
Do not change the setting
unless asked to change by
engineer.
Select target gain.
Effective when PRG 84-31-28 =
2
7
84-31-28
Type 1, 8 =
36
Type 9,
11~15 = 42
Type 1, 8 = 1
Type 9,
11~15 = 0
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB
ISSUE 1.1
Item
No.
SL1100
Item
33
RTP Tx Gain
Compression
Threshold
34
RTP Rx Level Control
(V2.0 Added)
35
RTP Rx LevelControl
Level (V2.0 Added)
36
RTP Rx
AutomaticLevelControl
Level (V2.0 Added)
37
TDM Echo Canceller
NLP mode (4W)
Input Data
0 ~ 42 (- 42 dBm ~ 0 dBm)
0 = - 42 dBm
1 = - 41 dBm
:
42 = 0 dBm
0 = Disable
1 = RX Level Control
Mode
2 = RX Automatic Level
Control
Flag
0 ~ 16 (- 24 dB ~ + 24 dB)
0 = - 24 dB
1 = - 21 dB
:
8 = 0 dB
:
15 = 21 dB
16 = 24 dB
0 ~ 12 (- 42 dBm ~ - 6
dBm)
0 = - 42 dBm
1 = - 39 dBm
:
7 = - 21 dBm
:
11 = - 9 dBm
12 = - 6 dBm
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
2 = Echo Path Mode
3 = Echo Path Auto Detect
Mode
Description
Default
Related
Program
Type 1, 8 =
36
Type 9,
11~15 = 42
Do not change the setting
unless asked to change by
engineer.
Select receive level control
mode.
0
Do not change the setting
unless asked to change by
engineer.
Select receive voice level.
Effective when PRG 84-31-34 =
1
8
Do not change the setting
unless asked to change by
engineer.
Select target gain.
Effective when PRG 84-31-34 =
2
7
Program
84-31-34
84
84-31-34
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-459
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-01 : Installation Date
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 90-01 : Installation Date to define the installation date of the system.
90
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
Item
Year
Month
Day
Input Data
00 ~ 99
01 ~ 12
01 ~ 31
Default
00 (No Setting)
00 (No Setting)
00 (No Setting)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-460
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-02 : Programming Password Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 90-02 : Programming Password Setup to set the system passwords. For password
entry, the system allows eight users to be defined. Each user can have a:

Unique alphanumeric name (up to 10 alphanumeric characters)

Password entry of up to eight digits (using 0 ~ 9, # and *)

Password level
The IN level password is used by the System Installer for system programming. The SA or SB level
password cannot access the IN level programs. The reverse type (white on black) just beneath the
Description heading is the program access level. You can only use the program if your access level
meets or exceeds the level the program requires. (SA level password can access to SA or SB programs,
and SB level password can access to SB programs only.)
It is NOT recommended to change these data. If you must change these Data
make sure you keep the ID/Password or you will never be able to enter the
program unless you clear all the System Data/Setting.
Input Data
User Number
Item
No.
01
02
03
1~8
Item
User Name
Password
User Level
Input Data
Default
Maximum 10 characters
Up to eight digits
0 = Prohibited User
2 = IN (Installer Level)
3 = SA (System Administrator Level 1)
4 = SB (System Administrator Level 2)
5 = UA (User Programming Administer Mode
Level 1)
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Default
User No.
User Name
Password
Level
Level Description
1
nec-i
******
1 (MF)
2
tech
12345678
2 (IN)
3
admin1
0000
3 (SA)
4
admin2
9999
4 (SB)
5
user1
1111
5 (UA)
Manufacture Level - Access to all system
program
Installer Level - Access to all IN level
programs.
System Administrator Level 1 - Restricted
Access
System Administrator Level 2 - More
Restricted Access
User Programming Administer Mode
Level 1
Conditions

More than one extension can be in the programming mode.
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-461
90
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-03 : Save Data
Level
SA
Program
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
90
Use Program 90-03 : Save Data to save the programmed data on the CF Card. This program should
be used after changing the programmed data.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Save Data
Input Data
Default
Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.)
-
Conditions


Before Uploading Customer Database please make sure you reset the system either by using
90-08 or Power down/up the system.
When installing a compact flash card onto the PZ-VM21 the system MUST be powered off. Never
install or uninstall the compact flash card while the system is under power.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-462
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-04 : Load Data
Level
SA
Program
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
Use Program 90-04 : Load Data to load the system data from the inserted CF Card into the PZ-VM21
Daughter Board installed to the system.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Load Data
Input Data
Default
Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.)
-
Conditions


After uploading the data the display will change to a next Program. Then make sure you EXIT the
Program order for upload to complete. Now some of the setting needs to have system reset order
for setting to be effective (example: IP Address, Line Key Assignment) so we Recommend to
reset the system.
When installing a compact flash card onto the PZ-VM21 the system MUST be powered off. Never
install or uninstall the compact flash card while the system is under power.
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-463
90
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-05 : Slot Control
Level
IN
Program
Description
Note: This program is available via telephone programming and WebPro not through PC Programming.
90
Use Program 90-05 : Slot Control to reset or delete (uninstall) units (slots 0 ~ 9).
Delete allows you to completely uninstall the unit. You should do this if you want to remove a unit and
plug it into a different slot and still retain the port assignments. If a different type of interface unit is being
installed in a slot previously used, the slot should be deleted (option 1) first before installing the new
interface unit.
Reset allows you to send a reset code.
Input Data
1 = Delete
2 = Reset
3 = Set Busy Out
4 = Reset Busy Out
Menu Number
Item No.
01
Item
Slot Control
Input Data
Slot Number 0 ~ 9
Conditions


When you delete or reset a unit, you must first remove it from its slot then run Program 90-05.
When reusing the slot for another unit, you must plug the unit in or reset the system before the
system can use the slot again.
When you delete or reset a unit, all related programming in Program 10-03-01 is set back to
default.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-464
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-06 : Trunk Control
Level
SA
Program
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
Use Program 90-06 : Trunk Control for trunk maintenance. Busy Out lets you block a unit from
placing outgoing calls (just like placing the unit switch down). Once busied out, none of the ports on the
unit can be used for new calls. Existing calls, however, are not torn down.
Input Data
0 = Set Busy Out
1 = Reset Busy Out (idle)
Menu Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Trunk Control
Input Data
Trunk Port Number :
001 ~ 096
Default
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-465
90
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-07 : Station Control
Level
SA
Program
Description
Note: This program is available via telephone programming and WebPro not through PC Programming.
90
Use Program 90-07 : Station Control for extension maintenance.
Input Data
1 = Hardware Reset
2 = Software Reset
Menu Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Extension Control
Input Data
Extension Number (up to eight digits)
Default
-
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-466
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-08 : System Reset
Level
IN
Program
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
90
Use Program 90-08 : System Reset to perform a system reset.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
System Reset
Input Data
Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold key only to
cancel.)
Default
-
Conditions

Some of changes made to a program may need to reset the system order for the change to be
effective.
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-467
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-09 : Automatic System Reset Time Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 90-09 : Automatic System Reset Time Setup to define the time for the system to
automatically reset.
90
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
Item
Input Data
Default
Month
00 ~ 12
00
Day
If the Month is set to 00 and Day is set, the
system is automatically reset every month on the
predefined day.
00 ~ 31
00
Hour
Minute
If the Day is set to 00 and the Time (Hour and
Minute) is set, the system automatically resets every
day at the predefined time.
00 ~ 23
00 ~ 59
00
00
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-468
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-10 : System Alarm Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 90-10 : System Alarm Setup to assign a status to system alarms. You can designate an
alarm as Major or Minor. This program also assigns whether or not the alarm information is reported to
the pre-defined destination.
Input Data
Alarm Number
Item No.
90
001 ~ 100
Item
01
Alarm Type
02
Report
Input Data
0 = Not Set
1 = Major Alarm
2 = Minor Alarm
0 = Not Report (No autodial)
1 = Report (autodial)
Table 2-17 Description of Alarm
Alarm
No.
Type
Report
1
2
0
PKG
Initialize
Error.
2
2
0
PKG
Mounting
Error
Programming Manual
Name
Content of
Alarm
Alarm
Status
Cause
Action
Recovery
1.The PKG
failed to
initialize.
2. The PKG did
not start
normally.
1. PKG not inserted
firmly.
2. PKG was
removed, but not
reinserted firmly.
3. Old PKG data still
reported due to no
initialization.
During
initialization,
the PKG is
recognized.
ERR
REC
The unit did not
step on a regular
procedure and it
was pulled out.
Or, it is not
normally
inserted.
1. The package is
not completely
inserted.
2. The package is
out of order.
1. Insert PKG
firmly.
2. Insert PKG
firmly.
3. Delete slot
information in
Prgram 90-05 and
insert the PKG
again.
1. Please insert
the package
firmly.
2. Please try
again after
initializing the
system data once
when LED
doesn’t blink
normally.
3. Exchange
packages.
When unit is
reconfirmed,
the error is
recovered.
ERR
REC
2-469
Note
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Alarm
No.
Type
Report
Name
3
2
0
Connecti
on fault
between
CPU and
other
PKGs.
4
2
0
PKG S/W
Downloa
d Error
Program
Content of
Alarm
Action
Recovery
The error
occurred when
communicating
with the
package.
When the
package is
broken, it
recognizes it as
a
communication
fault.
1. The unit is not
completely inserted.
2. The power-supply
voltage of the
system is outside
ratings.
3. The equipment
that generates the
noise in the same
power supply
system as the power
supply origin of the
system is
connected, and it
malfunctions
because of the
power supply noise.
4. The equipment to
which it is adjacent
to of a main device,
and has put out the
radiation noise
exists, and it
malfunctions
because of the
radiation noise.
5. The chassis is not
properly grounded.
When unit is
confirmed,
the error is
recovered.
ERR
REC
The unit
program could
not be
downloaded
normally.
The unit could
not able to be
started normally.
1. The package
software is not
stored in the
downloaded USB
memory.
2. The stored
package software is
illegal. Package
information that was
installed before
remains.
1. Please insert
the unit firmly.
2. The
power-supply
voltage must use
another power
supply when is in
the range of
ratings or
measuring with
the voltmeter, and
deviating from the
rated range.
3. Please use the
power supply
besides the
equipment with
the possibility of
the noise source.
4. Please
separate as much
as possible and
use a main device
from the
equipment by
which you seem
may generate the
radiation noise.
5. Please ground
the chassis
correctly.
1. Delete slot
information that
corresponds by
Program
90-05-01 to
delete package
information that
was installed
before.
2. There is a
possibility that the
unit program is
broken though an
external factor of
the noise etc. is
thought.
3. Please load
into the USB
memory and try
again when you
back up the unit
program.
4. Please Check
with maker on
uncertain points.
Please
exchange
units,
though it is
likely to
restore by
mounting
the unit
again.
When the
unit
program is
normally
downloaded
, the error is
recovered.
ERR
REC
90
2-470
Alarm
Status
Cause
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
Note
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Alarm
No.
Type
Report
Name
6
0
0
Blocking
Content of
Alarm
The link of
terminals
connected with
the ESI package
came off.
Action
Recovery
1. Terminal
Breakdown.
2. Faulty wiring and
wiring termination.
3. External noise.
4. ESI package
Breakdown.
Confirm the
terminal
connected with
same ESI. If they
work normally,
confirm the
breakdown or the
wiring for the
terminal.
Exchange the
terminal that
doesn’t work and
the working
terminal, and
confirm it’s
working. An
external factor of
the noise etc. is
thought.
Please reconfirm
wiring and the
installation, etc.
Please inquire of
the manufacturer
when the problem
occurs after it
confirms it.
Check the battery
connector. If it is
connected
correctly, replace
the battery.
1. Confirm the
data of Program
10-03.
2. Confirm wiring
and the
installation of
DSU.
3. Check with the
manufacturer if
the problem
occurs again.
1. Confirm the
CTI server, wiring,
and the
connection.
2. Check the
manufacturer if
the problem
occurs again.
Confirm the
operation of LAN
connector, LAN
cable, and HUB
again.
The error is
recovered
when
connecting
or
exchanging
it.
8
1
0
RAM
Backup
Battery
Error
10
0
0
ISDN
Link
Error
11
0
0
CTI Link
Error
The link with the
CTI server came
off.
1. LAN cable
defective.
2. Connected HUB
broken.
3. The CTI server
doesn’t start
normally.
14
0
0
LAN Link
Error
The link with
LAN on CPU
came off.
1. LAN cable
defective.
2. Connected HUB
broken.
3. Defective CPU.
17
1
0
Denial of
service
The system
received illegal
packet.
Service outage (Dos
attack)
18
1
0
Connecti
on Error
Digital Station
Wiring Error
The wiring
connection between
the Multiline terminal
and the system has
an issue.
Programming Manual
RAM backup
battery on the
CPU unit is
unplugged or
defective.
Layer1 link of
ISDN lines came
off.
Cause
1. Check Connection
between main
device and ISDN
line.
2. DSU Breakdown.
3. The setting of
Program 10-03 does
not correspond to an
actual line.
Confirm whether
to find
abnormality on
the net side.
Check all wiring in
between the
Multiline terminal
and the digital
station card.
Alarm
Status
Note
ERR
REC
Program
90
The error is
recovered
once the
battery is
replaced.
When the
connection
returns
normally,
the error is
recovered.
ERR
REC
When the
connection
returns
normally,
the error is
recovered.
ERR
REC
When the
connection
returns
normally,
the error is
recovered.
ERR
REC
ERR
REC
WAR
MAJ
2-471
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Alarm
No.
Type
Report
Name
30
2
0
SMDR
Buffer full
31
1
0
32
1
0
50
1
0
51
0
0
Security
Sensor
detected
Automati
c
Transmis
sion from
Remote
Surveilla
nce
System
Start
Notificati
on
System
Data
change
54
2
0
License
Manage
ment
Table Full
55
2
0
Regular
maintena
nce
exchang
e
notificatio
n.
57
2
0
IP
Collision
error
Program
90
2-472
Content of
Alarm
Cause
Action
Recovery
The temporary
buffer for SMDR
in main device
overflowed, and
a part of output
SMDR data
disappeared
because it could
not output
SMDR data.
1. Problem of wiring
to connect main
device with PC.
2. PC Problem.
1. Confirm
whether there is
problem in wiring
to connect a main
device with PC.
2. Execute the
reactivation of
PC.
When the
output is
restarted,
the error is
recovered.
However,
the SMDR
data after
the error
occurs is not
recorded.
Sensor detected
abnormality.
Sensor detected
abnormality.
Remote watch
function did auto
dialing.
Remote watch
function did auto
dialing.
Especially,
anything need not
be done.
Especially,
anything need not
be done.
The system
started.
The system was
started.
No action
needed.
CPU Upgrade is
performed or
Programming
change is made.
A new TCP/IP
terminal and the
DSP board were
not able to be
added to the
application
license
management
table.
・The license
management
table is
registering full.
The regular
maintenance
exchange day
has passed.
Check the IP
Address
collision (CPU,
VOIPDB,
Program
84-26-01 GW : 1
~ 8).
Alarm
Status
ERR
REC
INF
INF
No action
needed.
Maximum 512
license information
on the TCP/IP
terminal is
registered, and a
new terminal cannot
be registered.
・The regular
maintenance
exchange day that
had been set with
Program 90-51
exceeded it.
Collision IP Address
in the network.
Please delete
license
information on an
unnecessary
TCP/IP terminal
with Program
90-44.
Please do the
maintenance
exchanges of
pertinent parts,
and set the next
regular
maintenance
exchange day
with Program
90-51.
Check the IP
Address in the
network.
WAR
The excess
on the
regular
maintenanc
e exchange
day is
canceled by
changing
Program
90-51 or
when the
function is
invalidated,
the error is
recovered.
Recover the
IP Address
collision.
ERR
REC
WAR
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
Note
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Alarm
No.
Type
Report
Name
60
2
0
SIP
Registrati
on Error
Notificati
on.
61
0
0
SIP
extensio
n trouble
informati
on.
63
0
0
SIP-MLT
trouble
informati
on.
64
1
0
VoIPDB
LAN Link
Error.
Content of
Alarm
Cause
Action
Recovery
1. The
registration of
the SIP trunk to
the SIP server
failed.
2. The
registration of
the SIP trunk to
the SIP server
failed in the
authentication.
3. There is no
response from
the SIP server to
the SIP
registration
request.
1. The setting of the
system data is
wrong.
2. The setting of the
router is wrong.
3. It is an error to the
link of LAN.
4. Net side trouble.
The error is
recovered
when
normally
connecting
it.
1.Failed
registration of
the SIP
extension
terminal.
2.The SIP
extension
terminal was not
acquired:
3.At Regist of
the SIP
extension
terminal to
SL1100.
1. The registered
port is used by other
extension.
2. The license is
insufficient.
3. DSP of VoIPDB
not acquired.
1. Confirm the
following system
data setting –
Programs 10-12,
10-28, 10-29,
10-30, and 10-36.
2. Confirm the
setting of routers.
3. Confirm
whether
abnormality
occurs on the net
side.
4. Confirm the
authentication
system data
setting.
5. Confirm wiring
and the system
data setting.
Please inquire on
uncertain points
of the maker.
1. Confirm wiring
and the system
data setting.
2. Confirm
whether each
equipment such
as access points
works normally.
4.When you
cannot acquire
the DSP
resource when
it sent.
1. The trouble
occurred by the
SIP-MLT
relation.
2. The DSP
resource could
not be acquired
at
incoming/outgoi
ng.
3. The
negotiation with
VoIPDB failed.
The link of LAN
of VoIPDB came
off.
1. The packet loss
occurred on the
network or the wiring
cutting occurred.
2. DSP of VoIPDB
not acquired.
Confirm whether
each equipment
such as wirings
and HUB is
normal.
1.
1. Confirm LAN
connector and
wiring.
2. Check with
maker on
uncertain points.
1. Possibility of
defective
hardware.
2. Check with
maker on
uncertain points.
2.
3.
65
0
0
Programming Manual
VOIPDB
trouble
informati
on.
When DSP of
VoIPDB notifies
Error.
LAN cable is
defective.
Connected
HUB broken.
Defect CPU.
VoIPDB. Defective.
Alarm
Status
Note
ERR
REC
Program
90
ERR
REC
WAR
When the
connection
returns
normally,
the error is
recovered.
ERR
REC
WAR
2-473
SL1100
Program
90
ISSUE 1.1
Alarm
No.
Type
Report
Name
Content of
Alarm
66
2
0
SIP
extensio
n License
Error.
More than the
number of
licenses to
which the SIP
extension
terminal was
turned on at
REGISTER.
67
0
0
SIP
illegal
Packet
received
The system
received illegal
packet.
A client or network
was illegal state.
68
2
0
VoIPDB
DSP All
Busy
Alarm
1. Provides alert
when all DSP
resources are
being used.
2. Used to
troubleshoot or
alerting when
upgrade is
needed.
Not enough DSP
resources in system.
Cause
Action
Wrong number of
licenses.
1. Confirm the
number of
licenses for SIP
extension
terminals.
2. Check with
maker on
uncertain points.
Check with maker
on uncertain
point, when
happening
frequently when
operating it.
Install VMDB with
more DSP
resources.
Recovery
When the
number of
registration
of SIP
extension
terminals
falls below
the number
of licenses.
Alarm
Status
WAR
INF
Conditions



The entire terminal that has an Alarm Display setting can be set at Program 90-50-01.
System Alarm Type is shown despite the setting done at 90-10-01. If multiple Alarm Display
Setting is set, only one highest priority alarm will be shown on a LCD Display.
The priority level (highest -> lowest) : Alarm 55 > Alarm 7 > Alarm 5 > Alarm 30 > Alarm 8 > Alarm
52> Alarm 29 > Free Demo License Period.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-474
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
Note
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-11 : System Alarm Report
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 90-11 : System Alarm Report to define the details of the system alarm report.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
02
Report Method
0 = No Report
1 = E-mail Address
06
SMTP Host
Name
Up to 255 Characters
07
SMTP Host Port
Number
0 ~ 65535
08
To E-mail
Address
Up to 255 Characters
09
Reply Address
Up to 255 Characters
10
From Address
Up to 255 Characters
11
DNS Primary
Address
DNS Secondary
Address
Customer Name
0.0.0.0 ~
255.255.255.255
0.0.0.0 ~
255.255.255.255
Up to 255 Characters
14
Change SMTP
Client (V2.0
Added)
0 = No
1 = Yes
15
DIMLOG
Notification
(V2.0 Added)
0 = No
1 = Yes
12
13
Description
Default
When alarm reports are e-mailed,
set this option to 1. E-mail address
set in 90-11-08.
When alarm reports are e-mailed,
set the SMTP name (ex :
smtp.yourisp.com). Contact your
ISP (internet service provider) for
the correct entry if needed.
When alarm reports are e-mailed,
set the SMTP host port number.
Contact your ISP (internet service
provider) for the correct entry if
needed.
When alarm reports are e-mailed,
set this e-mail address to which the
report should be sent.
When alarm reports are e-mailed,
set the e-mail address where replies
should be e-mailed.
When alarm reports are e-mailed,
set this e-mail address for the
station sending the report.
When alarm reports are e-mailed,
set the DNS primary address.
When alarm reports are e-mailed,
set the DNS secondary address.
When alarm reports are e-mailed,
enter a name to identify the
particular system.
In case of YES uses a PRG47-18
SMTP client.( MEMDB/CF mounting
is required.)
To Address (PRG 90-11-08), CC
Mail Address (PRG 90-25-01) Up to
48 characters.
In case of No uses a PRG 90-11
SMTP client.
PRG 90-11-14=YES (PRG 47-18
SMTP Client uses) and CF mount
are necessary.
In the case of System Fault,
Dimlast.gz and Dimdump.gz are
notified.
0
Related
Program
No Setting
25
No Setting
No Setting
No Setting
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
No Setting
0
90-11-08
90-25-01
47-18
90-11
0
90-11-14
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-475
90
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-12 : System Alarm Output
Level
IN
Program
90
Description
Use Program 90-12 : System Alarm Output to set the options for the alarm report. This program has
six separate menu options. Define the output port to be used as the output for system alarm report and
set the system alarm options. The system can have up to 50 reports.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Output Port Type
Input Data
0 = No setting
5 = Compact Flash
Description
Default
Indicate the type of connection used for the
System Alarms.
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-476
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-13 : System Information Output
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 90-13 : System Information Output to define the output port to be used as the system
information output.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
Output Port Type
05
Output Command
Input Data
0 = No setting
5 = Compact Flash
Dial 1 + press Hold
(Press Hold only to
cancel.)
Description
Indicate the type of connection used to
print the system information.
Default
0
-
This program only be able to access by
Telephone programming.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-477
90
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-16 : Main Software Information
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 90-16 : Main Software Information to display the main software information on the
CPU.
90
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
Version Number
01.00 ~ 99.99
02
Software Release Date
May 22 2002 17 : 53 : 46
Default
ASCII Code
(5 Bytes)
ASCII Code
(20 Bytes)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-478
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-17 : Firmware Information
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 90-17 : Firmware Information to display the firmware versions of the various system
units.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
DSP Firmware Version No.
Input Data
00.00.00.00 ~ 15.15.15.15
Default
BCD Code (2 Byte)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-479
90
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-19 : Dial Block Release
Level
SA
Program
Description
Note: This program is available via telephone programming and WebPro not through PC Programming.
90
When the extension number is entered in Program 90-19 : Dial Block Release, the extension is
released from the Dial Block restriction.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Delete IP Telephone
Up to eight digits
Input Data
[Release ?] : Dial 1 +
press Hold
(Press Hold only to
cancel.)
Description
Default
This assignment removes the station
number association with the MAC address
of the IP station.
-
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Code Restriction/Toll Restriction
2-480
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-20 : Traffic Report Data Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 90-20 : Traffic Report Data Setup to define the details of the traffic report.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
Call Traffic Output
03
All Line Busy Output
04
DTMF Receiver Busy Output
05
Dial Tone Detector Busy Output
06
Caller ID Receiver Busy Output
07
Voice Mail Channel All Busy
Output
09
Attendant Channel All Busy Output
11
Security Sensor Dial Record
Record Security sensor dialing and
Remote Inspection dialing to security
report
Input Data
Default
0 = Not Measured
1 = Measure
0 = Not Detected
1 ~ 256
(Report when the data reaches the defined value)
0 = Not Detected
1 ~ 256
(Report when the data reaches the defined value)
0 = Not Detected
1 ~ 256
(Report when the data reaches the defined value)
0 = Not Detected
1 ~ 256
(Report when the data reaches the defined value)
0 = Not Detected
1 ~ 256
(Report when the data reaches the defined value)
0 = Not Detected
1 ~ 256
(Report when the data reaches the defined value)
0 = Not Recorded
1 = Recorded
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Traffic Reports
Programming Manual
2-481
90
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-21 : Traffic Report Output
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 90-21 : Traffic Report Output to define the output port to be used as the traffic report
output.
90
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Output Port Type
Input Data
0 = No setting
3 = LAN
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Traffic Reports
2-482
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-23 : Deleting Registration of IP Telephones
Level
IN
Program
Description
Note: This program is available via telephone programming and WebPro not through PC Programming.
Use Program 90-23 : Deleting Registration of IP Telephones to delete the registered IP telephone
from the system.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Delete IP Telephone
Up to eight digits
Input Data
[Delete?] : Dial 1 +
press Hold
(Press Hold only to
cancel.)
Description
Default
This assignment removes the station
number association with the MAC address
of the IP station.
-
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-483
90
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-24 : System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 90-24 : System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup to set the date and time for the
alarm report to print.
90
Input Data
Notification Number
Item
No.
01
02
03
04
Item
Month
Day
Hour
Minute
1 ~ 12
Input Data
00 ~ 12 (0 = Not Set)
00 ~ 31 (0 = Not Set)
00 ~ 23
00 ~ 59
Default
00
00
00
00
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-484
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-25 : System Alarm Report CC Mail Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 90-25 : System Alarm Report CC Mail Setup to define the mail address to receive the
system alarm report CC Mail setup.
90
Input Data
CC Number
Item
No.
01
1~5
Item
CC Mail Address
Input Data
Up to 255 Characters
Default
No setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-485
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-26 : Program Access Level Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 90-26 : Program Access Level Setup to define the password access level required to
change a system program.
90
Input Data
Program Numbers
Item
No.
01
Item
Maintenance Level
1001 ~ 9903
Input Data
Level 1 = MF Level
Level 2 = IN Level
Level 3 = SA Level
Level 4 = SB Level
Default
Refer to the Level
indication for each
individual program
(located in the upper
left corner at the
beginning of each
program).
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-486
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-28 : User Programming Password Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 90-28 : User Programming Password Setup to set the password used to enter the
user programming mode.
90
Input Data
Extension Numbers
Item
No.
01
Maximum eight digits
Item
Password
Input Data
Fixed four digits
Default
1111
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-487
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-31 : DIM Access over Ethernet
Level
IN
Program
90
Description
Use Program 90-31 : DIM Access over Ethernet to enable DIM (Diagnostic Information Maintenance)
access over the LAN, and to define the user name and password. DIM is a maintenance tool used by
engineering to extract trace level information.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
Access Enabling
02
Username
03
Password
Input Data
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
20 characters
(alphanumeric)
20 characters
(alphanumeric)
Default
0 (Disable)
SL1100
12345678
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-488
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-33 : Preselected Data Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
90
Use 90-33 : Preselected Data Setup to setup the system to preselected setting.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
02
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
Item
China
Chile
Taiwan
Korea
Hong Kong
Brazil
Malaysia
Thailand
India
Input Data
Default
Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.)
Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.)
Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.)
Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.)
Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.)
Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.)
Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.)
Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.)
Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.)
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Refer below
Default
China
Program No.
Name
10-02-01
Country Code
14-02-09
Busy Tone Detection
14-02-18
Busy Tone Detection on talking
15-03-15
Disconnect without dial after hooking hold
20-01-09
20-02-12
Camp-on cancel time
Mode setting for incoming call from extension
20-17-01
20-31-02
20-31-07
20-31-08
20-31-19
21-03-01
Operator’s Extension number
Callback / Trunk Queuing Cancel Time
Ring No Answer Alarm Time
DIL/Incoming Ring Group No Answer Time
DISA Conversation Warning Tone Timer
Trunk Group Routing for Trunks
22-01-03
22-01-04
22-01-08
22-08-01
Incoming ring no answer alarm start Timer
Normal DIL incoming no answer Timer
DID (DDI) Pilot Call No answer timer
Second IRG Setup for unanswered
25-03-01
DUD/DISA Transfer Ring Group at Wrong dialing
25-04-01
DUD/DISA Transfer Ring Group at No
answer/Busy
DISA Conversation Warning Tone Timer
LCR Mode Option
DSS Console Extension Assignment
ON min. time (Busy Tone for Trunk)
ON max. time (Busy Tone for Trunk)
OFF min. time (Busy Tone for Trunk)
OFF max. time (Busy Tone for Trunk)
Frequency No 1 (Busy Tone for Trunk)
Twit Level-Rcv1/Rcv2/Rcv3
25-07-07
26-01-04
30-02-01
80-04-06
80-04-07
80-04-08
80-04-09
80-04-12
80-04-14
Programming Manual
Default
Note
86
(For China)
1
(All trunks : On)
1
(All trunks : On)
1
(All stations = Disconnect)
30
1
(Signaling call)
101 (Operator 1 = 101)
30
30
30
180
1
(All trunks : All modes : Group1)
30
30
30
1
(All trunks : All modes : IRG1)
1
(All trunks : All modes : IRG1)
1
(All trunks : All modes : IRG1)
180
1
101 (Console No.1 = 101)
9
12
9
12
2
1
2-489
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program No.
80-05-01
80-07
Program
81-01-09
Call Progress Tone Detector Frequency Setup
(Table2)
Time ringing signal stop detection time
82-04-08
Maximum hook flash time
15-03-09
15-03-14
40-07
47-02-16
Caller ID Function
Forwarded Caller ID display mode
Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS
Voice Prompt Language (All Station Mailbox
Number)
Voice Prompt Language (All Group Mailbox
Number)
Prompt Language (All Routing Mailbox Number)
Voice Prompt Language (All Trunk port Number)
47-06-14
90
Name
Date Format
47-07-03
47-10-03
Default
Note
1
(yy/mm/dd)
45
70
(4.5 s)
132
(660 ms)
1
1
15
15
15
15
15
Chile
Program No.
Name
10-01-01
10-01-02
10-01-03
10-01-04
10-01-05
10-01-06
10-01-07
80-01-02
- Year
- Month
- Day
- Week (1 : SUN)
- Hour
- Minute
- Second
Basic Tone No
12-01-02
20-02-07
20-02-09
20-02-12
20-07-11
Automatic night mode switch
Display mode of Date and Time
Disconnect Supervision
Mode setting for incoming call from extension
Force Trunk disconnection (Analog trunk only)
20-07-12
Trunk port disable
20-08-08
Dial Block
20-09-04
Notification for Incoming Call List existence
20-11-12
External Call Forward (Off-Premise)
20-13-01
Long conversation alarm
20-13-15
Break-In
20-13-16
Broken-in
20-13-20
Account Code/Toll Restriction Operator Alert
20-13-26
Group listening service
20-13-31
Connected Line identification (COLP)
21-01-06
21-08-01
21-08-02
21-08-03
24-02-01
24-02-03
25-07-07
25-07-08
40-10-01
14-01-06
Dial pause at first digit
Time of Repeat Dial
Interval of Repeat Dial
Repeat Dial Calling Timer
Transfer to busy extension
No answer time for call forward
DISA Conversation Warning Tone Time
DISA Conversation Disconnect Timer
VRS Fixed Message
SMDR print-out
14-01-13
Trunk to Trunk transfer
14-02-09
Busy Tone Detection
11-12-16
Trunk access via Networking
2-490
Default
5
7
10
4
18
30
0
1
(Svc Tone 2 Unit 1)
0
8
1
1
1
(Class 1 ~ 15)
1
(Class 1 ~ 15)
1
(Class 1 ~ 15)
0
(Class 1 ~ 15)
1
(Class 1 ~ 15)
0
(Class 1 ~ 15)
0
(Class 1 ~ 15)
0
(Class 1 ~ 15)
0
(Class 1 ~ 15)
1
(Class 1 ~ 15)
1
(Class 1 ~ 15)
1
5
15
10
1
30
0
0
0
1
(All Trunk)
1
(All Trunk)
1
(All Trunk)
715
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program No.
11-12-29
20-17-01
30-02-01
10-02-01
15-02-01
40-07-01
47-02-16
47-06-14
47-07-03
47-10-03
Name
Direct extension call pickup
Operator’s Extension number
DSS Console Extension Assignment
Country Code
Display Language Selection
Voice Prompt Language Assignment for System
based
Voice Prompt Language
Voice Prompt Language
Prompt Language
Voice Prompt Language
Default
866
101 (Operator 1 = 101)
101 (DSS Console No.1 = 101)
56
12
7
7
7
7
7
Program
Taiwan
Program No.
Name
15-01-01
Extension Name
20-02-12
21-04-01
Forced Intercom Ringing
Toll Restriction Class for Extensions
21-05-07
Permit code table
21-05-08
Restriction table
21-06-06
Permit code table
21-06-07
Restriction table
31-02-01
Internal Paging Group Assignment
31-02-02
Internal Paging Group Assignment
14-02-10
Caller ID
14-02-16
Caller ID signal
22-04-01
11-09-01
11-01-01
Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment
Trunk Access Code
System Numbering
10-20-01
35-01-01
LAN Setup for External Equipment (SMDR)
SMDR-Output Port Type
35-01-04
SMDR-Omit Digits
35-02-09
SMDR-Extension Number or Name
35-02-14
SMDR-Date
20-02-07
15-03-03
Time and Date Display Mode
Terminal Type
21-01-06
20-13-01
Dial pause at first digit
Long Conversation Alarm
20-13-22
Called Party Status
20-09-04
Notification for Incoming Call List existence
14-02-18
Busy tone detection on talking
14-02-19
Busy tone detection frequency
14-02-20
Busy tone detection interval
Programming Manual
Default
Note
(Delete all station name)
1
1
(Class 1, EXT 200 ~ 295, mode 1 ~ 4)
Class 1 set 1
Class 2 set 2
Class 3 set 3
Class 4 set 4
Class 1 set 1
Class 2 set 2
Class 3 set 3
Class 4 set 4
PmitTBL 1 = None
PmitTBL 2 = None
PmitTBL 3 = 080, 081
PmitTBL 4 = 110, 119
TollRes 1 = 0204
TollRes 2 = 00, 01, 0204, 100, 108
TollRes 3 = 0, 100, 18, 108
TollRes 4 = @
1
(All stations)
1
(All stations)
1
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
1
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
Set to 101-108 (IRG1)
0
0 for Type 3 Trunk access code
9 for Type 5 operator
DEVICE 5 set to 1
1
(Port 1 only)
0
(Port 1 only)
1
(Port 1 only)
1
(Port 1 only)
5
1
(All stations)
1
0
(Class 1 only)
1
(Class 1 only)
0
(Class 1 only)
1
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
3
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
10
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
2-491
90
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program No.
Program
90
Name
80-04-06
80-04-08
14-02-09
80-04-12
ON Minimum RCV2 time
OFF Minimum RCV2 time
Busy tone detection
TONE RCV 2 frequency 1
80-04-13
TONE RCV 2 frequency 2
80-07-01
Call progress TONE detector frequency
14-02-04
Flash For Timed Flash or Disconnect
81-01-14
81-01-15
20-19-02
20-07-01
Flash (Hooking 1)
Flash (Hooking 2)
Caller ID Wait Timer
Manual Night Service Enabled
25-03-01
DID/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect
Dialing
DID/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No
Answer/Busy
DID/DISA No Answer Time
DID/DISA Answer Delay Timer
Door Box Ring Assignment
25-04-01
25-07-02
25-07-11
32-02-01
40-07-01
81-07-01
25-07-03
20-02-11
24-02-03
14-02-02
20-07-11
20-03-04
25-02-01
Voice Prompt Language Assignment for Voice
Mail
CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Ports
Disconnect after DID/DISA re-transfer to IRG
Default Setting of Microphone of Key Telephone
Delayed Call Forwarding Time
Ring Detect Type This option to sets Extended
Ring Detect or Immediate Ring Detect for the
trunk
Forced Trunk Disconnect (analog trunk only)
Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use
Forced Trunk Disconnect
Trunk Call Dial Sending Time by SLT
DID/DISA Talkie to assign the VRS message
number
25-05-01
VRS/DISA Error Message Assignment
40-10-08
40-10-09
25-06-02
14-01-13
Call Attendant Message - when Busy
Call Attendant Message - when No Answer
DID/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup
Loop Disconnect Supervision
21-03-01
Trunk Group Routing for Trunks
20-11-12
Call Forwarding Off-Premise
25-07-07
12-02-01
DISA Conversation Warning Tone Time
Automatic night service Patterns
12-02-01
Automatic night service Patterns
12-02-01
Automatic night service Patterns
12-02-01
Automatic night service Patterns
10-02-01
80-01-01
Country Code
Repeat count
Default
Note
7
7
1
1
(Table 1)
2
(Table 2)
TABLE 1 set to 48
TABLE 2 set to 62
0
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
20
30
2
1
(Class 1 only)
1
(Trunks 1 ~ 27 Mode 1)
1
(Trunks 1 ~ 27 Mode 1)
16
3
Set to EXT.101-108; DOOR 1; Mode
1-2
9
0
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
180
0
16
1
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
1
(Class 1 only)
1
Trunks 1 ~ 27 Talkie = 1
Mode 1 data = 1 (Day Mode)
Mode 2 data = 2 (Night Mode)
4
(Trunks 1 ~ 27 Mode 1, 2)
8
9
MSG (1, 2, 4, 8, 9) Recv. 9 data=101
1
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
1
(Trunks 1 ~ 27 Mode 1, 2)
1
(Class 1 only)
0
01 ~ 02 set to 08 : 30 Mode Group 1
only
01 ~ 01 set to 08 : 30 Mode Group 1
only
01 ~ 03 set to 17 : 30 Mode Group 1
only
01 ~ 02 set to 17 : 30 Mode Group 1
only
886
6
Korea
Program No.
10-02-01
11-01-01
11-09-02
11-10-20
11-12-27
2-492
Name
Country Code
Dial * Digit
2nd TRK Access
Ope VRS Msg
Call Pickup
Default
Note
82
1
6
#716
*
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program No.
Name
12-02-01
Automatic night service Patterns ( Start of time )
12-02-02
Automatic night service Patterns ( End of time )
12-02-03
Automatic night service Patterns ( Mode No. )
12-03-01
Night mode week setting
14-01-13
14-02-04
14-02-05
14-02-09
14-02-10
14-02-18
15-01-01
15-03-09
15-03-15
16-01-03
16-01-04
16-01-08
20-02-04
20-02-11
20-02-12
20-03-03
20-03-04
20-03-07
20-07-01
20-08-09
20-08-20
20-13-01
20-13-22
20-17-01
20-19-02
21-01-06
21-01-09
21-04-01
21-05-07
TRK-TRK Transfer
Flash for timed Flash or Disconnect
DTD-Manual Dl
Busy Tone Detection
Caller ID
Busy Tone Detection Talking
Extension Name
Extension Display
Hook disconnect mode
Auto Step Call
Hunting Mode
Max Queue No
Transfer Retrieve
Microphone of Key telephone
ICM Call Type
SLT DTMF Dial
Dial Start
Forced Dial
Manual night Service Enabled
Hotline
Hot key Pad
Long Conversation Alarm
Call Party Status
Attendant
Caller ID wait timer
1st Digit P
Hotline Start
T/R Class for Extension
Permit code table
21-06-06
Permit code table
21-05-08
Restriction Table
21-15-01
22-01-11
22-14-01
22-14-03
22-14-05
22-14-07
22-15-01
22-15-03
22-15-05
22-15-07
24-02-03
24-02-04
25-01-02
25-07-01
2nd TRK Ace Route TBL
Msg Interval
Message1 Start Time
MSG1 Count
MSG2 Count
Disconnect Time
Message1 Start Time
MSG1 Count
MSG2 Count
Disconnect Time
CFW not answer Time
TRF Recall time
without Password
VRS Dial Time
Programming Manual
Default
Note
ModeGrp 1-4, Time Pattern 01, Set
Time 01 = 00:00
ModeGrp 1-4, Time Pattern 01, Set
Time 02 = 09:00
ModeGrp 1-4, Time Pattern 01, Set
Time 03 = 18:00
ModeGrp 1-4, Time Pattern 01, Set
Time 01 = 09:00
ModeGrp 1-4, Time Pattern 01, Set
Time 02 = 18:00
ModeGrp 1-4, Time Pattern 01, Set
Time 03 = 00:00
ModeGrp 1-4, Time Pattern 01, Set
Time 01 = Mode3
ModeGrp 1-4, Time Pattern 01, Set
Time 02 = Mode1
ModeGrp 1-4, Time Pattern 01, Set
Time 03 = Mode2
sun = Pttrn 3, sat = Pttrn 2
Mode Group 1-4
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
32
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
101
0
1
3
1
Class 1 set 1
Class 2 set 2
Class 3 set 3
Class 4 set 4
PmitTBL 1 = None
PmitTBL 2 = 119, 112, 113, 080
Class 1 set 1
Class 2 set 2
Class 3 set 3
Class 4 set 4
2
10
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
15
15
0
5
Program
90
2-493
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program No.
Program
90
Name
25-07-02
25-07-03
31-02-01
31-02-02
32-01-02
35-01-04
35-02-09
35-02-14
80-04-06
80-04-08
80-04-12
80-04-13
80-06-01
80-07-01
81-01-09
81-01-14
81-01-15
81-07-01
DISA No Answer Time
DISA Disconnect Retransfer to IRG
Internal Paging Group
Internal all Paging Group
Door Box Lock Cancel
SMDR-Omit Digits
SMDR-Extension Number or Name
SMDR-Date
ON Minimum RCV2 Time
OFF Minimum RCV2 Time
TONE RCV 2 Frequency 1
TONE RCV 2 Frequency 2
Impedance set
Busy Tone Frequency
Signal Stop Dtct
Flash (Hooking 1)
Flash (Hooking 2)
CODEC Filter Setup for analog Trunk Ports
82-04-04
82-04-07
82-04-08
Max. Break TM
Min. Flash TM
Max. Flash TM
Default
Note
60
30
1
1
1
0
1
1
7
7
2
3
0
table 2 ~ 48, table 3 ~ 62
80
20
30
0
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
14
17
120
Hong Kong
Program No.
Name
14-01-13
Loop Disconnect Supervision
14-02-02
Ring Detect Type
14-02-04
Flash for Timed Flash or Disconnect
14-02-09
Busy Tone Detection
14-02-10
Caller-ID
14-02-18
Busy Tone Detection on Talking
14-02-19
Busy Tone Detention Frequency
14-02-20
Busy Tone Detention Interval
20-02-12
20-03-03
20-03-04
20-07-01
Forced Intercom Ringing
SLT DTMF Dial
Trunk Call Dial Sending Time by SLT
Manual Night Service Enabled
20-13-01
Long Conversation Alarm
20-13-22
Called Party Status
20-17-01
20-19-02
21-01-06
22-01-11
24-02-03
31-02-01
Operator Extension Number
Caller ID Wait Timer
Dial pause at first digit of dialing
VRS Waiting Message Interval Time
Delayed Call Forwarding Time
Internal Paging Group Number
31-02-02
Internal All Call Paging Receiving
32-01-02
80-01-02
80-01-02
Door Lock Cancel Time
Tone 14 Intercom Ring-Back Tone (Unit1Basic TN)
Tone 39 Special Audible Ring-Busy Tone
(Unit1Basic TN)
Tone 39 Special Audible Ring-Busy Tone
(Unit2Basic TN)
Tone 39 Special Audible Ring-Busy Tone
(Unit1Duration)
Tone 39 Special Audible Ring-Busy Tone
(Unit2Duration)
TONE RCV2 (Frequency 1)
TONE RCV2 (Frequency 2)
80-01-02
80-01-03
80-01-03
80-04-12
80-04-13
2-494
Default
1
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
1
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
0
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
1
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
1
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
1
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
3
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
10
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
1
1
1
1
(Class 1 only)
0
(Class 1 only)
1
(Class 1 only)
101
0
1
10
15
1
(All stations)
1
(All stations)
2
10
10
0
10
20
2
3
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program No.
Name
80-07-01
80-07-01
81-01-14
81-07-01
Table 2 (Frequency)
Table 3 (Frequency)
Flash (Hooking 1)
CODEC Filter Type for analog trunk port
10-02-01
Country Code
Default
48
62
25
0
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
852
Brazil
Program No.
Name
10-20-01
11-01-01
TCP Port SMDR Ex - Dev 5
System Numbering - ACC Operator
11-01-01
System Numbering - ACC Trunk
11-09-01
12-02-01
Trunk Access Code for Type 3
Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 1)
12-02-01
Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 1)
12-02-01
Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 1)
12-02-01
Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 1)
12-02-01
Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 2)
12-02-01
Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 2)
12-02-01
Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 2)
12-02-01
Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 2)
12-02-01
Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 2)
12-02-01
Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 3)
12-03-01
Weekly Night Service Switching
12-07-01
Text Data for Night Mode
Day / Night Mode 1
Day / Night Mode 2
Day / Night Mode 3
Day / Night Mode 4
Day / Night Mode 5
Day / Night Mode 6
Day / Night Mode 7
Day / Night Mode 8
14-01-01
14-01-13
Trunk Name
Loop Disconnect Supervision
14-01-14
Long Conversation Cut Off
14-01-15
Long Conversation Alarm before Cut Off
14-01-17
14-01-18
Trunk to Trunk Warning Tone For Long
Conversation Alarm
Warning Beep Tone Signaling
14-02-04
Flash for Timed Flash or Disconnect
14-02-09
Busy Tone Detection
14-02-12
Detect Network Disconnect Signal
Programming Manual
Default
Note
60000
Dial = 9 (1 = Digit)
Type (5 = Opr)
Dial = 0 (1 = Digit)
Type (3 = Trunk)
0
Set Time 02 = S 0800, E 1200, M1
ModeGrp 1
Set Time 03 = S 1200, E 1300, M3
ModeGrp 1
Set Time 04 = S 1300, E 1700, M1
ModeGrp 1
Set Time 05 = S 1700, E 0000, M2
ModeGrp 1
Set Time 01 = S 0000, E 0800, M2
ModeGrp 1
Set Time 02 = S 0800, E 1200, M1
ModeGrp 1
Set Time 03 = S 1200, E 1300, M3
ModeGrp 1
Set Time 04 = S 1300, E 1600, M1
ModeGrp 1
Set Time 05 = S 1600, E 0000, M2
ModeGrp 1
Set Time 01 = S 0000, E 0000, M2
ModeGrp 1
01 = Sunday, 3
ModeGrp 1
Program
90
Dia
(Mode Grp 1)
Noite
(Mode Grp 1)
Almoço
(Mode Grp 1)
(Mode Grp 1)
(Mode Grp 1)
(Mode Grp 1)
(Mode Grp 1)
(Mode Grp 1)
Linha 01 ~ 51
1
(All Trunk)
1
(All Trunk)
1
(All Trunk)
1
(All Trunk)
1
(All Trunk)
1
(All Trunk)
1
(All Trunk)
1
(All Trunk)
2-495
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program No.
Program
90
Name
14-02-16
Caller ID signal
15-01-01
15-02-12
Extension Name
Off Hook Signaling Type
15-02-33
Multi Language Calendar Display on LCD
15-02-34
Call Register Mode
15-03-11
Caller ID Type
15-03-12
Fixed Cadence
15-07-01
Programmable Function Key
20-01-01
20-02-07
20-02-09
20-02-11
20-02-12
20-07-01
Operator Access Mode
Time and Date Display Mode
Disconnect Supervision
Default Setting Microphone of KTS
Forced Intercom Ringing
Manual Night Service Enabled
20-07-11
Forced Trunk Disconnect
20-13-01
Long Conversation Alarm
20-15-01
20-15-03
20-15-05
20-15-09
20-16-01
20-31-02
Normal Incoming Call of Trunk
Internal Incoming Call
DID
Call Back
Selectable Display Message
Message Number 1
Message Number 2
Message Number 3
Message Number 4
Message Number 5
Message Number 6
Message Number 7
Message Number 8
Message Number 9
Message Number 10
Callback / Trunk queuing cancel time
22-09-01
Expected Number of Digits
24-02-01
25-01-02
Busy Transfer
DISA User ID
26-01-04
26-02-01
LCR Mode Option
Dial Data
Dial Analysis Table number 151
Dial Analysis Table number 152
Dial Analysis Table number 153
Dial Analysis Table number 154
Dial Analysis Table number 155
Dial Analysis Table number 156
Dial Analysis Table number 157
Dial Analysis Table number 158
Dial Analysis Table number 159
Dial Analysis Table number 160
Dial Analysis Table number 161
Dial Analysis Table number 162
Dial Analysis Table number 163
Dial Analysis Table number 164
Dial Analysis Table number 165
Dial Analysis Table number 166
Dial Analysis Table number 167
Dial Analysis Table number 168
Dial Analysis Table number 169
Dial Analysis Table number 170
2-496
Default
Note
1
(All Trunk)
101:101 ~ 220:220
4
(All stations)
1
(All stations)
1
(All stations)
1
(All stations)
0
(All stations)
Key 21 : 00
Key 22 : 00
(All stations)
1
5
1
0
1
1
(Class 1 Only)
1
(Class 01 ~ 15)
0
(Class 01 ~ 15)
11
10
11
10
REUNIÃO_# # : # #
SERVIÇO_EXTERNO
RETORNA_ # # : # #
LIGAR _ # # # # # # # # # #
LIGAR_APÓS_ # # : # #
ALMOÇO
VIAGEM _ ATÉ # # / # #
FÉRIAS_ ATÉ # # / # #
FORA DE SERVIÇO
AUSENTE_ATÉ # # / # #
7200
(Class 01 ~ 15)
2
(TRK G.10 only)
1
0
(All Trunk)
1
[email protected]@@@@@@@@@
[email protected]@@@@@@@@@
[email protected]@@@@@@@@@
[email protected]@@@@@@@@@
[email protected]@@@@@@@@@
[email protected]@@@@@@@@@
[email protected]@@@@@@@@@
[email protected]@@@@@@@@@
[email protected]@@@@@@
[email protected]@@@@@@@@
[email protected]@@@@@@@@
[email protected]@@@@@@@@
[email protected]@@@@@@@@
[email protected]@@@@@@@@
[email protected]@@@@@@@@
[email protected]@@@@@@@@
[email protected]@@@@@@@@
[email protected]@@@@@@@@
[email protected]@@@@@@
[email protected]@@@@@@@@
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program No.
26-02-02
Name
Dial Analysis Table number 171
Dial Analysis Table number 172
Dial Analysis Table number 173
Dial Analysis Table number 174
Dial Analysis Table number 175
Dial Analysis Table number 176
Dial Analysis Table number 177
Dial Analysis Table number 178
Dial Analysis Table number 179
Dial Analysis Table number 180
Dial Analysis Table number 181
Dial Analysis Table number 182
Dial Analysis Table number 183
Dial Analysis Table number 184
Dial Analysis Table number 185
Dial Analysis Table number 186
Dial Analysis Table number 187
Dial Analysis Table number 188
Dial Analysis Table number 189
Dial Analysis Table number 190
Dial Analysis Table number 191
Dial Analysis Table number 192
Dial Analysis Table number 193
Dial Analysis Table number 194
Dial Analysis Table number 195
Dial Analysis Table number 196
Service Type
Dial Analysis Table number 151
Dial Analysis Table number 152
Dial Analysis Table number 153
Dial Analysis Table number 154
Dial Analysis Table number 155
Dial Analysis Table number 156
Dial Analysis Table number 157
Dial Analysis Table number 158
Dial Analysis Table number 159
Dial Analysis Table number 160
Dial Analysis Table number 161
Dial Analysis Table number 162
Dial Analysis Table number 163
Dial Analysis Table number 164
Dial Analysis Table number 165
Dial Analysis Table number 166
Dial Analysis Table number 167
Dial Analysis Table number 168
Dial Analysis Table number 169
Dial Analysis Table number 170
Dial Analysis Table number 171
Dial Analysis Table number 172
Dial Analysis Table number 173
Dial Analysis Table number 174
Dial Analysis Table number 175
Dial Analysis Table number 176
Dial Analysis Table number 177
Dial Analysis Table number 178
Dial Analysis Table number 179
Dial Analysis Table number 180
Dial Analysis Table number 181
Dial Analysis Table number 182
Dial Analysis Table number 183
Dial Analysis Table number 184
Dial Analysis Table number 185
Dial Analysis Table number 186
Dial Analysis Table number 187
Dial Analysis Table number 188
Dial Analysis Table number 189
Dial Analysis Table number 190
Dial Analysis Table number 191
Dial Analysis Table number 192
Programming Manual
Default
Note
[email protected]@@@@@@@@
[email protected]@@@@@@@@
[email protected]@@@@@@@@
[email protected]@@@@@@@@
[email protected]@@@@@@@@
[email protected]@@@@@@@@
[email protected]@@@@@@@@
[email protected]@@@@@@@@
[email protected]@
[email protected]@@@@@
[email protected]@@@@@
[email protected]@@@@@
[email protected]@@@@@
[email protected]@@@@@
[email protected]@@@@@
[email protected]@@@@@
[email protected]@@@@@@@@@
[email protected]@@@@
[email protected]@@@@
[email protected]@@@@
[email protected]@@@@
[email protected]@@@@
[email protected]@@@@
[email protected]@@@@
[email protected]@@@@
[email protected]@@@@
Program
90
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2-497
SL1100
Program No.
26-02-03
Program
90
26-02-06
2-498
ISSUE 1.1
Name
Dial Analysis Table number 193
Dial Analysis Table number 194
Dial Analysis Table number 195
Dial Analysis Table number 196
Additional Data
Dial Analysis Table number 151
Dial Analysis Table number 152
Dial Analysis Table number 153
Dial Analysis Table number 154
Dial Analysis Table number 155
Dial Analysis Table number 156
Dial Analysis Table number 157
Dial Analysis Table number 158
Dial Analysis Table number 159
Dial Analysis Table number 160
Dial Analysis Table number 161
Dial Analysis Table number 162
Dial Analysis Table number 163
Dial Analysis Table number 164
Dial Analysis Table number 165
Dial Analysis Table number 166
Dial Analysis Table number 167
Dial Analysis Table number 168
Dial Analysis Table number 169
Dial Analysis Table number 170
Dial Analysis Table number 171
Dial Analysis Table number 172
Dial Analysis Table number 173
Dial Analysis Table number 174
Dial Analysis Table number 175
Dial Analysis Table number 176
Dial Analysis Table number 177
Dial Analysis Table number 178
Dial Analysis Table number 179
Dial Analysis Table number 180
Dial Analysis Table number 181
Dial Analysis Table number 182
Dial Analysis Table number 183
Dial Analysis Table number 184
Dial Analysis Table number 185
Dial Analysis Table number 186
Dial Analysis Table number 187
Dial Analysis Table number 188
Dial Analysis Table number 189
Dial Analysis Table number 190
Dial Analysis Table number 191
Dial Analysis Table number 192
Dial Analysis Table number 193
Dial Analysis Table number 194
Dial Analysis Table number 195
Dial Analysis Table number 196
LCR Carrier Table
Dial Analysis Table number 151
Dial Analysis Table number 152
Dial Analysis Table number 153
Dial Analysis Table number 154
Dial Analysis Table number 155
Dial Analysis Table number 156
Dial Analysis Table number 157
Dial Analysis Table number 158
Dial Analysis Table number 160
Dial Analysis Table number 161
Dial Analysis Table number 162
Dial Analysis Table number 163
Dial Analysis Table number 164
Dial Analysis Table number 165
Dial Analysis Table number 166
Dial Analysis Table number 167
Dial Analysis Table number 168
Default
Note
1
1
1
1
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program No.
Name
Default
34-01-05
Dial Analysis Table number 170
Dial Analysis Table number 171
Dial Analysis Table number 172
Dial Analysis Table number 173
Dial Analysis Table number 174
Dial Analysis Table number 175
Dial Analysis Table number 176
Dial Analysis Table number 177
Dial Analysis Table number 178
Delete Digits
Carrie LCR Tabela 1
Carrie LCR Tabela 2
System Toll Restriction
34-11-01
E1 Trunk Type
34-11-02
MFC Dialing Type
34-11-03
MFC Group B
34-11-04
Expected Number Of MFC Digits
35-01-01
Output Port Type
35-01-04
Omit Digits
35-02-09
Extension Number or Name
35-02-14
Date data
35-02-16
Trunk Name or Received Dialed Number
40-07-01
40-08-01
80-04-04
80-04-06
80-04-07
80-04-08
80-04-09
80-07-01
80-08-01
82-04-04
82-04-06
82-04-07
82-04-08
10-02-01
15-02-01
47-02-16
47-06-14
47-07-03
47-10-03
Voice Prompt Language Assignment
Voice Prompt Language Assignment
No Tone Time Type 2 BT
On Minimum Time Type 2 BT
On Maximum Time Type 2 BT
Off Minimum Time Type 2 BT
Off Maximum Time Type 2 BY
Frequency Table 1
Duration
Maximum Break Time
Maximum Make Time
Minimum Hook Flash Time
Maximum Hook Flash Time
Country Code
Display Language Selection
Voice Prompt Language
Voice Prompt Language
Prompt Language
Voice Prompt Language
26-05-01
Note
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Program
4
3
1
(All Trunk)
8
(TRK 04 ~ 126)
3
(TRK 04 ~ 126)
1
(TRK 04 ~ 126)
3
(TRK 04 ~ 126)
1
(Port 1 only)
0
(Port 1 only)
1
(Port 1 only)
1
(Port 1 only)
2
(Port 1 only)
9
9
7
6
8
6
8
42
200
14
14
16
70
55
1
13
13
13
13
90
Brazil - PRG80-01 Service Tone Setup Service Tone Setup
Internal Dial Tone TONE 2
Special Dial Tone TONE 3
Busy Tone TONE 6
Ring Back Tone TONE 14
External Ring Back Tone TONE 45
External Busy Tone TONE 46
Unit
80-01-01
80-01-02
80-01-03
80-01-04
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
4
1
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
10
1
1
2
2
40
10
40
10
2
2
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
Malaysia
Programming Manual
2-499
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program No.
10-02-01
Name
Country Code
Default
60
Thailand
Program No.
10-02-01
Name
Country Code
Default
66
India
Program
Program No.
10-02-01
Name
Country Code
Default
91
Conditions
90
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-500
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-34 : Firmware Information
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 90-34 : Firmware Information to list the package type and firmware units installed in the
system.
90
Input Data
Slot Number
Item No.
00 ~ 09
Item
01
02
03
Package Name
Firmware Version Number
VOIPDB Software Version
04
05
06
DSP Project Number
Vocallo Firmware Version
OCT1010ID Version
Display Data
PKG Name
00.00 ~ 15.15
DEV/PR/REL - 00.00.00.00.00.00
DEV/PR/REL - FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF
00000000 - FFFFFFFF
00.00.00.00 - FF.FF.FF.FF
00.00.00.00 - FF.FF.FF.FF
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-501
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-35 : Wizard Programming Level Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
90
Use Program 90-35 : Wizard Programming Level Setup to set the maintenance level for Wizard
Programming.
Input Data
Wizard Number
Item No.
01
1 ~ 250
Item
Maintenance Level
Display Data
0 = All
3 = SB (System Administrator B)
4 = SA (System Administrator A)
5 = IN (Installer Level)
6 = MF (Manufacture Level)
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-502
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-36 : Firmware Update Time Setting
Level
IN
Program
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
Use Program 90-36 : Firmware Update Time Setting to define the data for the firmware update
feature. This data is available to set from the PC Programming FW update feature.
The following firmware is available to update with this feature:

main.bin

Dspdbu.bin

dsp.bin

intradbu.bin is not supported
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
Firmware Update
Schedule Time
02
Update mode
03
Update Report
Input Data
Default
Year : 0 ~ 99
Month : 0 ~ 12
Day : 00 ~ 31
Hour : 00 ~ 23
Minute : 00 ~ 59
0 = Non Active
1 = Activated
Maximum 256
characters
0
0
0
0
0
0
-
Description
Set the time to update the firmware
using a compact flash card.
Time registration fails if an expired
time is registered.
Activate the Firmware Update feature.
If this setting is 1, new firmware on the
compact flash card updates according
to the setting at 90-36-01.
Output a report when the update is
executed and saves one copy on the
system. If a new update occurs, the
new report overwrites the old report.
Refer to the Sample Report
shown.
Sample Report
Result
Update Success
Update Fail
Update Fail
Update Fail
Report Display
Update Success
Update is fail. Since ‘A’ drive is not available.
Update is fail. Since main up is not exist on A drive.
Update is fail. Since Time is expired.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-503
90
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-38 : User Programming Data Level Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 90-38 : User Programming Data Level Setup sets system data to turn on/off each User
Programming Feature.
90
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
Time setting
Change of music on hold tone
Automatic Night Service Pattern
Weekly Night Service Switching
Text Data for Night Mode
Holiday Night Service Switching
DISA User ID Setup
Mail Box Setup
Text Messages Setup
Incoming Ring Group Setup
Abbreviated Dial Number and Name
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Night-mode switching Other Group
DSS Key Assignment
Doorphone Ringing Assignment
Extension Numbering
Extension Name
Night-mode switching Own Group
Call Forward-Immediate/No Answer /Both Ring
19
20
Call Forward-Busy
Trunk Incoming Ring Tone
21
Internal Incoming Ring Tone
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Display Language Selection
Toll Restriction Override Password
User Programming Password
Programmable Function Key
Virtual Extension Ring Assignment
One Touch Key Assignment
Trunk Name
Automatic Transfer per Trunk
30
SPD Area No.
31
32
33
34
Telephone Data Copy
Dial in Name
LCD Line Key Name Assignment
IntraMail Station Mailbox Options
Program (Reference
Only)
10-01 (11-10-03)
10-04 (11-10-02)
12-02
12-03
12-07
12-04
25-08
40-02
20-16
22-04
11-10-04
13-04
11-10-12
30-03
32-02
11-02
15-01-01
11-10-01
11-11-01
11-11-03
11-11-05
11-11-02
11-11-20
15-02-02
11-11-20
15-02-03
15-02-01
21-07
90-28
15-07
15-09
15-14
14-01-01
11-10-06
11-10-07
11-10-08
24-04
92-01
22-11-03
15-20
47-02
Input
Data
0 = Turn Off
1 = Turn On
Default
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
1 = Turn On
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

Maintenance
2-504
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-39 : Virtual Loop Back Port Reset
Level
IN
Program
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
90
Use Program 90-39 : Virtual Loop Back Port Reset to reset to initial status.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Virtual Loop Back Reset
Input Data
[Reset?] : Dial 1 + press Hold
(Press Hold only to cancel.)
Default
-
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

PC Programming
Programming Manual
2-505
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-41 : Server Setting to Update Terminal Local Data
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 90-41 : Server Setting to Update Terminal Local Data to define the Primary DNS
Server address, the Secondary DNS Server address and the Data Roaming Server address.
90
Input Data
Server Information
Item
No.
Item
01
Server Address Type
02
Server Address
03
Port Number
1 ~ 13
Input Data
0 = IPv4
1 = IPv6
IPv4 form (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
IPv6 form (xxxx : xxxx : xxxx: xxxx: xxxx)
0 ~ 65535
Default
0
None
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-506
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-42 : DR700 Multiline Terminal Version Information
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 90-42 : DR700 Multiline Terminal Version Information to set the hardware version and
firmware version of the DR700 MLT Terminal.
90
Input Data
Terminal Type
Item
No.
01
02
1 ~ 3 = Not used
4 = IP4WW-24TIXH
Item
Software Version
Hardware Version
Input Data
00.00.00.00 ~ FF.FF.FF.FF
00.00.00.00 ~ FF.FF.FF.FF
Default
00.00.00.00
00.00.00.00
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-507
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-43 : Deleting Terminal License of DR700
Level
IN
Program
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
90
Use Program 90-43 : Deleting Terminal License of DR700 to delete the terminal license information
delivered to the DR700 terminal.
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Delete Terminal License
Up to eight digits
Input Data
[Delete?] : Dial 1 + press Hold
(Press Hold only to cancel.)
Default
-
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-508
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-44 : Deleting Terminal License of TCP Interface
Level
IN
Program
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
Use Program 90-44 : Deleting Terminal License of TCP Interface to delete the terminal license
information delivered to the terminal with a TCP interface.
Input Data
License Delete Code
Item
No.
01
Item
Delete Terminal License
000-000-000
~
999-999-999
Input Data
[Delete?] : Dial 1 + press Hold
(Press Hold only to cancel.)
Default
-
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-509
90
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-45 : Temporary Password Change for Multiline
Telephone
Level
Program
IN
Description
90
Note: This program is available via telephone programming and WebPro not through PC Programming.
Use Program 90-45 : Temporary Password Change for Multiline Telephone to change the
Temporary Password that is set in the Encryption function.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Temporary Password Change
Request
Input Data
00.00.00.00 ~ FF.FF.FF.FF
Change? (Yes = 1)
Default
00.00.00.00
Conditions

This Program is activated when the Program 10-46-07 set to “1”.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-510
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-50 : System Alarm Display Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 90-50 : System Alarm Display Setup to set the system alarm report display.
Input Data
Index Number
Item
No.
01
Item
System Alarm Display Telephone
90
01 ~ 50
Input Data
Up to eight digits
Default
No setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-511
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-51 : Alarm Setup for Maintenance Exchange
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 90-51 : Alarm Setup for Maintenance Exchange to set the day for the maintenance
exchange of parts that need regular maintenance.
90
Input Data
Index
Item No.
01
02
03
04
1 ~ 10
Item
Display Name
Year
Month
Day
Input Data
Default
Up to 16 characters
00 ~ 99
01 ~ 12
01 ~ 31
Refer to table
00
00
00
Index
Default
01
02
03
04 ~ 10
--- No setting --Backup battery
--- No setting ----- No setting ---
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-512
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-52 : System Alarm Save
Level
IN
Program
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
90
Use Program 90-52 : System Alarm Save for the system alarm output operation.
Input Data
Item No.
01
02
Item
Save All Alarm Reports
Save New Alarm Reports
Input Data
Print All? (1 = Yes)
Print New? (1 = Yes)
Default
-
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-513
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-53 : System Alarm Clear
Level
IN
Program
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
90
Use Program 90-53 : System Alarm Clear to clear the system alarm.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Clear All Alarm Reports
Input Data
All Clear? ( 1 = Yes)
Default
-
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-514
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-54 : PC/Web Programming
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 90-54 : PC/Web Programming sets parameters for PC and Web Programming.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
Web Pro TCP port
number
1 ~ 65535
02
PC Pro TCP port
Number
1 ~ 65535
Description
Default
The port number of TCP of the Web
programming is set. The port number of
new TCP is not reflected from the Web Pro
to the logout of all users of the Web Pro
who is logging in the system after data is
changed in the setting.
The port number of TCP of the PC
programming is set. The port number of
new TCP is not reflected from the PCPro to
the logout of all users of the PCPro who is
logging in the system after data is changed
in the setting.
80
8000
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

PC Programming
Programming Manual
2-515
90
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-55 : Free License Select
Level
IN
Program
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
90
Use Program 90-55 : Free License Select to validate the Free License.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Start Free License
Input Data
0 = Stop
1 = Start
Default
0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-516
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-56 : NTP Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 90-56 : NTP Setup to set the NTP.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
01
NTP Synchronize
02
Server Address
Input Data
0 = No
1 = Yes
IPv4 form :
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
IPv6 form :
xxxx.xxxx.xxxx.xxxx.xxxx
Default
0
No setting
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-517
90
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-57 : Backup Recovery Data
Level
SA
Program
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
90
Use Program 90-57 : Backup Recovery Data to backup the system data in the Compact Flash
memory on the CPU and to make the recovery data.
Input Data
Data ID
Item No.
01
1~5
Item
Backup Recovery Data
Input Data
[Backup?] : Dial 1 + press Hold
(Press Hold only to cancel.)
Default
-
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-518
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-58 : Restore Recovery Data
Level
SA
Program
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
Use Program 90-58 : Restore Recovery Data to select the recovery data stored in the Compact Flash
memory of the CPU. After this command is executed, the system restarts automatically.
Input Data
Data ID
Item No.
01
1~5
Item
Restore Recovery Data
Input Data
[Restore & Reset?] : Dial 1 + press Hold
(Press Hold only to cancel.)
Default
-
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-519
90
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-59 : Delete Recovery Data
Level
SA
Program
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
90
Use Program 90-59 : Delete Recovery Data to select and delete the recovery data stored in the
Compact Flash memory of the CPU.
Input Data
Data ID
Item No.
01
1~5
Item
Delete Recovery Data
Input Data
[Delete?] : Dial 1 + press Hold
(Press Hold only to cancel.)
Default
-
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-520
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-60 : T1/ISDN Layer Status Information
Level
IN
Program
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
Use Program 90-60 : T1/ISDN Layer Status Information to display layer status information for T1
packages.
Input Data
Slot No.
Item No.
01
00 ~ 09
Item
Link Status
Input Data
- = No Link
0 = Link
N/A = No card seen in slot
Default
None
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-521
90
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-63 : DR700 Control
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 90-63 : DR700 Control to adjust settings of the DR700.
90
Input Data
Item No.
01
Item
Priority Timer
Input Data
0 ~ 255
Default
80
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-522
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-65 : 1st Party CTI Authentication Password Setup
Level
SA
Program
Description
Use Program 90-65 : 1st Party CTI Authentication Password Setup to set the authentication
password.
Input Data
Item No.
01
Item
Password
Input Data
Up to 16 characters
Description
Default
Sets the authentication password when the
1st Party CTI application is connected to
the system via a NAT router. If a password
is not set, the system does not certify it.
nec-i
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-523
90
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-66 : FTP Firmware Update setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 90-66 : FTP Firmware Update setup to setup the Login info to connect to the FTP
Server.
90
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
02
03
User Name
Password
FTP Server Host
Name
Up to 32 characters
Up to 32 characters
Up to 255 characters
04
05
FTP Server TCP Port
DNS Primary
Address
06
DNS Secondly
Address
0 ~ 65535
0.0.0.0 ~
126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~
191.255255.254
192.0.0.1 ~
223.255.255.254
0.0.0.0 ~
126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~
191.255255.254
192.0.0.1 ~
223.255.255.254
Description
Input URL or IP Address of FTP Server.
Use xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format in case of IP
Address.
Default
None
None
None
21
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-524
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-67 : Backup Data Auto-save Interval Time Set
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 90-67 : Backup Data Auto-save Interval Time Set to set time interval D-RAM data that
is saved in F-ROM memory.
90
D-RAM memory : Configuration information such as call transfer and Do Not Disturb.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Interval time
Input Data
Default
0 ~ 255
48 (24 hr)
This Program is ..
0 = Do not Auto-save
1 = 30 min
2 = 60 min
3 = 90 min
:
255 = 30 min (127 hr)
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-525
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-68 : Side Tone Auto Setup
Level
IN
Program
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
90
Use Program 90-68 : Side Tone Auto Setup to setup the volume level of Side Tone for each Analog
Trunk Port.
This program will change the setting of "PRG 81-07 CODEC Filter Setup for analog Trunk Port" If the
Analog Port is in used or if it is other than a Analog Trunk Port then it will give out the error message.
Input Data
Item
No.
Item
Input Data
01
Adjustment
Start
Trunk Port Number
001 ~ 096
02
1 digit data
Dial (1 dight)
Description
Default
This will start the Adjustment of Side
Tone for each Analog Trunk Port. If
it is successful it will change the
PRG 81-07. If it is successful it will
ask to change it for all Analog Trunk
Port.. If you select to change the
Setting All Analog Trunk Port it will
change all the Port in 81-07.
This setting will ask to use the digit
after Line is retrieved.
No Setting
0
Related
Program
81-07-01
21-01-05
21-01-06
14-01-07
21-06-06
21-05-07
-
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-526
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 92 : Copy Program
92-01 : Copy Program
Level
IN
Program
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
Use Program 92-01 : Copy Program to copy the data for one program to another multiline terminal,
port, group, or other number. Refer to the following charts to see which programs can be copied.
Input Data
Program Number
Item No.
01
XX ~ XX
Item
Input Data
Source Number
Enter the extension, trunk, group or other number from which the
data is to be copied.
Destination Number (From)
Enter the first extension, trunk, group or other number to which the
information is to be copied.
Destination Number (To)
Enter the last extension, trunk, group or other number to which the
information is to be copied. If the information is being copied only to
one extension, trunk, group or other number, enter the information
entered in the Destination Number (From) entry.






For Trunk Base : Trunk Port
Number 001 ~ 096
For Trunk Group Base : Trunk
Group Number 01 ~ 25
For Extension Base : Extension
Number Maximum eight digits
For Department Group Base :
Department Group Number 01 ~
32
For DSS : DSS Console
Number 01 ~ 12
For Door Phone: Door phone
number : 1 ~ 6
The Copy Program is applicable only for the following programs :
Trunk Port Base
Program No.
14-01
14-02
14-04
14-08
14-09
20-30
21-03
21-12
21-21
21-22
22-02
22-03
22-05
22-08
31-05
81–07
Program Name
Trunk Basic Data Setup
Analog Trunk Data Setup
Behind PBX Setup
Music on Hold Source for Trunks
Conversation Recording Destination for Trunk
Timer Class for Trunk
Trunk Group Routing for Trunks
ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk
Toll Restriction for Trunks
CO Message Waiting Indication
Incoming Service Type Setup
Trunk Ring Tone Setup
IRG Assignment for Normal Ring Trunk
Second IRG Setup for Unanswered DIL / IRG
Incoming Ring Tone Audible on External Speaker
Codec Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Port
Note
Copy all data except Trunk Name (Item 01).
Trunk Group Base
Program No.
35-03
Program Name
Note
SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group
Extension Base
Program No.
Program Name
15-01
Extension Basic Data Setup (include Virtual Extension)
15-02
15-03
15-06
Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup
Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup
Trunk Access Map for Extension
Programming Manual
Note
Copy all data except extension name (item
01).
2-527
92
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program No.
15-07
15-08
15-09
15-10
15-11
15-12
15-17
15-18
20-06
20-29
21-02
21-04
21-11
23-02
23-03
23-04
24-03
31-02
82-14
Program
92
Program Name
Note
Programmable Function Key
Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup
Virtual Extension Ring Assignment
Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup
Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment
Conversation Recording Destination for Extension
CO Message Waiting Indication
Virtual Extension Key Enhancement Options
Class of Service for Extension
Timer Class for Extension
Trunk Group Routing for Extensions
Toll Restriction Class for Extensions
Hotline Assignment
Call Pickup Groups
Ringing Line Preference
Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions
Park Group Assignment
Internal Paging Group Assignment
Handset/Headset Gain Setup for Multi-Line Telephone
Department Base
Program No.
16-01
35-04
Program Name
Department (Extension) Group Basic Data Setup
SMDR Port Assignment for Department Group
Note
Copy all data except Group Name (Item 01).
DSS Console Base
Program No.
30-01
30-03
Program Name
Note
DSS Console Operation Mode
DSS Key Assignment
Door Box Base
Program No.
32-02
Program Name
Note
Door Box Ring Assignment
Conditions

Using this program to copy a multiline terminal Programmable Function Keys, copies all keys
whether or not they exist on the terminal to which the programming is being copied. This may
cause confusion when trying to define a key which is already defined but which does not exist on
the terminal (displays as DUPLICATE DATA). It is recommend to either clear these non-existent
keys or copy only from an extension which has the same or fewer numbers of keys than the
extension to which the programming is being copied.
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-528
Program 92 : Copy Program
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 92 : Copy Program
92-02 : Delete All Extension Numbers
Level
IN
Program
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
Use Program 92-02 : Delete All Extension Numbers to delete all extension numbers <Program
11-02>, <Program 11-04>. However, the extension number of the first port is not deleted.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Extension Number
Input Data
Delete Yes : 1
Description
Default
[Dial 1] + Hold key (Only press Hold key is
canceled.)
-
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-529
92
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 92 : Copy Program
92-03 : Copy Program by Port Number
Level
IN
Program
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
92
Use Program 92-03 : Copy Program by Port Number to copy extension and the data of each outside
line.
Input Data
Program Number
XX-XX
Item No.
Item
Input Data
01
Source Number
Enter the port number from where the data is to be copied.
Destination Number (From)
Enter the first port number to where the information is to be copied
Destination Number (To)
Enter the last port number to where the information is to be copied.
If the information is to be copied only to one port, enter the
information entered in the Destination Number (From) entry.
For Trunk Base : Trunk Port
Number 001 ~ 096

For Trunk Group Base : Trunk
Group Number 01 ~ 25

For Extension Number : 001 ~
100 (V2.0 Changed)
Including Virtual Extension : 01 ~ 50

For Department Group Base :
Department Group Number 01 ~
32

For DSS : (DSS Console
Number 01 ~ 12
02
03

Refer to Program 92-01 : Copy Program for program that can be copied.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-530
Program 92 : Copy Program
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 92 : Copy Program
92-04 : Extension Data Swap
Level
IN
Program
Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.
92
Use Program 92-04 : Extension Data Swap to swap data between two extensions.
Input Data
Item No.
01
Item
Input Data
1st Extension Number
2nd Extension Number
Up to eight digits.
The following table lists Programs that use the Extension Data Swap function.
Program Number
11-02
12-05
13-03
13-06
15-01
15-02
15-03
15-06
15-07
15-08
15-09
15-10
15-11
15-12
15-14
15-17
15-18
16-02
20-06
20-29
21-02
21-04
21-07
21-10
21-11
21-13
21-15
21-18
21-19
21-20
22-04
22-06
23-02
23-03
23-04
24-03
24-09
26-04
31-02
42-02
82-14
90-28
92-05
Programming Manual
Program Name
Note
Extension Numbering
Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions
Abbreviated Dial Group Assignment for Extensions
Station Abbreviated Dial Number and Name
Extension Basic Data Setup
Multi-Line Telephone Basic Data Setup
Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup
Trunk Access Map for Extension
Programmable Function Key
Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup
Virtual Extension Ring Assignment
Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup
Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment
Conversation Recording Destination for Extension
Programming One-Touch Keys
CO-Message Waiting Indication
Virtual Extension Key Enhance Options
Department Group Assignment for Extensions
Class of Service for Extension
Timer Class for Extensions
Trunk Group Routing for Extension
Toll Restriction Class for Extension
Toll Restriction Override Password Setup
Dial Block Restriction Class per Extensions
Hotline Assignment
ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extension
Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions
IP Trunk (H.323) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension
IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension
SIP Trunk Call Discernment Setup for Extension
Incoming Ring Group Setup
Normal Incoming Ring Mode
Call Pickup Group
Ringing Line Preference
Ringing Line Preference of Virtual Extension
Park Hold Group Assignment
Call Forward Split Settings
ARS Class of Service
Internal Paging Group Assignment
Hotel Extension Basic Data Setup
Handset/Headset Gain Setup for Multi-Line Telephone
User Programming Password Setup
Data Swap Password of each Extension Setup
2-531
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Program
92
2-532
Program 92 : Copy Program
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 92 : Copy Program
92-05 : Extension Data Swap Password
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 92-05 : Extension Data Swap Password to define the 4-digit password for each
extension to allow Extension Data Swap.
92
Input Data
Extension Number
Item
No.
01
Item
Password
Up to eight digits.
Input Data
Fixed four digits (No
setting at default)
Description
Default
Password required on a per station
basis when utilizing the station swap
feature.
-
Related
Program
11-15-12
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-533
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Program 92 : Copy Program
92-06 : Fill Command
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 92-06 : Fill Command to allocate the data of each extension number of each extension
group or each table.
92
Input Data
Program Number
Item No.
01
XX - XX
Item
Source Number
Destination Number (From)
Destination Number (To)
Input Data
Each extension port = 001 ~ 120 (V2.0 Changed) (Program 11-02)
Each virtual extension port = 01 ~ 50 (Program 11-04)
Each extension group = 1~32 (Program 11-07)
The following table lists Programs that use the Fill Command function.
Program Number
11-02
11-04
11-07
Program Name
Note
Extension Numbering
Virtual Extension Numbering
Extension (Department) Group Pilot Number
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
2-534
Program 92 : Copy Program
ISSUE 1.1
SL1100
Program 92 : Copy Program
92-07 : Delete Command
Level
IN
Program
Description
Use Program 92-07 : Delete Command to delete the data of each extension number of each
extension group or each table.
92
Input Data
Program Number
Item No.
01
XX-XX
Item
Destination Number (From)
Destination Number (To)
Input Data
Each extension port = 001 ~ 120 (V2.0 Changed) (Program 11-02)
Each virtual extension port = 01 ~ 50 (Program 11-04)
Each extension group = 1~32 (Program 11-07)
The following table lists Programs that use the Delete Command function.
Program Number
11-02
11-04
11-07
Program Name
Note
Extension Numbering
Virtual Extension Numbering
Extension (Department) Group Pilot Number
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference
None
Programming Manual
2-535
SL1100
ISSUE 1.1
Memo
Program
92
2-536
Program 92 : Copy Program
Programming Manual
NEC Corporation
ISSUE 1.1 (R2.1)
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement